Home

eZ Publish Content Management Basics

1. Literal text Right click on the box sur None rounding the text Lists bul Position your cursor some None leted and where inside an unformatted numbered chunk of text and right click Objects Right click on the object None Table header Right click somewhere inside Only for Mozilla based cells the header cell browsers This functionality is not available when using Inter net Explorer Select the Properties item from the pop up menu A modal dialog will appear de pending on the type of your current item Select the desired class from the dropdown list in the modal dialog and click the OK button For links you can also modify other link properties in the modal dialog For objects the currently selected object will be highlighted in the list of related objects You can make changes in the property table You can also select another related object to insert instead of the current one We assume that you are familiar with the corresponding modal dialogs from earlier in the chapter For example if you require additional information and tips about the modal dialog shown for literal text refer to Section 11 2 6 2 Literal outputting text as is Manual editing with XML tags 353 11 3 Tip For embedded objects you can also click on the embedded object so that it becomes the selected element you will see that it is encapsulated in a rectangular frame Then click the Object butt
2. Figure 1 6 Webpage with templates 2 The above screenshot shows the full view of the latest article Notice that it takes up all but the navigation areas of the page and that much more content is shown here compared to the previous figure Here a different template dictates that more of the information fields should be shown Notice also the size and position of the first car image here compared to previous figure Templates 13 In addition to standard HTML syntax it is possible to use eZ Publish specific code in templates to for example extract and display content from other parts of the content hierarchy In Depth Page generation The eZ Publish template system is component based That is in most cases a webpage is created by combining several templates At a minimum eZ Publish always renders the main template which is called the pagelayout The pagelayout contains the html head and body tags together with the stylesheets CSS these dictate the overall look of a site Among other things it specifies the title logo menu and footer that will be presented for each webpage the system gen erates The following illustration shows a simplified three step explanation of how eZ Publish responds to requests Such requests are mostly triggered by someone either clicking a link on a webpage or typing in a URL in the browser s address field The request processing reply cycle is what brings information from the intern
3. esse 196 9 6 Object relation upload new object sssssI 197 07 Access My a counttab 3 races eas a vive tentes dhs 08 445 08 reso Ee E EA SATVER 199 9 8 Access My drafts eee tese eee eda ee natare e epe eph 200 9 9 Manage Versions D ttOn eren eere or erede eee eoa n eer tenen en re ee geo beu oe npn u de 201 9 10 Version history interface sss meme me nennen nennen 201 xii 9 11 9 12 9 13 9 14 9 15 9 16 9 17 9 18 9 19 9 20 92 9 22 9 23 9 24 0 25 9 26 9 27 9 28 9 29 9 30 9 31 9 32 9 33 9 34 9 35 9 36 9 37 9 38 9 39 9 40 9 41 9 42 9 43 9 44 9 45 9 46 9 47 9 48 9 49 9 50 9 51 9 52 9 53 10 1 10 2 10 3 eZ Publish Content Management Basics Compare versions select esses enne mene nene nne 202 Compare Versions VIEW esee ve reni ren see ere nente n oet e pie rene dee 203 Draft with higher version number than the published version 205 Version history result 2 cete tette ertet ete areae ee e Ye eek Rae ex erede 206 Version history initiate revert esses emen nennen 207 Version history result of revert scene 208 Translations window select language eH 210 Language selection interface csssssssssssseseeeeeeneeene nennen 211 Context sensitive pop up menu Edit in eseeeeeee 212 Preview Win
4. You are currently not logged in to the site to get proper access create a new user or login with an existing user You misspelled some parts of your URL try changing it Login Username Password Log in to the administration interface of eZ publish Login Sign Up Figure 10 6 Access denied to media library 10 3 Usage of the media library This section uses step by step illustrations to provide a good understanding of how the media library should be used together with the Content branch The text is organized similarly to Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing according to different editing and management operations 10 3 1 Navigation and structure Basic navigation of the Administration Interface of eZ Publish was described Chapter 3 The secondary menu main menu tabs and Sub items window are used together to locate content In addition the bookmark and search features can help to make your work more efficient 10 3 1 1 Navigating between different branches of the node tree If you are navigating through content with the Browse interface for example when adding secondary locations or moving and copying content the navigation process is slightly different than usual Navigation and structure 261 Choose locations for lt Banners gt Choose locations for lt Banners gt using the che Navigate using the available tabs above the Gj News and Events G3 Products _ Part
5. A 312 11 3 Manual editing with XML tags 200 0 eee cece M 353 11 3 1 X ML syntax rre ths cede y x nr enne rn ene n 354 11 4 Information collection soreer nin ieee aesa eem 362 11 4 1 What is information collection seeeeeee 363 11 4 2 Feedback form example ee 363 11 4 3 Where does collected information end up 365 TT Ds SUIHIHAEV e 4 ia hast veredices cate pere Ui dese tener a iet esert oo des ea aut ens tedio es Oat 366 Glossary nnl EE ae ey Re sn ae tn eee ee 369 Index sci AS ates fete doeet tants eo fobs sada eee eo ee t di YR ISP bese 389 List of Figures 1 Running tutorial website sinsir isernia re eto TE E ERR ER Sa ES REP HERR XX 1 1 Content design webpage ssssse HH 4 1 2 Siteaccess related to access rules and resources ccseeeeneeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeenes 6 1 3 Website Interfaces isare tette Teetpn qon pe Re Pee s b Rer Cds Rb SE rd De RIT EA 8 1 4 Administration Interface esesseesesese Heer 10 1 5 Webpage with templates 1 sess 11 1 6 Webpage with templates 2 ssssssssee Hee 12 1 7 Chent server cycle uote etie he ere er e aea en e Ere pU 13 1 8 Content class inre ae tan S IR RT re ter ep eel 14 1 9 Website Interface login sicer cce teer toe Rae e Pent e EES 17 2 1 Public siteaccess Anonymous site visitor sesesee m 23 2 2 Website Interface after
6. Published version 6 FS English Administrator 02 19 2007 11 13 02 19 2007 11 17 German M American User am am E German Figure 9 25 Copy translation The generated copy is a draft containing only the copied translation Editing conflicts 221 Versions for lt News and Events gt 3 Version Status Edited language Creator Created Modified 3 Archived 3 English Administrator 02 19 2007 09 57 02 19 2007 11 06 E 2 American User am am BEC Published BS English Administrator 02 19 2007 11 13 02 19 2007 11 17 American User am am rz Draft By German Administrator 02 19 2007 01 21 02 19 2007 01 21 B A User pm pm Eran areren s s i Published version Version Translations Creator Created Modified Copy translation 6 E3 English Administrator 02 19 2007 11 13 02 19 2007 11 17 English American M E American User am am EE German Version Edited language Creator Created Modified fs German Administrator User 02 19 2007 01 21 pm 02 19 2007 01 21 pm aA Figure 9 26 Copy translation result When the draft is published the system will copy all other languages from the last published version to this version 9 2 4 Editing conflicts For some content editors this section about editing conflicts will be a valuable troubleshooting guide Hopefully this material will also help you avoid some of the problems in the first place The built in version control mechanism alerts you when you t
7. 4 Continue editing in the Object Edit Interface Tip In the Website Interface access the User profile page by clicking the My profile link in the top right corner From this page access the My drafts page then choose a draft by clicking the Edit button at the right of the entry for that draft This will bring up the Content Editing Interface See Section 2 5 2 1 Managing drafts for more information g 2 2 Working with versions The principles of version control the Version history interface and version status were described in Chapter 8 The most important thing to remember is that whenever you create a new draft a new version is created for editing while the old version s remain s untouched Below we describe various tasks related to versions We reference version numbers ex tensively in our examples See Section 8 1 4 1 Version number to review version numbers The topic of translations is covered in the next section When you are finished managing versions click the Back button in the Version history interface see Figure 9 10 Version history interface below to exit Working with versions 201 9 2 2 1 Displaying an overview of existing versions To see an overview of all versions bring up the Version history interface 1 Select the object of your choice for editing in the Object Edit Interface 2 Inthe Object information window on the left you will see the published version s version numb
8. 4 3 2 2 3 Connecting the node tree At a minimum the tree consists of one node called the root node This is the root folder under which all content is placed Unlike all other nodes the root node does not have a Parent Node ID simply because it is at the top of the hierarchy It is also not associated with a content object Its only function is to be a parent node to the other content nodes to hold the tree together In other words the root node is a virtual empty construct without any content You cannot navigate to it cannot see it and cannot delete it It simply exists A node that is directly below the root node is called a top level node Each top level node is the start of a node tree branch for example the Content or Users branch The number of levels in the tree is unlimited This is an extremely flexible and generic solution that can be used to structure any kind of custom content Node details such as the Node ID about top level nodes are beyond the scope of this book Interested readers may find in formation in the documentation at http ez no doc Each node except the root node has two associations one to a parent node and one to a content object Parent nodes must be containers so that they can have nodes located beneath them Refer to Section 2 3 3 1 Containers structuring for a description of container classes which are also discussed in depth in Chapter 5 Content Classes These associations are establishe
9. The price can be affected by a value added tax and or a discount rule A discount rule can be configured to reduce the price of certain products by a specified percentage Your Product class q1 daily work will probably be restricted to setting up and updating the values in attribute fields as opposed to setting up the attribute fields themselves The Webshop allows you to offer products to your visitors and have them put the products into a virtual shopping basket In the shopping basket there is a link to the checkout process where the customer enters identifying information that will be sent to a designated recipient usually a sales person via email The screenshot below shows the Webshop section of our example site News and Events Products Partner Community Knowledge Base Company Home Products mez arice v Createhere Edit Move Remove Op noffe Import Export Replace Products Products Color Pencil Box A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Price 89 00 d Boxes a lii Green Paint Bucket Color Pencil Box Matchbox Price 245 00 Price 89 00 Price 142 00 Figure 2 1
10. This section gives you a basic introduction to some key concepts related to content editing with eZ Publish While a general idea of these concepts is helpful you are not expected to gain an in depth understanding yet Chapter 4 covers this material in detail Readers already familiar with these topics might find the presentation here a bit narrow and sim plified Objects eZ Publish supports various types of content such as images articles multimedia files forums feedback forms and so on A content type is called a content class or class for short while a specific piece of content is called a content object or object for short A content class can be thought of as a structural blueprint for a particular type of content The properties of that content are referred to as attributes For example the Article content class contains attributes like title name of author introduction text the text of the article and so on The following screenshot shows this You will learn more about attributes in Chapter 4 ARTICLE CLASS Figure 1 8 Content class ATTRIBUTES Content objects can be both individual objects and containers for content located beneath them in the content hierarchy For example one or more articles are generally stored beneath a folder When the folder is displayed it automatically displays a summary list of the articles stored beneath it This is part of the internal template for the Folder content class
11. 328 Chapter n Content Editing Documentation and guidance Morbi elit neque accumsan nec tincidunt sec elementum Cras molestie nisi quis metus Fi metus vitae augue vehicula rhoncus Cras sus vitae nunc Vivamus quis odio id justo aliquar ante eget facilisis magna neque non diam N faucibus vel justo Sed sit amet ante Vestibi 1 this is the fist list item 2 second list item third list item 1 item 2 item 3 last list item ol li Figure 11 33 Convert list style for list item independent list item numbering 11 2 6 3 5 List items with multiple lines To create a new text line inside a list item without creating a new list item hold down the Shift key and press the Enter key The following screenshot shows a bullet list containing six list items Online Editor daily tasks 329 Body Normal z e B J 2 Documentation and guidance Morbi elit neque accumsan nec tincidunt sec elementum Cras molestie nisi quis metus Fi metus vitae augue vehicula rhoncus Cras sus vitae nunc Vivamus quis odio id justo aliquar ante eget facilisis magna neque non diam M faucibus vel justo Sed sit amet ante Vestibi this is the fist list item second list item third list item item item last list item lt ul gt lt li gt Figure 11 34 Add new text lines to a list item six list items We will insert a few text lines into the second list item To do this positi
12. An eZ Publish template is a custom extended HTML file that describes how particular types of content should be presented For example there is a template for viewing a folder and its contents a news article the contents of a gallery as thumbnails media files as list items forum posts and so on In some cases you can even have different article templates based on different kinds of articles or where they are located in the content hierarchy In short templates are the transforming unit that produces the site layout either for an entire webpage or some part of that page The following screenshots illustrate how different templates work together to produce a page The main template dictating the overall layout is described in the in depth section that follows COMPANYLOGO Login Register Site map Your company slogan here _Searh News and Events Products Community Knowledge Base Company Home News and Events News and Events News and Events estor bulletins gt Product release Latest Information From This Company Press Releases z Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor A sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem
13. If you examine the contents of this folder you will see that all items are of the Banner class The main area shows a preview of the Corporate banner object You might re cognize this image from the site s front page 258 Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab News and Events Products Partner Community Knowledge Base Company eZ arice Y Createhere Edit Press Releases Latest Information From This Company Tan Figure 10 3 Site front page If you look closely at the Relations window in the main area of Figure 10 2 Banners folder in media library you will see that this banner object has a reverse object relation meaning that it is used by the Home content object as a Billboard attribute Creating banners is described later in Section 10 3 2 Creating new content in the media library 10 2 Accessing the contents of the media library You might recall from Section 4 3 2 Content node tree that the sections feature see the Section definition from the Glossary can be used to enforce limits and control to content Unlike the Content branch the nodes of the Media branch are not displayed by default on the public siteaccess This is also the case for user groups and accounts found in the Users branch Compare the following two screenshots illustrating the sections from the Media and Content branches Protected areas 259 Preview Detais Transhtions Locations Rehtions
14. Media Folder Last modified 08 12 2008 03 37 pm Administrator User Teraisn american 7 Move Remove English American Efl Administrator User 08 12 2003 03 37 pm Media Figure 10 4 Media branch section information Preview DesE Transhtions I Locations Rehtions al Home Frontpage Last modified 12 20 2006 08 56 am Administrator User English American BA f Ergin amorcar x Move Remove Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard Figure 10 5 Content branch section information As the screenshots show the section of the Media branch is Media while the section of the Content branch is Standard Section management is beyond the scope of this book However when working with the media library you have to be aware of the section to which a content object belongs as it will have consequences regarding the accessibility of that object 10 2 1 Protected areas By default Anonymous users do not have access to anything within the Media section In other words the media library is a restricted and protected area of the site unless your site administrator specifically grants read access for Anonymous users If an Anonymous user attempts to access the media library an error page will be displayed similar to the one below 260 Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab Access denied You don t have permission to access this area Possible reasons for this are
15. Online Editor daily tasks 343 4 Click the OK button The table will appear in the OE text area If the table border is 0 the table will be displayed in the Online Editor with borders for easier visualiz ation dictum a varius non elementum ultrices libero Aliquam lacinia arcu nec tellus Cras eget elit ut leo pharetra pharetra Suspendisse varius quam in erat Figure 11 47 New table with border width O 5 Insert the desired content into the table cells Tip To edit a table tag manually refer to Section 11 3 1 7 Tables Text and inline elements inside table cells will always be encapsulated by paragraphs and you will see the lt p gt tag in the OE status bar Section 11 2 5 2 Text formatting line breaks and paragraphs explained how the OE visualizes paragraphs However the paragraph tags will not be shown when the Online Editor is disabled when you are looking at the simplified XML see Section 11 3 Manual editing with XML tags 11 2 6 6 2 Selecting a table If you click on the table border the table will become selected and you will see it in a rectangular frame 4 n p4 o Q Figure 11 48 Table selected Tip When using a Mozilla based browser you can also click inside the table in order to select it 344 Chapter n Content Editing 11 2 6 6 5 Removing a table When using Internet Explorer you can remove an entire table by right clicking on it and choosing Delete from
16. The item being viewed does not make use of any other objects E conference Article Common Cars Gallery Attribute Image Figure 10 29 Image Ferrari 3 284 Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab m Ferrari BB 512 side Image English American Side view of one of the classics from 80s maerore IE DEN SEES Creator Created Section Versions Translations Node ID Object ID Administrator User 02 21 2007 01 43 pm Media 1 1 172 180 CENE Related objects 0 The item being viewed does not make use of any other objects Reverse related objects 1 Class Relation type conference Article Common Figure 10 30 Image Ferrari 4 As Figure 10 29 Image Ferrari 3 reveals this image is also used in an object relation at the attribute level for the parent object Cars This closes our extended example about the media library 10 5 Summary The Media library tab makes it possible to browse and manage the nodes that belong to the Media top level node This content is commonly referred to as belonging to the Media branch or media library The media library is used for storing and organizing in formation that is frequently used by the Content branch Most editing operations for the Media branch are identical to the ones described in the previous chapters for the Content branch However you should note the following three points Access permissions may change when content is put inside the media librar
17. The item being viewed is not in use by any other objects Figure 10 17 View article 1 Note the matchbox image shown in the Preview window and that only the color pencil box image is listed in the Relations window Recall that the former image was uploaded directly into the Image attribute while the latter was created by adding a relation to an existing content object This explains why only the color pencil box image is listed in the Relations window The relation type is Common meaning that the image has not yet been embedded in the article and consequently it will not show when viewing the article Media library example 273 Company gt gt gt News and Events Contact us Investor Relations January 2007 newsletter Administrator User Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Pellentesque ullamcorper erat sit amet blandit semper risus tortor malesuada nulla nec ultrices justo massa nec nisi Aliquam non mi quis leo malesuada iaculis Aenean sit amet lacus Pellentesque metus ligula condimentum nec malesuada nec tincidunt non nibh Class inceptos hymenaeos Aliquam lobortis ornare diam Nullam dignissim Cras erat Etiam porttitor auctor dolor In in tellus vitae est ultrices aliquet Integer gravida sem tristique tortor Praesent gravida rhoncus turpis Ut eget orci non sapien pretium malesuada Aliquam feugiat porta magna Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient
18. The username may contain any characters This field is case insensitive In other words TigerBoy is the same as tigerboy 60 Chapter 3 An Overview of the Administration Interface The password must be at least three characters long This field is case sensitive In other words t 1000 is not the same as T 1000 The system forces you to enter it twice in order to prevent the accidental registration with a mis typed password The email address is used whenever eZ Publish attempts to communicate with the user for example by sending a registration confirmation The signature field can be used to enter additional information about the user to be displayed for example in forum posts The image field allows the user to upload an image of himself or herself Interested readers should refer to the eZ Publish documentation at http ez no doc for more details about user registration and management In Depth User email addresses Note that by default email addresses must be unique within the system If a person has multiple user accounts he or she must have separate email accounts for each This prevents multiple users from sharing a dummy email address 3 1 1 1 Successful registration If all the fields have been filled out correctly when the OK button is pressed the system will create a new user account The following dialog will be displayed Your account was successfully created An email will be sent to the specifi
19. Browse Figure 5 7 File input fields File objects can be used for example in a download section of your site Files can also be embedded in rich text content described in Section 11 2 6 4 Uploading and embed ding an image using the OE 5 3 Frequently used container content classes This section describes frequently used container content classes the Folder and the Frontpage classes 5 3 1 Folder class The Folder class is similar to the Article class described previously but it does not have the option to enable comments Objects of the Folder class are also containers used to display collections of other objects such as articles and images To create a folder that is able to list its sub items assuming that this behavior is allowed for in the templates you only need to fill in the Name field and mark the Show children checkbox as shown below The Name attribute is the title of the folder and is shown on the website The remaining attributes are optional 108 Chapter 5 Content Classes Show children n Figure 5 8 Folder show children The Short name attribute is used in the Administration Interface in the navigation tree structure It is also displayed if set on the public siteaccess in places like the title of the browser window Because of this it should be kept short The Description attribute is the body of the page and can contain formatted text because it is associated with an XML block
20. Locate content and select Edit from the pop up menu or click the Edit button in the main area Alternatively cre ate new content See Sec tion 7 1 1 Bringing up the Object Edit Interface How dol XXV Task Website Interface WI Administration Interface AD Create new content Navigate to the desired loca tion and click the Create here button on the Website Tool bar See Section 2 32 1 Adding content Navigate to the desired loca tion and click the Create here button in the Sub items win dow Alternatively select Create here from the relev ant pop up menu See Sec tion 9 1 1 Object creation Input formatted text Edit the XML input field us ing the Online Editor or manually See Section 11 2 Online Editor Same as for the WI Access my drafts Access your User profile page and click the My drafts link See Section 2 2 1 User profile Access the My account tab and click the My drafts link See Section 9 2 1 2 Contin ue editing a stored draft Undo changes When editing formatted text use the Undo button in the OE toolbar After saving a draft delete the draft and re start editing After publishing content revert to a previous version Same as for the WI Copy Not available Locate content and either click the Copy button for that item in the Sub items window or select Copy from the pop up menu See Sec tion 9
21. TMA SE 5e eee er bate ener e Re caved So res Quiet esee Due en e US 106 5 7 File input fields 1 eeu IERI ES 107 2 9 Polder Show children 44 ior eret er ne dee Roe ek ds 108 59 Frontpage column shinii ne ini ed pee eee n ae i 109 5 10 Frontpage billboard attribute esee 110 5 T1 Link im edit mode teer EE eh cebel leavcsbeasenecds 112 5 12 Article with comments asise iape eT A nennen senes enne 114 5 13 Feedback fori e ee eere E nn we de E een ean eae oa 115 3 14 Forums Pages uotis eet poete eed bee epo kon e Ron oet a Bo eet cerdo ket eer he Cono ERE DU Rer Rs 116 5 15 Forum Opies eee tert ere ek Sete a Te ee ee sec APERTE RH EYE o e Por ee ma eec un 118 2316 Single TOrUM Opie 5 eere es ere o e rre donee ayer pee pre dees 118 5 17 Folder p ge ii rr ee rn here ee eeu eee x e debe E eu ves 120 2 18 Documentation page 2 52 dio orate doa ut een te ans va ora eue d e Do eR ee ee RTT S 121 5 19 Infobox on Products page ssesssssesee m e eee hehehe nene 122 2 20 Event calendar i eee e ch pe e Tros et e ibm de yp ei a 123 521 Image gallery eoi nee ede rhe e ey Re Ine n 124 6 1 Areas of the Administration Interface 2 2 0 0 cc ceeeeeeeceeececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeenes 128 6 2 Tree menu first level only sssssesssssee eem 131 6 3 Tree menu single branch unfolded esee 131 6 4 Context sensitive pop up menu csssssssee me me me
22. amples show a site where all content classes are displayed The tree menu see Section 3 2 3 Secondary left menu in eZ Publish behaves very much in the same way as the interface of a typical file browser in a modern operating system It allows you to view and explore the depths of the content node tree by folding and unfolding the different nodes The screenshot below shows the tree menu with only one level unfolded Note the button to the left of the items Interactive tree 131 Content structure B i e Ld e E News and Events amp E Products amp Partner Community amp _ Knowledge Base amp E Company LI Figure 6 2 Tree menu first level only Imagine that you are going to add a new file for download but you cannot recall the location in the content node tree where it should be stored If you work your way down the items shown in the menu you will find the Downloads folder under Community The screenshot below shows this part of the tree menu unfolded amp E News and Events e E Products Gr Partner Gr Community Multimedia Downloads 7 More dummy data Y Download statistics 7 Research Data 7 A very small document Cy The secret file amp E Pictures amp Forums a _ Knowledge Base j Company LI Figure 6 3 Tree menu single branch unfolded A node listed in the secondary menu can be selected by clicking on its name When
23. content class that should be created Note that the available content classes depend on the permissions of the user who is currently logged in the data structures that have been set up for the site and the location in the content hierarchy The second dropdown list allows you to select the language for the object This list is not shown for single language sites In the screenshot above Article is selected from the first dropdown list and English American is selected from the second one When you click the Create here button the system will create an article in English inside the Press Releases folder You will then be presented with the Object Edit Interface for the purpose of entering data into that article You can create any object under any other object as long as the content class of the parent object is configured as a container The following list summarizes the steps to create new content 1 Use the dropdown lists in the Sub items window to select the type of content you wish to add and the desired language for this content Click the Create here button You can alternatively select Create here from the context sensitive pop up menu for the node where you want to place your new content 2 Use the Object Edit Interface to add the content 3 When you are done filling in all the necessary fields click the Send for publishing button Tip In the Website Interface navigate to where you want to place new content t
24. lt p gt lt table gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt p gt lt table gt lt tr gt lt td gt Figure 11 36 Nested list Tip The Decrease indent and Increase indent buttons are inactive until you position the cursor inside a list item or select one of the list items 1 2 6 4 Uploading and embedding an image using the OE Images are the most common elements to embed in content Other embedded content includes files Flash videos and other media objects The embedding feature for the OE was introduced in Section 11 2 5 3 1 Object button 332 Chapter n Content Editing 11 2 6 4 1 Inserting an object Note that an image cannot be inserted on the same line as a heading It is recommended that you create a new paragraph before inserting an image Inline embedding is available in the most recent version of the Online Editor as described in In Depth Built in attrib utes below 1 Position the cursor at a location where you wish to add an image Click the Object button You can also right click and choose the Insert object item from the context sensitive pop up menu 2 You will see a modal dialog showing a list of related objects If there are no relations the list will be empty re http nemo bms ez no Insert object Sandbox Mozilla Firefox D X Select from related objects or upload local files Related objects Related images Em 3 uw E C Ferrari BB 512 front open C Ferrari BB 512 side
25. simply click the Undo button to bring back the literal block When using Internet Explorer you can right click on the box and select Delete from the context sensitive pop up menu 1 2 6 5 Working with lists Using lists is a nice way to present material in a structured fashion The operations are almost identical for ordered and unordered lists The topic of lists was introduced in Section 11 2 5 1 3 Text formatting numbered and bullet lists 11 2 6 3 1 Creating a list The procedure below shows how to create a numbered list For a bullet unordered list simply use the Bullet list button instead of the Numbered list button 1 Create a new empty paragraph and click the Numbered list button 322 Chapter n Content Editing Documentation and guidanc Numbered list Morbi elit neque accumsan nec tincidunt sed fermentum in justo Aenean vitae ante ut eros ullamcorper rutrum Fusce elementum Cras molestie nisi quis metus Fusce orci lectus imperdiet in tempor vitae vulputate nec enim Aliquam in metus vitae augue vehicula rhoncus Cras suscipit metus sit amet mi Etiam porttitor neque ut ipsum Ut sollicitudin nibh vitae nunc Vivamus quis odio id justo aliquam pretium Quisque congue metus ut porta fringilla sapien ipsum porttitor ante eget facilisis magna neque non diam Mauris id purus Curabitur nulla Donec sem nisi cursus sed lobortis in faucibus vel justo Sed sit amet ante Vestibulum blandit pur
26. the Content structure tab the Media library tab the User accounts tab the Webshop tab the Design tab the Setup tab the My account tab An overview of the functionality of these tabs is given in Section 3 3 Administration Interface tabs after the description of the remaining areas of the Administration Inter face The Content structure tab and the Media library tab are the ones most frequently used by content editors Those tabs are described in depth in Chapter 6 Chapter 9 and Chapter 10 3 2 2 Path The interactive path 2 is located below the main menu 1 The path shows the location of the current page within the content node tree regardless of the current activity The path is constructed from the names of higher levels in the content hierarchy separated by slashes All but the last element which is the name of the current object is a link Therefore you can use the path to navigate backwards and upwards through the hierarchy independent of the navigation history in your browser Navigation is discussed below in Section 3 4 Navigation 64 Chapter 3 An Overview of the Administration Interface 3 2 3 Secondary left menu The secondary menu provides access to content and interfaces that are associated with the current tab This menu is as shown in Figure 3 5 Areas of the Administration Inter face usually positioned on the left side of the Administration Interface and is therefore also call
27. 11 62 XML example 4 embedded object with link 1 0 0 cee eeeeeee eens 361 11 63 Feedback form presented to site visitors secceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeneeeaeeeees 364 11 64 Feedback form in edit mode 20 00 cece cece eec nec neeeeaeeneeeeeneeaeeaeeaeeneeaeenes 365 11 65 Collected information page ssssssssse mem 366 List of Tables 1 Overview of common procedures for both interfaces ssessessess XXlV 2 1 Edit mode involved interfaces eesessesseseeeeeeeemememeee 32 2 2 Edit mode toolbar functions sssssesseseeeeenee mee he 35 3 1 Administration Interface main menu tabs cece eee eee nsec eeneeeeeneeeeeneenees 65 3 2 Context sensitive pop up menu functions sese e 78 SSeS Witches OVEFVIEW 2 ee ee eer ane cov ade sakes lug ree aa Ea e TE EAR OE Peu E NUR aeq 82 4 1 Commonly used built in datatypes sss 88 5 1 Forum related Classes i e erret orte rome be eder RR Ene ore E EE 116 6 1 Object relation types rer RR HERR ERE ct Rae er DRE Pede eet SE 142 7 1 Edit mode involved interfaces eessesseseseeseeeneeeen 149 8 T Actions on Version states irur aeree rei eR E TERN E E E 181 9 1 Publish at multiple locations or duplicate overview eeeeeeees 251 10 1 Media related concepts csse eene 255 11 1 Edit mode involved interfaces esee 288 11 2
28. 119 Forum topic 117 Notify me about updates 119 Sticky 119 Sticky topic 119 Thread 117 Topic group 117 Forum class 117 Forum reply class 119 Forum topic Create 119 Forum topic class 117 396 Forums class 116 130 Front end editing 21 Front end interface xx see Website Interface Frontpage class 108 119 257 Billboard attribute 109 258 Column attributes 109 G Gallery class 99 123 130 Generic controls 90 H Header 312 Heading 307 312 Help 302 303 HTML 3 103 HTTP Client server cycle 13 Request 13 Hyperlink 111 309 310 334 359 Properties 336 Remove 337 To anchor 340 ID 87 93 Image class 106 130 Image map 264 Infobox class 121 Information bar 137 Information collection 113 362 Stored 365 Information collector 90 Information sharing 119 Initial language 185 Inline custom tag 309 Inline element 309 Inline graphics 110 Input validation 88 159 289 306 Error 290 Insert custom tag 304 Insert special character 303 Installation xx 288 Instance 86 91 92 Integer datatype 290 Index Interactive tree see Content node tree Interface xviii 7 Administration Interface 9 57 Browse interface 196 Content Editing Interface 30 Login interface 17 Search interface 65 Version preview interface 160 Website Interface 7 22 Website Toolbar 23 XML input field with OE 297 Italic text 307 309 317 J J
29. 149 227 252 262 292 292 Action availability 301 Assisted text editing 202 Bold text 317 Button Anchor 311 Bulleted list 308 Decrease indent 308 Find text 303 Help 302 Increase indent 308 Insert custom tag 304 Insert literal text 311 Insert object 310 Insert special character 303 Link 310 Numbered list 308 Redo 303 Undo 303 Change heading level 314 Create Formatted pages 292 Heading 313 Hyperlink 334 Line break 308 List 321 New paragraph 308 Custom tag 300 Element class 300 Embed object feature 310 331 Emphasize text 317 Enable disable 295 For current user 295 For entire site 295 ezdhtml 296 Find text 303 Format text 312 Help 302 Insert custom tag 304 Insert special character 303 Integrated 292 Italic text 317 Layout 297 Context sensitive pop up menu 298 Modal dialog 298 OE status bar 299 OE text area 298 OE toolbar 301 399 List 321 Literal text 319 Redo 303 Set text style before writing 316 Table 341 Create 341 Delete column 346 Delete row 346 Header 344 Insert column 344 Insert row 344 Nested 350 Properties 349 Remove 344 Select 343 Split and merge cells 347 347 Table cell Properties 349 Tooltips 302 Troubleshooting 295 Undo 303 Unformatted text 319 Usage 305 Open source xvii xxvii OpenOffice org 50 OpenOffice org documents Export 53 Import 50 Replace 53 OpenOffice org Writer 50 Ordered list see Numbered li
30. Actions on version states Status Available Not available Draft can be edited by the same user cannot be archived without first who initially created it being published can be published the previous published version will become archived can be deleted discarded can be stored for later will keep status if object is re moved Published can be copied becoming a new cannot be edited draft cannot become a draft can become archived when a more recent version is published will keep status if object is re moved Archived can be copied becoming a new cannot be edited draft will keep status if object is re moved When a published or an archived version is copied the status of the new version is set to Draft and thus it becomes editable When and if the new draft is published the system 182 Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features automatically sets the status of the previously published version to Archived and the new draft will become the published version When a version is published the modification time of the object itself will be updated it will simply be set to the same value as the modification time of the version that was published For chronological listings of articles for example the modification time of a version will affect the order in which the articles are displayed 8 1 4 5 Translations A version can exist in multiple translations
31. Administrator User Published version Author 1 Name Email r Administrator User foms ez no pm Created 01 24 2007 10 04 am s ired Administrator User ummary required Modified rema Jees 7 s e 01 24 2007 10 04 am Administrator User Version 2 e ene fec v e I Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Sed ut libero eu ligula aliquet vestibulum Suspendisse elementum faucibus magna Quisque nisl felis pharetra id accumsan mattis gravida at nibh Figure 8 7 Published object edit new draft Here you can see that the information in the Object information window is the same Note especially that the published version of the object is 1 Because of this the object state and status are still Published 178 Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features The Current draft window has however been updated Both timestamps are the same and are different from the Modified timestamp of the object This is typical for a newly created but not yet stored draft Secondly note that the version of the current draft is 2 Discarding the draft transition 4a will preserve version 1 as the published one and no updates will be made to the object If you store the draft with or without exiting edit mode transition 4b or 4c version 2 which is still a draft will be available on the My drafts page and will appear in the version history of the object Also the M
32. Design the presentation of data cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 2 3 Webpage components csssssese 4 1 2 4 Website components i aieea oeer Hee 4 1 2 5 Benefits to separating content and design sesssss 5 1 3 eZ Publish from a non technical perspective eeeeeeses 5 1 3 1 SiteaCcesses iius teet er ee br e es qoe e odore de ee eee tees 5 1 32 Templates 3 ee ree rote RR RARO REESE 10 1 4 A quick introduction to content objects and the node tree 14 1 41 Objects i nior iie trier em Ri tac eigen 14 1 4 2 Nodes 2 ie T Re eee ea ee eut 15 T5 User accounts eiai r ER ERR E RE RE RR RON RAE RE 15 15 L LOg 2I gm eei peer pene tees tre EE a edid ene p Seco 16 15 2 Logging out iste URINE EEE 18 1 6 Requirements erre tette reet eoe eden ae Ulo aeo dotes doe ne eee 18 1 6 1 Supported browsers eses HH 19 1 6 2 Installation and environment requirements for the Online Edit OL ret rae EREA see nep toes ien E n oe ide aer teet nee A E UR dus E 19 1 7 Summaty HAS la er e ee a oes tee i oed eot 19 2 Front end Editing Website Interface eessseeeee 21 2 1 Website Interface 2 eite se tee tette reete to pe a lere a RU So Mee ca 22 2 1 1 Website Toolbar ie 2 2 itr Rec bed 23 2 2 Settings ooo ier eor aloes odio sec ceres Gee Te Pen de dee stones odio Vo dece sey tubs 25 2 2 User profile 5 EEE SER et re OrR D IRR R
33. Duis at diam Nulla est sapien sagittis ut consequat eget tincidunt in lectus Nulla facilisi Nulla at libero vestibulum purus mollis rutrum Suspendisse potenti A SSE a S s 2 r 2I Choose section et T a E4 Figure 7 1 Object Edit Interface The Object Edit Interface usually consists of six windows Object information window N Current draft window ioe Translate from window shown even if you have a single language site 4 Main edit window 5 Related objects window not shown in the screenshot located at bottom of page 6 Section window These windows are described in the sections that follow Note that the windows in the right area including the Bookmarks window are disabled grayed out This is done to prevent users from navigating away without either properly saving discarding or publish ing an object Bringing up the Object Edit Interface There are five ways to access the Object Edit Interface from within the Content structure Media library or User account tabs 152 Chapter 7 The Object Edit Interface Click the Create here button found at the bottom of the main area when some content is viewed to add new content This is shown in Figure 7 2 Open Object Edit Interface from main area Click the Edit button in the Preview window at the top of the main area when some content object is being viewed This
34. E amp amp l AEE Cars E New product release Ls E ed 1 3 Latest Information Fro 5 Euit Visible Article Administrator User 01 02 2007 01 32 pm Standard 5 MM ESL LLL I E New company website Visible Article Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 57 am Standard 58 K Events C Clear cache amp E Products released j Partner T E Good results in the fourth Visible Article Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard 8 K Content zj J Community quarter Standard _ Knowledge Base E I E New product release Visible Article Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard 8 Z is C Company Quick settings T Latest Information From Visible Article Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard Gl 4 This Compan s 5 fg Trash Maisie salaried Update priorities mal SN Large Aricie zj Engish american z sorting Published gt Descending gt EJ eZ publish Copyright 1999 2006 eZ systems AS and others For more information see ezinfo about Figure 9 1 Tools for creating objects 9 1 1 Object creation Let us start our walk through of object creation with an example As the screenshot above shows we have navigated into a folder called Press Releases There are two dropdown lists at the bottom left of the Sub items window The first one allows you to select the 192 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing
35. If you simply discover some typographical error in your published content it is simpler to edit the object as usual to correct the mistake If you added a new translation and stored that as a draft you can undo this by deleting the draft This will work as long as you have not published the version containing the new translation However if you have published it you can remove that translation through the Translations window as described in Section 9 2 3 4 Removing translations versions If you are editing content using the Online Editor there is a dedicated Undo button in the toolbar This is described in Section 11 2 4 5 5 Undo and Redo buttons Deleting content whether it is a version a translation an entire content object or a sec ondary location of that object calls for extra attention since some remove actions are ir reversible Procedures for removing objects are described later in this chapter Before we move on to the third major section of this chapter we will describe the eZ Publish trash system 228 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing 9 2 5 1 Trash By default deleted content is moved to a trash container and is not entirely deleted from the system You can access the trash through the link at the bottom of the secondary menu when viewing content amp Knowledge Base amp E Company Dn gt fig Trash Small Medium Large Figure 9 30 Trash Items in the trash can be retrieve
36. In other words you can only edit eZ Publish content with it and only when you are logged into the system Note that it is possible for anonymous users to access the OE if and only if special access privileges have been granted by the site administrator This is however very uncommon You can disable the Online Editor if you want complete control over content formatting Toggling the OE on and off is described in Section 11 2 2 Enabling and disabling the Online Editor below Manual editing without the OE is described in Section 11 3 Manual editing with XML tags The illustrations in this chapter can be directly applied to the Object Edit Interface in the Administration Interface or the Content Editing Interface in the Website Interface since the OE behaves the same in either edit mode interface You might want to review the section about text input fields in Chapter 5 first Before we continue our description we present an illustrated example 11 2 1 1 Example getting started with the Online Editor We will open a folder object for editing and take a closer look at how the Online Editor works What is the Online Editor 293 Tip For the Content Editing Interface we assume that you are logged into the Website Interface with at least Editor permissions and that you have some folder object available You can easily edit an object by clicking the Edit button on the Website Toolbar Tip For the Object Edit Interface we assume t
37. Login button Once a valid username and password have been entered log in by clicking this button Sign Up button Provides a mechanism that allows new users to register themselves on the system Refer to Section 3 1 1 User registration for more information about this feature Log in to the Administration Interface checkbox If checked this will send you to the Administration Interface as opposed to the Website Interface after successful login This option is not shown if you access the URL of the Administration Interface directly Follow the steps below to log in via the Website Interface Open the Login interface by clicking the Login link in the upper right corner of the Website Interface Enter your username and password 18 Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management 3 Mark the checkbox if you want to be redirected to the Administration Interface 4 Click the Login button 5 This will reload the webpage with additional functionality depending on your user account type If you leave the checkbox unchecked you will now be looking at the Website Interface with the Website Toolbar showing If you do check it and your user account permits it you will be looking at the Administration Interface 1 5 2 Logging out eZ Publish stores information about the currently logged in user In other words you do not need to repeat the login process when moving between different pages of your site However we reco
38. Required 90 Requirements 18 JavaScript 129 Online Editor eZ Publish version 19 PHP version 19 Supported browsers 19 Supported browsers 19 Web standards 18 Revert xxiii 47 206 227 Rich text 103 Role xviii 16 Root node 95 RSS xviii S Save see Store draft Search 65 72 97 260 261 303 Current location 75 Limited 75 Standard 73 Troubleshooting 75 Interface disabled 76 Missing search results 76 Search interface 65 90 128 Searchable 90 Secondary location 99 Remove 249 Set before publishing 247 Secondary menu 128 130 132 see also Left menu Displayed object types 132 Enable disable 130 Horizontal size 132 Interactive tree 130 Vertical size 132 Width 132 Section 97 138 158 245 258 267 Create a protected area 259 Media 259 Standard 259 Section management 86 158 Section window 151 158 Settings 25 Default language 185 Edit mode settings 248 Locale 185 Notifications 28 Site settings 25 User profile 25 Edit 26 Setup 288 Setup tab xxiii 295 Extensions 295 Shop related datatypes 40 Single language site 157 190 Single threaded forums 117 Site 4 Configuration settings 4 Content 4 Design 4 Site languages 186 Site locale 185 Site design 10 Site interface 5 see also Siteaccess Site languages 186 192 216 Prioritized 186 Site locale 185 Site management Cache 297 Enable extension 296 Site map 256 Site settings 25 Si
39. Use the Register button to create a new account Username Password Figure 3 1 Administration Interface login screen User registration 59 3 1 1 There are three ways to obtain an account to access the Administration Interface First a user can use the default Administrator user account although it is preferable to use an account with more limited privileges Second the site administrator can create a user account for each content editor Third the content editor can register as a user as described below then the site administrator can give Editor permissions to that account Note that granting editing rights automatically to self registering users jeopardizes the security of your site User registration The Register button on the login page see Figure 3 1 Administration Interface login screen invokes a web form that allows new users to register themselves on the system In order to register the user must fill out all required fields then click the OK button The following screenshot shows part of a completed registration form Most of the fields are self explanatory Register new user First name required iger Last name required Boy User account required User ID 145 Username Password Confirm password higerboy m Email higerboy ez no Figure 3 2 User registration Here are a few general notes about the registration fields The User ID is generated by the system
40. XML blocks store your text together with the information regarding internal structure headings tables lists and so on in the form of XML code The OE converts the XML code to a visual representation of the same data For example images will be shown as images tables will be shown as tables and so on If we temporarily disable the OE the markup for the contents above Figure 11 2 Edit mode with OE will look like this Description gt lt embed size medium href ezobject 121 gt rmation about this company Information about this company Information about this company Information about this company Information about this company Information about this company Information about this company Information ab out this company Information about this company Information about this company Information about this company Information ab out this company Information about this company lt header level 1 gt Main values of company lt header gt lt ul gt lt li gt Value 1 lt li gt lt li gt Value 2 lt li gt lt li gt Value 3 lt li gt lt ul gt lt table border 0 width 100 gt lt tr gt lt th gt Europe lt th gt lt th gt America lt th gt iv Enabk editor Show children Lj Send forpublishing Store draft Discard Figure 11 3 Edit mode without OE Note that the styling only includes logical structure layout related design issues are handled separately from content wit
41. article without knowing how it is internally handled 4 2 Datatypes attributes classes and objects This section goes deeper into the content structure of eZ Publish Recall that Acontent class is a blueprint a structural description for a content object The properties of an object are defined by its attributes and their datatypes At the most basic level content attributes and content objects have two properties in common a name and an ID The name is the human readable means of referring to the attribute object The ZD is used for the system s internal reference To illustrate this think of a person named Sara Smith In most situations it is most con venient to refer to her by her name in fact it would be rather awkward to refer to her in any other way If you need to be more specific you might add some information about who she is related to or where she works for example Sara Smith my mother in law or Sara Smith the 4th grade teacher However if you need to look her up in the public 88 Chapter 4 Content Management Concepts Objects and Nodes hospital records it is better to use her social security number the ID in this case as there might be several Sara Smiths in the system This also holds when working with content in eZ Publish 4 2 1 Datatypes A datatype describes the type of value that can be stored in an attribute and is the smallest possible entity of storage It determines how a specific t
42. control system for content objects in eZ Publish In addition to creating new content adding content to the site maintaining and updating existing content is a major task for content editors First we pull together the information given in previous chapters about versions to show you the big picture Then we look at the Version history interface Finally we describe the version structure emphasizing version statuses Content versions big picture The first and most important concept to understand is that a content object consists of one or more versions This additional layer makes it possible to have different versions of the same content Versions are also known as the second dimension of content objects If you look at the relationship between a content object and its versions from the opposite view you will see that the different versions are encapsulated by the object itself Second remember how versions are created Every time you click either the Create or Edit buttons a new version of the content is automatically created by the system If the draft is discarded before it is stored the new version is deleted Third it is always the new version that is edited old versions remain untouched In other words the version mechanism follows a copy and edit approach rather than an over write replace approach Fourth the version history which provides information about the versions of an object is how eZ Publish keeps tr
43. in order all of the content modifications in the examples of this book Explore the site as an An onymous user or log in as an Editor or Administrator user to test the eZ Publish function alities Log in with the username admin and password 1234 to access the Adminis trator user account Log in with the username editor and password 1234 to access to the Editor user account All changes made by visitors to the demo site will be automatically reset every two hours For clarity of presentation we have made some minor changes such as ensuring that all content types are shown in the secondary left menu of the Administration Interface restricted by default to enhance performance and relaxing the access restrictions 3 Contents The chapters are organized as follows Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management background about eZ Publish features and concepts including the separation of content and design siteaccesses the main interfaces for editing and managing content templates content objects and the node tree user accounts requirements and logging in and out Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface the simplest approach to content editing with eZ Publish It explains how to work with the front end interface for managing content The Webshop feature is also covered here Chapter 3 An Overview of the Administration Interface the advanced back end eZ Publish interface for adding and managing conte
44. including step by step procedures At the bottom left of the Sub items window you can create new objects of different types The dropdown list makes it possible to choose the content classes for new objects Certain classes relating to users or setup might not be shown Refer to Chapter 5 Content Classes or http ez no doc for more information about content classes The Create here button will display the Object Edit Interface see Chapter 7 The Object Edit Interface A new node will be placed below the current one 6 2 7 6 Sorting controls 6 3 The sorting controls are located in the lower right part of the Sub items window These controls can be used to determine how to sort the nodes in the node list Refer to Sec tion 9 3 2 Sorting content for more information about sorting Summary This chapter explained the layout of the Content structure tab focusing specifically on the secondary left menu and the main area The secondary menu of the Content structure tab displays nodes representing content objects belonging to the Content branch This tree menu behaves very similar to the in terface of a typical file browser in a modern operating system To bring up a context sensitive pop up menu click on one of the icons using the left or primary button on your mouse or other pointer device Selecting an item on the pop up menu will trigger a content management procedure The main area will be reloaded as appropriate for the
45. initial language 186 Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features It is possible to change the main language if a content object contains multiple translations Because of this it is incorrect to say that initial language equals main language but it is convenient to think that way Consider the following scenario where a Hungarian article is later translated into English and French You also have site material in several other languages Due to new company policies it is decided that English should be the default language across the site In this case it makes sense to update the article so that the main language is now English not Hungarian Still Hungarian will be the initial language for that content object at the system level because it was introduced in the first version 8 2 3 5 Site languages Starting from eZ Publish 3 8 you can specify the languages in which a site should be displayed This set of languages is referred to as site languages These languages can be controlled per siteaccess see Section 1 3 1 Siteaccesses in the configuration files by a prioritized list The system will try to display content in the highest prioritized language first If an object is not available in this language the second prioritized language will be displayed and so on If an object does not exist in any of the site languages it will not be shown unless it is configured to override this default behavior In other
46. menu item might thus not be available 11 2 6 Online Editor daily tasks This section is a practical step by step guide on how to carry out everyday text editing tasks for XML block fields with the Online Editor 1 2 6 1 Adding headers and formatting First we explain how to format text Structural elements like lists and tables are covered later You should note that we use both the term header and the term heading They have similar meanings but you should be aware of a small practical difference Heading is the name shown in the Text Style tool see Section 11 2 5 1 1 Text Style tool found in the OE Toolbar Header corresponds to the resulting markup Recall that a heading 1 in eZ XML corresponds to an lt h2 gt XHTML tag see In Depth OE heading levels versus XHTML lt h gt tags Online Editor daily tasks 313 11 2 6 1 1 Creating new headings The following example demonstrates how to create a new heading called Chapter 2 within the contents of an XML block attribute 1 Type in Chapter 2 as normal text MI i I z 2 e Jal E 9 Ml Body Normal J ll B I Morbi elit neque accumsan nec tincidunt sed fermentum in justo Aenean vitae ante ut eros ullamcorper rutrum Fusce elementum Cras molestie nisi quis metus Fusce orci lectus imperdiet in tempor vitae vulputate nec enim Aliquam in metus vitae augue vehicul
47. or another special purpose interface Tip In the Website Interface click the Manage versions button on the Website Toolbar when editing an object Then perform the same copy and edit procedure as described above 9 2 2 4 Setting an existing version as published There may be several reasons for assigning the Published status to another of the existing versions This automatically happens when you click the Send for publishing button on a draft There are two main scenarios related to reassigning the Published status Working with versions 205 9 2 2 4 1 Publishing a version more recent than the current In this scenario you already have a more recent version draft and you can simply publish that Versions for lt News and Events gt 5 Version Status Edited language Creator Created Modified Xm Archived 9 English American Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am 12 20 2006 08 56 am B A Era Published NS German Administrator User 01 18 2007 08 15 am 01 18 2007 08 15 am E Draft E English American Administrator User 02 19 2007 09 57 am 02 19 2007 10 31 am aA T a4 Draft Em German Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 19 am 02 19 2007 10 19 am E 55 Draft E English American Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 20 am 02 19 2007 10 20 am EB Delete selected English American Mi a Mi 5 z Show differences Published version Version Translations Creator Created Modified Copy translation 2 E English American Admin
48. 3 4 Copying content Move Locate content and click the Move button on the Website Toolbar See Section 2 3 3 3 Moving objects Locate content and either click the Move button for that item in the Preview window or select Move from the pop up menu See Sec tion 9 3 3 Moving content around xxvi Preface Task Website Interface WI Administration Interface AD Remove Locate content and click the Locate content and either Remove button on the Web site Toolbar See Sec tion 2 3 3 4 Removing and retrieving objects click the Remove button for that item in the Preview win dow or select Remove from the pop up menu See Sec tion 9 3 5 Deleting content Recover from trash Not available Click the Trash link at the bottom of the secondary menu and select the items you want to recover See Sec tion 9 2 5 1 Trash Solve an editing con flict Select an existing draft or create a new one See Sec tion 2 3 22 1 Editing con flicts Same as for the WI except that there is a different loca tion to access drafts See Sec tion 9 2 4 Editing conflicts Compare versions Bring up the Version history interface by clicking the Manage versions button on the Website Toolbar when in edit mode Click the Manage versions button in the Object Edit Interface or select Ad vanced Manage versions from the pop up menu See Secti
49. A translation is a representation of content in a specific language Therefore the translation layer allows a version of the object s actual contents to exist in different languages A version always has at least one translation For example a version written only in English has one translation the main and only English translation Even single language sites have translations but there will always be only one translation for each version and the same language is used for all versions and objects Multilingual content and translations are the topic of the following section 8 2 Multiple languages understand ing translations This is the second of two major sections in this chapter Earlier we looked at the built in version control system Now we will focus on multi language issues Content editors working with single language sites can skip this section The translation feature allows an object s contents to exist in several languages We have already touched upon this topic several times in this book and will start by outlining the big picture before looking at the details 8 2 1 Content translations big picture Recall that a content object consists of one or more versions This additional layer makes it possible to have different versions of the same content Versions are also known as the second dimension of content objects Each version further consists of one or more translations The translation layer makes it possible to r
50. Browse interface copying ssssssssseseee m eme mme hee mener 240 Treednenu Sei Ae ete ee IIR IA Ga IAG aes Bt 241 Details window original location of object ee 241 Details window secondary location of original object ssss 241 Details window copy of original object ssese 242 Removal confirmation dialog cccceeeceecceecceeeeeeeeeecaeeeaeeceeeeeeneeeaes 243 Remove displayed object through the Preview window 244 Remove multiple selected objects through the Sub items window 244 Locations window add location ssssssssssseeeee ee 246 Locations window in edit mode sssssssseseseseeneeemee nene 248 Edit mode settings window sessesse He 249 Delete selected location cinse e e 249 Kernel error page cannot be displayed sene 250 Media library tab reete Ree DP Pers 253 Banners folder in media library se 257 Site ATONE page oor aa eter Re RE eite receded ede ire tere Sade 258 xiii 10 4 Media branch section information sss eeeeeeeueeeeeeeeeaees 259 10 5 Content branch section information sesseee eeen eee eeeeeenees 259 10 6 Access denied to media library sese 260 10 7 Browse 1nt rface nen eaan a SR o OO a A O TE AA 261 10 8 Sub items window select class se HH 2
51. Chapter n Content Editing 11 2 Online Editor The Online Editor simplifies the editing process by providing assisted text editing via a WYSIWYG interface This means that you can format and work with content without having to deal with the code behind it 11 2 1 What is the Online Editor The eZ Publish Online Editor OE for short is an extension that allows you to create formatted pages using an intuitive interface With the OE you can easily format long passages of text for your articles product descriptions weblogs and so on The OE inter face is very similar to what you experience in modern word processors There is no need to know XML or manipulate tags manually When you click the necessary buttons the OE will automatically convert your instructions into valid eZ Publish XML code However some basic understanding of XML standards can be beneficial when it comes to advanced text editing features like element properties If this applies to you as a content editor you should refer to Section 11 3 Manual editing with XML tags Working al ternately with the Online Editor enabled and disabled can also act as a self study tool The Online Editor is an integrated part of your eZ Publish content editing environment the Content Editing Interface or Object Edit Interface When enabled it will appear every time you edit text that is stored using the XML block datatype Warning The Online Editor is not a standalone text editor
52. Editor Open Document Format OpenOffice org Open source P Path Glossary See Also Online Editor The OE toolbar contains tools for editing the content that is displayed in the OE text area Its buttons are very similar to those found in many word processors It is divided into seven areas Text Style Actions Format Lists Special Tools Tables and Help See Also Online Editor The Online Editor simplifies the editing process by providing assisted text editing with a WYSIWYG interface When in edit mode you can use the Online Editor to apply formatting characteristics in the text fields for XML block attributes You can also create links insert tables and lists and so on The formatting is based on XML The Online Editor is an integrated extension to eZ Publish meaning that it will automatically be displayed when editing attributes of the XML block datatype unless the default behavior has been overridden See Also Datatype XML CSS Class parameter Content Editing Inter face Object Edit Interface Edit mode Administration Interface This is an XML based file format specification by OASIS for office ap plications See Also OASIS OpenOffice org is a multiplatform and multilingual office suite and an open source project Compatible with all other major office suites the product is free to download use and distribute eZ Publish can import and export text documents based on the OASIS Open Document Format
53. Gg Downloads Figure 3 10 Browse for item to add to bookmarks 3 4 2 1 Adding bookmarks There are three ways to add bookmarks The Bookmarks window provides a button that can be used to bookmark the node that is currently displayed Bookmarks 71 The context sensitive pop up menu see Section 3 5 1 Context sensitive pop up menu below for each node has an option for adding a bookmark The Bookmarks interface as described previously in In Depth My bookmarks can be used to add one or more bookmarks Note that if you attempt to add a bookmark that already exists the request will silently be ignored 3 4 2 1 1 Adding bookmarks via the Bookmarks window The following procedure explains how to add a bookmark using the Bookmarks window 1 Navigate to the target node In other words display the content you want to book mark Check that the Bookmarks window is expanded If this is not the case click the button to display it Click the Add to bookmarks button in the Bookmarks window An entry for the current node is added to the list of bookmarks No confirmation message or page is displayed instead the current page is simply reloaded 3 4 2 1 2 Adding bookmarks via the context sensitive pop up menu The following procedure explains how to add a bookmark using the context sensitive pop up menu 1 Browse the node tree in the secondary menu by folding and unfolding the branches until you locate
54. Main rules for block and inline elements sseeeee 310 11 3 Table related OE buttons csse 341 11 4 Bringing up the pop up menu in the OE for different elements 351 11 5 Parameters for the lt embed gt tag ssssssss eecneeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaes 358 Preface eZ Publish is an Open Source Enterprise Content Management System that is used to build powerful flexible web solutions enabling people and organizations to share their information With more than 30 000 downloads per month over 2 million in total eZ Publish is trusted by enterprises and organizations around the world This book was written to address the needs of end users editors and content managers We take a non technical perspective and present everyday examples illustrations and screenshots Overall this book provides a comprehensive introduction to writing editing and managing content with eZ Publish A considerable amount of material in this book was drawn from or based upon the eZ Publish technical and user manuals http ez no doc which were written by Balazs Halasy and Svitlana Shatokhina Material from the Website Interface manuals ht tp ez no doc originally written by Jostein Knudsen was also included 1 About eZ Publish eZ Publish is a highly flexible and customizable Content Management System CMS It can be used to build everything from personal home pages to multinational corporate web s
55. ODF This is the format used by OpenOffice org Writer documents Open source refers to computer software that has publicly available source code as opposed to proprietary programs where the source code is not available Open source software is distributed under licenses that permit modification and re distribution The interactive path in the Administration Interface is located below the tabs and shows the location of the current page within the content node tree regardless of the current activity Its main task is to aid navigation The path is constructed from the names of higher levels in the content hierarchy separated by slashes The path is also known as breadcrumbs See Also Administration Interface PDF PHP Plain text content Policy Pop up menu Preview window R Related object Relations window Revert 381 Portable Document Format is Adobe Systems widely used file format that allows the electronic representation of documents in a paged form It is supported on all major computer platforms PHP Hypertext Preprocessor is an open source server side HTML centric scripting language that can be used to create dynamic webpages See Also HTML Attributes of the Text block line datatype are shown as is since the datatype does not permit formatting to be specified inside the text Therefore this kind of content is often referred to as plain text See Also XML Datatype Rich text content A policy
56. Recall that templates control the display of content Nodes 15 Each content class has a different template for displaying objects of that class Therefore while a folder displays some attributes of the objects located beneath it in the hierarchy an article will not necessarily do the same In addition to the display characteristics defined by each content class s template some content objects can display other objects located anywhere on the site For example an article will not automatically display an image located beneath it in the content hierarchy However you can embed objects in other objects For example images can be used as inline graphics in the text of an article in addition to the main Image attribute of that article Embedding is covered in Chapter 11 1 4 2 Nodes In eZ Publish content objects are wrapped or encapsulated and structured using content nodes or nodes for short A node wraps a particular content object to provide a mechanism to access the data stored inside the object and display it on the website Objects have no structural capabilities of their own In other words content objects cannot position themselves in relation to other objects Wrapping a node around an object allows for this In addition nodes represent the published version of content objects You will learn more about the built in versioning system in Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features 1 4 2 1 Node tree the
57. Tab Layout in Detail eee m 127 6 1 Secondary left menu cecenii i E meer 130 6 1 1 Interactive tree dirt ot eR eee eT tee van Dean E 130 6 1 2 Width of the secondary menu sssse 132 6 1 3 Selected features of the pop up menu see 132 6 2 ETC REEL 134 6 2 1 Selected node content always at the top sesseessse 135 6 2 2 Preview window ssssssssssssssesseseene en enn eene 136 6 2 3 Details Window tte etr eet e b egt retos 138 6 2 4 Translations window ssssssssssee mee 139 6 2 5 Locations window csessessesseseeseeeenenn enne men enne 140 6 2 6 Relations window sssssssssssseee m eene 141 6 2 7 Sub items window always at the bottom eesse 143 EMITE m 146 TxThe Object Edit Interface edet dere tete e onte n RU o ghia co SEHR ER ORE 149 7 1 Interface layout e eet esse tee teste ete H eee e dee eee 150 7 1 1 Bringing up the Object Edit Interface 2 0 0 0 cee eeee eee eee eee 151 7 2 Object information window esses ee eene 154 Ty Current draft wWiNdOw sie Gee teure ere eee Fe OE ente SOR yes Chases 155 7 4 Translate from window sess 157 Vs SCHON WINDOW ied pr etq o YR SU pee e pRISL I MEN e E EROS RES 158 7 6 Main edit window cesses nennen me mene men hene 158 7 6 1 Send for publishing button esA 159
58. When working inside the Version history interface you target specific versions or translations Therefore if you remove a version or translation the other ver sions and translations in the object remain intact However if you remove a node the entire object is removed unless it is only a secondary location to an object published elsewhere Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab In the previous chapters we dealt extensively with the Content structure tab of the eZ Publish Administration Interface The Media library tab is very similar in appearance and function to the Content structure tab except that it deals with the Media branch of the content node tree We commonly refer to content within the Media branch as the media library The following screenshot shows the Administration Interface when the Media library tab is selected Allcontent g Current location Content structure BUSA User accounts Webshop Design Setup My account Media Media library E Preview Detais Transtations Locations Rebtions CE oa Administrator User amp gg Banners E Change information GJ Files Last modified Oi User English American Bil amp Change password E Images English American Eg Move Remove Logout 3 Multimedia E Bookmarks E y Software fj Trash 10 25 50 List Thumbnail Detailed Press Releases Small Medium Large Eal Name Visibility Type Modifier Modified Section 3 Euit
59. a A Yellow oranges Visible Banner Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Media amp amp gj A Green grass Visible Banner Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Media B a A Green apple Visible Banner Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Media B ia A Yellow notebooks Visible Banner Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Media a fa A Woman with hat Visible Banner Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Media B a A F Hummingbird Visible Banner Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Media B ia A I Happy Woman Visible Banner Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Media E S A Happy Exotic Woman Visible Banner Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Media B a A Delete selected Update priorities Banner M English American z Sorting Published gt Descending gt Ed Figure 10 8 Sub items window select class The following screenshot shows the Object Edit Interface for a new banner 264 Created Name required Not yet published Modified Not yet published URL p Published version Not yet published Manage versions Image required GJ Current image Delete image Created aa 02 21 2007 12 34 pm New image file for upload Administrator User Browse Add to bookmarks Modified Alternative image text E Edit lt New Banner gt Banner Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab fey Administrator User 02 21 2007 12 34 pm Administrator User Version Image m
60. a confirmation message when the object is successfully stored Tip In front end edit mode the Content Editing Interface of the Website Interface there is a panel of buttons at the bottom Next to the Send for publishing and Discard buttons is a third button named Store draft see Section 2 5 2 Drafts On the Website Toolbar click the Store and exit button to perform the save and exit operation 9 2 1 2 Continue editing a stored draft To bring up a stored draft and continue editing it follow these steps 1 Click on the My account tab Content structure Media library User accounts Webshop Design Setup My account Figure 9 7 Access My account tab 200 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing 2 Select My drafts from the left menu Content structure Media library User accounts Webshop Design Setup B Ao se My drafts My drafts 10 25 50 My pending items ml jor econ lees Modified My notification settings mp kitcar are V Gj News and Events Folder Standard English American 02 19 2007 10 15 am ri Collaboration Change password My shopping basket My wish list Edit mode settings Locations on of Re edit on off Figure 9 8 Access My drafts 3 Select the draft you want to edit by clicking the Edit button at the right of the entry for that draft Alternatively you can open a preview of that draft by clicking the object name Then click the Edit button at the bottom of the preview
61. a detailed walk through of this window 6 2 2 Preview window The purpose of the Preview window is as explained above to display the actual contents the attributes of the object that is referenced by the selected node In its active state this window has four parts title bar info bar object attributes and button bar as shown in Figure 6 7 Preview window enabled 6 2 2 1 Title bar 1 The title bar 1 consists of three elements Preview window 137 1 An icon indicating the object type In the example above it is a folder icon Clicking on this icon brings up a pop up menu 2 The name of the object in this example News and Events 3 The name of the class that the object is an instance of in square brackets Here the object is of the Folder class 6 2 2 2 Information bar 2 The information bar contains information about the version and translation see Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features that is being viewed The left part of this area reveals when the object was modified along with a link to the user who did the actual modification The right area reveals the translation that is being displayed This is shown independent of whether it is a multilingual or single language site Recall that each object has at least one translation 6 2 2 3 Object attributes 3 The object attributes are displayed in the main area of this window in the order that is specified in the class definition
62. additional images All of the related objects will appear in the Related objects window z ww T Ferrari BB 512 front open Ferrari BB 512 front Ferrari BB 512 side embed href ezobject 182 gt lt embed href ezobject A81 gt apse hah tae eA ese link hrefezobject 182 gt lt linke lt link href ezobject 18 1 link raed UD al Common Common Common Figure 10 12 Related objects window 10 3 5 Media library and multiple locations You can easily add multiple locations for content in the media library and add secondary locations within the Media branch for objects published in the Content branch The only changes from adding multiple locations to the Content branch is the small difference in using the Browse interface and the possibility of access restrictions Adding secondary locations is trivial and the procedure is found in Section 9 3 6 1 Adding a new location to a published object You can also change the main location for a content object that has several locations as described in Section 9 3 6 3 Removing content published at multiple locations Note that this might update the section and thus affect the access rights to the object Removing locations is done through the Locations window as for objects within the Content branch 10 3 6 Moving copying and removing content of the media library Moving or copying an object into the media library or between locations within it intern
63. aged net n eee S ee sex R oe ege ns tan 159 7 10 Version preview interface earnest ee eb eoe eee nne ene n nn ea eene nea 161 VoL T View control WInOOW s eeioes octets ex te Seu aba a se ds en Pinion aes Qe TONS ea EAR EAS RR ER 163 7 12 Related objects window ssssssssssesee eere 163 7 13 Relations WindOoW iu ies ehe iere MI e EROR EN RSS ERIS detache 164 8 1 Version history interface eere e E cde av adeeb reae dee kane ee pere 170 8 2 Version number example sss eee 172 8 3 Life cycle of a content object sss e eher 174 544 New 0bIJeCtuus A sese Matec E pote rero des eroe ede Er poete ge Rane ene rr oen yey 176 8 5 Draft object 4 eo e rere xe rev etude venire o zen eee 176 8 6 Published object first Versio esos ie deae ea Ea EE h 177 8 7 Published object edit new draft ssssssssee e 177 8 8 Published object new draft version stored eeseeseeees 178 8 9 Published object second version sess 179 8 10 Language selection interface sess eene 183 8 11 Translation interface eet tere rente e eig A e ee et CESTA 184 9 1 Tools for creating objects ires isidan a enan a HH ee 191 9 2 Add ar cle step F i54 ee e e leer ee e rud 193 9 3 Add article edite mode is cise utet e t e eese T e Bens ate Sod ee Reus 194 9 4 Related objects window esses ne eee 195 9 5 Object relation add existing
64. ally is done just as described in Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Refer to Section 9 3 Content manipulation for detailed procedures However remember that 268 Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab if you move or copy some content into the media library you will most likely change the content s section to Media and thus also change the access permissions to that content Removing an object from the media library is also done as described in Chapter 9 However you should pay special attention to how the object you wish to remove is used by the system The object might be used and shared by other content Thus removing it would affect other objects For example the same image could be embedded in several articles When site visitors access the articles in question the related images would be gone You should therefore check the Relations window for the object you plan to remove If the reverse related objects count is zero this means that the current object is not in use by any other objects You can assume that it is safe to remove such an object without affecting other objects However if this count is above zero you should visit the listed object s to remove the references to this object 10 4 Media library example This section contains a comprehensive example illustrating extensive usage of the media library as a repository for frequently reused material It also provides a more in depth visual description o
65. am Administrator User Modified COMPANYLOGO 01 02 2007 01 32 pm Your company slogan here Bookmarks x Administrator User News and Events Products Partner Community Knowledge Base Company Published version i A Hone Neves ure Evers Press A d Bez Edt Move Remove Opioffke Exp News and Events 1 o Version information Fresh fruit risen Gti Add to bookmarks Created A Administrator User 01 22 2007 10 02 am Administrator User Last modified 01 22 2007 10 56 am Administrator User Clear cache Bi Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur m Quisque sagittis laoreet urna Nam rhoncus risus eget enim Pellentesqu ix pharetra non pretium vel commodo vitae arcu Clear Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Cras et mi Maecenas Status quis erat Integer cursus odio sed leo Maecenas in arcu ac mauris volutpat alid Draft viverra felis dictum cursus pretium mauris leo porttitor libero id laoreet nisi jus Version Vestibulum semper dapibus purus Duis at diam Nulla est sapien sagittis ut c tincidunt in lectus Nulla facilisi Nulla at libero vestibulum purus mollis rutrum potenti View control Translation BE English Amer Loostion Copyright 2006 eZ systems AS All rights reserved Press Releases Powered by eZ Publish Content Management System Siteaccess eng C fre C ger C front C back C admin Figure 7 10 Version preview int
66. and lowest for an Adminis trator 1 5 1 Logging in To log in to either the Website Interface or the Administration Interface you need to have a valid user account To edit and manage content your account must belong to the Editor or Administrator group This book is intended for these two types of users Site administrators assign users to groups See Section 3 1 1 User registration for more information To log in to the Website Interface locate the Login link located by default in the top right corner of the site Clicking this link will bring up the Login interface shown in the following screenshot Logging in 17 Login Username Password Log in to the administration interface of eZ publish r Login Sign Up Figure 1 9 Website Interface login To log into the Administration Interface access the URL for the administration siteaccess This will display an almost identical Login interface to the one shown above You can also log in to the Administration Interface through the login screen of the Website Interface as described below This way you will not have to remember the URL The list below explains the input fields of the Website Interface login screen The fields are also valid for the Administration Interface Username The user s login name The default username for the Administrator user is admin Password The user s password The default password for the Administrator user is publish
67. are referred to as multilingual sites The My account tab in the Administration Interface provides access to user specific settings as well as a user s drafts See Also Administration Interface User profile Draft See Content node Non translatable attributes are marked as such in the class definition When creating additional translations beyond the main translation the value will be copied to the new translation and it cannot be edited This is useful for attributes such as email addresses dates and numbers Notification O OASIS Object Object Edit Interface Object Information window Object Oriented techno logy Object relation OE status bar OE text area 379 See Also Multi language features Content class The email notification service sends an email to subscribed users every time a specific part of the website as specified by each user is changed Notifications can be managed through the My account tab in the Admin istration Interface and the User profile page in the Website Interface The Organization for the Advancement of Structured Information Stand ards is a not for profit international consortium that drives the develop ment convergence and adoption of e business standards such as the OpenDocument Format for Office Applications See Content object The Object Edit Interface is a special purpose interface within the Ad ministration Interface where content is created and edited
68. be published with sorting settings and visibility status In order to avoid possible conflicts when an object is edited by multiple users at the same time the system will only allow you to specify multiple locations in the Object Edit Interface when creating a new object but not when editing an existing one However it is still possible to modify the location s of existing objects using the Locations window in the normal view of the main area as described in the previous section 9 3 6 5 Removing content published at multiple loca tions To remove a secondary location from a content object make sure that you are viewing the content object and the Locations window is enabled Then follow the steps below 1 Mark the checkbox to the left of a location then click the Delete selected button a Location Sub items Visibility Main I Home Community News and Events 0 Visible Hide C Home News and Events 5 Visible Hide Delete selected Add locations EL Figure 9 52 Delete selected location 250 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Note that the checkbox associated with the main location cannot be selected 2 Your selected location s will now be removed from the system In other words the node s representing the object at the given place s will disappear from the tree If the selected location has sub items you will be presented with a confirmation page warning you about which additional n
69. below to edit content 1 Browse to the page that you want to change In other words make sure you are viewing the page that directly has the content you wish to modify We are going to work with the article shown in the screenshot below News and Events Products Partner Community Knowledge Base Company Home News and Events Press Releases Fruit Mez Edt Move Remove Openoffice Export Replace News and Events Fresh fruit gt itio Mut Administrator User Technology P t release T Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Press Release Quisque sagittis laoreet urna Nam rhoncus risus eget enim Pellentesque erat libero Events pharetra non pretium vel commodo vitae arcu Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Cras et mi Maecenas pretium magna quis erat Integer cursus odio sed leo Maecenas in arcu ac mauris volutpat aliquet Mauris viverra felis dictum cursus pretium mauris leo porttitor libero id laoreet nisi justo a turpis Vestibulum semper dapibus purus Duis at diam Nulla est sapien sagittis ut consequat eget tincidunt in lectus Nulla facilisi Nulla at libero vestibulum purus mollis rutrum Suspendisse potenti Figure 2 13 Edit article start Adding and editing content 35 2 Click the Edit button shown in Figure 2 13 Edit article start to bring up the Content Editing Interface 3 In edit mode the following toolb
70. checkboxes the object will be published in the currently shown container In this case you could have also navigated one level up in the tree then marked the checkbox next to the Download folder The object will be published at the selected location s and thus it should appear at multiple locations in the node tree Publishing at multiple locations 247 Warning This feature only works with single nodes If you add a new location for a folder that contains sub items for example several news articles the system will only make a new location for the folder itself but not the sub items articles In other words adding a location to a content object does not affect its children A common mistake when planning the structure of a site is to think of multiple locations as shortcuts or links on a file system Unfortunately this is not how the node tree works When a new location is added to an object eZ Publish will not go through and replicate the node structure below the object s original location 9 3 6 2 Controlling locations before publishing You can also select multiple locations for an object before the content is published In this way the content will appear at all the desired locations once it is published For ex ample you could publish an article about some product release on the front page in the Webshop in the information pages for the community and in the company bulletin pages all at the same time The Object Edit
71. community has thousands of members all over the globe We support our vision with a business model that combines innovations from the Open Source software development world with proven strategies from traditional software enterprises Working together with our community and our partners we serve ventures worldwide ranging from single person web shops to multinational enterprises from re gional governments to global humanitarian organizations 5 1 Contact eZ Systems Please visit our website at http www ez no Send questions suggestions and comments to info ez no All books in the eZ Press series are available online at http ez no store books ez press 6 Acknowledgments I would like to start by thanking Balazs Halasy also know as Allman for paving the ground for this book doing the initial work of the documentation project at ht tp ez no doc and writing the online User manual and the book eZ Publish Basics Despite a high workload he helped me get settled when I joined the eZ crew and was always helpful and shared his experiences as an author at eZ A big thanks to the eZ Press team for professional support in creating this book Jennifer Zickerman did an awesome job as project coordinator and motivator reviewing and editing content setting up my authoring environment and being so dedicated and fun to xxviii Preface work with Thanks to Peter Keung for professional editing questioning my ideas keeping an open dia
72. content 2 5 Index Template 10 Details switch 138 Details window 138 169 204 Discount rule 40 Documentation page class 119 Draft xxiii 45 94 155 156 175 189 194 198 Discard 160 Manage list 46 227 Resume editing 199 226 251 Stale 198 Store 160 199 Unpublished 222 223 E e commerce see Webshop Edit xxiii 34 158 287 Add 32 Conflict 35 Front end 21 User profile 26 Website Interface 21 Edit button 215 Edit conflict 35 171 221 Prevent 225 Unpublished draft different user 223 Unpublished draft multiple users including you 225 Unpublished draft same user 222 Edit mode xxiii 30 113 113 149 154 168 169 190 287 288 see also Content Editing Interface see also Object Edit Interface Settings 248 Edit mode settings 248 Edit window see Main edit window Editor User account 16 110 137 190 243 Element properties 306 311 Email notification service 28 see also Notifications Embed 15 106 108 110 142 194 262 310 332 358 Flash 334 Embed links 195 195 Embedded object 101 310 331 Emphasize text 307 Encapsulation 93 95 140 167 Event class 123 see also Event calendar class Category 123 Event calendar class 123 Calendar view 123 Program view 123 Extension 295 Enable 296 ezdhtml 296 296 Extension management 296 eZ Network 2 eZ Press xxvii eZ Publish xvii xxvii 5 About xvii Architecture 86 Built in classe
73. count post count and information about the latest reply for each forum Content editors will rarely create objects from the Forums class as this is normally done during site implementation You might however want to edit the text in the Title Forum related classes 117 or the Description attributes Content objects of this class serve only to display other content objects of the Forum class 5 5 3 2 Forum class a single forum The Forum class is a container class made for organizing forum topics Because of this its objects only hold a few attributes to describe the forum and its purpose including the Name attribute used as the title of the forum and the Description attribute used as a description for the forum To create forums which will be displayed automatically as shown in Figure 5 14 Forums page simply create objects of the Forum class from the forums page in the Website Interface or below the forums object in the content node tree in the Administration Interface Because the Forums class is a container its objects will automatically display information about their sub items As content editor you might sometimes create a new forum but this is not a frequent task It is more likely that you would edit an existing forum s title or description Like the Forums class content objects of the Forum class only display other content forum topics Creating objects of the Forums and Forum classes might be disabled on your
74. current column 11 2 6 6 7 Splitting and merging table cells Splitting table cells is very easy and works in the same way for both browser types Merging however is slightly more difficult and browser specific We will start by ex plaining splitting 1 Position the cursor inside the cell you want to split 2 Click the Split cell button Body noma x 0 B T de sb io E reu e n n Iu a1 b1 c1 di a2 b2 c2 d2 yf 4 gt a3 b3 c3 d3 a a4 b4 c4 d4 a5 b5 c5 d5 ni a al Figure 11 53 Split table cell step 1 The current cell will be divided into two cells a new cell will appear to the right of the current cell The contents of the original cell will stay in the original cell 348 Chapter n Content Editing a n n a1 b1 c1 di a2 b2 c2 d2 I 4 gt 33 b3 c3 d3 E a4 b4 c4 d4 a5 b5 c5 d5 a OF Figure 11 54 Split table cell result 1 2 6 6 7 1 Merging table cells in Internet Explorer There are two ways to merge table cells horizontally and vertically Horizontal merging allows you to combine several table cells located in the same row Vertical merging allows you to merge the current cell with its bottom neighbor in the same column To merge horizontally follow the procedure below 1 Click on the first cell Then hold the Shift key and click on the cell with which you wish to merge the first cell To merge more than two cells click on the left most or right
75. datatype The Summary attribute is an introduction for the page Installations without the Website Interface refer to this as the Short de scription attribute Like the article summary this is displayed in bold as a separate paragraph at the top of the page 5 3 2 Frontpage class The Frontpage class is a very flexible container class and is used to present summaries of content in a more flexible manner than a folder You can create any number of front pages anywhere on your site just like any other class as long as they are placed within other container objects Thus thinking of objects of this class as only being the main front page of your site is too narrow The site of our running tutorial uses this content class both as the main index page and as the overview page of the Community part of the site See Section 2 2 Example strategies in the Preface on how to access the running tutorial demo site You can embed content from other locations in the content structure inside a frontpage You can choose to always display the latest content compiled from several other objects without having to manually update the frontpage The only difference from the general embedding procedure is that for frontpages you usually do not upload new material but instead browse for existing content Frontpage class 109 Right column Normal x x2 a BI The most important resources in the community section Pictures Foru
76. does not affect any existing versions of the object Tip If you accidentally enter edit mode for example if you click the Edit button instead of the View button simply click the Discard draft button to exit edit mode without storing any changes or saving a new draft Do not use the Back button of your browser because this will create a draft that might cause editing conflicts later Editing conflicts are dis cussed in Section 9 2 4 Editing conflicts 7 6 4 Translator mode As mentioned earlier in Section 7 4 Translate from window the Main edit window is switched to a special translator mode when you are creating a new translation based on an existing translation See Section 8 2 2 Translation interface for a more in depth explanation 7 7 Mersion preview interface The Version preview interface makes it possible to generate a preview of any object version on the system This interface is typically used to create a preview of the draft that is currently being edited It can be reached by clicking the View button in the Current draft window of the Object Edit Interface or by following the version translation links in the Version history interface The following screenshot shows the Version preview interface Version preview interface 161 TETTE y z paa Administrator User 143 I English American Bg Created En Fe Ge Site settings Logout AdministratorUser My 12 22 2006 08 53
77. drafts and whether or not the object is currently located in the trash Version control is enforced based on what action a user is permitted to do on a specific version of the object For example you cannot un publish content already published but you can copy that content into a new version to edit or revert content to a previous version For an overview of permitted and unavailable actions refer to Table 8 1 Actions on version states A version can exist in multiple translations languages a translation is a representation of the information in a specific language A version always has at least one translation of the content When you translate content attributes are represented by the values of the different input fields that you update in edit mode The Translation interface is a special purpose mode of either the Object Edit Interface in the Administration Inter face or the Content Editing Interface in the Website Interface used when translating existing content to a new language Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing This chapter outlines the common tasks performed by content editors in the eZ Publish Administration Interface It builds on the concepts that were covered in the previous eight chapters in order to detail daily editing and content management tasks It is highly practical and provides hands on explanations and illustrated walk throughs After you have gained a good understanding of the layout of the A
78. eia itte emit 47 2 24 Version overview page with archived content sseseessesssererrsrrererrrrrerree 48 2 25 Version overview page after revert sssssssssessessee e 49 2 26 OpenOffice org import start ssssssssssssssssee Hmmm 51 2 27 OpenOffice org import interface ssssesssessese mee 51 2 28 OpenOffice org import confirmation cessessese eeeeaeeeaeeeneeeees 52 2 29 OpenOffice org import result article full view eeeee 52 2 30 Result of edited article after OpenOffice org import ssssuessss 53 2 31 OpenOffice org export entere erint UT HEAR Ee ERES IBAR LO TERMS 54 3 1 Administration Interface login screen sss 58 3 2 User registration 2 ee PR REOR RR TORMENTA SERA 59 3 3 User registration SUCCeSS coiere enr teen e ert epe vae ore Spe ere endadenes ones 60 eZ Publish Content Management Basics 344 Current set WIDdOW 42i te creas gas save cevey ngs dndtuva dese ERES e RR e SERE a dead 61 3 5 Areas of the Administration Interface esses nee 62 3 6 Navigation zones in the Administration Interface eese 67 3 7 Bookmarks window eessssssssssesssee e em eme me menn e nennen ree 68 3 8 Bookmarks window disabled sse 69 3 9 Bookmarks interface eoe rine eene rene i nene eet 69 3 10 Browse for item to add to bookmarks cess
79. elit euismo tempor vel pretium eget est Aenean risus Nam tir malesuada ut dolor Proin tincidunt tincidunt urna luctus quam a massa Pellentesque est nibh dictum hi Figure 11 17 Change heading level step 1 2 Access the dropdown list to see the available headings The one that is currently selected will be displayed using a darker background 3 Change the text style by selecting Heading 3 from the list The style of the text will change 316 Chapter n Content Editing Body Heading 3 ze 5 I Documentation and guidance Morbi elit neque accumsan nec tincid elementum Cras molestie nisi quis me Figure 11 18 Change heading level step 3 You can also select some existing paragraph text and convert it to a heading Simply use the Text style tool dropdown list Isolate the text on a separate line first in order to avoid formatting the entire paragraph as a heading You might only want to use the bold and or italic buttons depending on what you wish to achieve 11 2 6 1 3 Setting the text style before writing The following example demonstrates how to set the text style before typing something in Suppose that we want to write a Chapter 3 heading and then type up a small para graph of text 1 Create a new paragraph see Section 11 2 5 2 Text formatting line breaks and paragraphs at the location where you wish to add the new chapter 2 Open the dropdown list of text styles and
80. enim ad minim veniam quis pe 1 exercitation ullamco laboris nostrud exercitation ullamco q i 1 nisi ut aliquip ex ea laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea 1 q commodo consequat commodo consequat Figure 1 1 Content design webpage 1 2 4 Website components Now that we have looked at how content and design combine into a webpage let us stop to consider the term website or simply site A website encapsulates and includes everything that belongs to a particular area on the web Configuration settings A database containing the content structure and actual content Content related files Design related files You should note that we in line with common web practices distinguish between a website and a webpage the former refers to the whole for example http www ez no while the latter refers to a specific part of it for example http ez no ez publish A website consists of a collection of webpages Benefits to separating content and design 5 1 2 5 Benefits to separating content and design The ability to handle the distinction between structuring and displaying content is one of the key features of eZ Publish The separation of content and design provides the fol lowing benefits Content editors and designers can work separately without conflicts Content can be published easily in multiple formats Content can easily be transferred and re purposed Global redesigns and changes can be applied wit
81. error report Administration Interface cece cece ee es 291 11 2 Edit mode with OE oe des eee P rrr E ee emer PER dees Pre ee pet 293 11 3 Edit mode without OE fr edt e EA ty een 294 11 4 Setup OE extens10n c cies toot seat cos Le SUR T ERU ie E se Peu d ne CoL ed 296 11 5 OE components arns i eb EIRI GRE A A R E E 297 11 6 Pop up menu for OE element sesssese Hee 298 11 7 Modal dialog ona ete nubosos 299 11 8 OE status bar example ius cte ertet es trie Ee en SEE AE es bs 300 11 9 OE status bar example 2 ssssssssesseseeseeseen emen he hene 300 14 10 OE toolbar buttons i en oer reri regret erre erret nns 301 11 11 Online Editor active and inactive buttons eeeeen 302 11 12 Online Editor tooltips depend on current editing situation 302 11 13 Modal dialog for element properties em 312 Li 4 Add heading step 1 itt retro rrr e erre HORE 313 11 15 Add iheading step 2 e tete A E 313 TT 16 Add heading step 3 uicit open eo en beens IE TE e aSa 314 11 17 Change heading level step 1 315 11 18 Change heading level step 3 sss 316 11 19 Set text style before writing result ss 317 xiv eZ Publish Content Management Basics 11 20 OE when inside bold element esee 318 11 21 Bold carries on to new paragraph ssssse MH 318 11 22 Emphasize tex
82. ez pub lish technical manual and the eZ Publish Basics book You will get the most out of this book by studying the topics in the order they are presented Learning the basic concepts and ideas will make subsequent chapters more comprehensible Content editors working mainly in the Website Interface can consult Section 3 1 Reading suggestions in the Preface for a suggestion for an alternate reading order 1 1 Content management systems The role of a content management system CMS is to organize and store content regard less of type and complexity Pieces of information in an eZ Publish installation are defined both by their content class that is the type of content such as an image or an article and their location in the content hierarchy see Chapter 4 for information on the eZ Publish content structure The main goal of such a system is to provide a well structured automated yet flexible solution which allows information to be freely distributed and instantly updated across various communication channels such as the internet intranets and miscellaneous front and back end systems In short a CMS collects manages and publishes content on various types of websites Let us consider a scenario at a company that needs to store information about its employ ees Most off the shelf content management systems will offer a selection of built in content types There might exist a Person type consisting of fields like name birt
83. from window might look something like this Translate from No translation C English American C mm German Figure 7 7 Translate from window multiple translations If you select a language using the corresponding radio button and click the Translate button the Main edit window will switch to a special translator mode in order to make 158 7 5 Chapter 7 The Object Edit Interface it easier to translate an object from the selected existing language Multilingual content is discussed in Section 8 2 Multiple languages understanding translations Section window The Section window displays information about the section that the current object belongs to and allows you to change this Sections are used to segment the content node tree Then you can among other things apply different access rules to them The window is shown in the screenshot below exo se Choose section Standard v Figure 7 8 Section window Section management is an administrative task beyond the scope of this book Interested readers should refer to the documentation at http ez no doc ez_publish technical_manual Main edit window You can modify the contents of the attributes of the selected object in the Main edit window For example if an article object is being edited this window will allow you to change the title of the article the summary and the body The attributes will be displayed in the same order as they were set up when th
84. image will be shown in the text without a line break 334 Chapter n Content Editing aptent taciti sociosqu ad litora torquent per conubia nostra per inceptos hymenae diam Nullam dignissim Cras erat Etiam porttitor auctor dolor In in tellus vitae cz gravida sem tristique tortor Praesent gravida non sapien pretium malesuada Aliquam feugiat porta magna Cum sociis natoqu parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Nulla lobortis aliquet nibh Pellentesqu adipiscing id tristique quis sapien Curabitur ut tortor porta lacus venenatis susci MAE C ecd wc ew aoc Dek du ml Eat PI qi Figure 11 38 Object inline embedded Note that as is the case in the above screenshot you might get extra white space if the image is vertically bigger than the text line height Itis possible to assign a unique identifier to the embedded object It will become the ID attribute in the resulting XHTML code which is referenced in JavaScript code or stylesheets In Depth Placing a file in a document Use the Object button in the OE to embed other types of objects The embed view template for that specific content class will determine how this object should be displayed For example if you embed a Flash element you need an embed template for that content class Contact your site administrator for more information about supported file formats on your site 1 2 6 4 2 Adding related objects to the list If the needed object is not in
85. is disabled by default Ask your site administrator if you are unsure as to whether it is enabled It is a system that defines an ordered sequence of actions to be executed after a content editor has published an object For example your site might have a restriction that all content has to go through an editor in chief before becoming available on the public siteaccess The Pending and Rejected version statuses are used by the collaboration system When a version is waiting to be approved by an editor the status is set to Pending If the version is approved it will be automatically published and thus the status will be set to Published On the other hand if a pending version is rejected by the editor the status will be set to Rejected Pending and rejected versions are much like drafts as they can only be accessed by the user that cre ated them on the My drafts page In addition content editors responsible for approving pending versions are also given access to pending content Refer to the documentation at http ez no doc ez_publish technical_manual for more information on the eZ Publish collaboration system 180 Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features 8 1 4 4 3 Archived status We saw above in Figure 8 9 Published object second version that once version 2 was published the status of version 1 changed Although an object can have many versions there can only be one published version The re
86. is specified as part of the Gallery class is the large image on the gallery page as opposed to the image objects located beneath the gallery in the content hierarchy which are displayed as thumbnails In other words the Image attribute is an illustration image for the gallery itself and not a piece of content published in the gallery Multimedia classes This section provides an introduction to content classes related to multimedia elements For in depth information refer to the documentation at http ez no doc ez_publish tech nical manual Above we saw that a gallery is a container class and thus gallery objects can hold images In fact most containers like objects of the Gallery Folder and Frontpage classes Summary 5 8 125 can hold not only images but also other media types like Flash Quicktime Real Video and Windows Media files All these multimedia standards have a content class used to integrate these files into your webpage They share some attributes and have others that are specific to each class The Name and Description attributes are the same as with other content classes The File at tribute has its own settings that must be specified The Width and Height attributes specify the size of the box where the multimedia content is displayed The Controls dropdown list lets you choose how the controls should be displayed Finally the Autoplay checkbox should be marked if you want the media to start playing automati
87. is written for content editors working with eZ Publish content through the front end of their website We recommend that front How dol xxiii end editors read the following chapters in the order given and supplement it with the reading tips given in those chapters Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface Chapter 11 Content Editing Chapter 4 Content Management Concepts Objects and Nodes Chapter 5 Content Classes We recommend that content editors using the Administration Interface read the entire book in the order it is written The one exception is Chapter 2 although it deals with the Website Interface it eases the learning curve before starting with the Administration Interface It can be skipped without losing important information except for the section about the Webshop Chapters 1 through 8 deal mainly with concepts and interfaces whereas Chapters 9 through 11 describe daily tasks and procedures Tip Each chapter also has recall blocks in the introduction so if you read chapters out of order you will be reminded about the important background concepts and information relevant to each chapter 3 2 How dol The following table presents an overview of how to perform common tasks in both the Website Interface and the Administration Interface For readers who are already fa miliar with the basic terminology and eZ Publish in general it ca
88. it Content manipulation 231 Tip The location memory feature was introduced in eZ Publish version 3 9 For older versions you have to restore each location manually 9 3 Content manipulation This is the third and final section in our chapter about everyday editing tasks in the Ad ministration Interface Above we looked at the object creation process and the usage of related objects as well as editing procedures for drafts versions and translations We now turn to the following editing tasks previewing sorting moving copying deleting and publishing at multiple locations 9 3 1 Previewing content You can preview your content as it would display to site visitors both before and after publishing it More specifically you can preview any content object version including the published one If the version has multiple translations you can select the language in which to preview the content The preview feature can be reached from both the Object Edit Interface and the Version history interface In the Object Edit Interface it can be accessed by clicking the View button In the Version history interface it can be accessed by clicking the different version numbers and translations The following screenshot shows the Version preview interface first introduced in Section 7 7 Version preview interface This interface is also commonly referred to as the Preview interface for short You can also access the Preview interface by cl
89. items art Ini The Increase indent button allows you to increase the level of indentation for list items Note that the Decrease indent and Increase indent buttons are active only when the current or selected element is a list item are In Tip It is possible to specify a c1ass parameter for lists but not for the list items themselves See Section 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements for more information 1 2 5 2 Text formatting line breaks and paragraphs In the OE text area you can create new lines and paragraphs To create a new paragraph position the cursor at a location where you wish to add a new text paragraph and press the Enter key A new empty paragraph will be created To create a new line simply Formatted text in the Online Editor 309 hold the Shift key down and press the Enter key A new empty line will be created leaving a hard line break in the text When the system is generating XHTML code converting the contents of an XML block datatype into XHTML it will use the lt br gt and lt p gt tags for lines and paragraphs This is the default behavior While paragraphs can be classified see Section 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements lines cannot Both lines and non classified paragraphs are displayed in a natural way without tags when the OE is disabled For classified paragraphs the XML tag paragraph is displayed 11 2 5 3 Block and inline elements
90. justo Sed sit amet ante Vestibulum hlandit nurus sit amet lacus aptent taciti sociosqu ad litora torquent per conubia nostra per i Figure 10 18 Preview article 1 As expected it is only the matchbox image that is shown here and its position within the article is determined by the layout defined in the design templates You must contact your site administrator to change the templates We will now create another article using the previous one as a starting point From there we will replace the related object and use the embedding feature First copy the January 2007 newsletter object following the steps from Section 9 3 4 Copying content In edit mode we have replaced the title so that it now displays February 2007 newsletter We keep the matchbox image attribute but update the related objects 274 Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab Enable comments r Current image Preview Filename MIME type Size matchbox jpg image jpeg 39 72 kB New image file for upload Browse Alternative image text Matchbox Send for publishing Discard draft Related objects 2 Related images 2 Ferrari BB 512 front open Ferrari BB 512 side open lt embed href ezobject 182 i lt embed href ezobject 183 gt link href ezobject 182 linkc link href ezobject 183 link Common Common Delete selected Addexisting Upload new Figure 10 19 Edit mode article 2 Above th
91. left menu is Media and the folders shown in the tree menu are different By default the media library comes with these four folders Banners Files Images and Multimedia The Banners folder is relatively new to eZ Publish introduced with the Website Interface 1 0 and requires some extra attention The following screenshot shows the contents of the expanded Banners folder Content structure MERERI AI User accounts Webshop Design Setup Myaccount Media Banners Corporate banner E Preview Detais Transtations Locations Media library Media E Corporate banner Banner Administrator User Banners Change Information Partner banner Last modified 12 20 2 English American Bil amp Change password G Name 2 Logout Lj Yalow on RAS Bookmarks J j Yellow oranges ia Green grass Software ivin api rede Gg Press Releases Yellow notebooks 5 Enit Woman with hat i i _ Daily Usage JH bird m Questions LJ Hummingbi cars 3 Happy Woman Imaae map E Happy Exotic Woman a English American v ca Remove Clear cache E Images Related objects 0 fip Trash The item being viewed does not make use of any other objects Small MENN Large Reverse related objects 1 Class Relation type j Home Frontpage Attribute Billboard The Banner class is not configured to contain any sub items Figure 10 2 Banners folder in media library
92. marks not the actual nodes e Access the context sensitive pop up menu see Section 3 5 1 Context sensitive pop up menu below by clicking on the icons in order to view or edit the node or to remove the bookmark itself Add nodes to the bookmark list by clicking the Add items button After this button is clicked you will be able to browse the conent node tree and select one or more nodes that should be bookmarked Simply navigate the tree select the nodes and click OK The bookmark list will be updated and your new bookmarks will be available for use The screenshot below shows the screen when you are browsing for an item to add to the bookmarks list MILLE Ld Medialibray User accounts Home Content structure choose items to bookmark current user Home K Administrator User oS imp News und Everts Select the items that you want to bookmark using the checkboxes and click Select 3 Investor bulletins Navigate using the available tabs above the tree menu left and the content list middle Technology Bookmarks amp gg Products a Type 3 Eit 3 Food J Daily Usage te Foo T gj News and Events Folder piene G Software can G3 Cars T g Products Folder cars Things T j Partner Frontpage Add to bookmarks Boxes r i Community Frontpage pe i j 3 Books V Knowledge Base Documentation page amp Partner z Quick settings B Co k amp j Community Cj company oier G Multimedia EE E
93. menu or clicking the Edit button for some content object You can select one of the existing languages or choose None When a language is chosen instead of None edit mode will be transformed into a special translator mode See Also Translator mode Translation LDAP Left menu Locale Location Locations window M Main area Main edit window Main language Main menu Media library 377 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol is a relatively simple protocol for updating and searching directories running over TCP IP See Secondary menu A locale is a set of country specific settings like language character sets number formats currency format and date and time format These settings will affect how some content is displayed on the site See Also Multi language features A node provides a location for a content object within the tree structure A node refers to exactly one content object See Also Content node Content object The Locations window is shown in the main area of the Administration Interface while viewing content and the corresponding switch is selected The purpose of this window is to reveal the different nodes locations that encapsulate the current object See Also Main area The main area is the most dynamic and important part of the Administra tion Interface as it displays the actual content and or interfaces that are associated with the current action See Also Administrat
94. merge several table cells into a single cell This button becomes active when a table cell is selected When generating XHTML code the system uses the lt table gt tag for tables tr for table rows lt td gt for table cells and lt th gt for table header cells 11 2 6 6 1 Creating a table The steps below describe how to create a table 342 Chapter 11 Content Editing Position the cursor at a location where you wish to insert a table Notice that Insert table is the only active button in the Tables area at this point Duuy noma OHE T Quisque congue metus ut porta fringilla sapien ipsum porttitor ante eget fadi c sc table eque r Mauris id purus Curabitur nulla Donec sem nisi cursus sed lobortis in faucibus vel justo Sed s ante Vestibulum blandit purus sit amet lacus Figure 11 45 Insert table step 1 Click the Table button You can also right click and select Insert table from the context sensitive pop up menu You will see a modal dialog called Insert table e http nemo bms ez no Insert ta D X Rows Columns b b Size Border fioo f Class none x Properties Attribute name Value There are no attributes defined ror E carce Figure 11 46 Modal dialog for insert table Specify the number of rows and columns the table width either 0 100 or the number of pixels the table border size in pixels and optionally choose a class using the dropdown list
95. node tree The most significant parts of the node tree for content editors are the Content and Media branches These branches correspond to the Content structure and Media library tabs presented in Chapter 3 An Overview of the Administration Interface They will also be 94 Chapter 4 Content Management Concepts Objects and Nodes exhaustively described in the following chapters especially Chapter 6 Content Structure Tab Layout in Detail and Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab Because nodes have structuring properties they can be hierarchically organized to enforce limits and control to content For example recall that the Users branch is one of the major branches of the node tree Because this is a separate branch access rules can be applied to restrict who can view and update information about user accounts By default user accounts are not shown to site visitors on the public siteaccess Nodes also enable the ability to enforce access limitations to a sub branch of a content branch so that only members of a certain user group can view content published there Another example of the purpose of nodes is a situation where users who are responsible for Webshop products are only able to update the product branch and the product release pages while content editors are limited to publishing articles and cannot add or modify products Usually the larger the site the more common it is to have fine grained access limitations Configuring th
96. object that is used by multiple content object can have effects outside of the intended context This is not limited to media content Suppose that you have a newsletter article about summer sports that embeds an image object containing the file summer jpg a photo of some people playing tennis next to a swimming pool When creating another article this time about summer vacation spe cifically sunbathing and swimming pools you decide to reuse the summer jpg image object So far so good However you decide to update the summer sports newsletter to describe the activities of the year round alpine center replacing the old image with a snowy mountain scenario summer skiing jpg Because this image object is related to several articles including the newsletter about summer vacation the image is changed for that article as well In other words the summer vacation article now shows a snowy mountain image next to the description about sunbathing and swimming pools Tip Whenever object relations are in use content editors should be cautious about where content is applied and how it is modified 10 3 4 Relating media content to objects in the Content branch The following procedure illustrates how to create an article in the Content branch that uses an image from the media library We will use the related objects function and not the default image attribute of the article In our example we use the images found in the Cars folder 266 C
97. object s location in the node tree To do this you can either use the context sensitive pop up menu or the Move button in the Preview window of the main area Warning Do not confuse moving content with publishing content at additional locations or changing an object s main location The Locations window is used to publish content at multiple locations and does not deal with moving content from one place to another Remember that a node represents the published version of a content object and is the access point for that object in the tree In other words moving an object is the same as changing where its translations and versions are located 1 Access the content to be moved in the Administration Interface In the Preview window click the Move button If the node you want to move is displayed in the node tree or the Sub items window click the node s icon to bring up the context sensitive pop up menu and select Move The following screenshot shows the Locations window for the News and Events folder before initiating a move of its secondary location 238 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Locations 2 Home Company News and Events 0 Visible Hide C Home News and Events 5 Visible Hide Delete selected ad Figure 9 38 Locations window before move The system will display the Browse interface where you select a new location for the node You might have to use the up arrow to navigate to t
98. objects that you wish to relate to lt News and Events gt Use the checkboxes to choose the objects that you wish to relate to lt News and Events gt Navigate using the available tabs above the tree menu left and the content list middle 10 25 50 List Thumbnail a Name Type gg News and Events Folder gg Products Folder Parner Frontpage Community Frontpage Lj Knowledge Base Documentation page gj Company Folder Figure 9 5 Object relation add existing The image above shows the main area of the Browse interface This interface makes it possible to select objects that have been placed somewhere in the node tree In addition it is possible to use the first three tabs the Content structure Media library and User accounts tabs the path the left menu and the Bookmarks window for navigation When you add an object relation to an existing object as described here the relation type will be set to Common See Table 6 1 Object relation types for more information 9 1 2 3 Uploading new objects The Upload new button makes it possible to upload new content to the system and automatically relate it to the object that is currently being edited For example this button is useful to relate to an image that has not yet been added to the system The following screenshot shows what happens when this button is clicked Related objects 197 Upload a file and relate it to lt News and Events gt Thi
99. of a new version unless the new version is discarded the database can quickly become filled up In order to prevent this problem the versioning system can be limited to a maximum number of versions per object This is described in the in depth block below In Depth Upper limit to version count The default limitation on versions is 10 for all classes except Folder class which is set to 5 This means that every object can have a maximum of ten versions of its content When the maximum count is reached the oldest version will be automatically deleted and thus a free slot will become available for the new one If you leave edit mode without clicking either the Send for publishing Save draft or Discard draft buttons you will end up with a stale draft This occu pies one of the ten versions allowed but typically contains no changes from the previous version Stale drafts can force the deletion of a more useful older ver sion Also it will most likely contribute to editing conflicts see Section 9 2 4 Editing conflicts 8 1 4 Version structure and status A version contains the following elements Version number Creation time Modification time Creator 172 Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features Status Translations The following paragraphs describe these elements 8 1 4 1 Version number Every version has a version number This number is used by the system to organize and keep
100. of the Administration Interface because this is where the content editing takes place The information displayed in the main area depends on the current action and will most likely change when you click on something outside this area In other words it displays information about the currently selected node The horizontally aligned switches at the top of the main area determine which windows are shown in the main area A bluish background indicates that a switch is on and thus the window that it controls will be active visible A whitish background indicates the opposite The screenshot below shows the main area for a single language site with the Locations switch active Selected node content always at the top 135 Preview Details Relations ll Home Frontpage Last modified 01 17 2007 01 35 pm English American BA Administrator User eligi Move Remove Location Sub items Visibility Main Home 6 Visible Hide Delete selected Add locations Set main Sub items 6 10 25 50 List Thumbnail Detailed Name Type Priority V gg News and Events Folder b Ir gg Products Folder b E Parner Frontpage b IF Figure 6 5 Main area with Locations switch active If all switches are turned on at the same time the windows will appear in the same order as the placement of the switches left to right Preview Details Translations for multilingual sites only Locations and Relations The Sub items wind
101. on the system You can also delete drafts Select one or more drafts by marking the corresponding checkbox then click the Remove button below the draft To remove all drafts simply click the Empty Draft button The My drafts page will then show the text You have no drafts 2 5 3 Reverting content With the eZ Publish versioning system you can revert an object from the current version to a previous version Only a limited number of versions of each content object are stored in the database to prevent the database from getting too large This value is set as part of the system configuration which is described in the documentation http ez no doc Warning You should not confuse reverting to a previous version of content with recovering deleted content from trash When deleting content all versions of that content are removed and will vanish from the public siteaccess Thus there is no older version to go back to in this case To revert to a prior version of an object make sure you are logged in with your Editor or Administrator user account We will be using our example article assuming that it was saved with some incorrect information 48 Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface 1 Navigate to the page containing the content you wish to revert 2 Click the Edit button 3 Click the Manage versions button 4 You will now have a page that looks something like this Versions for lt Fruit gt 3 12
102. open Related content Name Type e Daily Usage Questions Documentation page Upload re J Add exist ng Properties Property name Value Size medium gt Alignment Center M Class lma View emea gt Inline T ID El EI z Figure 11 37 OE modal dialog for embed object The screenshot above shows a modal dialog with a list of related objects at the top and a table of properties at the bottom Note the Related content block below the Related images block with a documentation page object The property table shows Online Editor daily tasks 333 the default properties for embedding this image object These properties generally correspond to the attributes parameters of the lt embed gt tag There are six built in attributes Size Alignment Class View Inline and ID These are described below in the in depth block In Depth Built in attributes 3 If the desired object is not in the list of related objects perform the instructions in Section 11 2 6 4 2 Adding related objects to the list below Otherwise select the desired object from the list and specify its embedding properties as described in Section 11 2 5 5 Element properties 4 Set the desired properties and click the OK button The inserted object will appear in the OE text area Image objects will appear as images while all other objects will appear as special icons Tip To edit an embed tag manually refer
103. piece of content is called a content object or object for short A content class can be thought of as a structural blueprint for a particular type of content The properties of a class are referred to as attributes There is a front end and a back end interface for managing content the Website In terface commonly used by content editors and managers and Administration Inter face commonly used by webmasters site administrators and developers The Website Interface uses the Content Editing Interface to edit and add content while the Ad ministration Interface uses the Object Edit Interface to do the same In addition each set contains some special purpose sub interfaces such as those for managing content versions and translations To be able to edit content you must log in with an account that belongs to an Editor or Administrator group In this chapter you will gain an understanding of How to log in and access the Administration Interface including user registration How the Administration Interface is organized How to navigate around the Administration Interface How to use the search functionality to locate content The purpose and usage of the context sensitive pop up menus 58 Chapter 5 An Overview of the Administration Interface How to selectively display detailed windows when examining viewing content by using a menu of switches Note that the Administration Interface contains many elements including multiple
104. scribed in Section 5 2 2 Image class above while the rest of the supported media content classes are explained in the following section For now we will assume that images are placed in the gallery We have already seen that folders display the articles located directly beneath them in the node tree Images within a gallery are also displayed according to some settings for the container The following screenshot illustrates this 124 5 7 Community Multimedi Cars Chapter 5 Content Classes Image gallery with one of the classic cars from the 80s Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Main points 9 to summarize the images here Ferrari BB Ferrari BB Ferrari BB Figure 5 21 Image gallery The only required attribute in the Gallery class is the Name You can supply formatted text both in the Description and Short description fields as well By default both will be displayed when you view the gallery as shown in Figure 5 21 Image gallery However a folder listing existing galleries will only use the short description The Image attribute that
105. see Section 4 2 2 Content classes and class attributes The attributes are styled using predefined rules the standard view templates for the specific datatypes 6 2 2 4 Button bar 4 The button bar is located at the bottom of the Preview window At a minimum the fol lowing buttons are shown Edit Move Remove These trigger exactly the same actions as the corresponding menu items that are found in the pop up menu of the secondary menu If you are logged in to the Administration Interface with an Editor user account you might have certain permission restrictions You might find that the Move and Remove buttons in this bar are disabled as shown in the screenshot below 138 Chapter 6 Content Structure Tab Layout in Detail ES Coffee Article t Last modified O1 03 2007 10 19 am Administrator User English American BA English American gt Move Remove Figure 6 8 Preview window button bar restricted 6 2 3 Details window The purpose of the Details window is to provide additional information about the selected node and the object that it encapsulates The following screenshot shows the Details window Creator Created Section Versions Translations Node ID Object ID Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard 1 1 72 70 Figure 6 9 Details window As the screenshot indicates this window reveals the following information Theuser who initially created the object Administrator User in the
106. selected procedure If all switches in the main area are turned on at the same time the windows will appear in the same order as the placement of the switches left to right Preview Details Translations multilingual sites only Locations and Relations The Sub items window will always be at the bottom Unlike the other windows the Preview window does not completely disappear after you deactivate the corresponding switch Deactivating the switch will only hide the window s contents When the Preview window is activated it will display the attributes of the current object Summary 147 The purpose of the Details window is to provide additional information about the selected node and the object that it encapsulates The Translations window for multilingual sites displays the languages that exist for the published version of the selected object The currently selected translation is displayed using bold characters The Locations window reveals the different nodes locations that are associated with the current object The Relations window reveals information about other objects that either use the current object or that the current object currently uses The Sub items window displays the current node s children meaning those that are be neath it in the node tree You can also access some typical content management operations from the bar at the bottom of this window Chapter 7 The Object Edit Interface The Object Edit Interf
107. sentence press the Enter key to create a new empty paragraph then click the Bold button The Bold button will change its appearance because the bold formatting is currently switched on tema Jalal IL Figure 11 21 Bold carries on to new paragraph 6 Type ina sentence and click the Bold button once again to switch the bold formatting off Now you can continue typing in normal unformatted text Online Editor daily tasks 319 Chapter 2 Ut congue nisi vel malesuada vulputate lacus tortor vehicula dolor at laoreet lectus mauris quis quam Vestibulum nec nisi et nulla varius dapibus Mauris diam elit euismod et fermentum vel mollis vitae neque Nam orci enim aliquet vel tempor vel pretium eget est Aenean risus Nam tincidunt quam id mauris Nunc elit felis viverra in elementum vel malesuada ut dolor Proin tincidunt tincidunt urna Sed purus est tincidunt ac pulvinar at elementum a nulla Nulla luctus quam a massa Pellentesque est nibh dictum a varius non elementum ultrices libero Aliquam lacinia arcu nec tellus Cras eget elit ut leo pharetra pharetra Suspendisse varius quam in erat This is the new paragraph with a bold sentence at first Then the bold styling is turned off Ut eget orci non sapien pretium malesuada Aliquam feugiat porta magna Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Chapter 3 Class aptent taciti sociosqu ad litora torqu
108. short A content class can be thought of as a structural blueprint for a particular type of content The properties of that content are referred to as attributes A datatype describes the type of value that can be stored in an attribute and is the smallest possible entity of storage An XML block is one of the built in datatypes and the one you will be working with in the Online Editor Attributes using the XML block datatype hold multi line formatted text and are commonly referred to as rich text content This is in contrast to plain text content rep resented by the Text line or Text block datatypes which do not support formatting A content object consists of one or more versions the second dimension of content objects Every time an object is created or edited a new version is automatically created by the system A version can exist in multiple translations the third dimension of content objects A translation is a representation of the information in a specific language Arelated object see the Related object definition from the Glossary is a content object that the current object uses These are listed in the Relations window see Section 6 2 6 Relations window in the main area of the Administration Interface and in the Related objects window see Section 7 8 Related objects window at the bottom of the screen in the Object Edit Interface Related objects are not directly manageable 288 Chapter n Content
109. should be able to translate content For example you may have permission to edit existing content but not to translate it into a new language Content editors should contact their site administrator for information about site policies 9 2 3 1 Editing a translation If an object exists in several languages you can choose which translation to edit There are several ways to access the Object Edit Interface for translations Tip The first step will always be to navigate the Administration Interface so that you are viewing either the object itself or its parent node The procedures below only deal with editing an existing translation Adding new transla tions is described later 210 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Tip To edit a translation in the Website Interface navigate to the content using the siteaccess for the language you want to edit then bring up the Content Editing Interface by clicking the Edit button on the Website Toolbar 9 2 3 1 1 Using the Translations window to edit a translation 1 Make sure that the object is being displayed in the main area of the Administration Interface 2 Make sure that the Translations window is visible If it is not activate it by clicking the corresponding switch Preview Details Locations Rehtions News and Events Folder Last modified 02 19 200 ense EN EM A Translations 2 Existing languages 7 11 17 am Administrator User English Am
110. site Warning If you delete a content object of the Forum class all forum topics below it will also be deleted If you delete a content object of the Forums class all forum material published beneath it will also be deleted 5 5 3 3 Forum topic class a discussion thread We have so far seen that your site may have several forums and that they are organized in objects of a special Forums container class We now turn to the forum elements that are directly involved in user interaction Usually a website forum has multiple topic groups with one forum content object for each group A topic group is a collection of discussions Each discussion is referred to as a thread eZ Publish only supports single threaded forums This means that for each topic there is only one discussion thread to follow In other words the discussion is not permitted to branch into sub topics This means that in the content hierarchy you create objects at different levels in the order given in Table 5 1 Forum related classes ns Chapter 5 Content Classes Following from this an object of the Forum topic class is a container that represents a thread It is usually created when someone a registered user wishes to start a new discussion The following screenshot shows the General forum containing three topics Community General gt Multimedia gt wnloads gt Pictures An example of the general forum gt Forums New topic
111. special character 2 Click the Special character button A modal dialog with a table of special characters will appear see Figure 11 7 Modal dialog 3 To insert a character simply click on it inside the modal dialog To view a larger version of a character hover the mouse pointer over it and check the lower left corner of the dialog Tip Special characters are inserted as is without any XML tags As such they cannot be specifically classified See Section 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements for information about the c1ass parameter When the system generates the XHTML output many of the special characters will be rendered as HTML entities For example the copyright symbol will display as the character in your browser but is represented by amp copy in HTML 11 2 4 5 7 Custom tag button It is possible to use custom tags in XML input fields Custom tags allow you to create both block and inline elements described below There are five default custom tags available for use Factbox block used for additional facts that stand out from the rest of the text Quote block used for quotations that stand out from the rest of the text Strike inline text that is struck out e Sub inline subscript text e Sup inline superscript text The Insert custom tag button is located in the Special Tools area of the OE toolbar and looks like this not to be confused with the similar Help button ee Fo
112. the My account tab is used to manage and organize your personal bookmarks for example to delete existing bookmarks and add new ones The interface is accessed by either clicking the My book marks link in the My account tab or by clicking the Bookmarks link at the top of the Bookmarks window in the right area Use this interface to remove or add multiple bookmarks at the same time The following image shows this interface Content structure Media library User accounts Webshop Design Setup BOES gt My bookmarks Z umm TJ Administrator User Mydratts E3 Name Type Section My pending items gj Change Information My notification settings T Bent Article Standard e change password My bookmarks I Daily Usage Questions Documentation page Standard Logout Collaboration Fi a My shopping basket Ema Delete selected Quick setti l Locations on off Re edit on off Figure 3 9 Bookmarks interface 79 Chapter 5 An Overview of the Administration Interface Note the difference between the terms Bookmarks interface and Bookmarks window You can perform the following tasks in the Bookmarks interface View a bookmarked node by clicking its name on the list Edit the nodes themselves by using the edit icons located to the right of the list Delete one or more bookmarks by marking the checkboxes and clicking the Delete selected button Note that this operation will simply delete the book
113. the drafts Select the desired version of the content and click the Edit button 36 Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface Fruit The currently published version is 1 and was published at Friday December 22 2006 08 53 05 am The last modification one at Friday December 22 2006 08 53 05 am The object is owned by Administrator User This object is already being edited by you You can either continue editing one of your drafts or you can create a new draft Current drafts Version Name Owner Created Last moditied 2 12 22 2006 09 21 am 12 22 2006 09 31 am K Fruit dministrator User 12 22 2006 09 45 am 12 22 2006 09 45 am Edit New draft Figure 2 14 Edit conflict select version In the above screenshot you can see a good reason for creating a user account for each editor instead of having everyone use the Administrator user account to edit content The table lists several versions of an article but since all have been created with the same account you cannot see which versions belong to you In addition to the above scenario several other situations may cause an editing conflict To understand more about editing conflicts we recommend that you read Section 2 5 Versions and translations on the built in version mechanism including drafts and supplement that with the more in depth material in Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features and Section 9 2 4 Editing conflicts While those sectio
114. the selected text bold If the selected text is already bold this button will remove the bold formatting B The Italic button will make the selected text italic If the selected text is already italic this button will remove the italic formatting El Tip Itis possible to set the text style bold italic before typing in the actual text When your cursor is on a blank space or line click the corresponding button to initiate the bold or italic text style type some words then click the button again to turn off the text style 308 Chapter n Content Editing Warning Note that if no text is selected the Bold and Italic buttons will change the word where the cursor is currently positioned However this feature is only available in Internet Ex plorer In addition Internet Explorer passes the formatting settings to the next line or paragraph For example if you are writing bold text and then press the Enter key the new paragraph will be bold as well 11 2 5 1 3 Text formatting numbered and bullet lists When generating XHTML code the system will use the lt ol gt tag for numbered lists the ul tag for bullet lists and the 1i tag for list items The output is controlled by templates The Numbered list button allows you to create numbered ordered lists E The Bullet list button allows you to create bullet unordered lists The Decrease indent button allows you to decrease the level of indentation for list
115. the target node Alternatively navigate to the parent node of the node you want to bookmark Your target node should then be listed in the Sub items window at the bottom of the main area Click the icon to the left of the node either in the secondary menu or in the Sub items window and select Add to my bookmarks from the pop up menu 72 Chapter 5 An Overview of the Administration Interface G amp Products E Food Software View Edit in gt Copy Copy Subtree ma TEDS Move LJ Remove L Advanced gt uL Expand Collapse i Add to my bookmarks o Add to my notifications Create here gt Export OpenOffice org Export PDF Export Word E Import OpenOffice org S Replace OpenOffice org S E Corrperry Figure 3 11 Add bookmark through pop up menu 3 You will now see an entry for the target node in the list of bookmarks No confirm ation message or page is displayed instead the current page is simply reloaded 3 4 3 Searching A skilled content manager should know how to locate existing content quickly The built in search engine indexes almost everything that is added to the site This section describes how to use the Search interface to find content The Search interface is shown below gt All content j Current location Figure 3 12 Search interface Searching is used in many settings including assisting navigation listing an overview of content with some common elements identifying particular con
116. the translation count here is 2 and that there is an additional row listing ow the second translation German ger DE The English translation is selected as indic ated by the bold font and it is set as the main translation You can edit a translation by clicking on the language s corresponding edit icon on the right Clicking on a translation name for example German in the above screenshot will reload the page the selected translation will be displayed in the Preview window When either one or several languages are selected using the checkboxes on the left the Remove se lected button can be used to carry out the deletion of the selected translations The Set main button can be used to change the main language The main language cannot be re moved In Section 9 2 3 4 Removing translations versions we will show you how to work around this restriction The basics about translations and languages are described in Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features 6 2 5 Locations window We saw in Section 4 3 2 1 Locations that a node provides a location for a content object within the content hierarchy Each node refers to exactly one content object The purpose of the Locations window is to reveal the different nodes locations that are associated with an object In eZ Publish each object is encapsulated by at least one node within the tree The following screenshot shows the Locations window Relations
117. time when it was last modified The window also shows the version number of the draft In Depth Versions and drafts Every time an object is created or edited eZ Publish will automatically create a new draft unless you resume editing a work in progress draft If you are editing multilingual content you should note that the Current draft window only contains the language that is currently being edited The input fields of the Edit window in the main area are empty if you are creating a new object or translation However if you edit an existing translation of an object the system will create a draft that contains the field values copied from the last published version Note that the version number of the current draft differs from the version number of the published version shown in the Object information window This is so because you cannot edit the published version You will learn more about this in Section 8 1 4 4 4 Possible editing actions on versions At the bottom of the Current draft window are two buttons The View button brings up the Version preview interface which can be used to generate a preview of the content that is being edited see Section 7 7 Version preview interface When the Store and exit button is clicked the system will save the draft and exit the Object Edit Interface This will in most cases return you to the page from which you entered edit mode If no specific reference exists you will be returne
118. to Section 11 3 1 5 Objects images and embed ding In Depth Built in attributes The Size attribute is available for image objects only The default sizes are reference 600x600 pixels small 100x100 pixels medium 200x200 pixels large 300x300 pixels rss 88x31 pixels and original If necessary images are scaled down to fit the specified number of pixels However they are never scaled up so images smaller than the specified number of pixels will display in the original size The Original attribute will keep the image at its original size Depending on your user permissions or the context of the current editing opera tion you might see additional size options These default sizes are specified in a configuration file and can be redefined Ask your site administrator for more details The Alignment attribute sets the position of the object center left or right The Class attribute allows you to specify a custom class that will be used for the embedded object See Section 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements for more information You can choose the view to be used to render the embedded object For example if you insert an image object the embed view will show the image along with its caption while the full view will display additional information such as the object name and current version If you select embed inline from the view dropdown list the Inline checkbox will be marked and the
119. tutorial website The running tutorial is a multilingual site with three languages a front end interface to site visitors a front end interface for content management the Website Interface and a back end interface for both content editing and site administration the Administration Interface The site has a Webshop community forum news article repository image gallery and many other built in eZ Publish features The running tutorial initially contains only content included in the eZ Publish distribution but throughout the book we will add additional content and modify existing content You can follow the tutorial in your own installation of eZ Publish simply by installing eZ Publish and the ezwebin site package which includes the Website Interface Keep in Contents xxi mind that the buttons and interfaces and the resulting screenshots and procedures will vary from those found in this book if you use a version other than eZ Publish 3 9 1 and the Website Interface 1 1 In most cases these variations will be minor and we encourage you to work with the latest version in spite of the variations A demo site installation is available at http cmbasics demo ezpublish no To access the Administration Interface siteaccess append ezwebin site admin to the base address The demo site corresponds to the completed running tutorial In other words this site is the end result if you were to install eZ Publish as mentioned above then follow
120. up menu 77 be found in Chapter 6 Content Structure Tab Layout in Detail The pop up menu only functions if JavaScript is enabled in your browser as described in In Depth Web standards technical requirements in Chapter 1 The terms context sensitive pop up menu and pop up menu refer to the same thing and will be used interchangeably Recall that The main area is the most dynamic and most frequently used part of the Administration Interface It displays the content and interfaces that are associated with the current selection The pop up menu is only available when viewing content as opposed to settings In other words it is only available in the Content structure Media library and User accounts tabs 3 5 1 Context sensitive pop up menu The pop up menu contains functions that are specific to the item for which the menu was invoked That is the menu is context sensitive providing quick access to commonly used functions In the node tree in the secondary menu clicking the icon with the left mouse button to the left of the name of the node displays the pop up menu The following screenshot shows a pop up menu Chapter 5 An Overview of the Administration Interface Content structure E Preview _ Home Fruit Article News and Events G3 Investor bulletins E Technology English American v G3 Product releases LJ Pr Press Releases View The current item does m LJ Edit in g
121. version 4 Fruit E Author Created Administrator User lt bms ez no gt 02 06 2007 12 52 pm Administrator User Modified Name Email 02 06 2007 12 52 pm Administrator User Li Administrator User bms ez no LE elected E a Summary required Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Quisque sagittis laoreet urna Nam rhoncus risus eget enim Pellentesque erat libero pharetra non pretium vel commodo vitae arcu Hz S M E Translate from al SE arg No translation Nomai 5 ee Z EE gt ZBE ERE 2 E English Ameri 7 Tien merca Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Quisque sagittis laoreet uma Nam rhoncus risus eget enim Pellentesque erat libero pharetra non pretium vel commodo vitae arcu Section Standard 6 Choose section i a ER lt p gt EM Class none B online Editor 4 2 Figure 8 11 Translation interface The Language selection interface full or reduced appears when you have to choose which translation you wish to edit or create The language selection radio buttons are divided into two groups The Existing languages group contains the languages that are already used by the object The New languages group contains a list of available languages that are not yet used by the object Tip You should not confuse the Translation inter
122. window 141 Locations 2 2a Location Sub items Visibility Main Home Company News and Events 0 Visible Hide Home News and Events 5 Visible Hide Figure 6 12 Locations window The screenshot above shows the locations of the Home News and Events folder Currently this has two locations As in the Translations window the currently selected node is displayed using bold characters The table reveals the following information for each location node e The location itself this is the actual node path You will recognize the path format from file system and webpage URLs You can use this information to navigate the tree menu and to directly jump to higher nodes in the content hierarchy This can be par ticularly useful for operations such as restructuring site content The number of items that exist beneath a certain node in the node tree These sub items are also listed in the Sub items window found at the bottom of the main area The visibility of a node visible hidden hidden by superior Beside the status is a clickable link to alter the visibility In the above screenshot this is Hide Changing the visibility of a node is considered advanced content management Information can be found in the documentation at http ez no doc Whether the node is the main node If the content object is published at only one loca tion this will always be the main location Itis possible to add and remove
123. windows interfaces and tabs This chapter does not cover any advanced topics except some in depth sections for relevant topics nor does it go into detail about the tabs These are described in subsequent chapters It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the separation of content and design see Section 1 2 Separation of content and design in eZ Publish as well as the concepts of siteaccess see Section 1 3 1 Siteaccesses and modular design by templates see Section 1 3 2 Templates The Administration Interface by default uses the admin siteaccess Note that some sites have a custom siteaccess for content editors and that some elements and functionality may have been removed from these custom setups This chapter introduces some concepts that will be elaborated upon later in the book For a definition of unfamiliar concepts and components refer to the Glossary 3 1 Accessing the Administration Inter face The topic of logging into the Administration Interface was described in Chapter 1 Here we provide a brief summary The login screen shown below is the first page you encounter when you load the siteaccess for the Administration Interface Alternatively you could log in through the login page of site s public siteaccess and mark the Log in to the Administration Interface checkbox Log in to the administration interface of eZ publish Please enter a valid username password combination and click Log in
124. working on a draft at a later time However only the user who created the draft can resume working on it unlike the situation with published versions where any content editor can edit them 2 5 2 1 Managing drafts Follow the steps below to view a list of your saved drafts and retrieve one for editing 1 Access your User profile page see Section 2 2 1 User profile 2 Click on the My drafts link 3 This will display a list of drafts belonging to you as shown in the screenshot below Our example user has two drafts an article called Fruits and the folder called Products Reverting content 47 My drafts Empty Draft These are the current objects you are working on The drafts are owned by you and can only be seen by you You can either edit the drafts or remove them if you don t need them any more Name Class Section Version Language Last modified Edit E Article 1 2 English American Tuesday January 02 2007 12 44 56 pm ha Pr Folder 1 2 English American Tuesday January 02 2007 12 43 02 pm w ig Select all Figure 2 23 My drafts page 4 Click on the corresponding Edit button on the right to resume editing You can also click on the name of a draft to bring up a preview then click the Edit button on the Website Toolbar This will bring up the Content Editing Interface There you can make any necessary edits then publish or store the draft If you choose to cancel the edit operation no changes will be made
125. yellow scooter megaphone Body He isan angry Body Hewantsa Body So watch out old penguin parking spot he shouts for his scooter Figure 4 2 Datatypes attributes a content class and objects In Depth Attribute instances Just as content objects are instances of content classes object attributes are in stances of class attributes This is how eZ Publish handles for example different articles that have different titles text bodies and so on Details about object structure can be found in the documentation at http ez no doc Object versioning and translations are covered in Chapter 8 Content nodes The above section described datatypes attributes content classes and content objects Content nodes encapsulate content objects and structure content in a node tree This section presents a more detailed explanation of content nodes as they play a dominant role when you are working in the Administration Interface Encapsulation of content objects 93 4 3 1 Encapsulation of content objects In eZ Publish every object is usually represented encapsulated by one or more nodes You may recall from Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface that nodes represent the published version of an object We shall see later that this has implications for the content node tree Objects cannot just float around in space they have to be organized in some way But why do we need nodes Why can we not skip the extra layer and just org
126. 1 Create a hyperlink from an embedded object eeseeseeessl 338 11 42 Link object shown with frame sese 338 11 43 Modal dialog for inserting an anchor ss 339 11 44 OE text area with inserted anchor icon seseeeee 339 11 45 Insert table step 1 eere err eee ene eR eee ree edes 342 11 46 Modal dialog for insert table sss 342 11 47 New table with border width O esee 343 11 48 Table selected nenien a ea te eet er ener a dese Rae eer aee 343 11 49 Table with header row ener rb eret tnnt taroen een 344 11 50 Insert TOW Step ih i sores cadens eso Saas E Soo ti eae h en ES te seus aves use eei es 345 11 51 Insert row result ecce beret tee e rte ANDRE on 345 11 52 Delete a table row or column sssesee Hm 346 11 53 Split table cell step 1 2 inr ehe eene 347 11 54 Sphittable cell result z 4 e aether rh ve e rans re eee oom e e ne rene 348 11 55 Modal dialog for table properties 349 11 56 Modal dialog for edit cell properties e 350 11 57 Nested tables menye cereo rere eer eon e e Pee covey e e coe 351 11 58 Edit XML code directly satserna Ire En eren aperta DERI A 354 11 59 XML example 1 heading bold and italic eeeeeese 356 11 60 XML example 2 lists orei nna i E mmm eee 358 11 61 XML example 3 embedded object A 359
127. 1 Main translation see Main language Manage Content 2 30 189 397 Extensions 296 Translation 44 167 198 Users 59 Version 44 167 198 200 Media library 253 Contents 255 Create content 262 Edit content 264 Navigation 260 Repository 268 Usage 260 268 Media library tab 93 129 253 Member User account 16 Merge Table cells 347 MIME type 197 Modal dialog 298 Move xxiii 37 237 267 Move to trash checkbox 229 Multi price datatype 40 Multilingual content 187 see Multiple lan guages Multilingual site xx 5 139 157 190 Multimedia 124 256 Autoplay 125 Class specific attributes Controller 125 Controls 125 Loop 125 Quality 125 Controls 125 Flash 125 Quicktime 125 Real Video 125 Windows Media 125 Multiple languages xvii 5 90 192 Features 187 Multiple locations 93 97 249 Media library 267 My account tab 251 My bookmarks 69 My drafts 157 199 My drafts 199 227 251 My profile see User profile 398 Name 87 Navigation xxiii 66 154 254 260 Across node tree branches 260 Bookmarks 68 Clicking around 67 Context sensitive pop up menu 77 Left menu 64 Main area 64 Main menu 63 Path 63 67 Right area 64 Search 72 Secondary menu 64 67 Sub items window 67 Nested tags 306 Nesting 350 Node 254 see Content node Sort settings 144 Node ID 138 234 Node list 145 Node structure 94 see also Content node tree Node ID 95 Obj
128. 11 142 256 Container 111 Content structure xvii 15 261 Reorganize 237 Content structure tab 93 127 129 253 257 Interactive tree menu 130 Main area 134 Details window 138 Locations window 140 Preview window 135 136 Relations window 141 Selected node content 135 Sub items window 143 Translations window 139 Secondary menu 132 Content type see Content class Content sensitive pop up menu 254 Context sensitive pop up menu 77 110 129 152 211 215 288 298 Add to my bookmarks 78 134 Add to my notifications 78 Content branch Tree menu 132 Copy 78 239 Copy subtree 240 Create 78 Edit 78 211 394 Edit in 133 Items 78 Manage versions 201 Move 78 134 Remove 78 Sub items window 144 View 78 133 Copy xxiii 239 267 Subtree 240 Translation 219 Create xxiii 146 Translation 213 CSS 3 13 Class 351 Current draft window 151 155 183 Current version 180 Custom XML tag 304 D Daily tasks Overview xxiii Data markup 4 Data storage 13 Data structure 86 Attribute 86 Content class 88 Datatype 87 88 Translation 87 Version 87 Database 2 4 6 171 Datatype 40 87 88 101 102 186 287 289 Built in 88 Input validation 290 Multi price 40 Price 40 Text block 102 Text line 102 View template 137 XML block 88 103 Input validation 305 Datatype specific controls 91 Default language 185 Delete see Remove Design 3 287 Pagelayout 13 Separation from
129. 187 will allow the translation of its contents when an object of that class is being edited This is typically convenient when the attribute contains text such as the title of an article or the text of a documentation page However some attributes are non translatable by nature This is typical for numbers dates email addresses and images without text Such attributes can be made non translatable and thus their contents will simply be copied from the main translation The copied values cannot be edited 8 2 4 Multilingual support Starting from eZ Publish 3 8 the primary language concept is gone and objects can be created using different languages Previously if the primary language was set to English all content objects had to at least contain a translation in English Content objects can now be created in any of the languages found in the translation languages list This means that you can for example have an article available only in English and another article available only in Norwegian However if and when these articles are in fact dis played will depend on the site languages for the specific siteaccess Recall that the site languages list specifies in which languages a site should be displayed In other words even if you create a new article in one of the translation languages it might not appear on the public siteaccess This would depend on how your multilingual site is set up It is possible to translate an object into any
130. 2 20 2006 08 56 am Administrator User English American BA Press Releases Show children Yes Engisn American x 82 80 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard Administrator User Existing languages eng US e E English American Set main Delete selected Use the main language if there is no prioritized translation damen Suites Visbily Main 6 Visible Hide Home News and Events Press Releases Set main Delete selected Figure 3 17 Horizontally aligned switches all enabled The following table gives an overview of the windows in the Content structure and Media library tabs These windows are described in detail in Section 6 2 Main area and Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Chapter 5 An Overview of the Administration Interface Note that the User accounts tab has two additional switches Roles and Policies These are described in the user management section of the documentation located at ht tp ez no doc Table 3 3 Switches overview Switch Description Preview Displays the contents of the object that is referenced by the selected node Unlike the other windows if this switch is disabled as in Figure 3 16 Horizontally aligned switches all disabled the cor responding window does not disappear completely Instead only the window s contents are hidden When the window s contents are dis played they show th
131. 22 2006 08 53 01 02 2007 01 19 01 02 2007 01 19 EH w 2 x 3 z Show differences version Status Edited language Creator Created Modified 5 Archived Englist Administrator 12 22 2006 08 39 American User am am m Published Englist Administrator 01 02 2007 12 44 American User pm pm Li Draft Englist Administrator 01 02 2007 01 19 American User pm pm Remove selected English American Back Published version Version Translations Creator Created Modified Engl Administrator 01 02 2007 12 44 01 02 2007 01 1 American User pm pm New drafts 1 Version Edited language Creator Created PA Enalish Americ Administrator User 01 02 2007 01 19 nm Figure 2 24 Version overview page with archi 9 English American x E Modified 01 02 2007 01 19 nm EH a ved content Click the Copy button next to the version to which you want to revert The selected version will most likely have an Archived status 5 Click the Edit button next to the newly created version having the higher version number to enter edit mode 6 Click the Send for publishing button at the bottom of the page If you want you can edit this version before publishing it The new version will replace the current version The version of the object that you just replaced is still stored in the database and can be reinstated in the same way as it was Translating content 49 replaced If we bring up the Version overview page o
132. 231 Button bar 137 C Cache 297 Browser 297 eZ Publish 297 Management 297 Cascading Style Sheets 3 Class see Content class Class Edit Interface 89 Class identifier 296 Class parameter General elements 351 Class structure 86 Classified element 306 CMS xvii 2 85 Built in content types 2 Custom structures 2 Collaboration system 179 Comment class 110 113 113 119 Concepts Media related 254 Configuration Edit mode settings 248 Locale 168 Overrides 6 Settings 25 Site language 168 Site settings 25 Sort settings 144 Contact us 114 Container 14 37 95 97 101 107 110 116 117 119 123 123 189 192 236 Folder class 107 391 Forum class 115 Frequently used 107 Frontpage class 108 Show children 107 Content 3 21 57 85 101 127 189 287 Copy xxiii 78 250 267 Hide 245 Show 245 Content branch 130 see also Content node tree Content class 2 14 21 57 85 86 88 101 101 129 149 167 189 287 Create xxiii 32 78 143 191 251 262 Related object 194 Draft 45 175 198 Duplicate 239 see also Copy Edit xxiii 34 78 137 143 189 198 251 264 287 Draft 198 Translation 209 Embed 108 Locate 73 75 261 see also Search Management 30 189 231 Media library 258 Move xxiii 78 137 237 267 Multilingual 156 Multiple languages 192 208 Multiple locations 97 245 250 see also Main location see also
133. 3 Modify the URL by appending the hash character and the anchor name Steve to the address eznode 113 Steve 4 Click the OK button to exit the dialog The link will be created When this is done your visitor will be able to jump to the Steve position inside the Apple article from within the Banana article Online Editor daily tasks 341 Tip You can type the link address directly into the URL field without having to choosing a link type first 1 2 6 6 Working with tables The Tables area of the OE toolbar contains seven buttons that allow you to create and manipulate tables in different ways Table 11 3 Table related OE buttons Description The Table button allows you to create tables The Insert row button allows you to insert rows into a table This button becomes active when a table cell is selected The Insert column button allows you to insert columns into a table This button becomes active when a table cell is selected w s uim i The Delete row button allows you to remove rows from a table This button becomes active when a table cell is selected M The Delete column button allows you to remove columns from a table This button becomes active when a table cell is selected The Split cell button allows you to split a single table cell into two cells This button becomes active when a table cell is selected Ce E The Merge cell button allows you to
134. 63 10 9 Edit mode banner Ji dno me ee eee ees 264 10 10 Destination objects for new relation sA 266 10 11 Related objects window Add existing and Upload new buttons 266 10 12 Related objects window esses Hem 267 10 13 Initial content structure esses eene 269 10 14 View conference article socors necronit ee 269 10 15 Media library Images folder sssss 270 10 16 Edit mode r cle T Lui dene eter aec e aa 271 10 17 Miew article T c E Ree d c te 272 10 18 Preview ar cle T 3i cete eee tA tases sabes ee ese Cad 273 10 19 Edit mode ar cle 2 niri eem epe 274 10 20 View article 2 os iege Pee Pee eee yao ert EROR EN 275 10 21 View article 2 with embedded object ccceeeeeeeeceneeeeueeeeueeeeaeeceanees 276 10 22 Article 2 preview x esteso etes ien LUN e fa ts can ceadadeasanavces a Mee sen Ee eR SUY 277 10 23 Resulting content structure ssssssssssssssse e emer 277 10 24 Image green paint bucket csssssssss 278 10 25 Image Matchbox s ER eden Eye eden 279 10 26 Image color pencil box sssssssss Ie 280 10 27 Image Ferrar T iet tegeret E eto tbe tele poets 281 10 28 Image Ferrari 2 esie reo E sana eoe EE ERE IRR eee de eta oe e RRS 282 10 29 Image Ferrari 3 2 Red ete 283 10 30 image Ferrari 4 oet eot etre ceed Stes sande case Soo xS LEER eee E Ree et 284 11 1 Validation
135. 7 Webshop 2 4 2 Product class To offer products to site visitors use the Product class The Product class is fairly advanced allowing you to add options to a product that customers can choose in order to increase revenue We will walk through the attributes of a product by first looking at it in edit mode Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface Edit Product Color Pencil Box Name Color Pencil Box Product number CPB 1001 Short description Normal J 8 c e 2 A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet lel Jalol s wa m wc es e Class none ig Online Editor 4 2 Disable editor Description ewe Teese ESSE ES v Amazing Colors These pencils comes with vibrant and clear colors Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet These pencils comes with vibrant and clear colors Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet These pencils comes with vibrant and clear colors Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Figure 2 18 Product edit mode The above screenshot displays several fields you should be familiar with the Name Short description and Description fiel
136. 7 6 2 Savedraft button iss tee eere tarde 160 7 6 3 Discard draft button oeeie eia a EA RA 160 7 6 4 Translator mode neee ia a e ei HH EE EEn 160 vi eZ Publish Content Management Basics 7 7 Version preview Interfaces s eom iese nereden ieaie iane a aiet 160 7 7 1 View control window esessseseee 162 7 8 Related objects window esses mener 163 7 8 1 Toolbar for managing related objects ssesssssss 164 FEL ENIIdIEQAT TL t 164 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features eese 167 8 1 Version control the publishing life cycle eeeeeeeeees 169 8 1 1 Content versions big picture ssA 169 8 1 2 Version history interface sess 170 8 1 3 Version limitations 2 0 0 0 cee cece cece reece HH 171 8 1 4 Version structure and status 0 0 0 cece ec cece eee e teen nena eee 171 8 2 Multiple languages understanding translations eeessse 182 8 2 1 Content translations big picture ee 182 8 22 Translation interface oed tte eet 183 8 23 Language concepts tue teer te e Reese Ie dene RR EN ene eed 184 8 2 4 Multilingual support ccsssssss EE ooa a E AA aE SERS 187 8 2 5 Multilingual features overview eeee 187 8 3 SUMMALY sesh cd eee e oe reo tae er eee renes de teer eee aene re dee ees 188 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Edi
137. A datatype is the smallest entity of storage in eZ Publish and determines the validation storage and retrieval for the value held by the attribute See Also Content object attribute Input validation The default language for a siteaccess is set in a configuration file See Also Multi language features The separation of content and design is one of the key features of eZ Publish Design deals with visual presentation of content data markup and layout Design includes the things that make up a web interface HTML stylesheets images that are not part of the content typography fonts and so on See Also Content CSS HTML Template The Details window is shown in the main area of the Administration Interface when viewing some content and when the corresponding switch has been selected This displays additional information about the selected node and the object that it encapsulates See Also Main area A Domain Name System or Service or Server is an internet based service that translates domain names such as www example com into IP ad dresses for example 60 70 12 130 and vice versa While humans prefer to work with domain names computers work with IP addresses the DNS provides an interface between the two A draft is a newly created but not yet published piece of content stored in the system Drafts are managed through the User profile page of the Website Interface or the My account page of the Administration Inter fa
138. ANT E NER 25 2 3 Managing content oesi eise re thot dert aene pe e lore ba ease Spe na 30 2 3 1 Edit mode mtm Pe ARR ERE 30 2 3 2 Adding and editing content sese 32 2 3 3 Basic management tasks sessesee seca eeeeeaees 37 2 4 Webshop E M S 39 iv eZ Publish Content Management Basics 2 4 1 About eZ Publish Webshop eeHH 39 2 42 Prod ct class iren ithe cadens e ede coke ade dled 41 2 4 3 Managing Webshop orders e I 43 2 5 Versions and translations ieis oia a e a oree a He 44 25 1 Versioning Syste eese esiste etre nasega e eatae 44 2 52 Drafts aes sje vis ret eoe edet eee 45 2 5 3 Reverting Content 1 coe xot co Pee ood oen ter e ton tuer en RC S cad 47 2 5 4 Translating content eein E an E A EEA mH een 49 2 6 OpenOffice org documents ssss HH 50 2 6 1 Importing an OpenOffice org document sese 50 2 6 2 Exporting to OpenOffice org format eese 53 pP nriad M Tr 54 3 An Overview of the Administration Interface see 57 3 1 Accessing the Administration Interface ssseee 58 SMA User registration 2 04 oe te iid ee t tes pee te etr iR 59 32 Administration Interface layout esee 61 32 17 Main nienu o1 needed dda Peto e pee eere tei Serenade sioteed 63 322 P th 2332 ono eleva vette ae ees 63 3 2 3 Secondary left menu sese cece eee eee
139. Ad ministrator user is publish See Also User account Some objects need to be displayed even if they do not exist in any of the languages that are configured for a siteaccess Such objects include user objects and containers like folders See Also Multi language features Content object Anonymous users can access the public siteaccess of the site with read only privileges They have not logged in See Also User account See Content object attribute 370 Bookmarks Browse interface C Class Edit Interface Class parameter CMS Container Glossary The Bookmarks window contains a list of the current user s bookmarks and is located in the right area of the Administration Interface These bookmarks are specific to eZ Publish and should not be confused with the bookmark mechanism of your web browser In eZ Publish you can bookmark content nodes but not special items like the cache management page or external pages Using bookmarks is an alternative way of navig ating content These bookmarks can be managed through the Bookmarks interface accessed from the My account tab The Browse interface makes it possible to select objects that have been placed somewhere in the node tree for various content management tasks such as adding secondary locations moving copying or creating object relations The Class Edit Interface is used mainly by web developers to modify and create content classes In this interface yo
140. Also Content class Content object Datatype See Version history interface The Content Editing Interface in the Website Interface has the same purpose as the Object Edit Interface in the Administration Interface to edit content When you are viewing content in the Content Editing Interface you are in edit mode You enter edit mode by clicking the Edit button on the Website Toolbar when viewing content on the site See Also Object Edit Interface Website Toolbar Online Editor See Content node tree In eZ Publish a content object is wrapped or encapsulated and structured using a content node or node for short Nodes are organized in a node tree A content node represents the published version of a content object It encapsulates a content object as a wrapper and it provides a location for the content by adding structuring capabilities and binding it together with other content A node has its own internal structure ID sorting of sub items pointers to object parent node See Also Content object Content node tree Content structure 372 Content node tree Content object Content object attribute Content relationship Content structure Context sensitive pop up menu CSS Glossary The content node tree or node tree for short is a hierarchical tree structure built up of nodes It is also known as the content hierarchy The content node tree is the published version of your content hierarchically s
141. American BA a Summer conference Administrator User lt bms ez no gt Wednesday February 21 2007 Morbi elit neque accumsan nec tincidunt sed fermentum in justo Aenean vitae ante ut eros ullamcorper rutrum Fusce elementum Cras molestie nisi quis metus Fusce orci lectus imperdiet in tempor vitae nunc Vivamus quis odio id justo aliquam pretium Quisque congue metus ut porta fringilla sapien ipsum vulputate vehicula rhoncus Cras suscipit metus sit amet mi Etiam porttitor neque ut ipsum Ut sollicitudin nibh vitae 1 porttitor ante eget facilisis v English American x E ial Rem Administrator User 02 21 2007 02 24 pm Standard Relations 3 fis Ferrari BB 512 front Image Common Figure 10 14 View conference article We will now add several new articles to the News and Events folder and examine in formation about their related objects These objects will be images located within the 270 Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab Images container of the media library added solely for this example Currently they are not used in any objects from the Content branch Media library Preview Details I Translations Locations Relations Media Images Folder amp E Banners BG Files si m Administ Jser sh American EB sums terres EN IEEE A amp gg Cars sj Ferrari BB 512 front oper fis Ferrari BB 512 side open is Ferrari BB 512 fron
142. Bergfrid Marie Skaara eZ Publish Content Management Basics eZ Publish Content Management Basics by Bergfrid Marie Skaara Copyright 2007 by eZ Systems AS All rights reserved Printed in the United Kingdom United States No part of this work may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information or retrieval system without the prior written permission of the publisher Electronic versions of this document will be distributed under more permissive terms Please visit http www ez no ezpress for more details eZ Press and eZ Publish are trademarks of eZ Systems AS Other product and company names mentioned in this book may be the trademarks of their respective owners We use trademark names in an editorial fashion to the benefit of the trademark holder therefore these names are not marked with trademark symbols All terms known to be trademarks have been appropriately capitalized We cannot attest to the accuracy of this usage and usage of a term in this book should not be regarded as affecting the validity of any trademark or servicemark While every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this book the publishers and author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions or for damages resulting from the use of the information in this book The information is provided on an as is basis with no express or implied warr
143. Cancel Figure 2 4 Change password page Simply type in your old password followed by the new one then click the OK button If you do not want to change your password simply go back by clicking the Cancel button 2 2 1 2 Editing your profile To modify your personal information click the Edit profile button at the bottom of the User profile page shown in Figure 2 3 My profile page above The Edit user inform ation page looks something like this User profile Edit User Bergfrid Skaara First name required Bergfrid Last name required Skaara User account required User ID 142 Username Password Confirm password Email fooososesese urtle ez no Current account status enabled Signature Image Current image There is no image file _Detete image New image file for upload Browse Alternative image text Send forpublishing Store draft Discard Figure 2 5 Edit user information page The following items can be edited First name Last name Password Email address Signature used in forums mage used in forums 27 28 Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface Alternative image text an accessibility standard requirement but not a mandatory field This text is displayed as a replacement for the image in cases where the image fails to load or when images are omitted for visually impaired users When finished click the Send for publishing b
144. Chapter 2 will be displayed as a heading Iisto vitac augue vermeura riiieuas vac vitae nunc Vivamus quis odio id justo al ante eget facilisis magna neque non diz faucibus vel justo Sed sit amet ante V Chapter 2 Ut congue nisi vel malesuada vulputate nisi et nulla varius dapibus Mauris diam tempor vel pretium eget est Aenean ri Figure 11 16 Add heading step 3 Tip To edit a heading tag manually refer to Section 11 3 1 1 Headings 11 2 6 1 2 Changing heading levels The following example demonstrates how to change the text style of the current element We will change the style for Documentation and guidance from heading 1 to heading 33 l Place the cursor somewhere inside the target text which becomes the current ele ment Alternatively you can select the text so that it becomes a selected element The lt h1 gt tag will appear in the status bar and Heading 1 will appear in the Text Style tool dropdown list Online Editor daily tasks 315 Documentation and guidance Morbi elit neque accumsan nec tincidunt sed ferme elementum Cras molestie nisi quis metus Fusce ort metus vitae augue vehicula rhoncus Cras suscipit m vitae nunc Vivamus quis odio id justo aliquam pretiu ante eget facilisis magna neque non diam Mauris ic faucibus vel justo Sed sit amet ante Vestibulum bl Chapter 2 Ut congue nisi vel malesuada vulputate lacus tortor nisi et nulla varius dapibus Mauris diam
145. Creator column The date and time when the object was initially created 12 20 2006 08 56 am in the Created column The section that the object belongs to Standard in the Section column The number of versions that the object contains 1 in the Versions column The number of translations that the current version contains 1 in the Translations column This information will be shown even if you have a single language site In that case the value is always 1 The Node ID 72 in the Node ID column The Object ID 70 in the Object ID column The creation time is discussed further in Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilin gual Features The Node and Object IDs were described in Chapter 4 Content Manage ment Concepts Objects and Nodes We do not cover the topic of section management in this book Interested readers should refer to the documentation at http ez no doc for further details or see the Glossary for a short definition Translations window 139 6 2 4 Translations window This section only applies to multilingual sites so content editors working with single language sites can skip this material and jump to Section 6 2 5 Locations window The purpose of the Translations window is to show the languages that exist for the last published version of the selected object The currently selected translation is displayed using bold characters The following screenshot shows the Translations windo
146. D 31 Name News Type Folder 44 Object ID 32 Name Company Y Type Folder As Object ID 33 Name About T Type Article SF Chapter 4 Content Management Concepts Objects and Nodes Node ID 2 Parent node 1 gt Object ID 30 e d ES z z m z Node ID 45 Node ID 46 z Parent node 2 Parent node 2 O Object ID 31 Object ID 32 g x Es A m H m 7 Node ID 47 i Node ID 48 Parent node 46 Parent node 46 Object ID 31 Object ID 33 Figure 4 6 Objects nodes and the content node tree multiple locations Name News e Type Folder Object ID 31 i Node ID 45 Name Content Type Folder Object ID 30 Node ID 2 Name Company Type Folder Object ID 32 Node ID 46 N Name News Name Contact Type Folder Type Article Object ID 31 Object ID 34 Node ID 47 Node ID 48 Figure 4 7 Content node tree with multiple locations Summary 99 Warning Note that a secondary location for a container object such as a folder will not duplicate the nodes below the container If you have an image gallery with multiple locations you will only see the actual images at the main location It is therefore common practice that almost all objects published at multiple locations are not container objects That said there is no constraint against creating multiple locations for container objects it is just not usually done This procedure is described and illustrated in Section 9 3 6
147. EES ogedeens son 101 5 1 Text input field types eet ee ee eens 102 5 1 1 Text line block datatype plain text format 102 5 1 2 XML block datatype rich text format eseeeeees 103 5 2 Frequently used non container content classes ssseessss 104 3 21 Article elass is e ee c ee enm eee 104 23 232 Image clas iioc cunt Gave eo tame setae en LET TIR E ER dea EORR EE oben 106 23 2 5 File class deniar atte eg ener eor RM berto E 107 5 3 Frequently used container content classes eese 107 3 3 1 Folder class iis rt rer Ren E E e Ree 107 5 32 Frontpage Class teet e coeno ree tete exe ec aene 108 5 4 Content relationships esses mene men nennen 111 Ae Eink cla 88 55 45 ee ertet eR De RE eer RES e Re EP sess 111 35 5 User interaction dA NORD Nous 113 5 5 1 Commit Class 2 3 e dote eh eo IIIA Sh ews Der eren ee Ws 113 5 52 Feedback form class sssssssssssssesee 114 5 5 3 Forum related classes esee 115 5 6 Information sharing necne epe ee eges 119 5 6 1 Documentation page class essseee A 119 3 62 Infobox class eie ere ninm PIS 121 5 6 3 Event calendar class ssssssssessesee 123 3 64 Gallery class eoe e exe nhe ener ner RR 123 5 7 Multimedia classes 2 cechacns Coe sedan epo Ene see Te ent e e teh lar E E toes 124 DOLOUMMALY ei E 125 6 Content Structure
148. Edit Interface see Chapter 7 is used to edit content This is the same inter face whether you start with a newly created object select a stored draft see below or choose one of the existing objects in the node tree In the latter two cases you bring up the interface by clicking the Edit button When done editing you can either publish store or discard the changes Remember that when you are working in the Object Edit Interface you are working in edit mode Warning Make sure to exit the Object Edit Interface correctly to avoid stale drafts In other words always make sure to either publish discard or store the draft instead of just closing the window or pressing the Back button in your browser Note that storing a draft is not the same as publishing it See Section 8 1 4 4 Status for details about the life cycle of objects and version statuses Publishing is illustrated later in Section 9 2 2 4 Setting an existing version as published Let us revisit the idea of objects having three dimensions the object itself the version s and the translation s Recall that the actual content of your site is stored in attributes inside translations inside versions inside objects and published at nodes 9 2 1 Smart editing using drafts Have you ever experienced writer s block Have you ever lost an article that you started because you had to leave the office for the night Drafts can help in a lot of situations Recall the following fact
149. Editing through the Website Interface The related object feature is used in situations when there is a need to reuse information from elsewhere in the content hierarchy The context sensitive pop up menu see Section 3 5 1 Context sensitive pop up menu contains functions that are specific to the item from which the menu was in voked JavaScript must be enabled in your browser in order to access this menu You are working in edit mode when you are viewing some content in the Content Editing Interface in the Website Interface or the Object Edit Interface in the Administration Interface This usually means that either the Edit or Create button has been clicked The table below outlines the relationship between the interfaces in edit mode Table 11 1 Edit mode involved interfaces Main interface Edit interface Resource Website Interface Content Editing Interface Online Editor Administration Interface Object Edit Interface Online Editor The Object Edit Interface is a special purpose back end interface within the Admin istration Interface It is where content is created and edited When it is active it takes total control of layout and functionality The Content Editing Interface is a special purpose front end interface within the Website Interface It is where content is created and edited In this chapter you will learn about the following The description and purpose of input validation a
150. Editor by first inserting a row above the current row transferring all of the information on the bottom row to the second from bottom row then entering the new information in the now empty bottom row A similar technique can be applied for inserting columns to the right of a table 1 2 6 6 6 Removing a table row or column Follow the steps below to remove a table row or column The only difference is the button to select 1 Position the cursor inside a table cell the OE status bar will show the tags for the current cell 2 Click the Delete row or Delete column button depending on your desired action Body Normal x X B I e ada iE 5 i 3 2 LE Oo n a1 b1 c1 di a2 b2 c2 d2 a3 b3 c3 d3 i 9 a4 b4 c4 d4 a5 b5 c5 d5 m m oO lt p gt lt table gt lt tr gt lt td gt Figure 11 52 Delete a table row or column Online Editor daily tasks 347 3 The current row or column will be deleted Tip You can also do this by right clicking on a cell and choosing Delete row or Delete column from the pop up menu Tip In a Mozilla based browser you can also place the cursor inside one of the table cells the OE status bar will show the tags for the current cell There will be two x icons near the top and left borders of the current cell Click on the x icon in the left border to delete the current row Click on the x icon near the top border to delete the
151. English Amer Location Company C Home Siteaccess C eng C fre C ger C front C back C admin Update view Figure 7 11 View control window The Update view button simply re generates the preview based on the selections made in the View control window 7 8 Related objects window The Related objects window see Figure 7 12 Related objects window in the Object Edit Interface makes it possible to relate other objects to the one that is being edited Related objects 3 Related content 3 Name Type XML code Relation type 5 5 Latest Information From This Company Article embed href ezobject 81 Common Press Releases Events link href ezobject 8 1 gt lt link gt Embedded Folder embed href ezobject 80 Embedded link href ezobject 80 links Event calendar embed href ezobject 71 Embedded link hrefz ezobject 7 1 links Delete selected 9 Acdexisting Upload new Figure 7 12 Related objects window 164 Chapter 7 The Object Edit Interface Recall from Section 6 2 6 Relations window that any type of object can be connected to any other type of object This feature is typically useful in situations when there is a need to reuse information from elsewhere in the system The screenshot indicates that the currently selected object is related to three other objects Related images are displayed as thumbnails Related files will be displa
152. Interface the left side of the screen displays instead the Object information Current draft Translate from and Section windows In other words you cannot browse the content node tree while editing an object Second the right area Search interface main menu the menu of tabs and path are all disabled grayed out 154 Chapter 7 The Object Edit Interface Finally note that the Sub items window usually displayed at the bottom of the main area is not shown Instead the main area is occupied by the Main edit and Related objects windows In Depth Workaround for accessing elements disabled by edit mode Itis possible to access or search for other content in a different browser window or tab while editing an object However throughout the book we strongly em phasize the importance of navigating properly through the Administration In terface Clicking buttons such as Send for publishing or Discard draft to leave edit mode instead of using the browser s Back button is an integral part of good editing practice Only when you are very comfortable with the Administration Interface should you use the method described in this section Pay special attention to the URL listed near the top of your browser If you have a bookmark in your browser to the starting page of the Administration Inter face simply use this However if you cut and paste whatever is in the address field of the current window to the new window you have to remove the
153. Interface contains a special version of the Locations window at the bottom 248 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing IT Image Current image There is no image file Delete image New image file for upload Browse Alternative image text Send for publishing Save draft Discard draft Related objects 0 There are no objects related to the one that is currently being edited Delete selected EGS EEE Locations 1 Home News and Events 0 Published z Visible Unchanged zl c Press Releases New Article IK gs Delete selected Add locations Figure 9 50 Locations window in edit mode Tip If this window is not available go to the My account tab and look at the Edit mode settings window at the bottom of the left column shown in screenshot below Make sure that on is highlighted for Locations Publishing at multiple locations 249 Content structure Media library User accounts Webshop Design Setup My drafts My account My drafts 0 My drafts My pending items My notification settings My bookmarks Collaboration Change password My shopping basket My wish list There are no drafts that belong to you Delete selected Remove all Edit mode settings Locations on off Re edit on off Figure 9 51 Edit mode settings window You can use the Locations window to control where the object should be published and how it should
154. Interface integrates into the front end siteaccess of an eZ Publish website It includes the Website Toolbar which is displayed to logged in users who are members of the Editor or Administrator group See Also Website Toolbar Administration Interface The Website Toolbar is a part of the Website Interface but only avail able when logged in with at least Editor user privileges This is the most important tool for editing and managing content through the front end of the site An important feature of the Website Toolbar is context sensitiv ity This means that the buttons and choices shown on the toolbar depend on the content currently displayed and the operations available under the given circumstances See Also Website Interface Editor user eXtensible Hypertext Markup Language is a reformulation of HTML version 4 0 in XML 1 0 Whereas HTML applies relatively loose standards XHTML is much stricter Among other things the strictness of XHTML results in a faster and more consistent display across different browsers 388 Glossary XML eXtensible Markup Language is a rich and highly portable format for de fining complex documents and data structures See Also Rich text content Index A Access control xxi xxiii 94 224 Cumulative privileges 16 Login 16 Media library 258 Protected area 245 259 Roles and policies 16 Translation 209 User account 15 User group 16 Username password 15 Accessibility Web stan
155. Keep me updated gt Technology 2 Topic Replies Author Last reply gt 3eneral Administrator 5 Where can find more 0 leer information Administrator s vb How to import a file 1 Last reply b mode and User Administrator User Administrator User Figure 5 15 Forum topics If we look closer at the topic with posted replies you will see a page similar to the screenshot below Community gt Multimedia Author Administrator User Edit Administrator User Edit How to import a file pic General Next topic You need to be logged in to get access to the forums You can do so here Message Wednesday December 20 2006 08 57 59 am Hi has anyone tried to import a binary file am trying to create objects which have a file attribute which will hold some pd s am unable to understand how to use the functions in ezbinaryfile php and ezbinaryfiletype php to obtain this Wednesday December 20 2006 08 58 01 am Cras eu pede Nullam luctus neque in porttitor tempus neque massa sollicitudin massa ac dignissim turpis dolor sed nunc Aliquam elit Nunc sodales elementum eros Aenean mi nisl aliquet eget lobortis in tincidunt eu sapien Pellentesque varius metus et mauris Morbi laoreet tincidunt mauris Proin ut dui In hac habitasse platea dictumst Quisque eget nisi In hac habitasse platea dictumst Figure 5 16 Single forum topic Information sharing 119 An Edit
156. List Thumbnail Name Type fg News and Events Folder C Products Folder C Parner Frontpage C j Community Frontpage C LJ Knowledge Base Documentation page Company Folder Figure 9 41 Browse interface copying 5 Select the corresponding radio button for the destination location then click the Select button The node will be copied to the selected location The instructions above will only make a copy of the selected node Any additional nodes that are located below the selected node its children will not be copied Tip The copy subtree option available from the pop up menu will copy a node and its children However because of potential database and server load issues this is considered an advanced content management topic Also it is not recommended that you use the Administration Interface to copy large subtrees Contact your site administrator or see the documentation at http ez no doc for more information on copying subtrees The copy operation is intended for entire object copying It should not be confused with copying content from a version or a translation Node copying duplicates an object and the new copy object will not be linked in any way to the old object The screenshot below shows the current state of the tree menu in our example Copying content 241 Content structure LJ Home amp gg News and Events gg Investor bulletins E Technology G Product releases Press Releases _ Ev
157. Pagelayout 13 Text Input field 102 Text block 102 287 Text editing 287 Text input field 101 Text line 102 287 Text Style tool 307 Thread 117 Tooltips 302 Top level node 95 Media 253 Translate xxiii 192 Translate from window 151 157 157 214 Translation xvii 49 87 90 137 138 150 157 167 167 182 189 208 287 Access control 209 Add 49 213 251 Copy 219 Disable 90 Edit 140 209 Index Main language 217 Translation interface 183 Translation languages 185 Translation interface 183 189 214 Translation languages 185 187 208 Manage 168 Translation list 162 Translation management 44 167 198 208 Translations switch 139 190 Translations window 139 183 210 Translator mode 157 160 183 214 Trash xxiii 180 228 Object retrieval window 230 Original placement 230 Tree menu 130 211 215 Troubleshooting Editing conflict 221 Online Editor 295 Search 75 Sort 236 U ndo xxiii 303 nformatted text 102 311 319 nordered list see Bulleted list sability OE help 302 303 OE tooltips 302 User 245 Account 15 Registration 17 59 Success 60 Role 16 Self registered 59 User account 8 15 94 User accounts tab 129 User email address 60 User group 16 Default groups 16 Administrator 16 Anonymous 16 Editor 16 Member 16 Partner 16 User ID 59 User interaction 113 362 qaacq Comments 113 Feedback form 114 Forum 115 User managemen
158. Properties Attribute name Value There are no attributes defined ok Cancel Figure 11 39 Modal dialog for insert link 3 Specify the link properties see In Depth Link properties below and click the OK button The inserted link will appear in the OE text area Tip To edit a link tag manually refer to Section 11 3 1 6 Hyperlinks 336 Chapter n Content Editing Tip You can find the Object ID see Section 4 3 2 2 2 Object ID of a content object or its corresponding Node ID see Section 4 3 2 2 1 Node ID in two ways First when in edit mode using the Website Interface the URL will contain a number behind content edit which is the Object ID Using the Administration Interface the Object information window and the URL will reveal this number Second when viewing content in the Administration Interface while not in edit mode position your mouse pointer over some object icon either in the left menu or main area and a tooltip with the Node ID will appear In Depth Link properties The Text parameter is required in order to provide text for the link itself There are five possible protocol prefixes for external links http mailto file ftp and https and two special types for internal links ezobject eznode The internal links make it possible to create links to objects and nodes that are in the system After choosing a link type the type will appear in the URL fiel
159. Publishing at multiple locations Summary This section presented a brief overview suitable for those who only need a quick intro duction to the concepts of datatypes attributes objects classes and nodes The eZ Publish content structure is based on ideas borrowed from object oriented pro gramming languages like Java and C There is a distinction between the description of the object and the object itself The former is referred to as a class whereas the latter is referred to as an instance or object A content class can be thought of as a structural blueprint for a particular type of content The properties of that content are referred to as attributes A datatype describes the type of value that can be stored in a attribute Actual content is stored inside the attributes of content objects Content objects are wrapped or encapsulated and structured using content nodes or just nodes for short Nodes are organized in a node tree storing all published content in a hierarchy An object can be assigned to several nodes thereby appearing at multiple places in the node tree Chapter 5 Content Classes This chapter is a walk through of some of the default content classes in eZ Publish Content classes are the blueprints for content you create on your site This material is relevant for all content editors as it will provide an understanding of the concepts and types of content classes Recall from Chapter 1 and Chapter 4 tha
160. RL link properties refer to Section 5 4 1 Link class and the documentation at http ez no doc Event calendar class 123 5 6 3 Event calendar class Objects of the Event calendar class are containers for events It can also display a clickable calendar that allows users to browse events During creation an event calendar can be specified to either have a calendar view or a program view The following screenshot shows the calendar view News and Events Events January 2007 January 2007 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 1 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 17 18 19 20 Figure 5 20 Event calendar Most of the properties of the event calendar are pre defined You can only set and update the title fields and specify the view type The Event class represents the sub items of the calendar Events have an article folder kind of relationship to event calendars Like the calendar itself an event has a short and full title In addition you can specify the start and stop time frame for the event a de scriptive text summary and optional keywords in the Category field 5 6 4 Gallery class The integrated image gallery feature provided by the Gallery content class is mostly used as a container for images A gallery will display a list of images represented by a thumbnail version of the image with a link to a page with a larger image and a proper description Galleries can also display other media such as video files Images were de
161. Releases Folder amp dg News and Events s E Investor bulletins Administrator User English American Bil Technology English American ca 3 Product releases ow E Tea E Coffee 10 25 50 Lit Thumbnail Detailed 3 Fruit a Name Visibility Type Modifier Modified Section dr E New company website ref i reg Visible Article Administrator User 02 16 2007 07 51 am Standard EP 5 A Good results in the fourth c uj dus seals Tono M 5 Coffee Visible Article Administrator User 01 03 2007 10 19 am Standard EP Si A n Pm EE P EJ Latest Information From E Fruit Visible Article Administrator User 01 02 2007 01 32 pm Standard EEEN amp Events I E New company website released Visible Article Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 57 am Standard Si 2 amp GJ Products I 7 Good results in the fourth quarter Visible Article Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard El i bap barnes T E New product release Visible Article Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard bial 4 amp j Community j DU Keia Bus V E Latest Information From This Visible Article Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard EX Gil A T Compan amp zz Company e a Ll Delete selected Update priorities Trash Article English American Reese Sorting Published v Descending ngl g ing Small Medium Large Figure 9 2 Add article step 1 The screenshot above shows the Press Releases folder cu
162. Required 158 193 Available extensions window 296 Back end interface xx see Administration In terface Banner class 109 257 263 Image map attribute 264 Billboard 109 Block element 309 310 390 Bold text 307 309 317 Bookmarks 68 212 260 261 Add 70 257 Add to my bookmarks 78 Bookmarks interface 69 Bookmarks window xxiii 68 151 196 212 216 254 Breadcrumbs 63 Browse interface 196 238 246 260 267 Bulleted list 321 Button Add existing 195 Add location 141 246 Anchor 311 334 Bold 307 317 Browse 197 Bulleted list 308 Copy 204 219 239 Create 288 Create here 32 191 Decrease indent 308 Disable editor 295 Discard draft 160 Edit 137 198 212 215 288 Empty trash 230 Enable editor 295 Find text 303 Help 302 Increase indent 308 Insert custom tag 304 Insert literal text 311 Insert object 310 332 Insert special character 303 Italic 307 317 Link 310 334 Login 17 18 Manage versions 155 Move 37 137 237 New draft 223 New reply 119 New topic 119 Numbered list 308 Redo 303 Remove 137 243 Remove selected 140 141 197 Send for publishing 159 192 290 Index Set 235 Set main 140 141 216 Show differences 202 Sign up 17 Store and exit 156 199 Store draft 160 199 227 289 Translate 157 213 Undo 227 303 Update priorities 236 Update view 163 233 Upload new 196 256 View 156 160
163. Secondary location Organization see Content Structure Presentation 3 4 see also Design Preview xxiii 160 231 Remove xxiii 78 137 143 180 242 249 268 Reusable 256 Revert xxiii 45 47 Secondary location Set before publishing 247 Separation from design 2 3 5 Sort xxiii 233 Structure 3 86 vs display 5 Translate xxiii 213 Translation 49 87 167 Type of see Content class Un publish 245 see also Visibility Version 44 87 167 View xxiii 78 Visibility Article 104 Banner 257 263 Class identifier 296 Comment 113 Container 37 107 Documentation page 119 Edit interface 89 Event 123 Event calendar 123 Feedback form 114 362 File 107 Folder 107 121 Forum 115 117 Forum reply 119 Forum topic 117 Forums 116 Frequently used 104 107 Frontpage 108 257 Gallery 123 Generic attribute controls 90 209 Image 106 123 Infobox 121 Information sharing 119 Instance 86 Link 111 Multimedia 124 Name 137 Product 41 Relationships 111 Structure 86 Attribute 88 Container flag 110 Identifier 90 Name 89 User interaction 113 Content class attribute 88 Datatype specific controls 91 Generic controls 90 Information collector 90 Required 90 392 Searchable 90 Translatable 90 Identifier 90 Information collector 363 Name 89 Content diff see Version management Content editing xxiii 189 198 287 Concepts 14 Conflict 221 Preve
164. Tab in a single folder like an images folder As the amount of content grows over time it gets harder to locate specific objects We illustrated this point in the in depth block above In Section 10 3 2 Creating new content in the media library we describe how to add new content to the media library With the Online Editor new embedded images are automatically uploaded to the Images folder of the media library without any further structuring To counter this you could add the images to sub folders below the Images folder first then embed them Alternatively make it a habit to reorganize this folder regularly Tip Organize your library content as if you are dealing with books in a public library Use the same care as you would for the Content branch Depending on the size and complexity of your site it may be a good idea to have a content manager specifically responsible for the media library 10 3 2 Creating new content in the media lib rary Adding new content to the media library is done in the same way as in the Content branch 1 Make sure that you are logged in to the Administration Interface Use the Media library tab the left menu and the Sub items window to find the container under which you want to add new content 2 Use the dropdown list s in the Sub items window to select the type of media you wish to add and the desired language for the content Alternatively bring up the context sensitive pop up m
165. Technical writer The Summary and Body fields are self explanatory Installations without the Website Interface refer to the Summary attribute as the Intro attribute You should note that these are XML text blocks which means that you can add formatting as previously ex plained By default the system displays article summaries in bold as a separate paragraph at the top of the page Enable comments a Figure 5 5 Article enable comments Enable comments is a simple checkbox as seen in the above screenshot If checked site visitors can add comments described below in Section 5 5 1 Comment class to the article The image input section looks like this 106 Chapter 5 Content Classes Image Current image Preview Filename MIME type Size p 0d922735 jpg image jpeg 11 16 kB P EE New image file for upload Browse Alternative image text Green thing Figure 5 6 Article image You can upload a new image or replace an existing one Note that the Article class only has one Image attribute You might have noticed when browsing an eZ Publish site that many articles have more than one image This is possible with the embedding feature where you can insert images into XML block attributes such as the article body We will return to the topic of embedded images in Section 6 2 6 Relations window and Sec tion 11 2 6 4 Uploading and embedding an image using the OE The Alternative image text attribu
166. The distinction between block and inline elements explains why some elements are dis played as they are This section explain how these elements are handled differently If you have no interest in this markup topic you can safely skip to the next section without missing important OE information A block element always begins on a new line when displayed It exists in its own virtual box and is always followed by a carriage return as when in a word processor you press the Enter key after typing in some text There are 12 types of block elements headings numbered lists bulleted lists list items embedded objects literal text tables table rows table header cells table cells paragraphs and block custom tags An inline element becomes part of the text on the same line There is no virtual box around inline elements There are 6 types of inline elements bold text italic text hyper links anchors lines and inline custom tags In Depth Rules for block and inline elements Block elements are represented by block level tags in the resulting XHTML code while inline elements are represented by inline tags Because of this there are two main rules for block and inline elements 310 Chapter n Content Editing Table 11 2 Main rules for block and inline elements XHTML rule eZ Publish XML Online Editor rule Placing text or other inline tags directly within the lt body gt tag is not allowed They should be surround
167. When active it disables hides most of the areas and functionality of the Administration Interface See Also Content Editing Interface Administration Interface The Object information window is a part of the Object Edit Interface and reveals information about the object that is being edited It provides access to manage the object s versions See Also Object Edit Interface The eZ Publish content structure is based on ideas borrowed from object oriented programming languages like Java and C Superficially object oriented OO means looking at the world in terms of objects Content is described and managed through abstraction and objects A data structure is described using a content class made up of attributes See Also Content object Content class An object relation is an association between two content objects Relations can be specified within XML blocks via the embed and 1ink tags Some content types also allow relations to be specified as attributes to content objects such as the Image attribute for an article The referred object is called a related object See Also Related object The OE status bar is located directly below the OE text area It displays useful information about the element where the cursor is currently located See Also Online Editor The OE text area is an editable multi line text area showing a visualization of your content in the form of XML code as formatted text 380 OE toolbar Online
168. a rhoncus Cras suscipit metus sit amet mi Etiam porttitor neque ut ipsum Ut sollicitudin nibh vitae nunc Vivamus quis odio id justo aliquam pretium Quisque congue metus ut porta fringilla sapien ipsum porttitor ante eget facilisis magna neque non diam Mauris id purus Curabitur nulla Donec sem nisi cursus sed lobortis in faucibus vel justo Sed sit amet ante Vestibulum blandit purus sit amet lacus Chapter 2 Ut congue nisi vel malesuada vulputate lacus tortor vehicula dolor at laoreet lectus mauris quis quam Vestibulum nec nisi et nulla varius dapibus Mauris diam elit euismod et fermentum vel mollis vitae neque Nam orci enim aliquet vel tempor vel pretium eget est Aenean risus Nam tincidunt quam id mauris Nunc elit felis viverra in elementum vel malesuada ut dolor Proin tincidunt tincidunt urna Sed purus est tincidunt ac pulvinar at elementum a nulla Nulla luctus quam a massa Pellentesque est nibh dictum a varius non elementum ultrices libero Aliquam lacinia arcu nec tellus Cras eget elit ut leo pharetra pharetra Suspendisse varius quam in erat lt p gt Disable editor Class none ig Online Editor 4 2 Figure 11 14 Add heading step 1 2 Select the Chapter 2 text then click the Text Style tool dropdown list and select Heading 1 Heading 1 Heading 2 Heading 3 Heading 4 Heading 5 Heading 6 Figure 11 15 Add heading step 2 314 3 Chapter n Content Editing
169. ace is a special purpose interface embedded within the eZ Publish Administration Interface The Object Edit Interface is where the editing of content objects takes place In addition from there you can access other content management interfaces for managing and previewing object versions The interface is presented whenever you initiate an edit or create operation This chapter is mainly written for content editors working in the Administration Inter face Basically you can restructure and delete content through the standard Administra tion Interface but without using the Object Edit Interface you cannot edit content For example you use the Object Edit Interface to correct a spelling error or re write entire parts in an article Recall that Acontent type is called a content class or class for short while a specific piece of content is called a content object or object for short A content class can be thought of as a structural blueprint for a particular type of content The properties of that content are referred to as attributes You are working in edit mode when you are viewing some content in the Content Editing Interface Website Interface or the Object Edit Interface Administration Interface This usually means that either the Edit or Create button has been clicked The table below outlines the relationship between the interfaces in edit mode Table 7 1 Edit mode involved interfaces Main interface E
170. ack of the changes made by various users In the subsection below we list some of the common areas in the Administration Inter face where version information is presented Viewing version information When viewing some content in the main area of the Administration Interface with the Details switch see Section 6 2 3 Details window activated the Details window shows the number of versions that the object contains When in edit mode you will find version information in several of the windows of the Object Edit Interface In particular the Object information window see Section 7 2 Object information window will display the version that is published on the site This window also contains the Manage versions button that brings you to the Version history interface described below The Current draft window shows information about the 170 Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features version currently being edited It also contains the View button which you can use to bring up the Version preview interface see Section 7 7 Version preview interface 8 1 2 Version history interface The Version history interface makes it possible to view and manage the versions that belong to an object It can be accessed by clicking the Manage versions button located inside the Object information window of the Object Edit Interface or by selecting Advanced Manage versions from the context sensitive pop up menu see Se
171. al window Object retrieval Please choose the location where you wish to restore lt Press Releases gt Restore at original location below lt Downloads gt Select a location Por Presrest Figure 9 34 Object retrieval window You can restore an object either to its original location or to another location In this example we select Restore at original location below Downloads The screenshot below shows the content structure after the folder has been restored from the trash Notice that the sub items are not automatically restored We have to return to the trash and repeat the procedure for each of the folder s children Content structure E ii Details Transtations Locations Relations J Home Press Releases Folder amp News and Events amp Products Last modified 02 19 2007 02 49 pm Administrator User English American Bil Cr Community Multimedia Sub items 0 amp dg Downloads E a The current item does not contain any sub items I More dummy data jJ Download statistics Delete selected Update priorities I Research Data Bal A vary arii document Article gt Engish American gt Sorting Published v Descending gt Figure 9 35 Result of trash retrieval Warning Make sure to read the removal confirmation request and check that this is in fact what you want to do Your content is not completely lost but it might be a tiresome and tech nically demanding task to recover
172. ally the first two methods of interaction provide feedback to the webmaster whereas the other two methods result in additional content published on the site We will describe the Comment Feedback formand Forum classes Content editors manage these user interaction features both via the Website Toolbar and the Adminis tration Interface All user interaction occurs through the public siteaccess Intranets and other login based sites can involve user interaction as well What distinguishes these classes from to the ones previously described is that content editors do not create the content In edit mode it is only necessary to enter data in the input fields marked in formation collector if you want to supply default values We will explain this more when discussing the specific classes 5 5 1 Comment class A comment is short text that site visitors can append to site content An object of this content class contains a subject author and message Note that the Author input field is only shown in edit mode otherwise the value for this field is extracted from the name of the currently logged in user When comments have been enabled see Figure 5 5 Article enable comments above for an object such as an article logged in users can post comments to that object Your page may look something like the following screenshot which shows an article with several comments 4 News and Events Chapter 5 Content Classes New compan
173. amet The new product XYZ Green Paint Bucket Color Pencil Box Matchbox was released to the ies as le public today Lorem Price 245 00 Price 89 00 Price 142 00 ipsum dobr sit amet Figure 1 3 Website Interface A second reason that the Website Interface is much simpler than the Administration Interface is the Website Toolbar seen in the above screenshot This provides easy access to content editing operations related to the content that is being viewed The buttons and menus on the Website Toolbar change depending on the context The Website Interface can only be accessed by users who are registered on the site and belong to the Editor or Administrator group Therefore site guests even if they are re gistered will see something similar to the above screenshot but without the Website Toolbar User groups are explained later in Section 1 5 User accounts We will now take a look at the Administration Interface Siteaccesses 9 1 3 1 3 Administration Interface Chapter 3 provides a complete overview of the Administration Interface In this section we introduce it briefly to give you a sense of what distinguishes it from the Website In terface The Administration Interface is the advanced back end interface providing powerful tools for content management and editing as well as site management configuration customization and development In other words you can change almost everything about a site in the Administration In
174. and their different statuses The features of the translation layer How to use the Translation interface Important concepts related to languages in eZ Publish including multilingual support and features This chapter does not cover issues related to the technical setup and configuration of languages Specifically you should refer to the documentation at http ez no doc ez pub lish technical manual to find out more about the following topics Site language configuration Site locale configuration Managing translation languages This chapter covers the basics on versions and translations It should be supplemented with the step by step editing procedures found in Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing This chapter is divided into two major sections The first describes issues related to the built in version mechanism and material presented there applies to all content editors The second major section deals with multi language issues and transla tions Content editors with single language sites can safely skip this material The chapter closes with a summary that highlights the most important issues Note that the book is based on the current major version of eZ Publish which at the time of writing is 3 9 Version control the publishing life cycle 169 8 1 Version control the publishing life cycle 8 1 1 8 1 1 1 This is the first of two main sections in this chapter We will look deeper at the version
175. ange your password update personal information manage Summary 55 drafts and notifications and Webshop order information through the User profile page Through the Site settings page you can edit the company logo and other site information You are working in edit mode when you are viewing some content in the Content Editing Interface The most common way to enter edit mode is to click the Edit button on the Website Toolbar eZ Publish has a built in version system and supports multilingual sites Both are access ible through the Website Toolbar You can also import and export content in OpenOf fice org format Chapter 3 An Overview of the Administration Interface The Administration Interface is the advanced back end eZ Publish interface used to add and manage content and to perform many administration tasks such as configuring user accounts This chapter provides an overview of the Administration Interface features that are most commonly used by content editors The material in this chapter is introductory and covers some key principles for content editors as well as the overall organization of the Administration Interface Recall from Chapter 1 that Content is information that is organized and stored in a structured manner by eZ Publish For example content might be a news article and its attributes title introduc tion body images A content type is called a content class or class for short while a specific
176. anize the objects themselves without the nodes The following illustration shows a simplified example of a node and its encapsulated object as it would have been represented inside the system Notice that both the object and node have their own IDs as explained in Section 4 2 Datatypes attributes classes and objects above and that the ID of the object is listed inside the node We will provide more details about these IDs in Section 4 3 2 2 Node structure OBJECT NODE Object ID 30 Node ID 2 Name Content Object ID 30 Type Folder Figure 4 3 Object node relation In Depth Why the extra layer You may ask why does eZ Publish add the node layer to the object oriented model The main reason is to identify the location of objects While content objects are containers for content the node is the placement of the content The main purpose of the node construct is to structure the content into a content node tree without affecting the content itself And why did we separate the location from the content This is because it allows one content object to have several placements locations While this is similar to symbolic links in Linux and shortcuts in Windows it is not exactly the same thing In eZ Publish when a content object like a folder has several locations it can have different sub content in each location There are advantages and disadvantages to that but that is beyond the scope of this book 4 3 2 Content
177. anslation languages is a set of languages set up in a configuration file This set identifies the languages in which content can be created and to which it can be translated See Also Multi language features Translation The Translations window is shown in the main area of the Administra tion Interface when viewing some content and the corresponding switch is selected The purpose of this window is to show the languages in which the published version of an object exists You can access translation related operations from this window See Also Main area Administration Interface Translator mode is a special purpose sub mode of edit mode used for working with multilingual content and translations If you select a language using the radio buttons located in the Translate from window and click the Translate button the Main edit window will be switched to a special translator mode in order to make it easier to translate an object from the selected existing language See Also Translate from window Object Edit Interface Translation Edit mode Administration Interface By default deleted content is moved to a trash container and is not entirely deleted from the system You can access the trash through the link at the bottom of the secondary menu when viewing content in the Administra tion Interface Tree menu Undo Unicode URL User account User group User profile UTF 8 385 See Also Undo Secondary menu Administ
178. anty Publisher Jennifer Zickerman Editor and layout Peter Keung Contributors Balazs Halasy Svitlana Shatokhina Jostein Knudsen Illustrator Thomas Hellstrom Cover Design Hansi Von Grenzfeldt Printing Lightning Source International Standard Book Number ISBN 978 82 92797 05 1 First printing May 2007 eZ Press a division of eZ Systems AS Kverndalsgate 8 Postboks 253 N 3701 Skien Norway Phone 47 35 58 70 20 Fax 47 35 58 70 21 Email info ez no http www ez no Table of Contents Preface c ues eiii t ERE M Een ERES RE Faye Dno ERR EA S CERE Ee Eee eR Rae P RARE Cap a xvii 1 About eZ Publish 2 eee nie ite oe elena xvii 2 Target audience and usage s ciini oi EEE en xviii 2 1 Special in depth material es xix 2 2 Example Strategies 2 5 ied e Re REPRE EARS xix SOIT HE E xxi 3 1 Reading suggestions eiras iA TERE EE E EAE xxii Eu xxiii 4 Typographical conventions cssse HH xxvii 5 About eZ Systems ance te ie Uo peek E eae er pese pres aa Reed xxvii 3 1 Contact eZ Systems c eu I e RSS ARE EROR URASRRRER EOS xxvii 6 Acknowledgments cisien ioonid ere ins ieuna HH ener xxvii 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management ssse 1 1 1 Content management systems ee cece cece Hehe 2 1 2 Separation of content and design cece ccecceeceeecee eee tene een eene ees 2 1 2 1 Content the d t e cc ces eere ee eee tenete eterne 3 1 2 2
179. ap Clear cache x Quick settings 4 Store and exit Translate trom H E No translation Translate Section unknown 6 Choose section i a ER Figure 10 9 Edit mode banner The Image map attribute uses a Text block datatype not an XML block datatype See Section 5 1 Text input field types for a description of the differences Image coordinates are specified using common web standards Refer to ht tp www w3 org or similar web markup documentation for information on image map standards 10 3 3 Editing media library objects Editing an object in the media library works just as described previously for the Content branch in Section 9 2 Editing objects writing and translating However since there is a possibility that content stored in the media library is shared by multiple content objects elsewhere by object relations changes made to media library objects can affect several other objects For example if you change the uploaded image file inside an image object by replacing the contents of the Image attribute this will update the image for all articles or other objects that have embedded object relations to this image Sometimes this is exactly what you want for example if you have acquired new portrait photos of the company managers Relating media content to objects in the Content branch 265 However sometimes changing an image or any other attribute in the media content
180. apter 4 Content Management Concepts Objects and Nodes places within the Administration Interface and can contain spaces and special characters in addition to letters and digits The Identifier field of an attribute or class is for internal use In particular attribute and class identifiers are used in configuration files in templates and in PHP code As a content editor you will rarely if ever stumble across this field Note that attribute and class identifiers are not the same as the IDs mentioned earlier The former is usually a string without any spaces or special characters The latter is an integer Each attribute has a set of generic controls regardless but not independent of the datatype that represents the attribute These are represented by the row of checkboxes in the above screenshot Controls can be enabled or disabled checked unchecked As a content editor you will notice the settings when editing objects For example they might affect what field values are mandatory in order to store an object The screenshot shows the Title attribute as required meaning that whenever you want to publish an article you must fill in some text in the title field The controls are described in the in depth block below In Depth Generic attribute controls Controls work as switches to turn a feature on or off The Required control if checked the relevant attribute must be filled in before a content object can be saved To illustrat
181. ar is displayed gi ez Manage versions Store and exit Preview No translation Translate This provides access to the functions listed in the table below 4 When finished editing choose either to publish your content click the Send for publishing button or to store the updated version as a draft without publishing it click the Store draft button Table 2 2 Edit mode toolbar functions Manage versions Used to view and reinstate previous versions of an object Versions are described in Section 2 5 Versions and transla ti ons Store and exit Used to store a draft of the object Drafts are described in Preview Section 2 5 2 Drafts Used to view the modified object as it would appear to site visitors Language selection Used to specify a language for a translation Translate S Used to translate an object Translations are described in ection 2 5 4 Translating content 2 3 2 2 1 Editing conflicts Editing conflicts can be a challenge on sites with lots of content and or multiple editors potentially working on the same content Under some circumstances there might be an editing conflict that needs to be resolved before you can continue to the edit page Editing conflicts happen when several editors are editing the same content making eZ Publish uncertain of which version of the content you want to edit Do you want to edit the published version or one of
182. arch field in the top right corner of the Administration Interface The built in search engine integrates with the content structure In other words you may search everything that is published on your site words users folder names and so on If you have read Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface you will have some understanding about versions and drafts If not you will learn about them in Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features The node tree only holds the current and published version of content Correspondingly searches are performed only on published versions You will not get any matches from archived versions or unpublished drafts You may search for any content as long as it is indexable within the node tree This means that the content that you are looking for must be marked as searchable Content editors should not worry about this marking as it is for webmasters site administrators and de velopers to determine the searchable property for content when defining the content classes You will learn more about this in Chapter 5 By default the All content radio button is selected With this setting the system will search for the specified word s within the entire node tree Matching is done on complete 74 Chapter 3 An Overview of the Administration Interface words and or phrases As an example we will perform a search based on the content shown in the screenshot below Home News an
183. ard 3 A very small document r 53 Frit Visible Article Administrator User 02 19 2007 02 27 pm Standard 7 The secret file by Update priorities amp Pictures amp Forums Article english American gt Sorting Published v Descending gt a Knnudardan Darn Figure 9 31 Content hierarchy After clicking the Remove button in the Preview window of the main area the following page appears How to undo changes 229 Confirm location removal Some of the items that are about to be removed contain sub items Removing the items will also result in the removal of their sub items Are you sure you want to remove the items along with their contents LJ Home Community Downloads Press Releases Folder 10 items Move to trash Carcel Figure 9 32 Confirm removal move to trash Click the OK button with the Move to trash checkbox marked to move the folder and its sub items to the trash Open the trash by clicking the icon as shown in Figure 9 30 Trash To bypass the trash in order to delete content permanently uncheck the Move to trash checkbox Trash 13 10 25 50 5 F Amazing site Comment Standard community downloads press releases new company website released A r 3 Coffee Article Standard community downloads press releases e F Congratulations Comment Standard community downloads press releases new company website released rl E E Fr
184. arn how to revert content that is bring back an older version Finally we explain how to proceed when translating content on a multilingual site If your site only has a single language this last section does not apply 2 5 1 Versioning system The versioning feature makes it possible to have several versions of a content object Generally each time you click either the Create or Edit buttons on the Website Toolbar a new version of the current content object is created and assigned a version number Any previous versions of the object remain on the system This is in contrast to simply overwriting replacing the attributes of the object with the new data Drafts 45 This is how eZ Publish keeps track of changes made by various users An accidental or unwanted change can thus be undone by simply reverting an object back to a previous version In addition to saving the content the system also saves information about the user who created the version the time of the version and the status of the version To learn more about version statuses see Section 8 1 4 4 Status The main statuses are Draft Published and Archived The version with the Published status is the one that is displayed to site visitors The Draft status is described below Archived versions represent old content that you can revert to when needed 2 5 2 Drafts A draft contains content that has been saved but not yet published Recall the Content Editing Inte
185. ary and the chapters on the layout of the Administration Interface Chapter 3 Chapter 6 and the Object Edit Interface Chapter 7 while studying this material The step by step procedures in this chapter will be your quick guide for solving problems when editing and managing content For this reason we have included an overview of these procedures in Section 3 2 How do I in the Preface If you are unfamiliar with the running tutorial used here review the information in Section 2 2 Example strategies in the Preface for a quick introduction If you have read Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface you will see that some of the editing procedures in this chapter are not much different from the Website Interface procedures In this chapter where appropriate we have included tips with short descrip tions on how to perform the equivalent Website Interface tasks as well as references to where the full descriptions can be found Tip In this chapter we use a multilingual site for examples and screenshots If you have a single language site the visual difference will mainly be that your windows and interfaces are slightly simpler For example the main area will not show the Translations switch and window or the language selection dropdown list This was described in more detail in Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features Creating objects 191 Tip Unless otherwise specified the descriptions in thi
186. ased browsers will also be able to see the tooltips inside the OE text area You can assign a unique identifier to a link as for embedded objects It will become the ID attribute used for JavaScript code or stylesheets in the resulting XHTML code Tip You can also select some text and click the Link button It is also possible to right click some selected text and choose the Insert link item from the context sensitive pop up menu The dialog that was described above will appear and the Text field will contain the selected text fragment 1 2 6 5 2 Removing a hyperlink To remove a link along with its text simply delete the link text in the OE text area If you want to keep the text but remove the link right click the link text and select the Remove Link item from the context sensitive pop up menu 11 2 6 5 3 Objects as links An embedded object see the Embed definition in the Glossary can also be a hyperlink If the object supports this feature the link will be included in the resulting XHTML For example it is possible to create manipulate and remove links from image objects These features are explained in the following example procedure 338 Chapter n Content Editing 1 Click on the embedded image object It will become the selected element Body noma MISIT B I aptent taciti sociosqu ad litora torquent per conubia nostra per inceptos hyme diam Nullam dignissim Cras erat Etiam porttitor auctor dolo
187. ason for this is that eZ Publish needs to know which version to display on the public siteaccess when the content object is accessed The published version of an object is also referred to as the current version All other versions are usually drafts or archived Published versions are automatically archived when another version of the same object is published since there can be at most one published version per object at a given time There can be several archived versions The object status can still be Published when some of its versions are Archived The situation is a bit more complicated when it comes to archived objects Recall that available object statuses are Draft Published and Archived and that a status is associated with the object s life cycle Following the object status will only change in that order and possibly repeat itself in a cycle For example the first status of an object may be Draft then it becomes Published then perhaps Archived It is possible to skip the draft status and go directly to published if you click the Send for publishing button without storing version 1 as a draft first The removal of objects and the built in trash system further complicate things Recall that the first draft version of a content object can be discarded without leaving any impact on the system A published object can be removed deleted from the system step 3a or 5a When removed the object s status will be set t
188. at the button will trigger an action that allows you to create a new link at the current position In that situation you have to specify both the URL for the link as well as some text to be linked However if you have selected existing text the button will convert the selected text into a link and hence the tooltip will read Make link This is shown in the screenshot below common sss rejatg Make link pand Figure 11 12 Online Editor tooltips depend on current editing situation 11 2 4 5 3 OE Help button The Help button is located on the right of the OE toolbar and looks like this 2 Layout of Online Editor elements 303 You can use this button in order to bring up the integrated help that accompanies the Online Editor Note that the integrated help contains only a summary of the topics that are covered in the online documentation For a full description refer to http ez no doc ex tensions online editor 11 2 4 5 4 Find text button The Find text button is only available with Internet Explorer and looks like this g When the Find text button is clicked a standard search dialog will appear and can be used to search for a word or phrase inside the OE text area If the target search phrase is in another text area you should use the built in search feature of your browser If you use a browser other than Internet Explorer the browser s built in search function can be used for all search tasks 11 2 4 5 5 Undo an
189. at the system has not yet assigned a value to Created Modified or Pub lished version If you look at the Current draft window these values are set for the draft version In other words simply creating an object produces a version with draft status but it does not yet affect the object itself 176 Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features m ID 160 English American Bil Created Title required Not yet published C D Modified Not yet published Short title Published version fe Not yet published zd Author _Marage versions Name Email t draft T instr Ue m Created Administrator User Modified Summary required 01 24 2007 08 38 am Administrator User Normal ov BDE 58 38 Version 1 BIEN HEEE Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Sed ut libero eu ligula aliquet vestibulum Suspendisse elementum faucibus ves magna Quisque nisl felis pharetra id accumsan mattis gravida at nibh View Figure 8 4 New object Storing the draft steps 2a and 2b will not change the status of the object The only thing that will happen is that the contents of the draft will be stored in version 1 The draft version will become available on the My drafts page and is listed as Status Draft when the version is previewed Object intormation B Tea Article p ID 160 E English American Bil Noe aed En Fe r Site settin
190. attributes content classes content objects and content nodes You will find that eZ Publish becomes more accessible and useful if you develop an un derstanding of its underlying concepts and basic terms Learning this common language will make it easier both to understand the documentation and to communicate with site administrators and developers when necessary Recall from Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management that The role of a content management system is to organize every element of content on a site regardless of the type and complexity Content is information that is organized and stored in a structured manner by eZ Publish For example content may be the properties of a news article title introduction body images Acontent type is called a content class or class for short while a specific piece of content is called a content object or object for short A content class can be thought of as a structural blueprint for a particular type of content The properties of that content are referred to as attributes Content objects are wrapped or encapsulated and structured using content nodes or just node for short Nodes can be thought of as pages or page elements on the site They are structural wrappers for content as they encapsulate objects for placement in the node tree Nodes are organized in a node tree The tree is divided into the Content Media and Users branches The node tr
191. avaScript 129 289 L Language Concepts 184 Always available object 186 Default language 185 Initial language 185 Locale 185 Main language 185 Non translatable attribute 186 Site languages 186 Translation languages 185 Default 185 Initial 185 Main 185 216 Translation languages 185 Language selection dropdown list 190 Language selection interface 183 211 Existing languages group 184 New languages group 184 Layout 4 355 Design 3 LDAP xviii Left menu 254 see Secondary menu License xvii Limitation links 144 Line 309 Line break 308 Link 359 see also Hyperlink Link class 111 111 URL 112 List 357 Bulleted 308 Change list style for li 326 Change type 323 Convert paragraph to listitem 325 Multi line list item 328 Nested 330 Numbered 308 Ordered 308 Unordered 308 Literal block 311 Literal text 311 319 357 Insert 319 Remove 321 Locale xvii 139 185 Location 93 94 94 99 140 237 245 247 254 see also Content node see also Multiple locations Add 246 Main 97 245 Remove 249 Secondary 97 245 251 Set before publishing 247 Location dropdown list 197 Location list 162 Locations switch 140 Locations window 140 246 254 Login xxiii 21 57 58 224 as Administrator 16 as Editor 16 Valid user account 16 Login interface 17 Logout 18 M Main edit window 151 158 Main language 139 185 Set 216 Main location Remove 250 Main node 97 14
192. ays the name of the user and provides links that can be used to change the user s account details In addition it also provides the Logout link to log the user out of the system The bottom part of the right area is the Bookmarks window that contains a list of the current user s bookmarks These are internal eZ Publish bookmarks that link to different nodes in the tree not to be confused with web browser bookmarks It also provides a button that can be used to bookmark the currently displayed node The Bookmarks window can be displayed or hidden using the and buttons Note that the lower part of the right area may also contain developer tools in the case of a custom configuration Search interface 65 3 2 6 Search interface The Search interface is located in the upper right corner of the Administration Interface It is always present but is disabled when in edit mode You are in edit mode whenever you are editing some content in the Object Edit Interface See Section 2 3 1 Edit mode for more information about edit mode The default behavior for the Search inter face is for the system to search for the specified word s within the entire node tree Performing searches is described below in Section 3 4 3 Searching 3 3 Administration Interface tabs This section describes the main menu of the Administration Interface Detailed descrip tions of the Content structure tab are found in Chapter 6 and Chapter 9 a detailed de
193. back form see Section 5 5 2 Feedback form class using the following attributes Name Description Sender name Subject Message Email and Recipient The Sender name Subject Message and Email attributes would be marked as information collectors When an object of this class is viewed the Sender name Subject Message and Email attributes will be displayed as input fields along with a Send form button 364 Chapter n Content Editing Contact us This is an example of how you can make a contact form on your eZ Publish site This form will be sent via e mail to the address specified in for this object Go to the Administration Interface or Website Interface and edit this object to change this text and the recipient Sender name Email Subject Message Send form Figure 11 63 Feedback form presented to site visitors Where does collected information end up 365 English American BA Name required Contact us Description Norma HABA amp udu me gr e This is an example of how you can make a contact form on your eZ Publish site This form will be sent via e mail to the address specified in for this object Go to the Administration Interface or Website Interface and edit this object to change this text and the recipient emm PERE a lt p gt DM Sender name required information collector Subject required information collector Message required informati
194. being edited These buttons and their corresponding editing actions are described in Section 9 1 2 Related objects Summary The Object Edit Interface is a special purpose interface embedded within the eZ Publish Administration Interface You are in edit mode whenever you are in the Object Edit Interface The Object Edit Interface usually consists of six windows Summary 165 Object information window reveals information about the object that is being edited The Manage versions button brings up the Version history interface which makes it possible to display a list of the versions of current object Current draft window displays information about the version that is currently being edited Translate from window shown even if you have a single language site displays information about the existing languages and allows you to select the language on which the current translation should be based You cannot use this window to add new translations as that has to be specified before entering edit mode Main edit window is where you can modify the contents of the different attributes of a selected object Related objects window makes it possible to relate other objects to the one that is being edited and view existing relations for the current object Any type of object can be connected to any other type of object This feature is typically useful in situations where you want to reuse information from elsewhere on the site Sect
195. bout Name Contact Type Article Type Article Object ID 33 Object ID 34 Node ID 47 Node ID 48 Figure 4 5 Content node tree Content node tree 97 4 3 2 2 3 1 Containers in the content node tree The content node tree reflects the overall site structure A usual way of categorizing content within the tree is by making use of containers for example folders under which relevant content objects are placed roughly in the same way as on afile system Choosing your categories and structure well will make it easier to navigate and locate content The starting point for each branch or sub branch is said to be the parent of the nodes in the branch Underneath the parents are children It can be argued whether the term children applies only to those nodes directly beneath a parent or to the entire branch We lean toward the former interpretation 4 3 2 2 4 Sort method The sort method of a node determines how the children of the node should be sorted By default nodes are sorted and displayed based on creation time It is common to override this behavior and set priority based sorting through the Administration Interface Refer to Section 9 3 2 Sorting content for more information about sorting 4 3 2 3 Content at multiple Locations In the previous section we looked at parent and object associations This section describes how content objects can exist at multiple locations within the node tree A location is a synonym for a no
196. bsite Interface is implemented as a site package called ezwebin that can be installed by the eZ Publish Setup Wizard 2 Target audience and usage This book is mainly written for editors and content managers with a light and easily comprehensible non technical presentation It is targeted at beginners who have little or no experience with eZ Publish It attempts to ease people through the learning curve by providing a clear and well structured overview of the system from an editor s point of view It includes detailed descriptions examples and how to procedures of the various editing tasks We provide a thorough description of the layout and functionality of the two main eZ Publish interfaces that are used to manage content the Administration Interface and the Website Interface The overall goal is to explain how to add modify reorganize and remove various types of content Editors and content managers work alongside other users such as webmasters and system administrators While most of the previous material on eZ Publish has focused on tech nical issues this book is written for end users These users responsibilities are related to maintaining updating and creating content on an eZ Publish site This book will take you along the path to becoming an eZ Publish content manager It is not assumed that the reader has prior knowledge related to web development pro gramming or object oriented concepts Where relevant the necessary bac
197. button Layout of Online Editor elements 297 3 Clear all the eZ Publish caches by selecting Cache management from the left menu of the Setup tab then click the Clear all caches button This should only be done by advanced users and at times when the site is exper iencing a relatively low load as it temporarily impacts site performance 4 Clear the browser caches Browsers usually cache visited pages in a folder on the local file system The next time the same pages are visited they are loaded faster because some of the information already exists on the local file system While this feature improves the speed with which pages load sometimes it may cause problems when you are updating the Online Editor The method for clearing the browser cache varies between different web browsers For Internet Explorer it is found under Internet Options in the Tools section of the main menu In Mozilla based browsers it is usually somewhere under Advanced Preferences 11 2 4 Layout of Online Editor elements The Online Editor has five elements three of which are shown in the screenshot below I Normal ipm Eire ESOS Oe company Information about this company Information about this company Information about this company Information about this company Information ab out this company Information about this company Information about this company Information about this company Information ab out this company Information about this co
198. by the user allowing nodes to be sorted in a custom order This is the most common criteria to set when not using the default 9 3 2 1 4 Sort order The sort order of a node determines the order in which the children of that node should be sorted There are two possibilities descending and ascending For example if the sort method is set to Name and the sort order is set to Ascending the underlying nodes will be alphabetically sorted from A to Z If the sort method is set to Descending the underlying nodes will be sorted from Z to A 9 3 2 2 Sorting controls The Sorting controls are located at the bottom right of the Sub items window 10 25 50 List Thumbnail Detailed 2a Name Visibility Type Modifier Modified Section Priority T GjNewsand Visible Folder Administrator User 01 18 2007 08 15 am Standard i amp a 57 Events Products Visible Folder Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 57 am Standard 2 a a A Partner Visible Frontpage Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 57 am Restricted a B fal a I Community Visible Frontpage Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 57 am Standard RB A _ Knowledge Visible Documentation page Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 58 am Standard s o a e Base Company Visible Folder Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 58 am Standard b B amp g a Delete selected Update priorities Article x English American Sorting Priority gt Ascending x Ey Figure 9 37 Sorting control
199. call that you can view and manage all versions through the Version history interface In addition you can access your own drafts on the My drafts page as described in Section 9 2 1 2 Continue editing a stored draft previously 9 2 4 1 Unpublished draft same user you Sometimes when editing an object you might accidentally close the browser or simply click the Store and exit button with the intent of resuming the edit process later The object will then have an unpublished draft The next time you try to edit the published version of the object the system will warn you about this A Possible edit conflict 02 19 2007 01 24 pm This object is already being edited by you Your most recently modified draft is version 8 last changed 02 19 2007 01 23 pm Possible actions Continue editing one of your drafts Create a new draft and start editing it Cancel the edit operation Current drafts 1 Version Translations Creator Created Modified C 8 E English American Administrator User 02 19 2007 01 23 pm 02 19 2007 01 23 pm SS een Fen Figure 9 27 Edit conflict warning Editing conflicts 223 The system is simply indicating that you have already started to edit this object but have not published the modified content yet Note that you might even have several drafts If so the window below the warning will list all your unpublished drafts for this object 9 2 4 1 1 Possible solutions The possible solutions ar
200. cally when the page is loaded The class specific attributes are e Controller Quicktime Windows media classes A checkbox that enables the visitor s ability to start stop the video Loop Flash Quicktime classes A checkbox that enables the endless replaying the file Quality Flash class You may tag Flash files with a quality identifier with a trade off between high quality and fast loading speed Controls Real video class This setting determines how the controls are displayed and which controls are displayed Examples of Real Video controls include a volume slider panel and the playback control panel with the basic play stop and start buttons You should use multimedia components with care and keep basic usability concerns in mind Relying too heavily on multimedia components can render your site inaccessible to some visitors who might not have the technical capabilities to view the files When in doubt refer to the site specification documents if they exist or contact your site admin istrator Summary This section summarizes the chapter but can also be read as a quick overview of the built in content classes of eZ Publish When working with text there are three relevant datatypes the Text line that stores a single line of unformatted text the Text block that stores multiple lines of unformatted text and the XML block that validates and stores multiple lines of formatted text The only difference be
201. cation The following screenshot shows how to make a link out of an embedded content object Body aptent taciti sociosqu ad litora torquent per conubia nostra per inceptos hymenaeos Aliquam lobortis ornare iam Nullam dignissim Cras erat Etiam porttitor auctor dolor In in tellus vitae est ultrices aliquet Integer ravida sem tristique tortor lt link title Link to eZ Systems href http www ez no gt lt embed size medium align center href ezobject 182 gt lt link gt Praesent gravida rhoncus turpis Ut eget orci non sapien pretium malesuada Aliquam feugiat porta magna Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Nulla lobortis aliquet nibh Pellentesque leo lorem semper nec adipiscing id tristique uis sapien Curabitur ut tortor porta lacus venenatis suscipit Figure 11 62 XML example 4 embedded object with link 11 3 1 6 2 Anchors The lt anchor gt tag makes it possible to insert HTML anchors inside the XML block The inserted anchors will work like standard HTML anchors anchor name gt The name parameter must be set to a unique identifier for the anchor Anchors can be referenced by appending the hash character followed directly by the name of the anchor for example http www example com hobbies music Tip To edit an anchor tag with the OE refer to Section 11 2 6 5 4 Inserting an anchor 11 3 1 7 Tables Tables can be created in
202. ccesses basically define two things Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management How eZ Publish recognizes the site interface that is being accessed Miscellaneous configuration settings that will override the defaults The most significant configuration overrides are the design settings and the database used By adding siteaccesses it is possible to create new sites and or add new interfaces to an existing site For example if two small companies cooperate to put up a webserver with an eZ Publish installation they can share the installation and still have their own content by having separate siteaccesses and databases Another example is a corporation wishing to store public information and internal information in different databases due to security and privacy policies The following illustration shows how siteaccesses relate to other parts of the system It is not expected that you understand the details we include this here only for a general overview ACCESS RULES www example com public admin example com admin SITE ACCESSES public admin Database example Database example Design public Design admin Var example Var example L1 L 8 c a DATABASE DESIGNS VAR DIRECTORY B Figure 1 2 Siteaccess related to access rules and resources One way to recognize a site interface is through the address URL in the browser In other words a site interface refers to the visual presentation whereas a siteacce
203. ce See Also Version Content object 374 Editing conflicts Editor user Edit mode Embed Encapsulation Extension eZ Publish Glossary Editing conflicts happen when several editors are editing the same piece content making eZ Publish uncertain of which version of the content you want to edit The three main scenarios that create an editing conflict are Unpublished draft same user Unpublished draft different user and Unpublished draft multiple users including you Preventative measures include always exiting edit mode properly and regularly managing your drafts See Also Edit mode Draft By default a user belonging to the Editor user group has access to add edit move and remove most of the content on the site See Also User account When you are viewing come content in the Content Editing Interface in the Website Interface or the Object Edit Interface in the Admin istration Interface you are in edit mode You usually enter edit mode by clicking either the Edit or Create button Through the embedding feature you can insert images into the rich text XML block attributes such as article bodies Some content objects can be displayed within other content For example an image can be shown within an article Related objects are displayed in edit mode with embed links that can be used to embed the object See Also Related object All content objects are usually represented encapsulated by o
204. ce from the Website Interface and the Object Edit Interface from the Administration Interface and it requires JavaScript support in your browser to function The Online Editor has five major parts The context sensitive pop up menu is a familiar component from working in the Administration Interface The OE text area contains an editable visualization of XML code as formatted text The OE status bar is located directly below the OE text area and displays useful information about the element where the cursor is currently located The OE toolbar contains tools for editing the content that is displayed in the OE text area Its buttons are very similar to those found in many word processors For example if you select a part of the text and click the Bold button the selected text will become bold and the OE will take care of inserting the corresponding XML tag When some of the OE toolbar buttons or items in the context sensitive pop up menu are clicked modal dialogs or windows will appear providing access to addi tional editing tools depending on the current setting Styling in XML only includes logical structure layout related design issues are handled separately from content with templates and CSS For more control with markup as a self study tool or if you for some reason do not have the OE available you can manually edit the XML tags You may temporarily turn off the OE for all XML input fields by clicking the Disable editor button belo
205. ce makes it possible to view and manage the versions that belong to the object that is being edited It can be accessed by clicking the Manage versions button located inside the Object inform ation window Via this interface you can remove duplicate and edit exist ing versions as well as compare the differences between versions See Also Version Object Information window Every version has a version number This number is used by the system to organize and keep track of the different versions of an object The ver sion number is automatically increased for each version that is created inside an object See Also Version Content object The Version preview interface within the Object Edit Interface makes it possible to generate a preview of any version that exists on the system In contrast to the Preview window that simply shows the attribute contents this interface lets you view the contents with the design and layout of a particular siteaccess See Also Object Edit Interface Administration Interface In addition to existing in several versions each version of a content object is located somewhere in the publishing life cycle at any given time a specific version has a version status The terms state and status are often used interchangeably A newly created version has a Draft status and this status will remain until that version is published Archived is the status set for previously published versions that have been rep
206. cell properties In XHTML tables and cells have adjustable properties that affect the visual layout The Online Editor lets you edit these easily through modal dialogs In other words you need not to be an expert webmaster or designer in order to add some styling to your tables The steps below show how to edit the table properties 1 Right click somewhere inside the table itself and select Table Properties from the context sensitive pop up menu 2 You will see a modal dialog called Table Properties e http nemo bms ez no Table Pr D X LETS dT TE CES Rows Columns FE S Size Border ep p Class none z Properties Attribute name Value There are no attributes defined ror f cancer Figure 11 55 Modal dialog for table properties 350 Chapter n Content Editing You can use this dialog to change the width either 0 100 or number of pixels the border pixels and the class The Rows and Columns fields are disabled and only available when creating the table see Figure 11 46 Modal dialog for insert table If you need to change the number of rows and or columns you have to use the Insert row Insert column Delete row and Delete column buttons as described earlier 3 Click OK when you are finished The procedure below shows the corresponding steps to edit the properties of single cells 1 Right click somewhere inside a table cell and select Cell Properties from the pop up
207. cess Then you could move content to that folder as needed This requires that your site administrator has configured access restrictions for the dedicated folder and given your user account sufficient permissions to work with that folder such as moving content into and out of it and viewing the folder in the Administration Inter face Another alternative is to use the show hide feature This is considered an advanced content management task and is not covered here in detail Interested readers should refer to http ez no doc Your site administrator must have enabled this feature and given you permission to use it The show hide feature allows your content to remain at its location within the node tree while giving you the ability to toggle its display on and off We re commend that only experienced content editors use this feature and only after first con sulting the site administrator 9 3 6 Publishing at multiple Locations Recall from Section 4 3 2 1 Locations that a location is the same as a node and refers to where a content object can be found in the content node tree A node refers to the 246 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing published version of an object but objects can be referred to by several nodes You might want to allow a content object to be accessed at multiple locations within the content structure When an object has multiple locations only one node can be considered the main location of
208. ch interface Refer to the documentation at http ez no doc for more details 3 4 3 3 Troubleshooting In some situations the Search interface might not behave as expected Two common situations are that the Search interface is disabled or that the search result is something other than what you expected for example the search returns no results Both are de scribed below with some common solutions 76 Chapter 3 An Overview of the Administration Interface 3 4 3 3 1 Search interface disabled In some circumstances the Search interface may be completely or partially disabled If so check the following Are you in edit mode Recall that the Search interface is disabled whenever the Ad ministration Interface is in edit mode This prevents improper termination of the editing session To perform the search you should exit the Object Edit Interface by clicking the Send for publishing Discard draft or Store and exit buttons You can also log in to the Administration Interface in a different browser window and perform the search there This is only recommended for advanced users Are the radio buttons disabled Recall that the radio buttons can be used to limit a search only when one of the first three tabs on the main menu is selected Otherwise you can still perform a simple standard search but you cannot limit the search to the current node because you are not in the node tree If you want to make use of the radio buttons to l
209. ch you want to view manage versions Recall that the pop up menu is accessed through the left tree menu or in the Sub items window This is how you can access the interface without first entering edit mode Tip In the Website Interface click the Manage versions button on the Website Toolbar when editing a content object This will bring up the Version overview page see Fig ure 2 22 Version overview page which is very similar to the Version history interface 9 2 2 2 Comparing different versions The following procedure shows how to compare two versions of the same content object As an example we will be using the News and Events folder shown above in Fig ure 9 10 Version history interface 1 Inthe Version history interface select the two versions you want to compare from the dropdown lists at the bottom right of the Versions for xxx window In addition for multilingual sites select the language for which you want to examine changes Versions for lt News and Events gt 5 Version Status Edited language Creator Created Modified X Archived English American Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am 12 20 2006 08 56 am E Era Published NN German Administrator User 01 18 2007 08 15 am 01 18 2007 08 15 am EH 4 Draft English American Administrator User 02 19 2007 09 57 am 02 19 2007 10 31 am T a4 Draft Em German Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 19 am 02 19 2007 10 19 am F5 Draft English American Bergf
210. choose Heading 1 The empty paragraph will be transformed into a heading The lt h1 gt tag will appear in the status bar 3 Type in Chapter 3 It will appear in accordance with the selected text style 4 Press the Enter key to terminate the heading At this point the text style will be automatically set to Normal so that you can continue with writing normal text The lt p gt tag will appear in the status bar 5 Type in the paragraph for this chapter The final result is show below Online Editor daily tasks 317 Chapter 2 Ut congue nisi vel malesuada vulputate lacus torto nisi et nulla varius dapibus Mauris diam elit euismc tempor vel pretium eget est Aenean risus Nam ti malesuada ut dolor Proin tincidunt tincidunt urna luctus quam a massa Pellentesque est nibh dicturr tellus Cras eget elit ut leo pharetra pharetra Suspe Chapter 3 Class aptent taciti sociosqu ad litora torquent per co Nullam dignissim Cras erat Etiam porttitor auctor c tortor Praesent gravida rhoncus turpis lt p gt Figure 11 19 Set text style before writing result Tip When using Internet Explorer you have to place the cursor inside the new empty heading step 2 before typing the text 11 2 6 1 4 Emphasizing text bold and italic The following example demonstrates how you can use the Bold and Italic buttons to emphasize text These buttons were introduced in Section 11 2 5 1 2 Text formatting emphasizi
211. ck the Send for publishing button for example 11 1 3 Input validation example Let us look at an edit mode example that will trigger a validation error For illustrative purposes we have disabled the Online Editor so that you can view the specific code Input validation example 291 A The draft could not be stored 02 26 2007 12 38 pm Required data is either missing or is invalid Summary lt th gt is not allowed to be a child of lt th gt Edit lt conference gt Article English American El Title required Summer conference Short title konference Author Name Email r Administrator User bmsGez no Summary required lt tr gt lt th gt Creator lt th gt lt th gt Created lt th gt lt th gt Section lt th gt lt th gt Versions lt th gt lt th gt Translations lt th gt lt th gt Node ID lt th gt Object ID lt tr gt Enable editor lt table class list width 498px gt l s Figure 11 1 Validation error report Administration Interface The above screenshot shows the error message at the top of the Object Edit Interface The corresponding scenario for the Website Interface would look very similar The message specifies the attribute s connected to the validation error the summary in this case The input field for this attribute is highlighted in some way such as with red text The problem syntax is stated here a table header tag has not been closed 292
212. cle Title required New company website released Figure 5 1 Text line input field article The next screenshot shows two input fields a text line at the top and a text block at the bottom The example shows the subject line and message body of a feedback form Note the different heights of the two input fields XML block datatype rich text format 103 p Contact us Feedback form Last modified 12 20 2006 08 58 am Administrator User English American Ej n Subject Message English American x ca Ed Figure 5 2 Text line and block input fields feedback form Text blocks are used as is since they do not permit formatting inside the text Therefore this kind of content is often referred to as plain text This does not mean that text blocks as a whole cannot be styled via CSS for the public siteaccess You might wonder why you would want multi line text that is not formatted when web standards like HTML and XML see below can make text look so much more fancy and stylish One reason is that you usually do not want to give site visitors formatting control over the content they submit For example you would not want the comment to a news article to contain blinking pink text or links to external pages that advertise products Another reason to restrict styling is that you might want to use consistent styling for at tributes in content created by site editors For example you might wan
213. content hierarchy Nodes are organized in a node tree The tree is divided into three major branches Content Media and Users and some other parts not frequently used by content editors If you are using the Administration Interface these parts will make more sense Most of the time you will be working with the Content branch of the node tree The node tree is also known as the content hierarchy which is an important concept when creating new content Just like you organize files on your computer in directories content objects of the Article and Image classes can be organized with containers such as objects of the Folder class 1 5 User accounts The public siteaccess is available to all site visitors Access to the Website Interface used for adding and editing content and the Administration Interface used for ad vanced administrative tasks requires a username and password After logging in asan Editor you can add and edit content as an Administrator you can add and modify user rights and other advanced settings in addition to the Editor tasks 16 Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management In Depth User roles The ability to perform various tasks on the website such as view hidden areas of the site add or edit content post to forums modify the site settings and so on depends on the group to which the user belongs and the policies assigned to that group Groups and policies are configured in the Admin
214. context refers to entire nodes or objects This is different than removing single versions and translations from a content object Instead the object will be deleted and completely disappear from the content node tree You can remove nodes from the system using several approaches This operation works in a similar way as when you remove files and directories from a file system If you re move a node that has children those nodes will be removed as well For example if you remove a folder that contains several articles both the folder itself and the articles in it will be removed Deleting content 243 The system will always ask for confirmation and give you the option to keep the removed objects in the trash as previously described in Section 9 2 5 1 Trash The following screenshot shows the removal confirmation dialog Contirm location removal Some of the items that are about to be removed contain sub items Some of the subtrees or objects selected for removal are used by other objects Select the menu from the content tree and Advanced gt Reverse related for subtree Removing the items will also result in the removal of their sub items Are you sure you want to remove the items along with their contents Item Type Sub items LJ Home News and Events Folder 22 items Move to trash Figure 9 46 Removal confirmation dialog In the example above we initiated the removal of the original occurrence of the News and Event
215. ct Edit Interface and also provide you with a reference guide for working with daily editing tasks 7 1 Interface layout The following screenshot shows how the Object Edit Interface is typically displayed Bringing up the Object Edit Interface 151 7 1 1 p E Administrator User 143 E PEL ae Title required 12 22 2006 08 53 Fresh fruit Administrator Usei Modified Short title Administrator User Published version Author 4 Name Email L I Administrator User bms ez no E a a LEES Created Add to bookmarks 01 19 2007 10 51 am i e Administrator User ummary required 01 19 2007 10 51 al pn Administrator User Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Quisque sagittis laoreet a vr mE urna Nam rhoncus risus eget enim Pellentesque erat libero pharetra non pretium vel commodo vitae arcu Clear Quick settings fia Translate from E E No translation lt p gt C E English 3 Class none Til online Editor 42 Ez Disable edito Section Standard 6 Body Normat Jeee 6 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Cras et mi Maecenas pretium magna quis erat Integer cursus odio sed leo Maecenas in arcu ac mauris volutpat aliquet Mauris viverra felis dictum cursus pretium mauris leo porttitor libero id laoreet nisi justo a turpis Vestibulum semper dapibus purus
216. ction 3 5 1 Context sensitive pop up menu The Version history interface is shown in the screenshot below ID 2 Bergfrid Skaara 143 Eal Version Status Edited language Creator Created Modified Created Br Archived A English American Administrator User 12 22 2006 08 39 am 12 22 2006 08 53am E 12 22 2006 08 53 am Administrator User v2 Archived English American Administrator User 01 02 2007 12 44 pm 01 02 2007 01 19pm E Mound L4 Published English American Administrator User 01 02 2007 01 27 pm 01 02 2007 01 32pm 7 01 02 2007 01 22 pm Administrator User Ts Draft EB English American Administrator User 01 22 2007 10 02am 01 22 2007 10 56am E r Add to bookmarks ei version r6 Draft E3 English American Berg rid Skaara 01 23 2007 01 22 pm 01 23 2007 01 22pm B A fom ane EN Published version Version Translations Creator Created Modified Copy translation 4 EA English American Administrator User 01 02 2007 01 27 pm 01 02 2007 01 32 pm Ergish America EJ Version Edited language Creator Created Modified 5 EE English American Administrator User 01 22 2007 10 02 am 01 22 2007 10 56 am a 6 E3 English American Bergfrid Skaara 01 23 2007 01 22 pm 01 23 2007 01 22 pm ag Figure 8 1 Version history interface In addition to providing an overview of an object s versions the Version history interface makes it possible to remove copy and edit existing versions As the screenshot indicates the interface s
217. cts encapsulated by the nodes In other words children of a node are listed according to a timeline from the most recently to least recently published object or the reverse The timestamp is set when an object is published the first time and will be almost the same as the modified time for the first version on the object The order of this list will only change when nodes are added or removed from this list In other words once published editing the corresponding object will not affect sorting This is the default behavior if no sorting criteria are set 9 3 2 1 2 Sort by modified timestamp This method sorts nodes by the modification time and date of the current versions of the objects encapsulated by the nodes The timestamp is modified each time a new version of the object is published and a new current version is created This value will be almost equal to the modified value from the current version In other words children of the node are listed according to a timeline from the most recently to least recently modified or the reverse The order of this list will change when a node is updated Sorting content 235 Tip The reason the timestamp on the content object and version may differ is because of the time used in the publishing process This sometimes takes a few seconds depending on the server 9 3 2 1 3 Sort by priority This method sorts the nodes by user defined priorities Every node has a priority field that can be set
218. d for example http If you have chosen ezobject or eznode a button labeled Browse will appear above the URL field Type ezobject Browse URL ezobject Figure 11 40 Browse button for creating internal link Clicking the Browse button will open another modal dialog that will allow the selection of objects that already exist in the system This is very similar to the Online Editor daily tasks 337 Browse interface see the Browse interface definition in the Glossary except that it does not allow the selection of multiple items Select the desired object and click the OK button The address will appear in the URL field for example eznode 114 The Type dropdown list is optional you can type the link address directly into the URL field You have to specify a valid external or internal URL address this is a required parameter JavaScript is not allowed here for security reasons You can specify a class that should be used when the link is rendered See Sec tion 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements for more information By default the linked page will open in the current browser window or tab You can check the Open in new window box in order to have the link open in a new browser window or tab You can specify a short title text It will appear as a tooltip when the mouse pointer is hovering above the link The tooltips will be displayed on the site pages Users of Mozilla b
219. d Events Gg Investor bulletins M Technology E Product releases E amp Products E Food Software Cars Things E Boxes Books _ Partner _ Community Multimedia Downloads G3 Pictures y Forums Figure 3 13 Content structure to be searched The figure below shows the results of a search for the term Release Note that the search is case insensitive meaning that release and Release will both provide the same results Release For more options try the Advanced search Search for lt Release gt returned 2 matches 3 New product release Article 3 Product pre release File Figure 3 14 Search 1 Release Searching 75 The search term is shown in the input field of the Search interface Now look at the search results We entered Release but both matches are lowercase illustrating case insensitivity What may at first appear more surprising is that the two folders Product releases and Press Releases seen near the top of the secondary menu refer back to Figure 3 13 Content structure to be searched are not included in the search result This is because there is not an exact match between release and releases If instead you searched for press or releases you would get the Press Releases folder as a result But if you search for press release no match will be found We encourage you to experiment with the Search interface and explore scenarios like th
220. d Redo buttons The Actions area of the OE toolbar contains buttons to undo or redo the last operations These buttons work similarly to popular word processing applications The Undo button can be used to reverse the last operation or to remove the last entry that was typed Keep clicking this button to reverse multiple operations Es The Redo button can be used to reverse or restore the last undo operation Keep clicking this button in order to restore multiple operations ial Warning Some operations cannot be reversed In addition the undo and redo functions work dif ferently in Internet Explorer and Mozilla based browsers In general Internet Explorer is a lot more permissive Refer to the online OE manual at http ez no doc for complete information on the undo and redo functions and a list of browser differences 11 2 4 5 6 Special character button The Special character button is located in the Special Tools area of the OE toolbar and looks like this al 304 Chapter n Content Editing This button allows you to insert special characters that may not normally be found on your keyboard such as the copyright symbol or characters from languages other than your system s default language The modal dialog associated with this button was previ ously shown in Figure 11 7 Modal dialog Below we outline how to insert a special character in the Online Editor 1 Position the cursor at the location where you wish to insert a
221. d by the Parent Node ID and the Object ID described above As mentioned previously a node can only refer to one parent node and one content object but a content object can be referred to by several nodes This is because several nodes can have identical values for the Object ID As a result the same object can appear at different locations within the tree 96 Chapter 4 Content Management Concepts Objects and Nodes The following illustrations show a simplified example of how objects are referenced by nodes to make up a content node tree The first shows the tree from a system perspective whereas the others show the same scenario from a user perspective OBJECTS NODES Object ID 30 Name Content x Node ID 2 Type Folder LN Parent node 1 icc ad Object ID 30 a Object ID 31 Oo Name News w z Type Folder ul m Object ID 32 Ue Node ID 45 Node ID 46 z Name Company v Parent node 2 Parent node 2 o Type Folder n x Object ID 31 Object ID 32 g Vu E m n They we N z Object ID 33 TL se m Name About v TORS Seo seteake sete Type Article Node ID 47 Node ID 48 Object ID 34 alo II Parent node 46 Parent node 46 Name Contact x Object ID 33 Object ID 34 Type Article EL e Figure 4 4 Objects nodes and the content node tree Name Content Type Folder Object ID 30 Node ID 2 Name News Name Company Type Folder Type Folder Object ID 31 Object ID 32 Node ID 45 Node ID 46 ra Name A
222. d normally occur in the content node tree Note the difference between the Forums and Forum classes 116 Chapter 5 Content Classes Table 5 1 Forum related classes Class Description Forums A container that holds forums Forum A container used to organize forum topics Forum topic Defines the topic itself and contains the topic s replies Forum reply An individual entry on a forum topic Let us illustrate the relationship between these classes by looking at the forums page of our demo site see Section 2 2 Example strategies in the Preface on how to access the running tutorial demo site Community F orums Forums container Example content Forum Topics Posts Last reply ES r 0 0 Tech discussion ic 1 3 4 i An example of the general forum 12 20 2006 08 58 am E Setur 0 0 Etiam erat urna tincidunt id Figure 5 14 Forums page 5 5 3 1 Forums class all the forums To ensure that your forums are presented in a way that is practical for this type of content objects of a wrapping Forums container class note the plural form in the class name hold all forums on your site In other words objects of the Forums class are top level containers for objects of the other forum related classes not to be confused with the site top level containers for the Content Media and Users branches A typical forums page will appear similar to Figure 5 14 Forums page It shows a listing with forums and the topic
223. d only through the Administration Interface not through the Website Interface The following example describes how to delete a folder with several sub items The sub items will be deleted as well The screenshot below shows the folder object to be removed e Preview Details Transhtions Locations Rehtions Content structure Home Press Releases Folder amp News and Events amp Products Laat n 2x English American Bil amp Partner English American Move amp _ Community Multimedia amp Downloads Sco TERES List Thumbnail Detailed amp E New company website Visibility Type Modifier Modified Section E Good results in the fo F 53 New company website released Visible Article Administrator User 02 19 2007 02 27 pm Standard 5 New product release E p 3 T E Good results in the fourth quarter Visible Article Administrator User 02 19 2007 02 27 pm Standard F Latest Information Fre s 7 juice Lj 53 New product release Visible Article Administrator User 02 19 2007 02 27 pm Standard 3 3 Tea r E Latest Information From This Visible Article Administrator User 02 19 2007 02 27 pm Standard E Coffee Company 5 Fruit Li 5 juice Visible Article Administrator User 02 19 2007 02 27 pm Standard More dummy data 5 3 Tea Visible Article Administrator User 02 19 2007 02 27 pm Standard 7 Download statistics rJ RRINE N Lj 5 Coffee Visible Article Administrator User 02 19 2007 02 27 pm Stand
224. d to the top element of the content node tree branch associated with the selected tab The newly saved draft Translate from window 157 will be available in the My drafts list located under the My account tab It can be accessed to resume editing at any time This is the same action as clicking the Save draft button at the bottom of the Main edit window except that the latter does not exit edit mode See Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing for a detailed description of the publishing process and smart editing using drafts 7 4 Translate from window The Translate from window displays information about the existing languages and allows you to select the language on which the current translation will be based Translate from No translation C English American Figure 7 6 Translate from window This window is shown for all sites regardless of whether the site is single language or multilingual However if you have a single language site this window will only contain one language and if you click the Translate button you will get a message in the upper right corner of the Main edit window that says something like Translating content from English American eng US to English American eng US since you only have one language Saving or publishing will simply update the existing contents of that object Therefore for single language sites you can ignore the Translate from window For multilingual sites the Translate
225. dards 107 Administration Interface xxiii 1 5 9 21 21 22 57 57 86 110 127 149 167 Bookmarks 68 Content structure tab 127 189 Daily editing 189 Create content 191 Edit content 198 Edit mode 287 Layout 61 Left menu 64 130 see also Secondary menu Login 17 58 Logout 18 Main area 64 128 134 Details window 138 Locations window 140 Preview window 135 136 Relations window 141 Sorting controls 235 Sub items window 143 Translations window 139 Main menu 63 65 128 see also Tabs Media library 253 Menus and switches 76 My account tab My drafts 199 Navigation 66 Object Edit Interface 149 Organization 61 Path 63 Requirements 18 Right area 64 Search interface 65 Secondary menu 64 130 see also Left menu Tabs 65 Translation management 208 Version management 200 Administrator User account 16 110 Alternative image text 106 Anchor 309 310 334 339 361 see also Hyperlink Insert 339 340 Internal link 340 Anonymous user 16 259 292 Archived status 94 180 204 Article class 14 104 110 119 130 Alternative image text 106 Enable comments 114 see also Comment class Attribute 14 85 86 101 129 149 167 182 189 287 Content class attribute 88 Generic controls 90 Datatype specific 91 Disable translation 90 Information collector 90 Required 90 Searchable 90 Instance 92 Name and ID 87 Non translatable 186 209 Optional 193
226. de An object can thus be assigned to several nodes thereby appearing at multiple locations in the content node tree For example this feature can be used to place a specific news article at two locations the front page and the news archive When an object has multiple locations and is thus associated with more than one node only one node can be considered the main node of the object The main node usually represents the object s original location in the tree where it was first put The other nodes can be thought of as additional or secondary nodes or locations Among other things the main node is used to avoid duplicate search hits and to allow you to set access permissions for different sections of the node tree A search result returns only the main nodes Sections are beyond the scope of this book interested readers should refer to the documentation at http ez no doc or the Glossary definition of Section More details about publishing at multiple locations and hands on descriptions are found in Section 9 3 6 Publishing at multiple locations Objects that are published at multiple locations might call for extra attention in some editing operations These issues will be described alongside the relevant editing operations in the upcoming chapters The following illustrations show an example of a structure where an object has multiple locations in the tree 98 OBJECTS Object ID 30 Name Content Y Type Folder Object I
227. dia librai User accounts Websho Design Setup My account Home Details Transhtions Locations Relations curentuser Ls E Administrator User amp News and Events Change information amp g Products ast modified 12 20 2006 08 56 am Administrator Use English Amerkan FEI Change password H x amp Partner Name H Logout amp _ Community Home ca Bookmarks Multi ig Multimedia Billboard Downloads Corporate banner Add to bookmarks i Pict ag Pictures Left column _ Forums Press Releases Clear cache l E F Knowledge Base enter colina amp ag Company Latest Information From This Company 3 Investor Relatid NE gt English American gt Ed Move Remove Quick settings fij Trash Small Medium Large KJ Sub items 6 10 25 50 List Thumbnail Detailed 2a Name Type Priority V gg News and Events Folder V Products Folder 3 Partner Frontpage Li Community Frontpage L Knowledge Base Documentation page T gg Company Folder Delete Selected Update priorities Figure 3 6 Navigation zones in the Administration Interface The most convenient method for navigating the tree is to use the secondary menu This menu is used to explore the node tree by opening different branches just as you would do when navigating a local file system The secondary menu for the first three tabs in the Administration Interface allow you to navigate the Content Media and Users branches The a
228. dified Section gginvestorbulletins Visible Folder Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 57 am Standard amp amp A Technology Visible Folder Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 57 am Standard EP 5 4 ggProductreleases Visible Folder Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 57 am Standard EP Sal A jPress Releases Visible Folder Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard EU 5 I Events Visible Event calendar Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard EH S A Update priorities Aricie gt English American gt Sorting Published gt Descending gt Figure 6 16 Sub items window detailed view 6 2 7 3 Node list The node list is the focus of the Sub items window displaying all of the nodes that are located beneath the current one The checkboxes on the left side in default list view mode can be used to select nodes for removal Above the checkboxes there is a button that can be used to invert the current selection For example if no nodes are selected clicking this button will cause all nodes to be selected 146 Chapter 6 Content Structure Tab Layout in Detail 6 2 7 4 Removing nodes The removal of nodes or more specifically the content objects they refer to can be carried out on the selected nodes by clicking the Remove button The remove delete feature is described in Section 9 3 5 Deleting content 6 2 7 5 Creating nodes Creating new objects is explained in Chapter 9
229. displays information about the top level node itself fol lowed by a list of the nodes that are directly below it 66 Chapter 5 An Overview of the Administration Interface Menu item tab Description User accounts Clicking the User accounts tab displays the top of the Users branch another branch of the node tree The purpose of this tree is to store users and user groups in a structured way If this tab is selected the secondary menu 3 displays an interactive tree containing the nodes that belong to the Users branch The main area 4 will dis play information about the top level node itself followed by a list of the nodes that are directly below it This book does not cover user management beyond what is described in this chapter and in Chapter 1 Interested readers should refer to http ez no doc Webshop Clicking the Webshop tab displays an area used to view and modify information that is related to the built in e commerce engine the Webshop This section should only be used if eZ Publish is set up to host a Webshop The Webshop in the Administration Interface is beyond the scope of this book Managing products through the Website Interface was covered in Section 24 Webshop Interested readers should refer to the documentation at http ez no doc for more information Design Clicking the Design tab displays an area used to view and modify the visual elements and layout of the site Refer to Cha
230. dit interface Resource Website Interface Content Editing Interface Online Editor Administration Interface Object Edit Interface Online Editor By default the Object Edit Interface makes use of the Online Editor a WYSIWYG editor integrated with eZ Publish Acontent object consists of one or more versions This additional layer makes it pos sible to have different versions of the same content 150 Chapter 7 The Object Edit Interface Each version further consists of one or more translations The translation layer makes it possible to represent the same version of the same content in multiple languages A translation consists of attributes In this chapter you will find information about The layout of the Object Edit Interface The features of the Object Edit Interface windows the Object information Current draft Translate from Main edit Related objects and Section windows This chapter aims to give you a descriptive and illustrated overview of the Object Edit Interface However it does not cover specific editing operations These are found in Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing with step by step procedures screen shots and examples General issues are presented in the layout section followed by dedicated explanations of the different windows that constitute the Object Edit Interface The chapter closes with a summary This material should give content editors valuable insight on the Obje
231. dministration Inter face this chapter is probably the most important part of the book It will be a very handy reference in your day to day use of eZ Publish Recall that Content is information that is organized and stored in a structured manner by eZ Publish For example it may be the components of a news article title introduction body images Acontent type is called a content class or class for short while a specific piece of content is called a content object or object for short A content class can be thought of as a structural blueprint for a particular type of content The properties of that content are referred to as attributes A usual way of categorizing content within the content hierarchy or node tree is by making use of containers for example folders under which relevant content objects are placed roughly in the same way as on a file system A content object consists of one or more versions Every time an object is created or edited a new version is automatically created by the system The Version history interface makes it possible to view and manage the versions that belong to an object It can be accessed by clicking the Manage versions button located inside the Object information window of the Object Edit Interface or by selecting Advanced Manage versions from the context sensitive pop up menu A version can exist in multiple translations the third dimension of content objects A t
232. dow Edit esee yere nen enn ner neuen 212 Translation interface translator mode sssseseeeee 214 Language selection interface new translation cesses 215 Set main language nyimas mm 217 Remoye selected Version onsec nete EE E EEE 218 Copy trans lation iis ccna iena a a Sa tang a a Dated n a aa ae a 220 Copy translation resulten oisinn isine i EEEa EE EE i 221 Editconflict Wafnlfg esa p dp e ote e Rc pe ERE eee SeN 222 Edit conflict warning other users cseseseeeenemene 224 Version history interface resume draft sse 226 Tits uide it en i e e o e HEU uiri 228 Content hierarchy ieu eee ree ertet eed Pea Lee der eroe ee eun oe reb ed i 228 Confirm removal move to trash ccccecececeenee cece enecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenes 229 Content TD rash os snc ceed seed n te uer d Ene oo Rear ToU S shan see EO Gor ER UTOR EDU eon ce 229 Object retrieval window esses nee heme hene nente enne 230 Result oFtrash retrieval 5 eco be et o e pete a ERES ee eX Ree re RES depen 230 Version preview interface sisi rere tb eene eere nee nene deeper deut 232 sorting Controls uuo oboe sesto ates bnt e veda Eee esae aUe eM Eras A 235 Locations window before move ssssssssesseseeseeneenememenmen ene 238 Browse interface select new location sseeee m 238 Locations window after move sssessesseseseenene eee hehehe 238
233. dow and select Remove If your user account has insufficient permissions this option will most likely still be shown in the menu but selecting Remove will produce an error message 9 3 5 1 3 Removing multiple nodes The Sub items window makes it possible to select and remove several nodes within the same operation Here you can specify which sub items to remove compared to automat ically deleting all children as in the previous two approaches Use the checkboxes to select the nodes that you wish to remove then click the Delete selected button 10 25 50 List Thumbnail Detailed Name Visibility Type Modifier Modified Section gglinvestor bulletins Visible Folder Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 57 am Standard EU 8 A gg Technology Visible Folder Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 57 am Standard EP 2a 59 gg Product releases Visible Folder Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 57 am Standard 2 59 Press Releases Visible Folder Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard EU 8 A r _ Events Visible Event calendar Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard EP S A Delete selected Update priorities Article x English American z Sorting Published v Descending gt Figure 9 48 Remove multiple selected objects through the Sub items window Publishing at multiple locations 245 9 3 5 2 Alternatives to removing content Warning Do not delete users on your system User management is
234. ds What is new is the Product number field used to hold the number or model name for the product as well as the Price attribute and some additional options seen in the screenshots below Price Price 89 00 Tax Price including tax Tax type Std 0 gt Figure 2 19 Product Price attribute Managing Webshop orders 43 The Price attribute is a collection of elements related to the price As you can see from the screenshot it contains the product price a checkbox for turning VAT on off and a VAT type To learn more about price and VAT features in eZ Publish refer to the eZ Publish documentation at http ez no doc Additional options Option set name Customization Options u Priority lo 1 Name Color Set Options Option Additional price Default T Color 10 C Gray 0 C Delete selected Add option Delete selected Add multioption Figure 2 20 Product Options attribute The additional options are for you or a webmaster to populate They are for alternatives that the customer can buy with the product You add option sets by clicking the button Add multioption and add options within an option set by clicking the Add option button To remove option sets mark the set you want to remove then click the Delete selected button If you want to remove an option within an option set mark the checkbox and click the button associated with that option set The components of an option set are opt
235. duced in Chapter 5 related to content classes used for user interaction The Feedback formclass is typically used to add Contact us functionality allowing visitors to send messages to a specified recipient through the website For example sales related feedback could be sent to sales yourcompany com while requests for help would be sent to support yourcompany com Information collection is about content management and not so much content editing In fact the editing part is done by the visitors of your site The actions following content submission are taken care of by the system This section is in depth material for interested readers It will provide you with some understanding of what is going on and where the collected data ends up Moreover the examples and practical tips assume that you have access to the Administration Interface Readers familiar with the contents of Chapter 4 should have sufficient knowledge to understand this presentation What is information collection 363 11 4 1 What is information collection Itis possible to gather user input when a node referencing an information collector object is viewed This means that some part of the content on a specific page is set up to gather data It is typically useful when it comes to the creation of feedback forms surveys polls and so on With feedback forms for example collected information can be emailed to the site administrator or to a specified address once the f
236. e Media library and User accounts tabs the sec ondary menu displays the node tree for either the Content Media or Users branches 129 The context sensitive pop up menu contains functions that are specific to the item from which the menu was invoked providing quick access to commonly used functions The pop up menu can be brought up by clicking one of the icons to the left of a node in the tree menu or Sub items window provided that JavaScript is supported and enabled in your browser Acontent type is called a content class or class for short while a specific piece of content is called a content object or object for short A content class can be thought of as a structural blueprint for a particular type of content The properties of that content are referred to as attributes Content objects are wrapped or encapsulated and structured using content nodes or nodes for short Nodes can be thought of as pages or page elements on the site and are organized in a node tree The node tree is also known as the content hierarchy Clicking the Content structure tab will bring you to the top of the Content branch The main area will display information about the top level node itself along with a list of the nodes that are directly below it In this chapter you will find information about The secondary menu and the features provided by the pop up menu The layout of the main area The six windows of the main area th
237. e think of a web sign up form you are likely to have some input fields marked required Pressing the Submit button without filling in all the required fields results in a warning message asking you to fill them in The Searchable control specifies whether the data stored for the attribute should be indexed by eZ Publish s built in search engine All content that has been in dexed will be searched when you use the Search interface located in the top right corner of the Administration Interface Keep this mark for indexing feature in mind so that you may include appropriate keywords in fields you know will be searchable if you plan to have search as a key feature on your site If the Information collector control is checked the attribute is most likely used as an input field in a web feedback form see Section 5 5 2 Feedback form class forum or other form of user interaction This means that you should not add data to this attribute in the Administration Interface but leave it to the visitors of the site In other words when creating or editing content you skip the input fields that are marked information collector Dealing with attributes with this control set is described further in Section 11 4 Information collection The Disable translation control toggles whether the value given for the attribute can be translated to additional languages or if it should be kept in the main lan guage For example is it nice to be able to pr
238. e 11 3 Edit mode without OE 11 2 3 Troubleshooting the Online Editor If for some reason the Online Editor is not active when you are looking at an XML block attribute in edit mode or it is not behaving as expected you should check the pos sible causes below If the problem persists contact your site administrator Are you using one of the supported web browsers and is JavaScript enabled Check Section 1 6 2 Installation and environment requirements for the Online Editor Has the OE been installed and enabled on your site Access the Administration In terface navigate to the Setup tab and click Extensions in the left menu shown in the screenshot below If you cannot access this area contact your site administrator 296 Chapter n Content Editing Content structure Media library User accounts Webshop Design Setup My account tension c onfigur ation c Available extensions 4 Cache management Active Name Classes Collected information r ezpaypal Extensions Z ezdhtml Global settings Ini settings Languages l ezwebin PDF export Packages Apply changes RAD l ezodf SN T NC CNN Figure 11 4 Set up OE extension The resulting page above contains a list of available extensions Look for the name ezdhtml in the right column If it is there the OE is installed Then check if it is marked as active in the left column If it is not marked this means that the OE exists but is not cur
239. e 70 3 11 Add bookmark through pop up menu eee ence HH 72 3 12 Search amntetface sri esee ns pepe oen sey pe pal ee epe saat 72 3 13 Content structure to be searched sss 74 3 T4 Search Release ose retro meret e atte dete tert or abd nena Rete 74 3 15 Context sensitive pop up menu ee cece eceee IH emere 78 3 16 Horizontally aligned switches all disabled eeeeee 80 3 17 Horizontally aligned switches all enabled eeeeeeees 81 4L Class EditInterface eth eo tein ER cand in RR Ee Deni 89 4 2 Datatypes attributes a content class and objects eseeeeess 92 4 3 Object node relation iret Perte heed ber pel eren e Sion tke deret 93 4 4 Objects nodes and the content node tree sses 96 4 5 Content node tree uoo eee ta bah ea entes atau eres a OD bah esu I qual en ER ET es 96 4 6 Objects nodes and the content node tree multiple locations 98 4 7 Content node tree with multiple locations eeem A 98 5 1 Text line input field article sssssesssm mm 102 5 2 Text line and block input fields feedback form eessssssse 103 5 3 XML block input field ssssssssssssse eere 104 5 4 Article title and author input fields esses 105 5 5 Article enable comments seere KiE E enne nennen 105 2 6 Ar cle
240. e Preview Details Translations Locations Relations and Sub items windows and their features We will present a walk through of the important features available in the Content structure tab Daily editing tasks are covered in Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Moreover the Object Edit Interface is described in Chapter 7 The Media library tab is discussed in Chapter 10 Readers interested in detailed information on the other tabs of the Administration Interface should refer to the documentation at ht tp ez no doc Throughout this chapter it is assumed that the Content structure tab is selected and that JavaScript is enabled in your web browser If the Media library or User accounts tab is selected most of the information here still applies However the remaining tabs behave differently mainly because they are not related to content This chapter contains many examples and is illustrated with screenshots The chapter closes with a summary that can be used for quick reference or to review the material without going into much detail We recommend that you use this chapter to learn the locations of functions and what you can expect to encounter when editing content 130 Chapter 6 Content Structure Tab Layout in Detail Warning If you do not have JavaScript enabled in your browser the secondary menu will at all times be a full tree menu where each item is a link to content To manage that content you need to first c
241. e Related objects window shows two Ferrari images Let us look at the pub lished object after leaving edit mode Media library example 275 T ETE a Transitions T Locations io Content structure M A E 2 Home 3 News and Events Last modified 02 21 2007 02 48 pm Administrator User English American G Products Adminisiaior Umar g Partner J Community February 2007 newsletter Knowledge Base Gg Company Administrator User lt bms ez no gt Wednesday February 21 2007 amp News and Events 53 February 2007 newsle 5 January 2007 newsletter bruary 2007 newsletter Article E conference _ Contact us Investor Relations English American gt 41 il o ff Trash Small Medium Large Administrator User 02 21 2007 02 44 pm Standard 181 188 Relations 2 fi Ferrari BB 512 front open Image Common Ferrari BB 512 side open Image Common ag The item being viewed is not in use by any other objects Figure 10 20 View article 2 The Relations window has two entries one for each related object and their relation type is Common There are currently no major differences compared to the first January newsletter article see Figure 10 17 View article 1 By re entering edit mode and using the embed object feature of the Online Editor see Section 11 2 6 4 Uploading and embedding an image using the OE w
242. e attributes of the object such as the title intro and text body as seen in Figure 3 17 Horizontally aligned switches all enabled Details The purpose of the Details window is to provide additional informa tion about the selected node and the object that it encapsulates Translations Displays the existing languages for the published version of the object that is being viewed The currently selected translation is displayed in bold characters This is not shown for single language sites see the Glossary definition of Single language site Locations Displays the nodes that are associated with the object that is being viewed Recall that a node among other things represents a location for content within the node tree In eZ Publish each object is repres ented by at least one node within the tree see Section 1 4 2 1 Node tree the content hierarchy The currently selected node is displayed using bold characters Relations Displays information about objects that are either used by the current object or that make use of the current object In eZ Publish any object can be used by any other object see the Object relation definition in the Glossary This feature is typically useful for relating or reusing information that is scattered around in the system You will learn more about these windows what they represent and what you can do with them in Chapter 6 Content Structure Tab Layout in Detail and the
243. e given below They refer to the warning page and the information and buttons displayed there Youcan select one of the drafts and edit it This is the most commonly used approach since usually there is only one unpublished draft If there are several unpublished drafts you might want to remove them to avoid further conflicts Usually you should select the most recent draft for editing in order to continue working on the latest version Youcan create a new draft by clicking the New draft button However keep in mind that the new draft will be a copy of the published version The draft that is causing the conflict may contain updated information If you create a new draft you should also make sure that you remove the one that is causing the conflict The Cancel button will simply cancel the entire edit operation and the system will be left in the same state as before In other words no changes will be made and you will still encounter an editing conflict the next time you try to edit the object 9 2 4 2 Unpublished draft different user Sometimes somebody else may be editing the same object that you wish to edit It might be that the other person is editing it at the same time or that the other person left an un published draft When you try to edit the same object the system will display a warning indicating that there is a conflict 224 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing A Possible edit conflict 02 19 2007 01 29
244. e have embedded one of the Ferrari images into the article summary Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab j Home amp E News and Events amp Products amp Partner amp Community LJ Knowledge Base amp Company amp News and Events E February 2007 newslett E January 2007 newsletter E conference _ Contact us Gg Investor Relations L IT i Trash Small Medium Large D EA E Transhitions Locations ruary 2007 newsletter Article English Americal February 2007 newsletter Administrator User lt bms ez no gt Wednesday February 21 2007 Section Versions Translations Node ID Object ID Administrator User 02 21 2007 02 44 pm Standard Related objects 2 Relation type is Ferrari BB 512 front open Image Common Embedded s Ferrari BB 512 side open Image Common Reverse related objects 0 The item being viewed is not in use by any other objects Figure 10 21 View article 2 with embedded object If you look closely at the Relations window and compare it with Figure 10 20 View article 2 you will see that the first image has the relation type Common Embedded This makes sense since we first added the relation through the Add location button in the Related objects window in edit mode then we used the embedding feature The object is thus related to the article in two ways Removing one of these relation types will not affect the oth
245. e related class which defines the actual data structure was created Required fields will be labeled as such Content classes at tributes and the required properties were described in Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 You can edit almost everything in a content object The exceptions are data generated by the system not shown as input fields in the Object Edit Interface and some fields related to user accounts Both exceptions are covered in the documentation ht tp ez no doc ez publish technical manual The following screenshot shows what this window looks like when a documentation page is being edited In this case you can edit the Title Body and Show children attributes Send for publishing button 159 E Edit lt Technology Introduction gt Documentation page English American Efl Title required Technology Introduction Introduction Body ajaja noma M oOo B I lt p gt CL sepes E onine canora Show children r Send for publishing Discard dratt Figure 7 9 Main edit window 7 6 1 Send for publishing button After you click the Send for publishing button if there are attributes with datatypes supporting validation in the object the system will first attempt to validate the contents of those attributes Then if they validate the system will publish the draft Input validation is a feature of some of the built in datatypes and is used to ensure that the attribute is correctly formatted acc
246. e to save your changes 30 Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface Tip Remember to remove notifications on material you no longer wish to be notified about in order to avoid receiving unwanted emails 2 3 Managing content Publishing content involves creating objects of different content classes To display the available content classes click the dropdown list on the Website Toolbar News and Events Products Partner iv Create here Common ini settings Documentation page Event Event calendar Feedback form File Flash Folder Forum Forum reply Forum topic Forums Press Frontpage Gallery Image lbs New c Infobox Y d Bi Ki Figure 2 8 Website Toolbar create dropdown list The two most important tools for an Editor are the Website Toolbar and the Online Editor The toolbar was introduced above and we will examine it in more detail here The Online Editor is described fully in Chapter 11 Here we only give a short overview Make sure that you are using a browser listed in Section 1 6 1 Supported browsers preferably with JavaScript enabled 2 3 1 Edit mode You are working in edit mode when you are viewing some content in the Content Editing Interface This usually means that either the Edit or Create here button has been clicked on the Website Toolbar The screenshot below shows a typical view of edit mode Edit mode 31 Eng Fre Ger Site settings Logout Administrat
247. e top right corner of the webpage In this chapter you will find information about The Website Interface and Website Toolbar Editing user profiles Managing content basic management tasks such as adding and editing content The Webshop and the Product content class 22 Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface Versions and translations drafts reverting content and multi language content mporting and exporting OpenOffice org content This book does not cover the installation and customization of eZ Publish As this chapter focuses specifically on the Website Interface tasks requiring access to the Administra tion Interface will be discussed later in this book Recall the browser requirements stated in Section 1 6 1 Supported browsers Make sure to use a browser that is compatible with the Website Interface We assume that you have some knowledge of basic eZ Publish concepts like content object class and attribute These were introduced in Chapter 1 For quick access to definitions review the terms in Glossary We recommend that you read at least the sections on the Website Interface Settings and Managing content Versions and trans lations and working with OpenOffice org content are considered advanced topics Also if your site does not have a Webshop the corresponding section can be skipped 2 1 Website Interface The Website Interface integrates into the front end of an eZ Publish website This in
248. e we started before performing the conversion tasks 1 2 6 3 4 Changing the list style for list items Mozilla based browsers only 1 Position the cursor inside the list item or select multiple list items 2 Click the Numbered list button or the Bullet list button depending on the desired list type the type that is not currently in use The following screenshot shows a numbered list containing six list items Online Editor daily tasks 327 Body Normal e i Biz E Documentation and guidance Morbi elit neque accumsan nec tincidunt set elementum Cras molestie nisi quis metus F metus vitae augue vehicula rhoncus Cras su vitae nunc Vivamus quis odio id justo aliquar ante eget facilisis magna neque non diam N faucibus vel justo Sed sit amet ante Vestib this is the fist list item second list item third list item item item last list item one wN ol li Figure 11 32 Convert list style for list item six list items Let us transform the third list item into a bullet list item To do this position the cursor inside the third list item and click the Bullet list button The following three lists will be created as a result A numbered list containing two list items A bullet list containing only one list item A numbered list containing three list items Note that these lists will be independent of each other see the list item numbering in the screenshot below
249. eases Folder embed href ezobject 80 gt Embedded link href ezobject 8O links 1 Events Event calendar embed hrefezobject 71 Embedded link hrefz ezobject 7 1 gt lt link gt Delete selected Addexisting 9 Upload new Figure 9 4 Related objects window You can do the following with related objects Use embed links to insert an object inside the content of the current object Relate to an existing object Add existing Relate to a new object Upload new Remove related objects from the current object 9 1 2 1 Using the embed links The embed links can be copied and pasted into attributes that use the XML block datatype For example if you relate images to an article and would like to have them displayed somewhere in the text you can just copy and paste the suggested links into the body of the article This process becomes much more simple when the Online Editor OE is in stalled see Chapter 11 Content Editing 9 1 2 2 Adding existing objects The Add existing button is used to browse the node tree and select multiple objects to relate to the one that is currently being edited Depending on your permissions the browse functionality will allow you to select objects located in different parts of the system the Content Media and Users branches The following image shows what happens when the Add existing button is clicked 196 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Choose
250. ect ID 95 Parent node ID 95 Sort method 97 234 Sort order 235 Node tree see Content node tree Non translatable attribute 186 Notifications 28 119 Add to my notifications 78 Numbered list 321 O OASIS Open Document Format 50 Object see Content object Always available 186 State 173 Status 174 Object button 310 Object Edit Interface xxiii 1 127 149 168 169 183 192 198 288 Current draft window 155 Exit 225 Index Layout 150 Main edit window 158 Object information window 154 Preview content 232 Related objects window 163 Section window 158 Translate from window 157 Version preview interface 160 View control window 162 Object ID 138 155 234 Object information window 151 154 169 Object relation 142 163 254 256 265 310 331 Add 195 Relation type Common 196 272 Embedded 276 Remove 197 Upload new object 196 Object relations 111 Object retrieval window 230 Object structure 92 Object oriented xviii 5 86 Instance 86 OE see Online Editor OE status bar 294 299 OE text area 294 298 Current element 306 OE toolbar 294 301 Actions area 303 Active buttons 301 Bold button 317 Format area 307 Help area 302 Inactive buttons 301 Italic button 317 Link button 310 Lists area 321 Literal text button 311 319 Object button 310 Special Tools area 303 Special tools area 304 310 Tables area 341 Text Style tool 307 Online Editor xvii xxiii 36 103
251. ect is completely re moved from the system step 2c Version structure and status 177 8 1 4 4 2 Published status When the draft version is published step 2 both the version and the object status will be set to published In addition the object s current version will be set to 1 which in dicates the published version of the object Object information Versions for lt Tea gt 1 bee Fal Version Status Edited language Creator Created Modified Created Es Published E9 English American Administrator User 01 24 2007 08 38 am 01 24 2007 08 59am E A 01 24 2007 09 20 am wir ELTE ES swe tm Published version Published version Version Translations Creator Created Modified Copy translation 1 ES English American Administrator User 01 24 2007 08 38 am 01 24 2007 08 59 am English American x a This object does not have any drafts Figure 8 6 Published object first version When published transition 2 the contents of the object can be viewed by others Note that up until this point the contents of the object are not visible on the public site or in the content node tree of the Administration Interface If you edit the object transition 3 the scenario may look something like this Object information Edit lt Tea gt Article a ID 160 English American Bil Created Title required 01 24 2007 09 20 am rea Administrator User Moditied Short title 01 24 2007 09 20 am frea
252. ect objects in eZ Publish to other webpages on the internet and are created by using the Link class as described below hyperlinks directly in attributes of the XML block datatype or attributes of the URL datatype Internal links connect objects within eZ Publish They are a type of object relation and can only be used in attributes of the XML block datatype Internal links are created by using the Link tag in an XML block Internal links use the ezobject or eznode prefix rather than the http prefix used for external links They are then converted to the standard protocol links such as http when displayed on the site The advantage of this is that these links will not break when the site structure is re arranged or when an object is renamed since they use the static Object ID or Node ID They will still break if you remove the object or node to which they link Even if you link to pages on your own site with the Link class or Link tag they are considered external links unless they use the ezobject or eznode link type This is discussed further in Section 11 2 6 5 Creating links to external and internal webpages 5 4 1 Link class Objects of the Link class function similarly to hyperlinks written directly into attributes of the XML block datatype except that they are stored and structured as separate objects Objects of the Link class can point to pages on the same site or to pages on an external site and are al
253. ection 9 2 1 Smart editing using drafts 6 The new content object will be placed in the node tree also called the content hierarchy below the node object you were just viewing 9 1 2 Related objects Recall from Chapter 6 that the purpose of the Relations window inside the main area is to display information about other objects that either use the current object or that the current object uses The related object feature is used in situations when there is a need to use information from elsewhere in the content hierarchy For example the concept of related objects makes it possible to add images to news art icles Instead of using a fixed set of image attributes the images are stored as separate objects outside the article These objects can then be related to the article and used directly in attributes represented by the XML block datatype See Section 11 2 6 4 Uploading and embedding an image using the OE for an explanation on how to work with object relations through the embedding feature The Related objects window see Section 7 8 Related objects window in the Object Edit Interface makes it possible to relate other objects to the one that is being edited Related objects 195 Related objects 3 Related content 3 Name Type XML code Relation type E Latest Information From This Company Article embed href ezobject 81 Common link href ezobject 8 1 gt lt link gt Embedded E Press Rel
254. ed by a block level tag Text and or inline elements are always en capsulated by a paragraph you can see the lt p gt tag in the OE status bar but note that the paragraph tags are not shown in the sim plified XML when the OE is disabled Text or inline elements inside table cells are encap sulated by paragraphs both in eZ Publish XML and the resulting XHTML Text or in line elements inside block custom tags are also encapsulated by paragraphs Block level tags can contain inline tags but not vice versa For example a paragraph tag cannot be placed inside a bold tag Block elements can contain inline elements but not vice versa For example if you select two paragraphs and click the Bold button the OE will create two bold elements one inside each paragraph 11 2 5 3 1 Object button eZ Publish allows you to create relations between different objects Working with related objects in the Administration Interface was described in Section 9 1 2 Related objects For example it is possible to relate an image object to an article The Online Editor makes it possible to insert related objects into the XML structure so that they become embedded objects This functionality can be used to embed any type of object in the XML field The Object button allows you to embed objects and edit existing embedded objects This button is located in the Special Tools area of the OE toolbar o By default embedded objec
255. ed email address You need to follow the instructions in that mail to activate your account EI Figure 3 3 User registration success The newly generated user account will be disabled until the user clicks on the registration confirmation link in the registration email automatically generated by the system Once this registration page is accessed the account will be activated If registration fails the system will display an error message explaining what went wrong and what must be done to fix the problem After logging in to the Administration Interface a user can change all of the personal data entered during the registration phase except their username and ID by clicking the links in the Current user window on the right Administration Interface layout 61 E Bergfrid Skaara Change password Logout Bookmarks l Clear cache E Quick settings E Figure 3 4 Current user window 3 2 Administration Interface Layout This section describes how the Administration Interface is organized Specifically we identify six areas of the interface and explain each of them in detail It is important for everyone working in the Administration Interface to develop an understanding of these areas where they are positioned what they display how they should be used and so on The Administration Interface defaults to the Content structure tab described in Sec tion 3 3 Administration Interface tabs below and displa
256. ed list button or the Bullet list button depending on your desired list type r 5 7 4 nascetur ridiculus mus Bullet list Nulla lobortis aliquet nibh Pellentesque leo lorem se porta lacus venenatis suscipit In porta nunc sed ligula Vestibulum luctus est a tristig nisl Proin libero Figure 11 29 Convert selected paragraph s to list items s The result is shown below Nulla lobortis aliquet nibh Pellentesque leo lorem tortor porta lacus venenatis suscipit n porta nunc sed ligula Vestibulum luctus est a augue quis nisl Proin libero Figure 11 30 Convert selected paragraph s to list items s result To perform the opposite transformation converting list items back to paragraphs follow the steps below 1 Position the cursor inside the list item or select multiple list items 2 Click the Numbered list button or the Bullet list button that corresponds to the current list type This will remove the list formatting and make the list into a para graph or paragraphs 326 Chapter n Content Editing Nulla lobortis aliquet nibh Pellentesque leo lore porta lacus venenatis suscipit In porta nunc sed ligula Vestibulum luctus est nisl Proin libero Figure 11 31 Convert list item s into paragraph s result If you compare this figure to Figure 11 29 Convert selected paragraph s to list items s in the previous procedure you will see that we are now back to wher
257. ed text such as program source code HTML code and XML content Everything that is inside a literal block will be rendered in the same way character by character when the final output the XHTML code is generated The system will use the lt pre gt tag when rendering literal blocks 11 2 5 5 Element properties The Online Editor allows you to modify the properties attributes of elements The attrib utes generally correspond to the parameters of the element s XML tag For example if a tag supports a parameter then you will most likely be able to modify that parameter through the Online Editor Note that lines list items and special characters do not have any properties To view and edit an element s properties right click on the element and choose the Properties item from the context sensitive pop up menu The element s properties will be displayed using a modal dialog as shown in the screenshot below for a paragraph tag 312 Chapter n Content Editing Select from available classes No classes are available for the element ox fe http nemo bms ez no Insert cl uii paragraph Properties Attribute name Value There are no attributes defined rancel Figure 11 13 Modal dialog for element properties To learn more about the properties of a particular element refer to Section 11 3 Manual editing with XML tags Warning You should not select any text before right clicking as the Properties
258. ed the left menu The secondary menus of the first three tabs Content structure Media library and User accounts look and behave in the same way These menus provide access to different parts of the node tree see Section 1 4 2 1 Node tree the content hierarchy When the Content structure tab is selected the secondary menu will give access to the Content branch when the Media library tab is selected the secondary menu will give access to the Media branch and so on Because of this the secondary menu is even sometimes referred to as the tree menu You will learn more about the node tree in Chapter 4 The secondary menus of the first three tabs can be hidden or displayed using the and buttons The secondary menu for the remaining tabs behaves differently and gives access to interfaces specific to those tabs Unlike the tree menus these menus cannot be disabled and thus will always be displayed 3 2 4 Main area The main area is the most dynamic and important part of the Administration Interface It displays the actual content and interfaces that are associated with the current action and is where most of the work is done In the screenshot above Figure 3 5 Areas of the Administration Interface the main area displays the top level node of the Content branch 3 2 5 Right area The right area displays information specific to the user who is currently logged in It does not change regardless of what the user is doing It displ
259. ee is also known as the content hierarchy In this chapter you will learn about the following 86 Chapter 4 Content Management Concepts Objects and Nodes Content objects and object orientation The relationship between datatypes attributes classes and objects How nodes structure content in a content node tree and represent the published versions of content More advanced discussion on the topics of this chapter can be found in the documentation at http ez no doc Class structure and section management the segmentation of the node tree are beyond the scope of this book Version and translation management is described in Chapter 8 The content creation process through the Administration Interface is described in detail in the following chapters For a more in depth discussion on issues like architecture and structure interested readers should refer to the book eZ Publish Basics 4 1 Object oriented technology The eZ Publish content structure is based on ideas borrowed from object oriented pro gramming languages like Java and C Superficially object oriented OO means looking at the world in terms of objects In real life people are surrounded by many ob jects furniture cars pets other people and so on Each of these objects has traits This is also the way content is described and managed within eZ Publish objects and attributes traits Creating an object is much like building a house you make the outline
260. em ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Press Releases Coffee of all flavours Vivamus magna elit bibendum vitae porta at ornare quis nibh Donec non dui Donec pharetra eleifend augue Phasellus libero dolor adipiscing ut viverra dapibus consequat ut nulla Proin iaculis Fresh fruit Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Quisque sagittis forest urna Nam rhoncus risus eget enim Pellentesque erat libero pharetra non pretium vel commodo vitae arcu New company website released me Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Events gt Norway trade show gt Tasks Figure 5 17 Folder page Infobox class 121 News and Events Home Knowledge Base Knowledge Base FAQ Daily Usage Questions Editing a document Sending e mail Use Cases Technology Introduction Nullam scelerisque Products Community Knowledge Base Company Knowledge Base Table of Contents FAQ Technology Introduction FAQ Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Nam laoreet neque nec ligula Phasellus eget quam Vestibulum lacus libero condimentum ut conse
261. ent per conubia nostra per inceptos hymenaeos Aliquam lobortis ornare diam ullam dacia Cano ee ee a ee ee ee lt p gt Class none ia Online Editor 4 2 Figure 11 22 Emphasize text result Tip To edit a bold or italic tag manually refer to Section 11 3 1 2 Emphasized text 11 2 6 2 Literal outputting text as is The Literal text button is found in the OE Toolbar and the concept was introduced in Section 11 2 5 4 Unformatted literal text This section presents examples of how to insert and remove literal text 11 2 6 2 1 Inserting literal text The procedure below shows how to insert literal text into your content 1 Position the cursor at a location where you want to display some text as is such as a piece of source code 2 Click the Literal text button You can also right click at the target location and choose Insert literal text from the context sensitive pop up menu A modal dialog see Section 11 2 4 3 Modal dialogs will appear 320 Chapter n Content Editing fe http nemo bms ez no Insert literal Sandbox Mozilla Firefox 0 x elect m available classes Class none x Properties Attribute name Value There are no attributes defined ok Cancel Figure 11 23 OE modal dialog for inserting literal text 3 If necessary choose a class from the dropdown list Click the OK button A box with a shaded background will appear in the OE te
262. ents E Products Partner Community Multimedia ar Downloads G Pictures _ Forums Gj News and Events Knowledge Base ed EM G News and Events _ Contact us Investor Relations Figure 9 42 Tree menu In the screenshot you can see three occurrences of News and Events Notice that it is only the topmost occurrence that has sub items Let us look at the difference between them by examining each of their Details windows Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard Figure 9 43 Details window original location of object Above is the information for the News and Events folder taken from the main original location Note the Node ID and Object ID values Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard Figure 9 44 Details window secondary location of original object 242 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Above is the information for the News and Events folder taken from the secondary location of the original object Notice that it has its own Node ID but the same Object ID as in Figure 9 43 Details window original location of object above te Creator Created Section Versions Translations Node ID Object ID Administrator User 02 15 2007 02 54 pm Standard 2 2 155 161 Figure 9 45 Details window copy of original object Above is the information for the News and Events folder taken from the newly created copy of the original object Notice that i
263. enu for the container object under which you wish to add new content then select the desired content class under the Create here menu item 3 Click the Create here button The system will bring up the Object Edit Interface see Chapter 7 4 Use the Object Edit Interface to add and edit the content as described in Section 9 1 Creating objects 5 Click the Send for publishing button to publish the content within the content node tree Alternatively click the Store draft button to store it as a draft for later retrieval By default your newly added content will belong to the Media section in contrast to the Standard content section that was used in the previous chapters Creating new content in the media library 263 In Depth Banner class The banner is a graphic file that is used as a billboard object on a frontpage as illustrated in Section 10 1 Contents of the media library A banner can only be created through the Media library tab First select the Banner content class at the bottom of the Sub items window then click the Create here button ES sub items 11 10 25 50 List Thumbnail Detailed P Name Visibility Type Modifier Modified Section _ Partner banner Visible Banner Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Media B a A Corporate banner Visible Banner Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Media as 2 F Autumn leaves Visible Banner Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Media o
264. enu of the first three tabs is shown as an interactive tree The main area displays the actual content and interfaces that are associated with the se lected object This is where most of the work is done When viewing content here you will see a row of switches at the top that are used for toggling information windows on and off The right area of the Administration Interface displays information specific to the user who is currently logged in Among other things this is where you find the Bookmarks window Searching for content is done by entering text in the search field in the top right corner In eZ Publish default search behavior is case insensitive and matches exact words or phrases The context sensitive pop up menu contains functions that are specific to the item from which the menu was invoked Chapter 4 Content Management Concepts Objects and Nodes We have already seen in Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management how eZ Publish separates content and design and how the system merges these compon ents with templates to create webpages You also got a quick introduction to some content management concepts This chapter describes in more detail the content management concepts used for structuring and storing content in the system Basically content is stored as content objects and these are organized in a tree structure of content nodes In this chapter you will learn about the relationship between datatypes
265. epresent the same version of the same content in multiple languages Trans lations are also known as the third dimension of content objects If you look at the relationship between a version and its translations from the opposite view you will see that the different translations are encapsulated by the version itself A translation consists of attributes Recall that attributes are the entity that holds your actual content such as the title of an article When you translate content attributes are represented by the values of the different input fields that you update in edit mode Translation interface 183 A content object will always have at least one translation Every time you edit an object in a new language and store it you add another translation to that object If you are editing multilingual content you should note that the Current draft window only contains the language that is currently being edited The Translations window associated with the Translations switch in the main area see Section 6 2 4 Translations window displays the existing languages for the published version of the object that is being viewed The currently selected translation is displayed in bold characters To sum up the actual content of a version is stored inside different translations and a translation is a representation of content in a specific language 8 2 2 Translation interface The Translation interface is a special purpose mode of
266. er Let us look at a preview of the second article Media library example 277 February 2007 newsletter Administrator User gt Investor Rehtions Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Pellentesque ullamcorper erat sit amet blandit semper risus tortor malesuada nulla nec ultrices justo massa nec nisi Aliquam non mi quis leo malesuada iaculis Aenean sit amet lacus Pellentesque metus ligula condimentum nec malesuada nec tincidunt non Figure 10 22 Article 2 preview Above the matchbox image is in the same location as in Figure 10 18 Preview article 1 However the Ferrari image has been embedded inline in the summary XML At this time the content structure of the News and Events folder has been updated as follows content structure F Preview Details Transtations Locations Rehtions _ Home News and Events Folder amp News and Events amp j Products Last modified 02 Administrator User English American amp _ Community J Knowledge Base Ex Sub items 3 amp Company News and Events 10 28 50 List Thumbnail Detailed 5 February 2007 newsletter Name Visibility Type Modifier Modified Section Ej January 2007 newsletter r 5 February 2007 Visible Article Administrator User 02 21 2007 02 48 pm Standard asa E conference newsletter Contact us r ES 5 January 2007 newsletter Visible Article Administrator User 02 21 2007 02 41 pm Standard a
267. er Click the Manage versions button at the bottom of that window ID 70 Created 12 20 2006 08 56 am Administrator User Modified 01 18 2007 08 15 am Administrator User Published version 2 Manage versions Figure 9 9 Manage versions button This button will open the Version history interface with a window titled Versions for xxx name of object that lists all the versions of the object you are working on Versions for lt News and Events gt 5 Version Status r Draft Draft I NN UNS Ilo d de gw og Draft Delete selected Edited language Creator Created Modified Archived E 3 English American Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am 12 20 2006 08 56 am i i Published NS German Administrator User 01 18 2007 08 15 am 01 18 2007 08 15 am EH E English American Administrator User 02 19 2007 09 57 am 02 19 2007 10 31 am aA EE German Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 19 am 02 19 2007 10 19 am E A E English American Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 20 am 02 19 2007 10 20 am English American 4 x 5 gt Figure 9 10 Version history interface The list displays the version number status language translation author creation date and modification date for each version 202 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Tip You can also access the Version history interface by selecting Manage versions from the context sensitive pop up menu associated with the content object for whi
268. erface Note that the Translate from and Section windows have been replaced by a new window the View control window described below Moreover the Current draft window has been replaced by a similar Version information window The information here should be familiar from the Object information and Current draft windows In particular the Version preview interface is typically used to get an impression of how a page will look once it is published on the site In other words it shows you what site visitors will see Different locations if the object is encapsulated by multiple nodes and siteaccesses can be applied to the preview The Manage versions button will take you to the Version history interface The Edit button will bring you to edit mode the Object Edit Interface A full screen preview can be generated using the button located just above the preview area X x xj In Depth Version preview interface vs Preview window The Version preview interface should not be confused with the Preview window described in the previous chapter see Section 6 2 2 Preview window The 162 Chapter 7 The Object Edit Interface former is a presentation of the content with design and layout included The latter is simply a listing of object attributes This is found at the top of the main area of the Administration Interface when you are viewing content It is asso ciated with the Preview switch Remember eZ Publish s important separatio
269. erican E Language Locale Main E English American eng US c a BM German ger DE C A Delete selected Use the main language if there is no prioritized translation Update Figure 9 17 Translations window select language 3 Locate the language that you wish to edit and click on the language s corresponding edit icon on the right The system will bring up the Object Edit Interface 9 2 3 1 2 Using the Sub items window to edit a translation 1 Make sure that the object s parent node is being displayed in the main area of the Administration Interface Working with translations 211 2 Locate the object that you wish to edit in the Sub items window and click on its corresponding edit icon on the right You will be taken to the Language selection interface see Section 8 2 2 Translation interface Edit Press Releases Existing languages Select the language you want to edit English American New languages Select the language you want to add French France C German Select the language the added translation will be based on None C English American Figure 9 18 Language selection interface 3 Use the radio buttons to select the language that you wish to edit then click the Edit button 9 2 3 1 3 Using the left tree menu and the context sensitive pop up menu to edit a translation 1 Locate the object that you wish to edit in the tree menu on the left of the Adminis tration Inter
270. es n Delete selected Copy ct ets Article M Move Remove Swap wih another node Expand Hide unhide Colla an View index Add to my bookmarks Reverse related for subtree Add to my notifications Manage versions Create here DOL 7 l Export OpenOffice org Export PDF Export Word Import OpenOffice org k 1 A 53 m Replace OpenOffice org Figure 6 4 Context sensitive pop up menu The content management procedure triggered by selecting a menu item is described in Chapter 9 in relation to the different editing tasks For a quick overview refer to Table 3 2 Context sensitive pop up menu functions or see the short list below Remember that selecting from the pop up menu will affect what is displayed in the main area described next View selects and displays the content of the node in the main area see below Edit in brings up the Object Edit Interface see Chapter 7 The Object Edit Interface for the corresponding object 134 Chapter 6 Content Structure Tab Layout in Detail Move moves the node from current location to another location in the content hierarchy Locations are described in Section 4 3 2 1 Locations Add to my bookmarks bookmarks were described in Section 3 4 2 Bookmarks 6 2 Main area This section describes the overall layout of the main area and the various windows within it Recall that The main area is the most dynamic and important part
271. es that a switch is on and thus the window containing the related information is currently being displayed Figure 3 16 Horizontally aligned switches all disabled and Figure 3 17 Horizontally aligned switches all enabled show the main area when all switches are disabled and enabled Due to print size limitations Figure 3 17 Horizontally aligned switches all Chapter 3 An Overview of the Administration Interface enabled is cropped to omit the Relations and Sub items windows below the Locations window All of the main area windows should be shown Preview Details Transhtions Locations Relations Press Releases Folder Last mi ministrator User English Ame rican English American M Edit 10 25 50 List Thumbnail Detailed B Coffee Article M Fuit Article L 5 New company website released Article A i 5 Good results in the fourth quarter Article A V E New product release Article 4 Latest Information From This Company Article 9 Del ced Update priorities Aricie gt English American gt EENES Sorting Published gt Descending gt Figure 3 16 Horizontally aligned switches all disabled Selectively displaying windows by toggling switches Rehtions NENNEN EN NEN NN NN cocations Press Releases Folder Last modified 1
272. ese kinds of access rights is beyond the scope of this book Interested readers should refer to the documentation at http ez no doc 4 3 2 1 Locations A node provides a location for a content object within the tree structure A node refers to exactly one content object as Figure 4 3 Object node relation above illustrated You will see a bit later that objects on the other hand can be referenced by more than one node Only published objects appear in the content node tree as a node by definition refers to a published object Accordingly if you are working on a news article for example but have not yet published it that is it still has a Draft status the article will not show in the node tree Archived content objects will for the same reason also lose their nodes and thus disappear from the tree After all site visitors should not be able to view an article in progress or other objects that are not yet published Drafts and other object statuses are described in Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features We now turn our attention to the mechanisms that hold the tree together You will also learn how the same content can be referenced from multiple locations without having to duplicate it 4 3 2 2 Mode structure Explaining the node structure can easily become technical We aim to keep this as simple and lightweight as possible This material is useful when dealing with publishing at multiple locations and mov
273. esent the text of an article in mul Content objects 91 tiple languages but it makes no sense to translate the name and email address of the author Multilingual content and translations are described in more detail in Chapter 8 Datatype specific controls may be available for an attribute For example the built in text line datatype provides two settings default value and maximum length Details about these controls will be provided as required in the relevant contexts 4 2 3 Content objects We have now looked at the content class its attributes and their datatypes This section describes the content object Recall that n programming terms a content object is an instance of a content class While the content class defines the type and structure of the data it is the content object that actually stores the data nside a content object all data is stored in one or more content object attributes The following illustration summarizes and shows the relation between datatypes attributes content classes and content objects The content objects are instances of the same content class which means that they are of the same type but contain different data 92 4 3 Chapter 4 Content Management Concepts Objects and Nodes ARTICLE CLASS N LL ac ARTICLE OBJECT ARTICLE OBJECT ARTICLE OBJECT Title Penguin Title Scooter Title Megaphone Sum The penguin is Sum Sigge rides a Sum Sigge has a named Sigge
274. et in a configuration file This setting should be relevant only to developers or programmers 8 2 3 3 Translation languages It is possible to choose the languages in which to create and translate content This set of languages is referred to as translation languages These can be managed via the Ad ministration Interface The maximum number of languages that can be used simultan eously is 30 Content editors should be aware of the list of translation languages as it affects the translation options for content 8 2 3 4 Initial main language An object can be created in any of the languages found in the translation languages list described above When an object is created its initial main language will be set to the language that was used during creation For example if an article is created in Hungarian its initial main language will be set to Hungarian A translation in the initial main language cannot be removed from the object see Section 9 2 3 3 Changing the main language In Depth Initial or main language For you as a content editor the terms initial language and main language mostly refer to the same thing The former is used at the system level whereas the latter is used in the Website Interface and the Administration Interface You will most likely see main language used in the graphical user interfaces and we also adopt that approach in this book However other documentation material may refer to this as
275. et to the browser CLIENT HTTP request WEBSERVER http www example com content search C2 Processing Web index php browser Module Iz HTTP reply Resulting HTML Pagelayout View template Result Figure 1 7 Client server cycle There are different types of templates in addition to the main template pagelayout Some are built in while others are custom made The important thing to understand is that there are rules dictating how content is displayed depending on the context regardless of how content is structured and stored Context can refer to a specific siteaccess or en closing content element For example an image may be displayed differently in an article than in an image gallery Second content attributes are not necessarily displayed in a fixed order For example when you are creating a new article the image upload field is commonly located near the bottom of the page however the image can be shown in the middle of the text when design is applied Third some content attributes may at times be hidden from view For example by default the author and creation time are not shown 14 Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management when an information page for a company is displayed Also on a news page you would probably prefer to view only a summary of the most recent news articles rather than the entire text of every article 1 4 A quick introduction to content objects and the node tree 1 4 1
276. ever a different node is selected the interface will reload and the main area will display the selected node This is in contrast to simply exploring the secondary menu by folding and unfolding the branches which does not update the main area Using the interactive tree to navigate is more efficient than using the Sub items window in the main area However 132 Chapter 6 Content Structure Tab Layout in Detail since the tree menu does not always show all nodes you will often have to use a combin ation of methods to navigate Navigating the Administration Interface was described in Section 3 4 Navigation 6 1 2 Width of the secondary menu The size of the secondary menu both the tree and the tools at the bottom can be custom ized to suit different users You can for example change the width of the menu Additional secondary menu settings are described in the in depth block below In Depth Secondary menu settings The small medium large buttons shown at the bottom of the secondary menu will alter the horizontal size of the menu The currently selected setting has a different background color You can change the width of the secondary menu for the Content structure Media library and User account tabs This is handy when you are working with parts of the tree menu unfolded so that you can view the item names without having to scroll across This feature can be especially useful if you are working without JavaScript as the
277. existing content as a template for Copy then modify new content Having the same content appear at mul Publish at multiple locations tiple locations on your site Solving a problem with inconsistent duplic Publish at multiple locations ates of content across the site Quickly fill the content structure with Create a few content objects that form a large amounts of data for testing purposes hierarchy then use the Copy subtree option in the context sensitive pop up menu to duplicate this hierarchy as many times as desired For clarity you should edit the titles of the copied content This situation is normally only used by ad vanced content managers site administrat ors and developers 9 4 Summary This chapter described common tasks performed by content editors in the eZ Publish Administration Interface Step by step procedures were given for creating editing and managing content objects Publishing in the Administration Interface is done by clicking the Send for publishing button in the Object Edit Interface The list below gives an overview of the different scenarios leading up to the publishing process Create new content using the dropdown lists and Create here button at the bottom left of the Sub items window or using the context sensitive pop up menu when some content node is being displayed Add a new translation Resume working on a draft Drafts can be found either in the My drafts sec
278. external and internal webpages 11 3 1 6 1 Internal links It is possible to create internal links to other nodes and objects by making use of the eznode and ezobject notation The internal links will be created dynamically based on the Node ID or Object ID In other words if a node is moved existing links to that node will point to the new location and thus will not be broken 11 3 1 6 1 1 Linking to a node A link to a node can be created by either specifying the target node s ID or the node path The following examples demonstrate an internal link to a node numbered 128 see the tip in Section 11 2 6 5 1 Creating a hyperlink on how to find a Node ID or Object ID lt a href eznode 128 gt Example lt a gt or lt link href eznode 128 gt Example lt link gt The following examples demonstrate how an internal link can be created to a node located at products computers example lt a href eznode products computers example gt Example lt a gt or lt link href eznode products computers example gt Example lt link gt 11 3 1 6 1 2 Linking to an object The following examples demonstrate how an internal link can be created to object number 1024 lt a href ezobject 1024 gt Example lt a gt or lt link href ezobject 1024 gt Example lt link gt XML syntax 361 When object linking is used the destination address will be generated using the target object s main node lo
279. ey are embedded you have control over the position of the image If they are specified as object attributes they will be displayed according to the content class s template See Section 11 2 6 4 Uploading and embedding an image using the OE on how to add object relations with the embedding feature The following table gives an overview of the object relation types The type is automat ically set by the system based on how the object relation was created Table 6 1 Object relation types Relation type Description Embedded in XML block This type is used when you embed an object by using the embedding tool of the Online Editor or the embed XML tag in an XML block Linked in XML block The Linked relation type is used when you insert an internal link by using the linking tool of the Online Editor or the Link XML tag in an XML block Note that Link content objects can also be embedded as described above See Section 5 4 Content relation ships for a definition of internal and external links Attribute of content object Some content classes allow other objects to be spe cified as attributes For example objects of the Art icle content class allow the specification of an Image object the Image object is then an attribute of the Article object Sub items window always at the bottom 143 Relation type Description Common All the object relation types described above are d
280. f the concept of related objects This material does not introduce any new concepts or interfaces and can be skipped if you feel that you have a good un derstanding of the media library and of object relations Tip If you follow this example in your own installation make sure that the Preview Details and Relations windows are active in the main area of the Administration Interface Our starting point is the News and Events folder found below the Company folder in the content structure Media library example 269 Preview I Details Transhtions I Locations Relations Content structure j Home News and Events Folder 3 News and Events amp E Products Last modified 02 15 2007 02 54 pm Administrator Use English American EE _y Partner English American x Community Knowledge Base o ase woen e News and Events 10 25 50 List Thumbnail Detailed conference Eal Name Visibility Type Modifier Modified Section J Contact us I E conference Visible Article Administrator User 02 21 2007 02 24 pm Standard G Investor Relations ri D Update priorities Trash Article gt Engiish American ESET sorting Published v Descending gt Figure 10 13 Initial content structure Notice that this folder currently holds one article titled conference conference Article d Last modified 02 21 2007 02 24 pm Administrator User English
281. f various elements that are defined by the eZ Publish XML tags The following elements are supported Headings see Section 11 2 5 1 1 Text Style tool and Section 11 2 6 1 Adding headers and formatting Bold and italic text see Section 11 2 5 1 2 Text formatting emphasizing text with Bold and Italic but tons and Section 11 2 6 1 4 Emphasizing text bold and italic Lines and paragraphs see Section 11 2 5 2 Text formatting line breaks and paragraphs Numbered ordered bullet unordered lists and list items see Section 11 2 5 1 3 Text formatting numbered and bullet lists and Sec tion 11 2 63 Working with lists Embedded objects usually images or other multimedia content 306 Chapter n Content Editing see Section 11 2 5 3 1 Object button and Section 11 2 6 4 Uploading and embed ding an image using the OE Hyperlinks and anchors see Section 11 2 5 3 2 Hyperlinks and anchors Section 11 2 6 5 Creating links to external and internal webpages Literal text see Section 11 2 5 4 Unformatted literal text and Section 11 2 6 2 Literal out putting text as is Tables table rows table header cells and table cells see Section 11 2 6 6 Working with tables Custom tags see Section 11 2 4 5 7 Custom tag button Many of the elements include other elements In other words included elements are nested For example a table con
282. face 2 Click on the object s icon in order to bring up the context sensitive pop up menu 3 Access the Edit in sub menu and select the language that you wish to edit 212 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing View Fvictine lanauanac Edit in r English American C a sm Another language Copy Subtree 1 gg cigis jar Mane h Figure 9 19 Context sensitive pop up menu Edit in After selecting a language the system will display the Object Edit Interface For editing an existing translation do not choose Another language because this will add a new translation 9 2 3 1 4 Using the Edit button to edit a translation 1 Make sure that the object is being displayed in the main area of the Administration Interface 2 Use the dropdown list of languages located in the Preview window at the top to select the language that you wish to edit Click the Edit button Press Releases Folder am Administrator User English American BA Last modified 12 20 eran anercon EM DIEM EES Figure 9 20 Preview window Edit The system will bring up the Object Edit Interface For editing an existing transla tion do not choose Another language because this will add a new translation 9 2 3 1 5 Using bookmarks to edit a translation 1 Make sure that the Bookmarks window in the right area of the Administration Interface is expanded use the button to open the window 2 Locate the b
283. face with the Translations window The interface is shown and used when you are adding a new translation This is the translator mode of the Object Edit Interface or the Content Editing Interface The window is shown when you are viewing some content and the Translations switch is selected This window only displays information and provides access to view edit and delete existing translations 8 2 5 Language concepts This is a lightweight overview of some concepts related to the multi language feature of eZ Publish The aim is to provide enough background for content editors to understand Language concepts 185 the basics without being unnecessarily burdened by technical issues A more detailed description can be found in the online manuals at http ez no doc ez publish technic al manual 8 2 3 1 Locales A locale is a set of country specific settings including language character sets number formats currency format and date and time format These settings will affect how content is displayed on the site but you should not have to worry about configuring them as a content editor These settings are defined in configuration files and have standards compliant identifiers like eng US English USA or nor NO Norwegian Norway Refer to the Configuring your site locale section in the online technical manual at ht tp ez no doc ez publish technical manual for more information 8 2 3 2 Default language The default language is s
284. follow the steps below 1 Make sure you are logged in as Editor and are viewing the content you wish to translate in the target language In our example the article exists in English which is the default language for the site We want to translate it to French so we access 50 2 6 Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface the French version of the site the French siteaccess by clicking the Fre link in the top left corner of the page 2 Click on the Edit button on the Website Toolbar 3 Write the content in the new language and click the Send for publishing button The content now exists in an additional language There are powerful translation management tools available through the Administration Interface Refer to Chapter 8 to learn more OpenOffice org documents eZ Publish can import and export text documents based on the OASIS Open Document Format ODF This word processing format is used and was originally created by OpenOffice org Writer OpenOffice org is a multiplatform multilingual open source office suite eZ Publish commonly refers to the OASIS Open Document Format as OpenOffice org format Note that there are other applications that support this format such as StarOffice and NeoOffice The Website Interface OpenOffice org import export feature enables you to take content offline to do any necessary work As a result there is no need to struggle with editing conflicts slow network connections and
285. following chapters If you feel a bit confused right now do not worry as this chapter is only intended to provide a basic overview Summary 3 6 85 Summary In this chapter we have looked at the organization and principles of usage of the Admin istration Interface We began by looking at how to access the Administration Interface including login and user registration Thereafter the six areas of the Administration Interface were described Review Figure 3 5 Areas of the Administration Interface for a visual recall The areas are main menu path secondary left menu main area right area and Search interface The main menu is a collection of tabs located below the eZ Publish logo and the Search interface The secondary left menu and the main area display elements that belong to the selected tab Each tab represents some subsection of the Administration Interface For example the Content structure tab gives access to view and manage most of the content that is published on your site The path is a representation of your current position in the navigation hierarchy of the site The last element shows the name of the content you are currently viewing prefixed by links to the higher level content you can use to back trace navigation The secondary menu provides access to content and interfaces that are associated with the tab that was selected from the main menu If your browser has JavaScript support enabled the secondary m
286. for an embedded object Summary required Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Pellentesque ullamcorper erat sit amet blandit semper risus tortor malesuada nulla nec embed size medium align center href ezobject 182 gt ultrices justo massa nec nisi Aliquam non mi quis leo malesuada iaculis Aenean sit amet lacus Pellentesque metus ligula ndimentum nec malesuada nec tincidunt non nibh Figure 11 61 XML example 3 embedded object 11 3 1 6 Hyperlinks Hyperlinks can be inserted by making use of the a or link tags a href target class title id gt Example lt a gt or lt link href target class title id gt Example lt link gt The href parameter is required and must be set to a valid address either external or internal The target parameter can be used to determine how the target URL should be opened inside the active browser window or within a new window or tab Theclass parameter classifies the link as described in Section 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements The title parameter can be used to specify a short description that will be shown when the mouse pointer is hovering over the link The id parameter is for assigning unique identifiers that can for example be used by JavaScript code 360 Chapter n Content Editing Tip To edit a link tag with the OE refer to Section 11 2 6 5 Creating links to
287. for being an efficient and patient administration manager Thanks to Andr R mcke for answering all those small practical questions that really make a big difference Thanks to my co workers at eZ Systems Nordic for being patient and understanding when I needed a quiet place to work I would also like to thank Pedro Dias for being tolerant flexible and understanding for always being there to support me and for providing honest feedback Thanks also to my family and friends for their patience in stressful times Bergfrid Marie Skaara Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management This chapter introduces the eZ Publish content management system and defines some key concepts It is written for everybody working with an eZ Publish website In general there are two different sets of interfaces used to edit and manage content on an eZ Publish site These should not be confused with the front end website as it is presented to visitors called the public siteaccess nor with the term siteaccess described later The first set of interfaces is the Administration Interface which includes the Object Edit Interface for content editing operations This is the advanced back end interface used mostly by webmasters site administrators and developers The second interface set is the Website Interface accessible through the front end of the website and mostly used by content editors This set includes the Content Editing Interface which ha
288. g Priority Ascending gt Figure 3 5 Areas of the Administration Interface As shown above the interface can be divided into six areas These areas are in fixed po sitions and will always be present In addition they are interactive and dynamic there are links and buttons to access the different functionality and perform operations and what is displayed in each area partially depends on the current context Note that some areas will be automatically disabled when the user performs certain actions For example some parts of the interface do not respond during editing to prevent you from doing op erations that are inappropriate for a given circumstance Here is a list of the six areas 1 Main menu 2 Path 3 Secondary menu 4 Main area 5 Right area Main menu 63 6 Search interface 3 2 1 Main menu The main menu 1 is a collection of tabs located below the eZ Publish logo and the Search interface 6 The secondary menu 3 sometimes called the left menu and the main area 4 display elements that belong to the selected tab The path 2 is updated to reflect the current location The right area 5 which contains the personal bar and the optional debug tools is unchanged regardless of the selected tab Note that the interface is identical for the first three tabs because each tab merely accesses different parts of the node tree The interface for the other tabs however is unique for each tab The tabs are
289. g Tip To edit an anchor tag manually refer to Section 11 3 1 6 2 Anchors 11 2 6 5 5 Changing an anchor name Changing the name of an anchor is done by bringing up the modal dialog on an existing anchor 1 Click on the anchor in the OE text area see Figure 11 44 OE text area with inser ted anchor icon so that it is the selected element 2 Click the Anchor button The Insert anchor modal dialog will be displayed You can change the anchor name using this dialog Click the OK button when done Tip You can also edit the anchor by right clicking it and choosing Properties from the pop up menu 1 2 6 5 6 Using anchors together with internal links It is possible to link to a specific part of a content object with an internal link through either the eznode or ezobject notation The following example explains how this is done Suppose you have an anchor called Steve inside an article called Apple You can insert a link directly to the Steve position in the Apple article from another article called Banana 1 Open the Banana article for editing and create a link using either the Link button or the context sensitive pop up menu 2 Inthe Insert link modal dialog choose either eznode or ezobject and click the Browse button Find and select the article called Apple and click the OK button The address of the Apple article will appear in the URL field for example eznode 113
290. ge the main language for a content object through the Website Interface 9 2 3 4 Removing translations versions The main translation the translation with the Main language radio button selected cannot be removed However if the object exists in several languages you can first change the main language to a translation other than the one that you wish to remove 1 Perform the steps described above to change the main language of an object When finished you will be viewing the object in the main area of the Administration Interface and the Translations window will be active open 2 In the Translations window mark the checkbox corresponding to the translation you want to remove Then click the Remove selected button 3 This will bring up a Confirm translation removal window You will then see the name of the selected language Click the OK button to complete the removal If this is not what you wanted you can go back by clicking the Cancel button Recall that a version holds one or more translations Removing a translation as described above will remove that language from all versions of an object All versions that contain only this language will regardless of their status be removed from the system Let us illustrate this with an example Suppose you have an object with several versions and several translations and this object is shown in the main area of the Administration Interface with the Translations window active Versi
291. gestas id imperdiet id justo Sed odio Nunc consequat Cras rutrum tellus Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis s Morbi commodo pellentesque metus Etiam bibendum Curabitur euismod quam qu bulum tristique mauris eros porttitor lacus quis commodo justo ante et nunc Figure 2 30 Result of edited article after OpenOffice org import 2 6 1 1 Replacing objects The Replace button on the Website Toolbar has similar functionality to the Import button However instead of creating a new content object it replaces the current object you are viewing with an uploaded file The replace action is in fact a combined delete and import action Because of this the old content is overwritten and cannot be retrieved through the trash system Therefore be cautious when using this functionality and read the confirmation dialog carefully 2 6 2 Exporting to OpenOffice org format This section explains how to export site content to OpenOffice org format These exported documents can be read by any application that supports the ODF standard such as OpenOffice org Writer StarOffice and NeoOffice as mentioned previously The exported document might not be 10096 equal to the source because there is not a complete one to one translation for all structural and visual formatting 54 2 7 Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface When you export a content object to OpenOffice org fo
292. gs Logout Administrator User My profile Site map e dui COMPANYLOGO yR Your company slogan here Loo Search Published version Not yet published News and Events Products Partner Community Knowledge Base Company cmd uMamgnveriona Home News and Events Tea Tea Version information Administrator User Created 01 24 2007 08 38 am Administrator User Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Sed ut libero eu ligula aliquet vestibulum Suspendisse Last modified elementum faucibus magna Quisque nisl felis pharetra id accumsan mattis gravida at nibh 01 24 2007 08 59 am Proin ultricies leo ut adipiscing tristique lectus elit tincidunt lectus ut pretium purus urna et felis Cras tincidunt nonummy nisl Administrator User Fusce semper velit eu imperdiet iaculis magna arcu feugiat eros vestibulum accumsan magna dui at turpis Praesent mollis Status convallis pede Vestibulum rhoncus diam in quam Proin cursus nisl a sem Nulla facilisi In tempus semper ligula Cras quis Draft lacus in tortor lobortis tincidunt Etiam purus nisl placerat quis faucibus sit amet lacinia non lacus Sed posuere porta orci Version 1 Figure 8 5 Draft object The information shown in the Object information and Current draft windows remains the same as in Figure 8 4 New object above except that the Modified timestamp is updated for the draft If the draft which is the only existing version is discarded the obj
293. h simple modifications 1 3 eZ Publish from a non technical perspective 1 3 1 Unlike many other content management systems eZ Publish does not use a one size fits all approach Instead of trying to fit data into rigid and predefined structures the system allows the creation of custom structures using an object oriented approach This approach allows for greater flexibility and ease of maintenance The topics of siteaccess and templates presented below are only a brief introduction Here our goal is to establish some familiarity with the terms Interested readers should refer to the eZ Publish documentation site at http ez no doc for more information Siteaccesses The content of a site can be displayed and modified in various ways This is possible through multiple site interfaces At a minimum each site has two site interfaces the Administration Interface previously described as an interface set and a public front end interface for visitors The latter can include the Website Interface which is the front end interface set for content manage ment A typical example would be that the site administrator uses the Administration Interface to build and modify the site A content editor might use the more lightweight Website Interface to manage content A site can also have several different interfaces in addition to these To decide which site interface to display eZ Publish uses a generic solution called a siteaccess Sitea
294. h templates and CSS This is managed by your de signers and developers The Online Editor described in this chapter comes with its own stylesheets meaning you will not see the raw text markup with the OE enabled nor will you see the exact view as on the public siteaccess To learn more about CSS refer to In Depth Web markup standards in Chapter 1 or web documentation such as ht tp www w3 org Style CSS learning Enabling and disabling the Online Editor 295 11 2 2 Enabling and disabling the Online Edit or The Online Editor can be turned on and off at two levels overall availability for your site and temporary availability restricted to the current user Overall availability means that the OE has been installed and set up for use on your eZ Publish site This is done during development or by your site administrator By default the OE is enabled for all users The OE can also be turned on and off by the logged in user while in edit mode You might want to disable it to see the XML code or in order to directly edit the XML tags This can be done by clicking the Disable editor button located under one of the XML input fields shown in Figure 11 2 Edit mode with OE which will turn off the OE for all XML block attributes This affects all content editing but is restricted to the current user session You can turn the OE back on by clicking the Enable editor button located under one of the XML input fields This was shown in Figur
295. hapter 10 The Media Library Tab Media library e Media e E Banners Files o jj Images c f Cars ss Ferrari BB 512 front oper fe Ferrari BB 512 side open usi Ferrari BB 512 front ssi Ferrari BB 512 side Multimedia Figure 10 10 Destination objects for new relation 1 Select the Content structure tab and navigate the Content branch to a location where you want to put your new article 2 Create an article object by using the Create here button at the bottom of the Sub items window This will bring up the Object Edit Interface for your new article 3 Navigate to the bottom of the Object Edit Interface to the Related objects window Click the Add existing or Upload new button depending on whether or not the image is already in the system New image file for upload Browse Alternative image text Send for publishing Discard draft Related objects 0 There are no objects related to the one that is currently being edited Delete selected MESS ISAEID M MEISIez 7 Figure 10 11 Related objects window Add existing and Upload new buttons Media library and multiple locations 267 Here we click the Add existing button and thus activate the Browse interface Navigate to the Media branch as previously described in Section 10 3 1 Navigation and structure Locate the image you want to include in the article mark the corres ponding checkbox then click the Select button 4 Repeat the above step to add
296. hat you are logged into the Administration Interface that the Content Structure tab is selected and that you have some folder object available You will see an icon next to it You can easily view and edit an object from the context sensitive pop up menu for that object Alternatively enter edit mode as described in Section 7 1 1 Bringing up the Object Edit Interface Edit mode will look something like this Description TIERS EXER ES ESEREJIEZESES AE s company Information about this company Information about this company Information about this company Information about this company Information ab out this company Information about this company Information about this company i Information about this company Information ab out this company Information about this company Main values of company Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Europe America Asia List of offices List of offices List of offices in Europe in America in Asia Ma lt p gt Disable editor Show children r Class none ig Online Editor 4 2 Send forpublishing Store draft Discard Figure 11 2 Edit mode with OE 294 Chapter n Content Editing Notice the XML input field for the Description attribute When the OE is enabled you should be able to see the OE toolbar above and the OE status bar below the OE text area These components are described in the upcoming sections
297. hdate phone number and so on However the custom employee data may not fit perfectly into this predefined model since it probably includes information that is specific to the company for example a department internal phone number and so on Even though some systems allow the creation of custom structures the solution is often a complicated and time consuming process that requires both programming and manipu lation of the database In addition once the solution is in use future alteration of the structure itself becomes more complex With eZ Publish customization can be done both at the time of initial development and after the site has gone live except for sites using eZ Network which is an automatic maintenance service for eZ Publish where there are some customization restrictions 1 2 Separation of content and design This section describes the concepts of content and design how they relate and how eZ Publish expresses the relationship between them One of the keys to building a site that Content the data 1 2 1 can be easily managed and maintained is knowing how to use the system to clearly sep arate data from presentation Content the data Content is information that is organized and stored in a structured manner by eZ Publish For example content may be the components of a news article title introduction body images or the properties of a car make model year color All information that is stored for
298. he desired new location Choose a new location for lt News and Events gt Choose a new location for lt News and Events gt using the radio buttons and click Select Navigate using the available tabs above the tree menu left and the content list middle Itl Home 6 EH 50 List Thumbnail Name T C gg News and Events Folder C E Products Folder C Parner Frontpage Community Frontpage c Knowledge Base Documentation page C gg Company Folder Figure 9 39 Browse interface select new location Mark the corresponding radio button for the destination location then click the Select button The node and its underlying nodes will be moved to the selected location The result is shown in the screenshot below Home Community News and Events 0 Visible Hide C Home News and Events 5 Visible Hide Set main Figure 9 40 Locations window after move Copying content 239 Note that if you move a node using this approach the system will also move its children For example if you move a folder containing news articles from one location to another the articles will also be moved Tip You can move content in the Website Interface by clicking the Move button on the Website Toolbar when viewing the desired content This is described in Section 2 3 3 3 Moving objects 9 3 4 Copying content The Administration Interface allows you to copy content Copy in this context means i
299. hen click the Create here button on the Website Toolbar See Section 2 3 2 1 Adding content for more information 9 1 1 1 Multilingual content Content editors working with single language sites may skip this section The Administration Interface allows you to create content objects in any of the available site languages by using the dropdown list of languages located in the Sub items window as shown in Figure 9 1 Tools for creating objects previously Warning Creating new objects is not the same as translating existing content to a new language The latter is described in Section 9 2 3 1 Editing a translation Object creation 193 If the desired language is not listed in the dropdown list contact your site administrator for support or refer to the Managing the translation languages section in the document ation located at http ez no doc ez publish technical manual 9 1 1 2 Example creating an article The following example demonstrates how to create and publish a content object of the Article class in a folder 1 Navigate to the location node under which you want to add new content For ex ample if you want to add a new article browse to the container in which you want the article to appear Content structure Media library User accounts Webshop Design Setup My account gt Home and Events Press Previ Details Transhti Locati Rehti Content structure E TER m _ Home y Press
300. hene hen nene 133 xi 6 5 Main area with Locations switch active sssssessse 135 6 6 Preview window disabled sss eee 136 6 7 Preview window enabled sssssssssssssesesee meme 136 6 8 Preview window button bar restricted eese 138 6 9 Details WINdOW ME 138 6 10 Translations window one translation ssse 139 6 11 Translations window several translations see 140 6 12 Locations window ssssssssssssssese e eee me eme menn enn e rhe rre rennen 141 6 13 Relations window 55 ecce seen eere nre Pa een e PR cevsaues 142 6 14 Sub items window 2 eene nO eee ie N 143 6 15 Sub items window thumbnail view ssese 145 6 16 Sub items window detailed view sss 145 7A Object Edit Interface ccc 2 rese eod tee erre er E re Io eo ERR See A 151 7 2 Open Object Edit Interface from main area esse 152 7 3 Open Object Edit Interface from pop up menu eee 153 7 4 Object information window sess eee hehehe nenne 155 75 Current draft windOW x5 eestor cc dans o OR ER Rhe osea rye i re 156 7 6 Translate from window esses me he mene hens eren 157 7 7 Translate from window multiple translations eeeeeee 157 7 9 Section WINDOW 5 ter caved eie exe l e Eee pex Ra a ee Eee HE bie e eed 158 7 9 M m edit WiNdOW i ose tmr epe oevew
301. here dropdown list at the bottom of the Sub items window contains Comment as the only option In contrast if you are logged in with an Administrator user account to the Ad ministration Interface this restriction no longer applies In fact you can create any type of content below an article For example a new article or even a folder can be placed below an existing article While this behavior might seem illogical because if you exploit this behavior it might break a well defined content hierarchy it is unavoidable because articles are containers The default templates for articles will not display anything but comments below the article itself We therefore discourage Administrator users from performing Content relationships m a create here operation below articles It is best to think of articles as non containers 5 4 Content relationships A content relationship implies that there is some form of connection between different pieces of content In eZ Publish there are three ways to build content relationships As previously described the content node tree ties all published content together in a content hierarchy Content relationships here are between parent and children nodes Object relations are relationships between objects in eZ Publish For example an image can be embedded in the body of an article The different object relation types are de scribed in Table 6 1 Object relation types External links conn
302. hows the different version numbers the edited language for each version information about the version structure see Section 8 1 4 Version structure and status below and for multilingual sites a dropdown list containing the available translations for each version Whenever a translation is updated or added a new version is created thus each version contains only one edited updated language For example if an article already exists in English American French and Hungarian editing and updating the English American translation will create a new version This new version would contain the edited English American translation and the existing French and Hungarian translations copied over from the previous version Thus the edited language for the new version is English American Translations and multilingual content are the topic of the second major section of this chapter Version limitations 171 Version numbers and edited languages are represented as links Clicking on these links will instruct the system to display the different versions translations using the Version preview interface Tip Content editors working with the Website Interface can access a similar interface by clicking the Manage versions button on the Website Toolbar Daily version management tasks are described in Section 9 2 Editing objects writing and translating 8 1 3 Version limitations As every edit procedure results in the creation
303. icking on a version name or number in the draft see Section 9 2 1 Smart editing using drafts and trash see Section 9 2 5 1 Trash lists 232 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Content structure Version preview ID em User 70 ngish American Bil Created 12 20 2006 08 56 am Administrator User COMPANYLOGO Modified 02 19 2007 02 01 pm Your company slogan here Bookmarks Administrator User News and Events Products Partner Community Knowledge Base Eng Fre Ge Site settings Logout Administrator User My profile Company amp Published version 12 Home News and Events gez y Createhere Edit Move Remove openoffice Import Export Rel News and Events B Version information News and Events Investor bulletins Add to bookmarks Created 02 19 2007 01 34 pm Clear cache Administrator User Latest Information From This Company Missi SSE z P EE Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum d iz Pa pm sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Loren Gatton Luar ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit enr Status amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ip SEMINE sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet 10 Translation Ei English Amer Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Pellentesque ullamcorper e
304. iew of the built in classes but will also provide you with a reference for when you are working with content on your site The principle of learning by doing is particularly relevant for this material 102 Chapter 5 Content Classes The classes are organized into six groups based on common features or usage Obviously some classes will belong to more than one group You may also find that your site uses some content classes differently than described here Before discussing the different content classes we will present an overview of the three main text datatypes These are important for understanding content class attributes and are involved in many of the illustrations throughout this chapter 5 1 Text input field types Recall from Chapter 4 that a content class is made up of attributes and that a datatype describes the type of value that is allowed in these attributes When working with text there are three relevant datatypes the Text line stores a single line of unformatted text the Text block stores multiple lines of unformatted text and the XML block validates and stores multiple lines of formatted text 5 1 1 Text line block datatype plain text format The only difference between the Text line and Text block datatypes is that the former contains only a single line whereas the latter can contain multiple lines Neither allow formatting The screenshot below shows a Text line input field used as the title of an arti
305. ife cycle of a content object consists of several object states These are Draft Published and Archived The illustration below shows an object in various states and the transitions between them 174 Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features OBJECT STATES D New object Store draft Status Draft Discard draft Store amp exit Current version D Publish BEIM B wally Version 1 Published i Status Archived Current version 1 3a Discard 1 Edit Current version 1 Status Published Store draft Version 1 Published Store amp exit Current version 1 an I i L l i L l i L I I i Version 2 Draft i i L i Li i L i I i L I Current version 2 T Figure 8 3 Life cycle of a content object As can be seen from the figure the object state has a direct relation to the object status The object is in a published state meaning that it will be displayed on the site and in the content node tree when its status is set to published Version structure and status 175 Recall that versions are the second dimension of content objects and that modifications are done to a specific version of an object Following from this transitions between object statuses are triggered by modifications to one or more of the object s versions or by de leting the entire object Content objects always have a status You may think of an object status as a built in at tribute
306. ilisis aliquet lorem Vivamus sit amet lacus Phasellus suscipit Etiam ut eros Duis nunc nisi auctor et lt strong gt venenatis sed volutpat lt strong gt a felis Vestibulum ante ipsum primis in faucibus orci luctus et ultrices posuere cubilia Curae Fusce ut risus Proin egestas diam in convallis aliquam felis sem lacinia risus sit amet eleifend urna elit vitae lacus Aenean at pede ac est ornare ornare Integer nec augue Nulla vitae augue Etiam mi header level 2 gt Sub heading lt header gt emphasize Mauris ipsum purus suscipit quis commodo sollicitudin volutpat nec lectus Nulla metus Nunc eget augue et neque vehicula tincidunt Suspendisse ac felis Aliquam elementum ipsum nec accumsan ermentum nulla nisl luctus justo a posuere augue risus a sem lt emphasize gt Sed nonummy porta est Figure 11 59 XML example 1 heading bold and italic XML syntax 357 11 3 1 3 Literal unformatted text The lt literal gt tag can be used to output unformatted text such as source code Everything that is inside a literal block will be rendered in the same way character by character as it is within the literal tags The text will be output using the HTML pre tag The optional class parameter classifies the tag as described in Section 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements literal class gt Example lt literal gt Tip To edit a literal tag with the OE refer to Section 11 2 62 Literal ou
307. imit the search simply navigate to one of the content tabs and try again 3 4 3 3 2 Missing search results If your search yields no results or results other than what you expected the following situations may apply No content matches the search terms This is a very obvious reason but can be annoying if you expected to find content It may indicate that the content you expected to find has been deleted or has not yet been created Recall that archived and draft content will not appear in the search results Content versions are discussed in Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features The search terms are misspelled If your search terms do not match any content your search terms or the content that you expected to find might be misspelled Correct your spelling and retry or try searching for alternate terms The search is too narrow Check to see if the Current location radio button is selected You might get better results by selecting the All content radio button and thus perform ing a broader search You have insufficient access permissions to the target content See Section 1 5 User accounts 3 5 Menus and switches Earlier in Section 3 2 4 Main area we briefly described the main area of the Admin istration Interface This section describes the context sensitive pop up menu and the switches that are available in the main area A detailed description of the main area can Context sensitive pop
308. imported as article OpenOffice org Document imported as Coffee The images are placed in the media and can be re used mport another document Upbad file Figure 2 28 OpenOffice org import confirmation Click on the link to your new article and you will be taken to your newly published article page Home News and Events Press Releases Coffee gez Edit Move Remove Opendffice Export Replace News and Events C offe e gt Investor bulletins Administrator User gt Technolgy Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Mauris blandit magna quis tristique Press Releases pulvinar mauris turpis pretium urna eu rutrum felis velit ut nibh In dapibus dui a nisl Aliquam Events at sem dignissim libero placerat sodales Mauris iaculis scelerisque augue Morbi vulputate EE hendrerit lacus Suspendisse potenti Nulla dolor Etiam pulvinar nisl nec venenatis semper nunc nisi vestibulum dui eu scelerisque nulla dolor vel dolor In faucibus nunc et arcu Pellentesque risus nulla iaculis sed egestas id imperdiet id justo Sed odio Nunc consequat Cras rutrum tellus Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas Morbi commodo pellentesque metus Etiam bibendum Curabitur euismod quam quis vestibulum tristique mauris eros porttitor lacus quis commodo justo ante et nunc Vivamus magna elit bibendum vitae porta at ornare quis nibh Donec non dui Do
309. ing and deleting content especially via the Administration Interface Content editors satisfied with the basic idea of nodes as structural wrappers for published content may skip this section Recall from Section 4 3 2 1 Locations that a node refers to exactly one content object The usual case is that an object is referenced by only one node Thus there is normally a one to one relationship However see Section 4 3 2 3 Content at multiple locations Content node tree 95 below for a description of situations where there are multiple nodes that refer to the same content object Because of the node encapsulation of objects any content object can be placed anywhere in the tree as long as the object is placed in a container A quick introduction to containers can be found in Section 2 3 3 1 Containers structuring Containers are discussed in more detail in Chapter 5 Content Classes 4 3 2 2 1 Node ID Every node is automatically assigned a unique identification number similar to the class and attribute IDs described previously see Section 4 2 Datatypes attributes classes and objects The Node ID numbers are used by the system to organize and keep track of the nodes The Parent node ID reveals the node s superior node in the tree 4 3 2 2 2 Object ID As with nodes every object that exists in the system has a unique identification number The Object ID in a node pinpoints the specific object that the node encapsulates
310. inserting literal text inserting a content object inserting a link and inserting a table The specific modal dialogs for these settings are described later in this chapter Warning Mozilla based browsers might not support modal dialogs correctly You might be able to work with the parent main window even if a dialog is being displayed This should never be done Whenever a modal dialog appears it must be closed before the parent main window is used 1 2 4 4 OE status bar The OE status bar is located directly below the OE text area It displays useful inform ation about the element where the cursor is currently located The following screenshots demonstrate typical scenarios See the description below each screenshot for an explana tion 300 Chapter n Content Editing eZ publish is a popular open source content management system and development framework It allows the development of professional dustomized and dynamic web solutions It can be used to build anything from a personal homepage to a multinational corporate website with role based multiuser access online shopping discussion forums and other advanced functionality In addition because of its open nature eZ publish can easily be plugged into communicate and coexist with existing IT solutions P e TB online Editor 4 Figure 11 8 OE status bar example 1 In the screenshot above the cursor is placed inside an italic word customized the curren
311. ion Interface The main edit window in the Object Edit Interface is where you modify the attributes that make up the current object See Also Object Edit Interface An object can be created in any of the languages found in the list of translation languages When an object is created its main language is set to the language that was used during creation The main language transla tion cannot be removed At the system level initial language is another term for main language See Also Multi language features Translation Translation languages The main menu of the Administration Interface is a horizontal group of tabs located below the eZ Publish logo and the Search interface See Also Administration Interface The Media library tab is one of the tabs in the Administration Interface It is associated with the Media branch also called the media library and section of the node tree which anonymous users cannot access by default The media library is used to store media content including images anim ations movies and documents outside the Content branch The media 378 MIME type Modal dialog Module MTA Multi language fea tures Multilingual site My account tab Node Non translatable attrib utes Glossary library can be considered a repository for often reused material and mater ial uploaded to the system through the Online Editor See Also Content structure Section Administration Interface Multip
312. ion set name title name and options Options holds the option text and price You can also decide which option should be the default option You can add and remove options and option lists with the associated buttons 2 4 3 Managing Webshop orders If the website is configured to sell products via a Webshop users can access their order history and current order status via the User profile page see Section 2 2 1 User pro file 1 Access your user profile as described previously 2 Click on the link My orders see Figure 2 3 My profile page 44 Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface Users can view their order history and the status of any current order The following screenshot illustrates this Customer order view Customer Information Customer Address Name Administrator User Email bms ez no Order list ID Date Total ex VAT Total inc VAT 1 12 22 2006 12 47 pm 152 00 152 00 Purchase list Product Amount Total ex VAT Total inc VAT 1 152 00 152 00 Figure 2 21 Order history 2 5 Versions and translations Chapter 8 is dedicated to the topic of versions and translations Here we give the topic a short introduction for content editors working with the Website Interface We start by covering the basics of the versioning system Then the concept of drafts a very useful resource for content editors is covered with some practical instructions and examples Third you will le
313. ion window displays information about the section that an object belongs to and allows you to change the section Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features This chapter covers versions and translations two topics that are tightly coupled in eZ Publish The system comes with a built in version control mechanism as well as built in support for multilingual content A brief overview of these topics was given in Sec tion 2 5 Versions and translations for content editors working with the Website Inter face This material is highly relevant for content editors working with the Administration Interface of eZ Publish Moreover content editors working with the Website Interface will find that this chapter can provide a deeper understanding of the topics expanding upon the descriptions from Chapter 2 To help you develop good editing practice we provide some background for important and frequently used editing tasks As a result you will be less likely to make mistakes and run into problems in your work You will also gain a deeper understanding of the draft concept which can be a source of confusion and can cause editing conflicts Recall that Acontent type is called a content class or class for short while a specific piece of content is called a content object or object for short A content class can be thought of as a structural blueprint for a particular type of content The properties of that content a
314. ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Press Releases New company website released p Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet a Good results in the fourth quarter Good results Lorem ipsum dobr sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dobr sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Figure 1 5 Webpage with templates 1 The above screenshot shows the News and Events section of the site displaying a highlighted bar with the latest article followed by other articles The templates dictate that the most recent article should have a different look You might also have noticed 12 Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management that the articles are displayed slightly different here than on the front page shown in Figure 1 3 Website Interface previously Eng Fre Ger Login Register Site map COMPANYLOGO Your company slogan here Search News and Events Products Community Knowledge Base Company Home News and Events Press Releases Latest Information From This Company News and Events Latest Information From This Company dii a Administrator User gt Technolg gt Product releases Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum do
315. is A typical search procedure that is searching and then editing is described below 1 In the search field enter the name or content phrase to search for For example the word release is part of a name in our example above 2 Click the Search button 3 Matches will be displayed as in Figure 3 14 Search 1 Release above Click on the name of the node in the list that you want to examine The system will then display the node Click the Edit button to edit it see Section 9 2 Editing objects writing and translating 3 4 3 2 Limiting a search to the current location The Current location radio button makes it possible to limit a search to the node that is currently displayed and all the items below it For example you may want to only search the Knowledge Base folder in the Content branch or the Images folder in the Media branch Simply navigate to the folder in the content hierarchy select the Current location radio button and continue with the search as in the previous procedure This option is only available when you are navigating the node tree from the Content structure Media library or User accounts tabs On the other tabs the radio buttons are disabled If you cannot select the Current location radio button check which tab you are on In particular note that you cannot perform a limited search from the My drafts page in the My account tab The search can be further limited by using the advanced sear
316. is played in the Relations window for each object However it is also possible to add an ad hoc relation that is a relationship to an object for an unspecified purpose This is done via the Related objects window in the Object Edit Interface Related objects specified in this manner are not displayed by default when the content object they are related to is displayed The other relations types can also be added for related ob jects that are already of the Common relation type 6 2 7 Sub items window always at the bot tom The Sub items window is always visible as is the Preview window It displays the node s children meaning those that are beneath it in the node tree Sub items 5 10 25 50 a Name T j Investor bulletins Technology V gg Product releases Gj Press Releases j Events Delete selected List Thumbnail Detailed Type Folder E Folder rj Folder r Folder E Event calendar 4 Update priorities Article M English American gt Sorting Published x Descending v Ed Figure 6 14 Sub items window The primary purpose of this window as shown in Figure 6 14 Sub items window is to display information about the nodes that are located directly beneath the currently se lected node In addition it allows the following functionality Creating new objects Removing existing nodes Editing existing objects 144 Chapter 6 Content Structure Tab Layout in Detail Co
317. is possible to copy a translation from any version regardless of the version s status such as published archived or draft Note however that starting from eZ Publish 3 8 there is only one edited language per version Thus the procedure for copying a translation is similar to copying a version from Section 9 2 2 4 2 Publishing a version older than the current unless you select a translation from the published version in the Published version window in the Version history interface This is described below 1 Navigate to the content object in question and bring up the Object Edit Interface 2 Click the Manage versions button in the Object information window top left of the Object Edit Interface to bring up the Version history interface Alternatively select Manage versions from the context sensitive pop up menu 3 Inthe Versions for xxx window click the Copy button for the version that contains the desired translation Or in the Published version window select the desired translation from the drop down list Then click the Copy button 220 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing 4 Versions for lt News and Events gt 2 ea Archived E 3 English Administrator 02 19 2007 09 57 02 19 2007 11 06 American User am am Ba Published g5 English Administrator 02 19 2007 11 13 02 19 2007 11 17 American User am am Show differences English American x s zf Je
318. is shown in Figure 7 2 Open Object Edit Inter face from main area Click one of the edit icons in the Sub items window at the bottom of the main area when some content object is being viewed This is shown in Figure 7 2 Open Object Edit Interface from main area From the context sensitive pop up menu see Section 3 5 1 Context sensitive pop up menu of the secondary menu select either Create here or Edit Edit in This is shown in Figure 7 3 Open Object Edit Interface from pop up menu Preview Details Transhtions Locations Rehtions Lj Press Releases Folder Last modified 12 20 English American M Move Sub items 6 08 56 am Administrator User English American EE 10 25 50 List Thumbnail Detailed Name Visibility Type Modifier Modified Section Lj 5 Coffee Visible Article Administrator User 01 03 2007 10 19 am Standard L 5 Fruit Visible Article Administrator User 01 02 2007 01 32 pm Standard a fa 49 I E New company website Visible Article Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 57 am Standard EJ S released quarter E Good results in the fourth Visible Article Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard E Fal A 5 New product release Visible Article Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard EH bial A S mm E Latest Information From Visible Article Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard EB is A This Company Aricie
319. istration Inter face Here is a list of the privileges provided by the different default roles Note that some of the categories may not be available on your site Anonymous users can access the public areas of the site with read only privileges They have not logged in Member users are anonymous users who have created their own account Administrators can also create Member users Self registered users are auto matically assigned to the Member group They can create topics and replies in forums and add comments whenever the comment functionality is enabled They can also modify personal account information such as email address and photo This group of users was named Guests prior to eZ Publish 3 9 Currently installations without the Website Interface also call this group Guests Partner users are configured by the Administrator user and have access to hidden areas of the site For example a Partner might have access to a targetted partner only news section Editor users are configured by the Administrator user and provide access to add edit move and remove most content on the site Administrator users can change the site settings and access the Administra tion Interface and can thus carry out user management These groups grant cumulative privileges by default That is an Editor can do everything a Partner Member and Anonymous user can do This also means that restrictions are highest for an Anonymous user
320. istrator User 01 18 2007 08 15 am 01 18 2007 08 15 am German M fe EE German Version Edited language Creator Created Modified 4 RA German Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 19 am 02 19 2007 10 19 am B 5 BS English American Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 20 am 02 19 2007 10 20 am Epa E English American Administrator User 02 19 2007 09 57 am 02 19 2007 10 31 am aA Iw Figure 9 13 Draft with higher version number than the published version 1 Click the Edit button for that version In the above screenshot select either one of versions 3 to 5 Here we choose version 3 since that is the only one editable by the currently logged in user 2 Click the Send for publishing button in the Object Edit Interface In the Object information window in the Object Edit Interface you will see that the number of the published version has changed The old current version is now archived and your target version is published You can also use the Version history interface to verify the update 206 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Versions for lt News and Events gt 5 a Version Status Edited language Creator Created Modified Ta Archived E English American Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am 12 20 2006 08 56 am B aA im Archived BS German Administrator User 01 18 2007 08 15 am 01 18 2007 08 15 am ica Published E9 English American Administrator User 02 19 2007 09 57 am 02 19 2007 11 06 am Ep T 4 Draft R German Bergf
321. it will be visible in the Related objects window 9 1 2 4 Removing object relations To remove an object relation of the Linked or Embedded type see Table 6 1 Object relation types remove the link or embedded object from the XML text input field in edit mode For relations of the Attribute type click the Remove object button in edit mode Only the relations are removed and not the objects themselves For example if 198 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing your news article embeds an image and you do not want to use that particular image anymore you can cancel the embedding but the image will not be deleted This is done so that other relations involving this image will not be broken and so that it can be reused later Use the checkboxes and the Remove selected button in the Related objects window to remove relations of the Common type If a relation of the Common type is also of an other type only the Common type relation will be removed the other relation type s must be removed individually Removing content objects is described in the last part of this chapter 9 2 Editing objects writing and translating This section describes everyday editing tasks in the Administration Interface Above we looked at the object creation process and related objects Here we present illustrated walk throughs regarding drafts version control translating content handling editing conflicts and undoing changes The Object
322. iteaccess tells the system how to recognize the site interface that is being accessed Template a custom HTML file that determines layout and design for a specific type of content Content object class A content type is called a content class or class for short while a specific piece of content is called a content object or object for short A content class can be thought of as a structural blueprint for a particular type of content The properties of a class are referred to as attributes Content node In eZ Publish content objects are wrapped or encapsulated and structured using content nodes or nodes for short Nodes allow objects to be placed in the node tree Content node tree Nodes are organized in a node tree divided into three major branches the Content Media and Users branches The node tree is also known as the content hierarchy User account To log in to either the Website Interface or Administration Interface you need to have a valid user account To edit and manage content your account must belong to the Editor or Administrator group Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface This chapter is a user guide to the eZ Publish Website Interface It describes how to work with the interface to edit and publish content The Website Interface provides re duced content management complexity and increased ease of use compared to the Ad ministration Interface This material is written for c
323. ject relation A content structure can refer to several things in eZ Publish First it refers to the way material on your website is organized Second it refers to one of the tabs in the Administration Interface the Content structure tab This tab is associated with the Content branch of the node tree See Also Section Content node tree The context sensitive pop up menu or pop up menu contains functions that are specific to the item from which the menu was invoked providing quick access to commonly used functions The pop up menu can be brought up by clicking one of the icons to the left of a node in the tree menu or Sub items window provided that JavaScript is supported and enabled in your browser See Also JavaScript A Cascading Style Sheet is a construct that is most commonly used with HTML and XHTML to provide more control over page display CSS al lows designers to create stylesheets that define how different elements Current Draft Window D Datatype Default language Design Details window DNS Draft 373 such as headers links and images should appear The stylesheets can then be applied to any webpage Modifying a stylesheet changes the display for all webpages that use the stylesheet See Also Design Class parameter The Current draft window is a part of the Object Edit Interface and displays information about the version that is currently being edited See Also Object Edit Interface
324. kground inform ation is provided In those cases the information is kept as simple as possible Special in depth material xix Throughout the book it is assumed that you are working with an existing eZ Publish in stallation Installation setup and technical material in general is covered in the book eZ Publish Basics This book can be used in a self study environment or as a supporting resource for eZ Publish courses and certifications After the content listing below we have included a section with reading suggestions for different editor groups This book is compatible with eZ Publish version 3 9 and Website Interface version 1 At the time of publication the latest versions were eZ Publish 3 9 1 and Website Interface 1 1 2 1 Special in depth material Due to the non technical approach in this book we have isolated some of the more technical material and presented it in In Depth blocks These blocks provide more back ground information for interested readers but can be skipped without interrupting the flow of the book or missing out on important concepts 2 2 Example strategies This book makes extensive use of examples screenshots and illustrations It includes tips and tricks real life examples and a running tutorial That is the examples assume a standard default installation and the examples build on each other so that sometimes one example uses data entered in a previous example xx Preface Eng Fre Ger L
325. l see a modal dialog called Link properties It is very similar to the previous modal dialog This dialog allows you to edit the link properties For example you Online Editor daily tasks 339 can use it to change the link URL to http ez no doc Then click the OK button to apply the changes 7 To remove the link from the image right click the image and select the Remove Link item from the context sensitive pop up menu 11 2 6 5 4 Inserting an anchor Anchors are used for linking to a specific section of a page Follow the steps below to set up anchor linking 1 Position the cursor at a place where you wish to add an anchor and click the Anchor button You can also right click this location and choose the Insert anchor item from the context sensitive pop up menu You will see a modal dialog called Insert anchor as shown in the screenshot below e http nemo bms ez no Insert ar D X Properties Attribute name Value There are no attributes defined Ed EH Figure 11 43 Modal dialog for inserting an anchor 2 Specify the anchor name and click the OK button The inserted anchor will appear as a special icon in the OE text area The following image shows this icon Ut congue nisi vel malesuada vulputate lacus tortor vehicula dolor at lac Vestibulum nec nisi et nulla varius dapibus Bauris diam elit euismo Figure 11 44 OE text area with inserted anchor icon 340 Chapter n Content Editin
326. laced by an update As a rule of thumb a version can only be edited if it is a draft and it can only be edited by the same user who initially created it The Pending and Rejected statuses are used by the collaboration sys tem See Also Version Content object Draft View Ww WebDAV Webshop Website Interface Website Toolbar XHTML 387 A view can be thought of as an interface to a module By using views it is possible to reach various functions that a module provides For example among other things the content module provides views for displaying editing searching and translating the contents of objects The name of the view that should be accessed appears after the name of the module separ ated by a slash in the URL See Also Module Web based Distributed Authoring and Versioning is a set of extensions to the HTTP protocol that allow users to collaboratively view edit and manage files on remote webservers The system comes with an integrated shop mechanism for e commerce that plugs directly into the object node tree model An actual product is represented by a published content object containing information about the product itself along with a price There is a front end and a back end interface set for managing content the Website Interface commonly used by content editors and managers and the Administration Interface commonly used by webmasters site administrators and developers The Website
327. lass attribute Content diff Content Editing Inter face Content hierarchy Content node 371 article objects below folder objects in the content structure By default when viewing the folder the list of articles is displayed How the sub items are displayed is defined in the templates and settings for the container objects See Also Content class Content node tree Content is information that is organized and stored in a structured manner by eZ Publish For example content may be the components of a news article title introduction body images or the properties of a car make model year color All information that is stored for the purpose of later retrieval is referred to as content See Also Design A content type is called a content class or class for short while a specific piece of content is called a content object or object for short A content class can be thought of as a structural blueprint for a particular type of content The properties of the class are referred to as attributes See Also Content object Content class attribute Datatype The properties of a content class are referred to as class attributes A datatype describes the type of value that can be stored in a attribute and is the smallest possible entity of storage Each attribute has a set of generic controls that are the same for each attribute regardless but not independ ent of the datatype that represents the attribute See
328. last part of the URL to avoid ending up in the Object Edit Interface again and generating an editing conflict Let us look at this through an example Suppose that the URL of a page is ht tp nemo sandbox index php back content edit 143 5 eng US When editing this page you would likely have content edit as part of the URL string It could also be content history or content versionview depending on what window you have accessed in the Object Edit Interface To cut and paste the address simply omit everything after and including the content string In other words the correct URL to enter in the new browser window would be http nemo sandbox index php back If your browser automatically copies the URL when you open a new window you can work around this simply by opening the extra window before you enter edit mode Or preferably make a bookmark in your browser to the starting page of the Administration Interface and use this whenever needed This way you will not have to worry about getting the URL wrong or causing editing conflicts 7 2 Object information window The Object information window displays information about the object that is being edited The following image shows what this window looks like Current draft window 155 Object information ID 143 Created 12 22 2006 08 53 am Administrator User Modified 01 02 2007 01 32 pm Administrator User Published version Figure 7 4 Object inf
329. lick the link as the functionality provided by the pop up menu is not available In other words the dynamic behavior is disabled However the windows of the main area will still behave the same 6 1 Secondary left menu 6 1 1 This section describes the layout and features found in the secondary left menu of the Administration Interface when the Content structure tab is active Tip The secondary menu can be enabled and disabled using the buttons For the following explanations we assume that it is enabled Interactive tree The secondary menu of the Content structure tab displays nodes representing content objects belonging to the Content branch of the content node tree Here you will find most of the content that is published on your website It will be structured and organized in a manner similar to your site structure By default not all kinds of content are included in the secondary menu The content classes listed are folders forums and galleries User groups are also listed by default but these are normally only kept in the Users branch and thus you will not see this in the Content branch Content such as articles and images does not appear in the secondary menu However this behavior can be fine tuned to the specific needs of your site In fact this has probably already been done by your site administrator or development team If you think some content is missing in the menu those are the people to contact Our ex
330. ll not be able to set a sort method or order Another reason might be that you have accessed one of the items inside a container instead of the container itself If so simply navigate one level up in the tree Changing the sort method and or order in the Administration Interface may not produce a visible result on the public siteaccess The sort settings may not be used by the template that displays the content This is completely up to the developer who created the view templates For example the template might dictate that regardless of the sort method the content should be listed alphabetically from A to Z This override can be useful if you want to ensure a specific sorting behavior such as for an employee list Content editors should contact their site administrator to obtain information about possible constraints related to sorting The solution may be as easy as setting the sort method in the template to follow what is set in the Administration Interface Reversing the order is also a trivial task but it has to be set in the template by the administrator or an experi enced eZ Publish developer 9 3 3 Moving content around We now turn our focus toward tasks for the reorganization of material within the content node tree moving copying duplicating and deleting objects Sometimes you might accidentally publish content at the wrong location or you might simply want to relocate content Moving content in eZ Publish means to alter an
331. locations using the Add locations and Remove selected buttons The Set main button can be used to change the main node These work in the same way as for the Translations window described in the previous section These content management actions are described in Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing 6 2 6 Relations window The purpose of the Relations window is to reveal information about other objects that either use the current object or that the current object currently uses The following screenshot shows the Relations window 142 Chapter 6 Content Structure Tab Layout in Detail Related objects 3 Class Relation type E Latest Information From This Company Article Common Embedded _ Events Event calendar Embedded Gg Press Releases Folder Embedded Reverse related objects 0 The item being viewed is not in use by any other objects Figure 6 13 Relations window In eZ Publish any type of object can be connected to any other type of object This feature is typically useful in situations when there is a need to reuse information from elsewhere in the system You might recall content relationships from Chapter 5 An object relation is a type of content relationship Object relations can be set at the object or attribute level For example images can be added to articles by embedding them in the XML block that contains the body of the article or by specifying them as Image attributes for the content object If th
332. log and for being flexible with working hours making it possible to cooperate even with a huge time zone gap I also would like to thank Aleksander Farstad and Bard Farstad for helping with initial project coordination and ideas Also a big thank you to the eZ Knowledge Products team for discussing ideas answering questions and being a positive collective motivator Particular thanks to Svitlana Shatokh ina for digging up technical information on features not yet documented at the time She also wrote the Online Editor manuals and kept me updated on issues related to this book Thomas Hellstrgm provided the illustrations in this book which were reused from Balazs Halasy s book eZ Publish Basics Thomas did not receive credit for his work on eZ Publish Basics an oversight for which the publisher apologizes I would like to thank Yelitza Jaramillo for invaluable discussions in the office helping me to rethink concepts and always being willing to share information about system de velopment and experience gained from working with customers and from training sessions Thanks to Vidar Langseid Jostein Knudsen Ole Marius Smestad Bj rn Reiten Gunnstein Lye Rune Langseid and the core support team for answering my tedious questions about technical features releases and bug fixes Thanks to Kristian Hole and Alexander Block for providing feedback from training sessions and for commenting on the initial content outline draft Thanks to Hege Runge
333. login ssessss e 24 2 3 My profile pagers 2 5 etait ade I Pe SS a a AT a eA DAATAR Te FRANE Aa 25 2 4 Change password page cscs cee e eei tee eerte nte a HERR tren ne iia 26 2 5 Edit user information page sssssessee HH 27 2 6 Notification settings page ssssssssse mI HH meme emere 28 2 7 Keep me updated Dutton risici niia en a iniaa meme 29 2 8 Website Toolbar create dropdown list see 30 29 Bdit modes ee ER RR SERRE E NUI RR BER UNI RSER IR Rd 31 2 10 Add article Step 1 w vet sens eere tr ten ETE VE beste eon ere EE sie eee p ete 32 2 11 Add article edit mode teat n ee tete sa Phan 33 2 12 Add article result sonore onn coetu eorr t te see rne set pe avg e cusses 34 2 13 Editarticle start oe me C etra ERR ERR RE has VER ees 34 2 14 Edit conflict select version essssee HH 36 2 15 Moving content browse for location sse 38 2 16 Webshop components eienn ennan aa He e Henne hne EE 40 2 172 Webshop ine ER CREE NR I QUERER E A 41 2 18 Produet edit mode iss ieai irern esei aea idea eese repe ese be ep ees 42 2 19 Product Price attribute iie a te tene ICI BEAR ETE RR aA 42 2 20 Product Options attribute sesssssessesee mee 43 2 21 Order hiStoEy ee od e tay EU HE ERU EC ERE CERE oe PEU AEAT 44 2 22 Version overview page csesssessseseee emm HI mem meme e nee ESSEET E n 46 2 23 My drafts page c vei
334. lor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet This is the start of the main article body Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet 1 Numbered list 2 Forthis fancy 3 article here A subheader Some random text is used to fi se p up the paragraph Some random wis a E a text is used to fill up the i Sou a paragraph Some random text is 23 E used to fill up the paragraph E Some random text is used to fi up the paragraph Some random f text is used to fill up the paragraph Some random text is used to fill up the paragraph Some random text is used to fi up the paragraph Some random text is used to fill up the paragraph Some random text is Side view of one of the classics from 80s used to fill up the paraqraph
335. m described later in Section 2 5 2 Drafts 6 Thenew content object will be added to the node tree also called the content hier archy below the page object you were just viewing 34 Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface E Eng rre Ser Site settings Logout Administrator User My profile Site map Your company slogan here Search News and Events Products Partner Community Knowledge Base Company Home News and Events Press Releases gez uce v Createhere Edit Move Remove openoffice Import Export Replace News and Events Press Releases gt Investor bulletins Fresh fruit Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Quisque sagittis laoreet urna Nam rhoncus risus eget enim Pellentesque erat libero pharetra non gt Ever pretium vel commodo vitae arcu New company website released Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit f amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet W a Good results in the fourth quarter Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Figure 2 12 Add article result 2 3 2 2 Editing content Editing content is similar to adding content in that the same attributes are displayed but they contain data from an existing object Follow the steps
336. ments lt h level class gt Example lt h gt or lt header level class gt Example lt header gt For example lt h level 1 class red gt Example lt h gt Tip To edit a heading tag with the OE refer to Section 11 2 6 1 1 Creating new headings 11 3 1 2 Emphasized text Bold text can be achieved by using one of the following tags lt b gt lt bold gt or lt strong gt The optional class parameter classifies the tag as described in Sec tion 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements 356 Chapter n Content Editing lt b class gt Bold text lt b gt or lt bold class gt Bold text lt bold gt or lt strong class gt Bold text lt strong gt Italic emphasized text can be achieved by using one of the following tags lt i gt lt em gt or lt emphasize gt The optional class parameter classifies the tag as described in Section 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements lt i class gt Emphasized text lt i gt or lt em class gt Emphasized text lt em gt or lt emphasize class gt Emphasized text lt emphasize gt Tip To edit an emphasize tag with the OE refer to Section 11 2 6 1 4 Emphasizing text bold and italic The following screenshot shows an XML input field with the OE disabled containing a header and a few bold and italic tags header level 1 gt This is a heading lt header gt Praesent fac
337. menu 2 You will see a modal dialog called Edit Cell properties re http nemo bms ez no Edit table cell San 0 x Edit Cell properties Width Apply to Cell Row Column Class No classes are available for the element lt td gt ES EE Figure 11 56 Modal dialog for edit cell properties You can use this dialog to specify the width either 0 100 or number of pixels and the class for the current cell It is also possible to apply the settings to all the cells in the current row or column 3 Click OK when you are finished 11 2 6 6 9 Nested tables Itis possible to have tables inside other tables This can be done by inserting a table into an existing table cell The new table is referred to as a nested table or inner table 1 Position the cursor inside the cell where you wish to insert a new table Online Editor daily tasks 351 2 Click the Table button as in Section 11 2 6 6 1 Creating a table You will see the Insert table modal dialog 3 Specify the desired properties and click the OK button A new table will appear inside the table cell al b1 c1 d1 a2 b2 c2 d2 b4 a4 c4 d4 a5 b5 ic5 d5 Figure 11 57 Nested tables 1 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements The class parameter can assign a specific appearance or behavior to an element In most cases the value in this parameter corresponds to a specific CSS class used for styling Therefore your
338. ministrator User 01 18 2007 08 15 am 01 18 2007 08 15 am Archived English American Administrator User 02 19 2007 09 57 am 02 19 2007 11 06 am a i 4 Draft fag German Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 19 am 02 19 2007 10 19 am E amp L5 Draft Eg English American Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 20 am 02 19 2007 10 20 am EH Ba Published E9 English American Administrator User 02 19 2007 11 13 am 02 19 2007 11 17 am BA Delete selected English American z 5 x s x Show differences Published version Version Translations Creator Created Modified Copy translation 6 ES English American Administrator User 02 19 2007 11 13 am 02 19 2007 11 17 am English American gt fe E German This object does not have any drafts Figure 9 16 Version history result of revert You must take the extra step to make a copy of the archived version because the direct transition from an archived to a published status is prohibited in the system Refer to Table 8 1 Actions on version states for an overview of transitions actions Tip In the Website Interface the procedure is initiated from the Version history page and works in exactly the same way except that the Content Editing Interface is used for editing 9 2 3 Working with translations This section describes and illustrates editing operations related to content translations Content editors only working with single language sites can skip this section Translations are clo
339. ministrator User 02 19 2007 09 57 am 02 19 2007 11 06 am ig TL a4 Draft EB German Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 19 am 02 19 2007 10 19 am EJ Ts Draft E3 English American Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 20 am 02 19 2007 10 20 am EH rs Draft E English American Administrator User 02 19 2007 11 13 am 02 19 2007 11 13 am EP A English American z 4 s Published version 3 English American Administrator User 02 19 2007 09 57 am 02 19 2007 11 06 am J English American x fs German 4 Em German Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 19 am 02 19 2007 10 19 am ig 5 English American Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 20 am 02 19 2007 10 20 am raj 6 English American Administrator User 02 19 2007 11 13 am 02 19 2007 11 13 am Fe Figure 9 15 Version history initiate revert The screenshot shows the list of versions after version 3 has been copied Version 6 holds the new copy 2 Note that the Edit button in the above screenshot is disabled for versions with archived or published statuses Click the Edit button for the copied version to bring up the Object Edit Interface 3 In the Object Edit Interface make any necessary edits then click the Send for publishing button You can verify the result in the Version history interface 208 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Versions for lt News and Events gt 5 Version Status Edited language Creator Created Modified 22 Archived PM German Ad
340. miscellaneous configuration settings that will override the defaults See Also Site Administration Interface The site languages is a set specifying the languages in which the contents of a site should be displayed It can be controlled per siteaccess based on a prioritized list See Also Multi language features Translation Siteaccess Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is a protocol used to send email messages between computers SOAP is an XML based lightweight protocol for exchanging information By default content objects are automatically sorted in the order that they were published with the newest material at the top Sorting is managed through the Sorting controls in the Sub items window of the Adminis tration Interface See Also Sub items window The Sub items window is shown at the bottom of the main area of the Administration Interface when viewing some content This window displays a node s children if there are any See Also Main area Administration Interface The horizontally aligned switches at the top of the main area of the Ad ministration Interface determine which windows also called panels are shown in the main area A blue background indicates that a switch is on and thus the window containing the related information is currently being displayed For the Content structure tab the switches are Preview Details Translations Locations and Relations See Also Administration Interface The main menu of
341. mmend that you make it a habit to log out when you are finished with your editing and site management tasks This will prevent others from accessing your account through your computer without even needing your login details Also if you want to swap between different user accounts for example between Editor and your regular user account you have to log out before a new login can occur Simply click the Logout link found in the top right corner of the Website Interface see Figure 1 3 Website Interface or in the Current user area on the right side of the Administration Interface see Figure 1 4 Administration Interface 1 6 Requirements The Website Interface and Administration Interface of eZ Publish can be accessed regardless of your physical location and or operating environment as long as the follow ing requirements are fulfilled The client machine must be able to access the eZ Publish server via the internet or in ternal network The client machine must be equipped with a supported web browser In Depth Web standards technical requirements The Website Interface and Administration Interface use the XHTML 1 0 Transitional standard combined with Cascading Style Sheets In addition JavaScript a lightweight programming language that extends the functionality of XHTML is used to create a more user friendly environment Among other things JavaScript is used to create an interactive tree representation of content i
342. mn Content Quick settings fij Trash Small Medium 10 25 50 List Thumbnail Detailed a Name Type Priority gg News and Events Folder 1 E Products Folder 2 la r F r _ Partner Frontpage Community Frontpage Knowledge Base Documentation page jj Company Folder E a Delete selected Articie English American Sorting Priority Ascending gt Update priorities Figure 6 1 Areas of the Administration Interface The main menu 1 is a collection of tabs located below the eZ Publish logo and the Search interface The secondary left menu 3 and the main area 4 display elements that belong to the selected tab Each tab represents some subsection of the Adminis tration Interface For example the Content structure tab provides access for viewing and managing most of the content that is published on your site The main area displays the actual content and interfaces that are associated with the current action and is where most of the work is done When viewing content here you will see a row of switches at the top used for toggling the display of windows within the main area The secondary menu provides access to content and interfaces that are associated with the current tab It appears on the left of the Administration Interface For the first three tabs the Content structur
343. montes nascetur ridiculus mus Nulla lobortis aliquet nibh Pellentesque leo lorem semper nec adipiscing id tristique quis sapien Curabitur ut tortor porta lacus venenatis suscipit In porta nunc sed ligula Vestibulum luctus est a tristique placerat sapien leo elementum urna ac auctor sem augue quis nisl Proin libero Vivamus hendrerit Nam vehicula justo sit amet nunc viverra faucibus Proin convallis metus pulvinar dolor Pellentesque facilisis neque non leo Curabitur id metus Nullam volutpat lorem vitae cursus posuere libero eros lobortis lacus non egestas odio est non dolor Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Pellentesque volutpat orci ac justo Etiam accumsan In aliquet Praesent ornare nibh placerat dapibus fringilla elit nisl vehicula nulla vel rutrum lectus tellus quis purus Morbi elit neque accumsan nec tincidunt sed fermentum in justo Aenean vitae ante ut eros ullamcorper rutrum Fusce elementum Cras molestie nisi quis metus Fusce orci lectus imperdiet in tempor vitae vulputate nec enim Aliquam in metus vitae augue vehicula rhoncus Cras suscipit metus sit amet mi Etiam porttitor neque ut ipsum Ut sollicitudin nibh vitae nunc Vivamus quis odio id justo aliquam pretium Quisque congue metus ut porta fringilla sapien ipsum porttitor ante eget facilisis magna neque non diam Mauris id purus Curabitur nulla Donec sem nisi cursus sed lobortis in faucibus vel
344. most cell with which to merge 2 Clickthe Merge cell button The selected cells will be merged into one cell contain ing all of the content To merge vertically right click on a cell and select Merge down from the context sensitive pop up menu The cell will be merged with the cell directly below it The new merged cell will contain the content of both cells Tip You can also select the cells to merge as described above then right click on the selected cells and choose Merge Cells from the pop up menu 11 2 6 6 7 2 Merging table cells in Mozilla In Mozilla based browsers you can only merge empty cells If you wish to merge non empty cells you must temporarily move the text elsewhere and paste it into the new cell after merging The procedure is the same for horizontal or vertical merges 1 Select the empty cells you want to merge This can be done in two ways You can either click in the first cell then hold the mouse down and drag across the cells to merge or you can click in the first cell hold the Shift key and click on the right most or left most cell with which you wish to merge To merge vertically click on the top most or bottom most cell with which you wish to merge Online Editor daily tasks 349 2 Click the Merge cell button The selected cells will be merged into one cell Tip You can also right click on the selected cells and choose Merge Cells from the pop up menu 11 2 6 6 8 Table and
345. mpany Main values of company Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Europe America Asia List of offices List of offices List of offices i4 Class none lg Online Editor 4 2 Disable editor Figure 11 5 OE components 1 OE text area 2 Context sensitive pop up menu see Figure 11 6 Pop up menu for OE element 3 Modal dialogs see Figure 11 7 Modal dialog 298 Chapter n Content Editing 4 OE status bar 5 OE toolbar 11 2 4 1 OE text area Formatted text see Section 5 1 2 X ML block datatype rich text format and the Rich text content definition in the Glossary is placed into an editable multi line text area hereafter referred to as the OE text area The OE text area contains an editable visual ization of XML code as formatted text 11 2 4 2 Context sensitive pop up menu The context sensitive pop up menu feature pop up menu for short was described in Section 3 5 1 Context sensitive pop up menu and its usage related to the left menu of the Administration Interface was explained in Chapters 6 through 9 With the Online Editor the pop up menu can be accessed by right clicking anywhere in the OE text area The following screenshot shows the context sensitive pop up menu for the OE in action Summary required wma ejes de doas 2 dog 2z 2Ma bLalit neque accumsan nec tincidunt sed fermentum in justo Aenean vitae ante ut eros ullj Undo Fusce elementum Cras molestie nisi quis me
346. ms Multimedia 4 Downloads 4 lt p gt lt custom gt lt p gt DM Bottom column noma ze e BI E Class none uj Online Editor 4 2 2 Class none ra Online Editor 4 2 Figure 5 9 Frontpage column The Frontpage class has four main sections consisting of three column attributes the Left column Center column and Right column attributes above a bottom area the Bottom column attribute that stretches across the width of the page The three columns are very flexible in that only the columns that contain content will be displayed and those that are displayed will always use the entire available width of the page For example if you enter some content in the left and center columns and nothing in the right column the page will be rendered so that the center column is the width of two columns occupying the available space from the empty right column Due to its dynamic handling of empty content attributes this is one of the most powerful content classes in the system The Name attribute represents the name of the frontpage content In addition there is a Billboard attribute shown in the screenshot below which is a banner image that will be displayed using the entire width of the page The Banner class is further described in Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab 110 Chapter 5 Content Classes Billboard Name Type Section Woman with hat Banner Media velet object f Ac object Figu
347. n between content and design One difference between the Version preview in terface and the Preview window is the design they apply Also note that the Version preview interface can be accessed for any existing version even drafts while the Preview window is limited to displaying the content node the published version of the object 7 7 1 View control window The View control window is part of the Version preview interface described above and makes it possible to control which siteaccess should be used to generate the preview In eZ Publish different designs are associated with different siteaccesses Refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management for information about design and siteaccesses The Translation list can be used to see how the object appears when viewed with different translations This list is not shown on single language sites If you have a multilingual site but the current version only contains one translation the radio button will be pre selected and disabled The Location list can be used to see how the object appears when viewed at different locations if it exists at different locations in the node tree If the currently selected content object is published at only one location the radio button will be pre selected and disabled As stated in the previous section you can also select different siteaccesses to apply to the preview Related objects window View control Translation FS
348. n be used as a quick reference guide and also to compare the two interfaces Beginner readers need not worry about the specific details in this table and can return to it later xxiv Preface Table 1 Overview of common procedures for both interfaces Task Website Interface WI Administration Interface AD Get editorial access Acquire a valid user account from your site administrator and access the login page click the Login link top right corner enter your username and password and log in See Section 1 5 1 Logging in Same as for the WI except that you must access the AI siteaccess or mark the corres ponding checkbox on the WI login page Navigate Browse the front end site as normal Use the horizontally aligned tabs path secondary left menu Bookmarks window and Sub items window See Section 3 4 Navigation View content Navigate to content Locate the content in the sec ondary menu or main area Click its name or select View from the context sensitive pop up menu Select the Preview switch Preview content Click the Preview button on the Website Toolbar when in edit mode Click the View button when in edit mode or select a ver sion number or translation in the Version history interface See Section 9 3 1 Preview ing content Enter edit mode Click the Edit button on the Website Toolbar when viewing content or create new content
349. n list 162 Translation list 162 View mode 144 Ww Web browser Clear cache 297 Web interface see Webpage Web standards 3 18 Cascading Stylesheets 3 18 see also CSS HTML 3 JavaScript 18 Markup elements 305 Rules for block and inline elements 309 Validation 289 XHTML 3 18 XML 3 WebDAV xviii Webpage 4 Webshop 39 94 101 404 Discount rule 40 Orders 43 Product 41 Shop related datatypes 40 VAT 40 Website see Site Website Interface xxii 1 5 7 21 21 22 57 86 127 149 167 190 257 Content management 30 Edit mode 287 Log in to Administration Interface 17 Login 16 23 Logout 18 My drafts 200 Requirements 18 Settings 25 Site settings 25 Sort content see Sort User guide 21 User profile 25 Edit 26 Version management 171 Version overview page 202 Website Toolbar 8 23 110 Website Toolbar xxiii 8 23 203 In edit mode 35 Workflow xviii X XHTML xviii 3 XML xviii xxiii 3 103 103 292 353 Attribute 311 Block and inline elements 309 Markup see XML Syntax Syntax 354 XML block datatype 88 102 103 195 264 287 287 290 XML syntax a 350 anchor 361 b 355 bold 355 em 355 embed 358 emphasize 355 Emphasized text 355 Index eznode 360 ezobject 360 h 355 header 355 i 355 li 357 link 359 List 357 literal 357 ol 357 strong 355 table 361 td 361 th 361 tr 361 ul 357 XML tag 305
350. n more detail in Section 5 5 3 Forum related classes Another useful application of the notification system is to subscribe to notifications when content for which you are responsible changes In other words you can track activity that occurs on a particular topic or other content without having to review the site constantly The Notification settings page is used to modify three aspects of this feature the fre quency of notifications whether or not notifications are sent individually or combined into one digest and removing the notifications setting from pages for which you previously requested notifications The following settings can be modified Receive all messages combined in one digest If this option is enabled all your notific ations will be combined into a single email If you have notifications for more than one page you will only receive a single email even if more than one page is modified during the notification period Time settings Specify the frequency to receive notifications Use the Time of day field to specify the time that the notification email will be sent Use the Daily Weekly and Monthly fields to specify the frequency of notification emails Node notification To stop receiving notifications for a particular node mark the checkbox beside the corresponding node then click the Remove button When you are done with the notification settings click the Store button at the bottom of the pag
351. n the Administration Interface and it enables the usage of context sensitive pop up menus and the Online Editor both in the Website Interface and Admin istration Interface Supported browsers 19 Although JavaScript enhances the interfaces the client does not need to have support for JavaScript enabled Thus the interfaces will function correctly in non JavaScript browsers but will not be as feature rich as intended You can still access the same operations through other buttons and links However note that if JavaScript is disabled the Online Editor will not be available Instead you will have to manually edit XML tags for the affected object attributes 1 6 1 Supported browsers The Administration Interface and Website Interface are designed to work in all major browsers on all of the common operating systems We test eZ Publish with the following browsers Internet Explorer 6 except with the Online Editor on Windows Vista Mozilla Firefox 1 5 Opera 8 except with the Online Editor Note that the interfaces should work in any browser that is capable of rendering XHTML 1 0 Transitional and supports CSS If CSS is not supported the system will appear without any design or layout but will still be accessible At the time of publication the Online Editor does not work with Internet Explorer on Windows Vista The reason for this is that Microsoft removed the DHTML component from Windows Vista from Release Candidate 1 and la
352. nce more there is now one addi tional version the new published version while the replaced version now has an Archived status Versions for Fruit 4 a Version Status Edited language Creator Archived nglish Administrator American User ES Archived B3 English Administrator American User M Draft ES English Administrator American User Ble Published BS English Administrator American User Remove selected Back Published version Version Translations Creator Created Modified Englist Administrator 01 02 2007 01 27 01 02 2007 01 32 Ame User pm pm New drafts 0 This object does not have any drafts Created 2 22 2006 08 39 1 am 01 02 2007 12 44 pm 01 02 2007 01 19 pm 01 02 2007 01 27 pm Moditied 12 22 2006 08 53 am 01 02 2007 01 19 pm 01 02 2007 01 33 pm 01 02 2007 01 32 pm e izi izi 8 English American x 3 x 4 z Show differences English American x E Figure 2 25 Version overview page after revert 2 5 4 Translating content eZ Publish can be used to build websites with content in multiple languages Site visitors can then choose from a list of languages in which to view a site Contact your site admin istrator or webmaster about available languages and what has currently been set up for your site If your site only has one language feel free to skip this section To translate content access the site in the target language and
353. nd buttons to the left of each node not to be confused with the similar buttons used to hide or display the secondary menu itself are used to unfold and fold the branches of the tree at any level Note that if JavaScript is not enabled in your browser the tree in the secondary menu is completely unfolded at all times The tree can also be navigated using the path and the Sub items window covered in Section 6 2 7 Sub items window always at the bottom In both cases you click the 68 Chapter 5 An Overview of the Administration Interface text links that correspond to the node to which you wish to navigate Note that this takes much more time than using the tree menu because every click forces the page to reload while folding and unfolding the tree menu does not For eZ Publish versions 3 8 and higher the secondary menu only shows the main con tainer nodes in the node tree This is done in order to prevent a noticeable drop in per formance when having to list all nodes on large sites Thus you will sometimes be forced to use the Sub items window together with the secondary menu in order to navigate to your desired location 3 4 2 Bookmarks This section explains how to use bookmarks in the Administration Interface and in particular how they aid navigation The Bookmarks window is found in the right area see Section 3 2 5 Right area A Bookmarks E 5 Fruit Daily Usage Questions Figure 3 7 Bookmarks wi
354. nd where it is used The different features of the Online Editor along with step by step instructions on how to use it How to use XML tags and their relationship to the Online Editor How to collect visitor information and where this information is stored This book aims to provide lightweight material with as little technical discussion as possible This chapter is no exception Therefore installation and setup related to both the Online Editor and information collection is omitted Interested readers should refer to the online manuals at http ez no doc Input validation 289 11 1 11 1 1 In this chapter content editors who work mostly or only in the Website Interface should focus on the material on the Online Editor and also aim for a basic understanding about input validation We recommend that content editors using the Administration Interface read the entire chapter Warning The Online Editor OE requires JavaScript to be enabled in your web browser See Section 1 6 2 Installation and environment requirements for the Online Editor for more information Following from this you will also have the context sensitive pop up menu available whenever the OE is available If you are prevented from working with the Online Editor see Section 11 3 Manual editing with XML tags For complete documentation on the Online Editor see the OE manuals at http ez no doc You will also find an installation guide there if for s
355. ndow The built in bookmark mechanism allows each user to store links to different nodes For example this mechanism can be used to bookmark and subsequently quickly access pages that you frequently edit To delete or edit bookmarks use the Bookmarks interface described below Recall from above that The Bookmarks window contains a list of the current user s bookmarks These bookmarks are specific to eZ Publish and should not be confused with the bookmark mechanism of your web browser The Bookmarks window will not display any bookmarks from the browser and the eZ Publish bookmarks will not be displayed in the bookmarks list in your browser menu The list of bookmarks can be enabled and disabled using the and buttons The screenshot below shows the disabled state of the Bookmarks window Figure 3 7 Bookmarks window above shows the enabled state Bookmarks 69 The Bookmarks window provides a button that can be used to bookmark the node that is currently being displayed Administrator User Change information Change password Logout Bookmarks E Clear cache Quick settings E Figure 3 8 Bookmarks window disabled The bookmarks feature is restricted to content nodes of eZ Publish thus you cannot bookmark special items for example an item in the Setup tab You also cannot bookmark external pages located outside of the node tree In Depth My bookmarks The Bookmarks interface located in
356. ne When a language is chosen instead of None the main part of the edit interface will contain the Translation interface see Section 8 2 2 Translation interface instead of the standard edit interface the Object Edit Interface will be in translator mode 214 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Edit lt gt Article Translating content from English American BE to French France Title required Juice uice Short title juice juice Author Administrator User lt bms ez no gt Name Email r Administrator User lbms ez no Summary required Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Pellentesque ullamcorper erat sit amet blandit semper risus tortor malesuada nulla nec ultrices justo massa nec nisi Aliquam non mi quis leo malesuada iaculis Aenean sit amet lacus Pellentesque metus ligula condimentum nec malesuada nee tincidunt non nibh noma som Br gs TAHEA Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Pellentesque ullamcorper erat sit amet blandit semper risus tortor malesuada nulla nec ultrices justo massa nec nisi Aliquam non mi quis leo malesuada iaculis Aenean sit amet lacus Pellentesque metus ligula condimentum nec malesuada nec tincidunt non nibh ri Figure 9 21 Translation interface translator mode In the Object Edit Interface use the Translate from window on the left to change the language on which to base the curre
357. ne or more nodes that represent the published version of that object See Also Content node An eZ Publish extension is an add on that provides extra functionality to the system An example is the Online Editor ezdhtml eZ Publish is a highly flexible and customizable content management system It can be used to build everything from personal home pages to multinational corporate web solutions with role based multi user access online shopping discussion forums and other advanced functions Based on Open Source technologies and principles it can be easily extended and customized to interact with other solutions See Also CMS eZ Systems F Formatted text Front end editing G Gallery Group Help HTML HTTP Information collection 375 eZ Systems is the creator of eZ Publish Based on a philosophy of openness and information sharing eZ Systems combines enterprise software with open source code and total product responsibility See Also eZ Publish Formatting can be as simple as marking a word bold or italic or using more advanced elements such as tables lists inline graphics links and so on This kind of content is often referred to as rich text Formatted text within XML block attributes is edited through the Online Editor or manually with XML tags Content can be edited from the website s front end through the Website Interface and its Website Toolbar when logged in with an Editor or Administrator u
358. nec pharetra eleifend augue Phasellus libero dolor adipiscing ut viverra dapibus consequat ut nulla Proin iaculis Integer sit amet diam ut nunc suscipit lobortis Sed magna Curabitur fermentum erat id justo Fusce lectus elit tempus et luctus non mattis posuere eros Aliquam erat volutpat Nunc nec risus sit amet odio bibendum iaculis Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Donec condimentum leo sit amet nunc Curabitur elit nisi mattis eget congue nec tempus eu turpis Curabitur porta nonummy sem Nullam mollis risus Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Morbi blandit porttitor lectus Class aptent taciti sociosqu ad litora torquent per conubia nostra per inceptos hymenaeos Sed suscipit ipsum eu sem consequat feugiat Integer quam pede molestie non blandit non eleifend nec massa Nullam at nibh Pellentesque non pede eget nunc luctus molestie Ut dolor Sed mauris Etiam aliquet iaculis elit Donec luctus diam vitae nunc Praesent scelerisque suscipit orci Fusce mollis ligula quis interdum dictum mi metus congue tortor eget bibendum nulla libero at enim Etiam vel purus ut neque adipiscing pulvinar Figure 2 29 OpenOffice org import result article full view You can then edit or delete your newly imported article as usual As you can see from the above screenshot the title of the imported content is taken from the filename Moreo
359. nee E E E A a 64 3 24 Main areae RISaoleW RIS A R E ROI 64 3 22 RIgh area 54e Nah diced dua bards pete detiene ig 64 32 6 Search mterface sooren eer e dac esr etin 65 3 3 Administration Interface tabs sssssse 65 34 Navigation 2 2 oninbzeenB tn ian nein 66 34 T Clicking around eei eroi e eroe i pie Fe eR EO Dne 67 3412 Bookmarks mnan ect A rete ie ee E a 68 BAB Searchims 25 oe cedi far betas casdasad sen Sa ans eU oli re tends pue RIO ENR ERR 72 3 5 Menus and switches iiie tenter nee tete ied 76 3 5 1 Context sensitive pop up menu ccseseeHHH 77 3 5 2 Selectively displaying windows by toggling switches 79 JG SUMIMALY M 83 4 Content Management Concepts Objects and Nodes eeeeses 85 4 1 Object oriented technology sse HH 86 4 1 1 Object orientation in eZ Publish eese 86 4 2 Datatypes attributes classes and objects seseesss 87 4 2 Datatypes iu otn e eee eet er reat ee Reni 88 4 2 2 Content classes and class attributes eese 88 4 2 3 Content objects 4 uo e RI ete e ee etn 91 4 3 Content nodes cec tto eth ee eoi torpe n RITE seat aan 92 4 3 1 Encapsulation of content objects eA 93 4 3 2 Content mode tree perti te rro eR ere pe E P ER RET 93 4A Summmaty 5 2 nee te TR DRIN eR 99 DS CONtent Classes 2 ccussosesieevss cones EAN ESAR oe caecnssgeenn cede dnged E
360. ner Knowledge Base p Community E Company Figure 10 7 Browse interface To navigate to a location in another branch of the content node tree using the Browse interface you have to use the up arrow to go to the top of the node tree beyond the root of your current branch Then you can navigate down into your desired branch This strategy is used for several of the editing operations described below 10 3 1 2 Tips and tricks for working with the media library Here we will discuss some useful tips and tricks for working with the media library Several of the tips also apply to content in general and are not specific to the media library Informative object names and image captions help when trying to locate content later with the search engine For example new product images with captions such as Outside view of ElectricCar 2008 front side passenger door and ElectricCar 2008 lighted odo meter are much more useful than if they all have the same caption New product photo Consequently you will more easily be able to get relevant search hits and thus locate content quicker Also good names allow you to spot desired content quicker by looking at the tree menu without having to examine each object In addition to using bookmarks and smart searching you will benefit from using a well defined hierarchical structure in the media library It is a common pitfall to put everything 262 Chapter 10 The Media Library
361. nfiguring the selected node s sorting settings If you have a single language site the language selection dropdown list is not shown It is also possible to access the context sensitive pop up menu described earlier by left clicking the icons in the list The following sections give an overview of the layout of the Sub items window 6 2 7 1 Limitation links The limitation links 10 25 50 in the top left corner control the number of nodes that will be displayed per page The default selection is 25 which means that new pages will automatically be generated if there are more than 25 node children 6 2 7 2 View mode selector The view mode selector at the top right makes it possible to choose between different view modes There are three settings List a simple list of nodes This is shown in the previous screenshots Thumbnail images are shown as thumbnails See Figure 6 15 Sub items window thumbnail view Detailed a detailed list for experienced users See Figure 6 16 Sub items window detailed view Sub items window always at the bottom 145 10 25 50 List Thumbnail Detailed r r e r i r Investor bulletins Technology Product releases Press Releases Lj r ia Events Delete selected Update priorities Aricie M Engish American z Sorting Published Descending v Figure 6 15 Sub items window thumbnail view 10 25 50 Lit Thumbnail Detailed Name Visibility Type Modifier Mo
362. nformation duplication In other words if you edit the original object the copy will not be updated and vice versa Use the copy functionality carefully The copy operation is normally initiated in the Administration Interface through the context sensitive pop up menu so you need to have JavaScript support enabled in your browser Alternatively select the Detailed view in the top right of the Sub items window to display the Copy button Tip You cannot copy content using the Website Interface The following procedure explains how you can copy a single node from one location to another In our example we will make a copy of the News and Events folder in the Company folder 1 Navigate the node tree until you find the node to be copied If you are using the Sub items window make sure that the target node is displayed in the list 2 Click the node s icon either in the tree menu on the left or in the Sub items window in order to bring up the context sensitive pop up menu 3 Select Copy The system will bring up the Browse interface 4 Use the Browse interface to choose a location for the copy 240 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Choose location for the copy of lt News and Events gt Choose a new location for the copy of lt News and Events gt using the radio buttons and click Select Navigate using the available tabs above the tree menu left and the content list middle B Home 6 10 25 50
363. ng text with Bold and Italic buttons 1 Select some text inside a paragraph and click the Bold button The selected text fragment will become bold Select another part of the text and click the Italic button The selected text fragment will become italic Chapter n Content Editing 3 Place the cursor inside some bold text The Bold button will change its appearance to indicate that the text at the current position is bold The lt p gt and lt b gt tags will appear in the status bar Chapter 2 Ut congue nisi vel malesuada vulputate lacus tortor vehi nisi et nulla varius dapibus Mauris diam elit euismod et tempor vel pretium eget est Aenean risus Nam tincidun malesuada ut dolor Proin tincidunt tincidunt urna Sed pt luctus quam a massa Pellentesque est nibh dictum a va tellus Cras eget elit ut leo pharetra pharetra Suspendisse Chapter 3 Class aptent taciti sociosqu ad litora torquent per conubia Nullam dignissim Cras erat Etiam porttitor auctor dolor tortor Praesent gravida rhoncus turpis p b Figure 11 20 OE when inside bold element If you place the cursor inside italic text the Italic button will indicate that the text at the current position is italic The p and i tags will appear on the status bar 4 Select a piece of the bold text and click the Italic button The selected text will be come both bold and italic 5 To create a new text paragraph starting with a bold
364. ngs to it provides access to privileged areas and operations Registered users in the system belong to user groups This concept is part of the access control mechanism and simplifies the task of managing users and assigning common privileges to multiple users See Also Access control User account The user profile is tied to the individual user accounts A specific user profile is only accessible when the user is logged in See Also User account UTF 8 is an encoding scheme for storing Unicode code points in terms of 8 bit bytes Characters are encoded using sequences of 1 2 3 or 4 bytes Characters in the ASCII character set are all represented using a single byte 386 V Version Version history inter face Version number Version preview inter face Version status Glossary A content object consists of one or more versions Versions are also known as the second dimension of content objects Every time you or someone else with editing permissions click either the Create or Edit buttons for some content a new version is automatically created by the system It is always the new version that will be edited old versions remain untouched A version includes a version number used to identify it and a version status draft published archived pending or rejected A version also contains at least one translation of its contents See Also Version number Translation Content object The Version history interfa
365. ns Usually the first two methods of interaction provide feedback to the webmaster whereas the other two result in addi tional content published on the site The most common content classes for user interaction are the Comment and Feedback formclasses as well as several classes for the forum feature Forum topics are placed beneath forum content objects and contain individual discussion threads including the original forum topic content and a series of forum reply content objects The forums themselves are kept in objects of the Forums container class Content classes that are commonly used to share information on the site include the Documentation page Infobox Event calendar and Gallery classes Most containers can hold not only images but also other media types like Flash Quick time Real Video and Windows Media files Each of these multimedia standards have a corresponding content class Chapter 6 Content Structure Tab Layout in Detail This chapter describes in detail the layout of the Content structure tab of the Adminis tration Interface We will focus on the secondary menu and the main area which were both outlined in Chapter 3 An Overview of the Administration Interface This material is relevant for everybody doing work in the Administration Interface Recall from the previous chapters that Content is information that is organized and stored in a structured manner by eZ Publish For example content could be the com
366. ns refer to the Administration Interface the troubleshooting tips are applicable to all content editing Keep in mind that drafts are found on the User profile page in the Website Interface 2 3 2 3 Online Editor When editing content you can use the Online Editor OE to apply formatting character istics to text fields You can perform actions such as creating links and inserting tables and lists The Online Editor is shown in Figure 2 9 Edit mode Hover your mouse over the buttons in the OE Toolbar to display a tooltip that describes the button s function e When a particular button is disabled this means that the button s function is not applic able in the current context The Online Editor is described in Chapter 11 with step by step guides illustrations and examples for the majority of visual and structural styling formatting you can apply to XML text XML text blocks are described in Chapter 5 Basic management tasks 37 2 3 3 Basic management tasks This section describes useful content management tasks beyond simply adding and editing content For background we will start with the concept of containers 2 3 3 1 Containers structuring Some content objects are of container classes and can contain and display other content objects below them in the content node tree This works just like folders and files on your computer The folders are containers for the items that are put in them Only objects located di
367. nsistent display across different browsers A Cascading Style Sheet CSS is a construct that is most commonly used with HTML and XHTML to provide more control over page display CSS allows designers to create stylesheets that define how different elements such as headers links and images should appear The stylesheets can then be applied to any webpage Modifying a stylesheet changes the display for all webpages that use the stylesheet 4 Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management To make a design one only needs to know the components of the content With an article for example it is enough to know that it has an introduction to decide whether it should be displayed in bold designers do not need to see the actual text within the introduction In other words the components of design are layout and data markup 1 2 3 Webpage components To sum up while content deals with storing and structuring data design dictates how the content should be presented These elements combine to form a complete interface a webpage as illustrated in the following diagram CONTENT DESIGN WEBPAGE Lorem ipsum Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipisicing elit sed do eiusmod Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet d i BN tempor incidi consectetur adipisicing elit sed d q dunt ut labore et dolore do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut ia ua magna aliqua Ut enim ad labore et dolore magna aliqua Ut RB og minim veniam quis nostrud
368. nt 225 Copy 239 Translation 219 Version 204 Create new 191 Headings 307 see also Text Style tool Hyperlink 334 340 Anchor 339 340 340 Input validation 289 Insert file 334 Lists 321 323 Change style 326 Convert p to li 325 Multi line list item 328 Nested 330 Media library 260 Online Editor 292 Publish existing version 204 Redo 303 Resume 226 Routines 225 Store and exit 156 Structure 287 Table 341 341 343 Cell 347 Header cell 344 Nested 350 Property 349 Remove 344 Rows and columns 344 346 Translation 140 Trash 228 Undo 227 303 Version Edit published 204 Reassign published status 204 Index Revert to older 206 Without OE 353 Working with formatted text 287 305 XML 353 Syntax 354 XML block datatype 313 314 316 317 Content Editing Interface 1 30 127 149 168 183 189 288 Content hierarchy 2 15 95 101 111 140 see Content structure Content management xxiii 2 5 21 30 37 85 189 231 Add location 246 Change main language 216 Combine content and design 4 Concepts 85 Content management system 2 Context sensitive pop up menu 77 Copy 239 Translation 219 Daily tasks 231 Delete see Remove Edit 198 Translation 209 Edit conflict 221 Functions 127 Media library 260 Move 37 237 Object oriented principles 86 Preventative measures 225 Preview 231 Remove 38 242 Hyperlink 337 Translation 217 Version 217 Sort 37 233 Tip
369. nt and for performing many administration tasks This chapter deals with layout tabs navigation and menus User registration is also discussed Chapter 4 Content Management Concepts Objects and Nodes describes in more detail the content management concepts used for structuring and storing content in the system emphasizing object oriented features and the content node tree Chapter 5 Content Classes a walk through of some of the default content classes in eZ Publish These are the blueprints for the content you will be adding and editing It also contains a discussion of the various text input fields available xxii Preface Chapter 6 Content Structure Tab Layout in Detail describes in detail the layout of the Content structure tab of the Administration Interface focusing on the secondary left menu and main area Chapter 7 The Object Edit Interface a special purpose interface embedded within the Administration Interface The Object Edit Interface is where the actual editing of content objects takes place Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features explains the built in version control mechanism as well as built in support for multilingual content It emphasizes version structure and the interfaces related to multilingual content Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing outlines the common tasks performed by content editors in the Administration Interface It is highly practical with step by s
370. nt translation and to turn translator mode on and off You cannot add new translations in this window that had to be done before entering edit mode 9 2 3 2 1 Using the Sub items window to add a translation 1 Make sure that the object s parent node is being displayed in the main area of the Administration Interface 2 Locate the object that you wish to edit in the Sub items window and click on its corresponding edit icon on the right You will be taken to the Language selection interface Working with translations 215 3 Existing languages Select the language you want to edit C English American New languages Select the language you want to add French France German Select the language the added translation will be based on C None English American Figure 9 22 Language selection interface new translation Select the desired parameters and click the Edit button The system will bring up the Object Edit Interface 9 2 3 2 2 Using the left tree menu and the context sensitive pop up menu to add a translation l Locate the object that you wish to edit in the tree menu on the left of the Adminis tration Interface Click on the object s icon in order to bring up the context sensitive pop up menu see Figure 9 19 Context sensitive pop up menu Edit in above Access the Edit in sub menu and select Another language You will be taken to the reduced Language selection interface It c
371. ntent We will start with an illustrated step by step walk through of how to add new content Then we will explain how to edit existing and newly created content 2 3 2 1 Adding content When you are logged in as a user with Editor privileges the Website Toolbar is displayed on each page of the site that contains editable content that is pages that are not automat ically generated by eZ Publish such as shopping cart pages Follow the steps below to create new content 1 Browse to the page under which you want to add the new content For example if you want to add a new article browse to the folder container under which you want the article to appear Site settings Logout Administrator User My profile Site map Your company slogan here _Search News and Events Products Partner Community Knowledge Base Company Hor N ind Events Press Releases Bez aricte y Createhere Edit Move Remove Op noffe Import Export Replace News and Events Press Releases bulk New company website released i Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results in the fourth quarter E Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Figure 2 10 Add article step 1 Adding and editing content 33 The
372. nvestor Relatic Ravan E EmmmE S fij Trash Small Medium Large Sub items 6 10 28 50 Lis Thumbnail Detailed Name Type Priority T gj News and Events Folder 1 r T gg Products Folder b A I Partner Frontpage 3 A T j Community Frontpage n rz T Knowledge Base Documentation page E rz T gj Company Folder b A Aricie x English American x Sorting Priority Ascending gt Figure 1 4 Administration Interface If you compare this screenshot to Figure 1 3 Website Interface you will see that the Content structure and Sub items windows in the Administration Interface contain the same elements as shown in the horizontal menu of the Website Interface Also notice that there are many more tools and operations available with the Administration Inter face 1 3 2 Templates Templates represent the fundamental unit of site design in eZ Publish For example a template might dictate that a page should appear with the site s title at the top and with the main content in the middle When the page is accessed the content management system places the content the actual title and body text into the appropriate locations in the template Templates n We saw previously that the combination of content and design constitutes a webpage Recall that a siteaccess dictates which design to use when displaying some content More specifically it specifies which set of design files stylesheets images templates to use
373. o Archived and thus it will be put in the trash see Section 9 2 5 1 Trash As the previous illustration shows Figure 8 3 Life cycle of a content object the status of the object s versions are not changed As long as the object remains in the trash it can be recovered to its previous status the object status can be Published again To be able to restore archived objects like this versions inside the object remain untouched Otherwise eZ Publish would not know which version to display on the public siteaccess after recovery 8 1 4 4 4 Possible editing actions on versions This section provides you with a brief overview of what you can and cannot do to a ver sion depending on its status This is not exhaustive and does not cover all exceptions but it gives a good overview of the most common actions and is intended to clarify as well as identify common misunderstandings and user errors We do not cover statuses used by the collaboration system Version structure and status 181 Tip As a rule of thumb a version can only be edited if it is a draft and it can only be edited by the same user who initially created it The table below shows available and non available actions for versions It is important to keep in mind that these pertain to version statuses not object statuses Recall that a published version is the one displayed by a published object and that archived versions are not the same as archived objects Table 8 1
374. o activate the changes 4 The page including the Sub items window will be reloaded and if you previously had a different sort method the layout of the Sub items window will change to in clude the Priority column Fill in the priority numbers and click the Update priorities button for the changes to take effect For sort methods other than priority this step is not needed 9 3 2 4 Setting sort criteria at creation time Setting the sort method and order for a node at its creation time is almost identical to the procedure described above for existing nodes However when creating a new object it does not yet have any children Thus there are no entries in the Sub items window and you cannot fill in exact priority values It is common that the main containers of the content node tree are set up in advance with sort criteria before other content like articles and images is entered into the system Settings for these initial containers should rarely be changed by content editors However deeper in the node tree you may find it useful to add subfolders to categorize and manage content In those cases you will have the freedom to set sort methods and orders 9 3 2 5 Troubleshooting If the Sorting controls are not shown in the Sub items window it is most likely because the current object is not configured to contain or show any children In other words Moving content around 237 the object might not be a container Thus you wi
375. o see some object relation entries here Media library example 279 Kaj Matchbox Image Last modified 02 21 2007 02 30 pm Administrator User English American Efl Matchbox English American M Move Administrator User 02 21 2007 02 30 pm Media 1 1 179 186 Relations 0 The item being viewed does not make use of any other objects The item being viewed is not in use by any other objects Figure 10 25 Image matchbox This image is not part of any object relation The reason is that it is not this image that we used for the image attributes in the articles Recall that we uploaded the file into each attribute and mentioned that because of that it was stored in the file system However this is not the existing content object from the media library that happens to contain the same file The January newsletter did have a relation to the color pencil box image object If we examine this object the Relations window reveals the following 280 Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab Koj Colour pencil box Image Last modified 02 21 2007 02 28 pm Administrator User English American PA me Colour pencil box English American Administrator User 02 21 2007 02 28 pm Media Relations 1 The item being viewed does not make use of any other objects 5 January 2007 newsletter Article Common Figure 10 26 Image color pencil box The relations co
376. odes will be removed Otherwise the removal will be carried out silently If you were viewing the object from the location that you deleted this will trigger an error message similar to this Q The requested page could not be displayed 3 The requested object is not available Possible reasons The ID number of the object is incorrect Please check the URL for spelling mistakes The object is no longer available Figure 9 53 Kernel error page cannot be displayed This is a natural consequence of the deletion of the location and you should not be alarmed eZ Publish simply tries to reload the previous page after deleting the location Because that node no longer exists the attempted reload fails Simply continue with your content management tasks by selecting content from one of the tabs or the left tree menu Tip For structural reasons you are not permitted to delete the main location of a content object If for some reason you want to delete the main location and keep secondary location s you can solve this by first setting the main location to one of the other locations Do this with care 9 3 6 4 When to use multi Location publishing and when to use plain copying The table below shows an overview of different situations where either multi location publishing or plain copying is appropriate Summary 251 Table 9 1 Publish at multiple locations or duplicate overview Situation Best alternative Using
377. odified timestamp of version 2 will change These transitions do not affect the status of version 1 nor the object itself except that the new version is associated with the object The version history at this point may look like this Object information Versions for lt Tea gt 2 ID rd z 5 160 Version Status Edited language Creator Created Modified Created Bi Published E9 English American Administrator User 01 24 2007 08 38 am 01 24 2007 08 59 am E A 01 24 2007 09 20 am Administrator User 32 Draft E3 English American Administrator User 01 24 2007 10 04 am 01 24 2007 10 19 am aA Modified 01 24 2007 09 20 am Engish america 1 zf 2 Administrator User Published version 1 Published version Version Translations Creator Created Modified Copy translation M EB English American Administrator User 01 24 2007 08 38 am 01 24 2007 08 59 am English American a Version Edited language Creator Created Modified ct E3 English American Administrator User 01 24 2007 10 04 am 01 24 2007 10 19 am e e Figure 8 8 Published object new draft version stored Compare this with Figure 8 6 Published object first version Note especially version 2 listed in the New drafts window after the update and the values in the status column of the upper window At this point the status and state of the object is Published version 1 is also Pub lished and version 2 is Draft If you then publish version 2
378. of content objects much like the title attribute of an article The difference is that the status is handled by the system while attributes like article titles are handled by content editors Let us now add versions to the picture As seen in Figure 8 3 Life cycle of a content object versions also have a status the version status Associated with each version status is a version state referring to a specific point in the version s time line The one to one relationship between a version state and a version status is the same as between object state and object status In fact for content editors object state and object status can be considered the same thing likewise version state and version status can be con sidered the same thing There are five possible version statuses states Draft Published Pending Archived Rejected The Pending and Rejected statuses are associated with the collaboration system de scribed in the In Depth Collaboration system section Let us now take a detailed walk through these concepts with the previous illustration in mind Figure 8 3 Life cycle of a content object 8 1 4 4 1 A new object draft status When a new object is created step 1 eZ Publish will also create a new draft version Because the object has not been published yet its status is set to draft and the current version of the object is unknown The screenshot below shows in the Object information window th
379. of the translation languages Recall that an object contains versions which contain translations Once an object is created in its main language multiple translators can work on the same object separately and simul taneously because they edit the translation itself instead of the entire version This means that if you have written an article in English different translators can add translations in French German and Norwegian for example to the object simultaneously They do not have to wait for each other in sequence Whenever an object is published the system automatically collects all the latest transla tions that the previous version s of the object contain s and puts them into the version being published The result is a version that contains all of the latest translations 8 2 5 Multilingual features overview You can perform the following actions related to multilingual content Create a new object in one of the available translation languages max of 30 Change the main language for an existing object Change an object s availability Translate existing content objects Add new languages to the translation list 188 Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features e Add remove languages from or re order the priority list of available site languages Have content displayed according to location specific settings The first four actions on the list can be performed by content editors These transla
380. ogin Register Site map COMPANYLOGO Your company slogan here _searh News and Events Products Community Knowledge Base Company rroga Alonsas Latest Information From This Compan New company website released pe EE Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem Lorem ipsum dolor sit ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet sit amet Lorem ipsum Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem A cor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet pum c ETE Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit aA Lorem ipsum dolor sit Soar amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results in the fourth quarter Good results Lorem ipsum dobr sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Boxes New product release The new product XYZ was released to the ui public today Lorem ipsum dobr sit amet The new product XYZ Green Paint Bucket Color Pencil Box Matchbox was released to the GAUL UTI public today Lorem Price 245 00 Price 89 00 Price 142 00 ipsum dolor sit amet Copyright 2006 eZ systems AS All rights reserved Powered by eZ Publish Content Management System Figure 1 Running
381. olutions with role based multi user access online shopping discussion forums and other advanced functions Based on Open Source technologies and principles it can be easily extended and customized to interact with other solutions The following list presents a brief overview of the most important features and benefits of eZ Publish Dynamic and customizable content structure Separation of content and design Powerful web based Administration Interface Easy to use Website Interface for creating and updating content Powerful and flexible template language WYSIWYG Online Editor for text editing Platform independence UNIX Linux Windows OS X and so on Flexible licensing Open Source and Professional License options Built in content versioning e Support for multiple languages translations and locales xviii Preface Built in search engine E commerce Webshop functionality Built in plug in system Role based permission system Built in workflow system Based on open and widely used standards XHTML XML PDF RSS PHP SQL LDAP WebDAV SOAP and so on The eZ Publish Website Interface is an extension to eZ Publish that makes it simple for users to create and maintain website content The Website Interface integrates into the front end of the website making content management intuitive and easy to learn Most of the basic content management tasks can be performed through the Website Interface The We
382. ome reason the Online Editor is not included in your current installation Contact your site administrator if in doubt Input validation Input validation exists to ensure that eZ Publish receives input in the correct format If the input does not validate eZ Publish will return feedback to the user on how to correct the input Datatypes and content attributes were described in Chapter 5 There we mentioned that some datatypes do more than just store data For example the XML block datatype sup ports validation This section explains this further Validation against web standards Because of the validation rules XML content received as input will be validated before it is stored in the database In other words the system will only accept and store data if it has valid XML structure Three common scenarios leading to invalid XML code are manual editing of tags in the XML block deleting too much or too little of a structure leaving orphaned tags and inserting pre marked up material from another source such as Microsoft Word or the old HTML version of an article when moving content from another system to eZ Publish Input validation in eZ Publish is very strict so input that was validated elsewhere might be invalid here You might recall from Section 9 2 1 Smart editing using drafts that using the draft system effectively can be an important component of good editing You can validate 290 Chapter n Content Editing your
383. ommon Delete selected Upload new Figure 10 16 Edit mode article 1 In Figure 10 16 Edit mode article 1 we have uploaded an image of a matchbox to the Image attribute This file will be stored in the file system and not in the database Interested readers should refer to the documentation at http ez no doc for additional information about how eZ Publish uses the database and file system for storage 272 Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab The Related objects window in the screenshot above shows that the content object Color pencil box is related to this article If we publish this article and exit edit mode the view looks like this pne Pe E Transhtions Locations Home B January 2007 newsletter Article amp News and Events amp gg Products Last modified 02 21 2007 02 41 pm Administrator User English American PS J Partner 4 amp j Community January 2007 newsletter J Knowledge Base amp gg Company Administrator User lt bms ez no gt Wednesday February 21 2007 amp G News and Events E February 2007 newsletter January 2007 newslette 3 conference _ Contact us j z 3 Investor Relations l I are CO Small Medium Large ection Versions Translations Node ID Object ID Administrator User 02 21 2007 02 41 pm Standard 180 187 Related objects 1 Relation type E Colour pencil box Image Common Reverse related objects 0
384. on 9 2 2 2 Comparing different versions Translate content Access the content in the siteaccess for the new lan guage and click Edit on the Website Toolbar See Sec tion 2 5 4 Translating con tent Enter edit mode as normal except first choose a new lan guage instead of an existing language See Section 9 2 3 Working with translations Sort content Not available Specify the sort order and method for a container object either when creating the con tent or later using the Sub items window See Sec tion 9 3 2 Sorting content Typographical conventions xxvii 4 Typographical conventions e Code samples class names and XML tags and their parameters are printed in mono Space font Filenames and paths are printed in monospace italic font Graphical user interfaces and their elements such as button labels are printed in bold font 5 About eZ Systems eZ Systems is the creator of eZ Publish an Open Source Enterprise Content Management System eZ Systems was founded in 1999 with one simple and pragmatic idea people working together sharing experiences and ideas can accomplish great things With this simple idea eZ has grown into a vibrant corporation with a thriving ecosystem of users partners customers and the eZ crew team members As a company we number 80 people with headquarters in Norway and offices in Germany Ukraine Denmark Canada and France The eZ
385. on collector Email required information collector Recipient nospam 2 ez no Figure 11 64 Feedback form in edit mode 11 4 3 Where does collected information end up The submitted data will be stored in a dedicated part of the database separated from but related to the object itself In addition whenever the attribute collects any data the in 366 11 5 Chapter n Content Editing formation can be sent to a specified email address The Collected information section within the Setup tab of the Administration Interface can be used to view and delete information that was collected through object attributes Content structure Media library User accounts Webshop Design er My account gt Collected information Setup Ce Cache management 10 25 50 Classes al Name Type First collection Last collection Collections a Collecrsd Information _ Contact us Feedback form 20 03 2007 3 24 pm 20 03 2007 3 24 pm X Extensions Global settings D l Ini settings Figure 11 65 Collected information page Summary In this chapter we looked at practical object editing with most of the attention directed at the usage of the Online Editor in edit mode This WYSIWYG editor integrated with eZ Publish allows you to easily work with formatted content without knowing how to code XML When installed and enabled the OE is available for all XML block attributes when using both the Content Editing Interfa
386. on on the OE toolbar to bring up the corresponding modal dialog Manual editing with XML tags In the previous section we went through the Online Editor in detail If your browser does not meet the requirements to run the OE or you simply prefer manual XML editing this section will provide you with the necessary information to carry out your content editing tasks Directly editing the tags that format eZ Publish content provides great power but can be a more difficult and slower process If you have a choice think of manual editing as a valuable supplement to what the OE provides Recall that Turning the OE on and off while in edit mode is done by clicking the Enable editor Disable editor button located under one of the XML input fields This will turn the Online Editor on or off for all XML block attributes Structured text is rendered as XHTML and the display is controlled through the template system of eZ Publish When the Online Editor is disabled see Section 11 2 2 Enabling and disabling the Online Editor you will be able to view and edit the XML code directly as shown in the screenshot below Warning Note that the system will not display the final XML code that is stored in the database only a simplified version 354 Chapter n Content Editing Description I embed size medium href ezobject 121 gt rmation about this company Information about this company Information about this company Inf
387. on the cursor at the end of the second list item hold the Shift key down and press the Enter key A new empty line will be created inside the second list item 330 Chapter n Content Editing this is the fist list item second list item first new line of text another line of text third list item item item last list item Figure 11 35 Add new text lines to a list item new line within list item Type in some text and continue adding new lines in the same way Although headings are not allowed inside lists you can use bold and italic formatting 11 2 6 3 6 Nested lists The Decrease indent and Increase indent buttons allow you to decrease and increase the indentation level for the current list item This makes it possible to create nested lists with sub lists and further modify their structure The screenshot below shows an example of this Online Editor daily tasks 331 Body Norma e e B I Mauris ipsum purus suscipit quis commodo sollicit et neque vehicula tincidunt Suspendisse ac felis A nulla nisl luctus justo a posuere augue risus a sem nunc accumsan sodales Nunc vitae neque Phasell imperdiet ut neque Ut ultricies ornare eros Sed cc per conubia nostra per inceptos hymenaeos Sed h commodo pede at vulputate tortor diam eget eros this is an unordered list with several list items and some are nested like this and like that and now the final element
388. ons 1 and 2 are in English eng GB and version 3 was translated to Norwegian nor NO At this point eng GB is the 218 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing main language for the object Looking at version 3 you can change the main language from eng GB to nor NO Then select the eng GB translation and click the Remove se lected button inside the Translations window The eng GB translation will be removed from all versions This means that versions 1 and 2 have no translation at all which is a paradox So to make sure the system is in a consistent state versions 1 and 2 are com pletely removed from the system After removing the eng GB translation the object will have one version version 3 Version 3 contains the nor NO translation and is as before the published version In some cases you might want to simply remove an entire version This will not affect the translations in the other versions To remove a version follow the steps below 1 Navigate to the content object in question and bring up the Object Edit Interface 2 Click the Manage versions button in the Object information window top left of the Object Edit Interface to bring up the Version history interface Alternatively select Manage versions from the context sensitive pop up menu to bring up the Version history interface 3 Mark the checkbox es for the version s that you wish to remove then click the Delete selected button Versions f
389. ons for comparing and repeat these steps When done click the Back to history button at the bottom of the window 204 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing 9 2 2 3 Opening a current published version for editing Warning You cannot directly edit the published version of an object Recall the permitted and prohibited actions listed in Table 8 1 Actions on version states Because of the version control restriction you must instead create a copy of the published version as a draft The procedure below only applies if you initiate the operation from within the Version history interface During normal editing when you click the Edit button on some object the system will automatically create the copy for you To edit the published version from within the Version history interface first click the Copy button next to the version ey Then click the Edit button next to the newly copied version i Now you can edit and publish the current version You can also save it as another draft When you have published the copied version that version is set to be the current version and the status of the previously current version is set to Archived In the Object Edit Interface you will find information about the version you are currently working on and how many versions exist for this object The version count can also be seen in the Details window when the main area shows the content object in normal view mode not edit mode
390. ont end of the site As a result you can navigate the site through familiar menus and links to locate content The screenshot below shows the Website Interface Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management Eng Fre Ger Logout Bergfrid Skaara My profile Site map COMPANYLOGO Your company slogan here _Search News and Events Products Community Knowledge Base Company eZ cocumentationpage Y Createhere Edit 2 P Rel Vus aie Latest Information From This Company New company website released r a Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem Lorem ipsum dolor sit ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet f y sit amet Lorem ipsum Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem A g ec St amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet M Si Icd Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit a Lorem ipsum dolor sit 4 E amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results in the fourth quarter Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Boxes New product rel The new product XYZ was released to the uH j public today Lorem ipsum dolor sit
391. ontains a list of languages in which the object does not exist and a list of available languages that the new translation can be based on see Figure 9 18 Language selection interface Select the language that you wish to add and optionally one of the existing languages on which to base the new translation After the Edit button is clicked the system will bring up the Object Edit Interface If you selected a language on which to base the translation you will be in translator mode 9 2 3 2 3 Using the Edit button to add a translation 1 Make sure that the object is displayed in the main area of the Administration Inter face 216 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing 2 Use the dropdown list of languages located at the bottom of the Preview window and select Another language 3 Click the Edit button as shown previously in Figure 9 20 Preview window Edit The system will display the reduced Language selection interface Select the desired parameters and click the Edit button The system will bring up the Object Edit Interface 9 2 3 2 4 Using bookmarks to add a translation Use the Bookmarks window in the right area of the Administration Interface to locate the bookmark of the object that you wish to edit Click on its icon to bring up the context sensitive pop up menu Then continue as previously described for using the pop up menu see Section 9 2 3 2 2 Using the left tree menu and the context sen
392. ontains only a Subject and a Message attribute just like a comment Forum replies are added through the public siteaccess by clicking the New reply button when viewing a forum topic thread If you have sufficient permissions this can also be done through standard editing procedures 5 6 Information sharing This section presents content classes that are commonly used to share information on the site without user interaction The Article and Frontpage classes have already been described 5 6 1 Documentation page class Objects of the Documentation page class are used to present reference information such as a knowledge base or FAQ page It is also useful for building online manuals and other reference documentation It is a container class like the Folder class and has a subset of similar attributes 120 Chapter 5 Content Classes The primary difference between these two classes is the way that they are displayed Compare the screenshots below showing the default view of a folder and a documentation page News and Events Products Community Knowledge Base Company Home News and Events News and Events News and Events Investor bulletins gt Latest Information From This Compan a a Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lor
393. ontent Right area Role S Search interface Secondary menu Section Send for publishing button Single language site Glossary In contrast to the plain text content you get from the text block line datatype the XML block datatype allows you to add formatting Format ting can be as simple as marking a word to be shown in bold or italics or more advanced like tables lists inline graphics and links This kind of content is often referred to as rich text See Also XML Datatype Plain text content The right area of the Administration Interface displays information specific to the user who is currently logged in It does not change regardless of what the user is doing although it can be disabled when in edit mode for example A role is a component of the access control mechanism and is used to gether with policies to specify concrete access rules for some content to some users See Also Access control Policy The Search interface is located in the upper right corner of the Adminis tration Interface It is always present and can be used to search regardless of the part of the site being accessed However it is disabled during edit mode The default behavior is that the system will search for the specified word s within the entire node tree You can limit a search by using the Current location radio button or by specifying advanced search criteria The secondary menu also called the left menu of the Adminis
394. ontent editors working with eZ Publish content through the front end of their website It can also be read as an introduction for those who will use the Administration Interface Recall from Chapter 1 that Content is information that is organized and stored in a structured manner by eZ Publish For example content might be a news article and its attributes title introduc tion body images Content object class A content type is called a content class or class for short while a specific piece of content is called a content object or object for short A content class can be thought of as a structural blueprint for a particular type of content The properties of a class are referred to as attributes There is a front end and a back end interface set for managing content the Website Interface commonly used by content editors and managers and Administration Interface commonly used by webmasters site administrators and developers The Website Interface uses the Content Editing Interface to edit and add content while the Administration Interface uses the Object Edit Interface to do the same In addi tion each set contains some special purpose sub interfaces such as those for managing content versions and translations To edit content you must log in with an account that belongs to the Editor or Admin istrator group To log in to the Website Interface begin by clicking the Login link located in the default design in th
395. ookmark of the object that you wish to edit and click on its icon to bring up the context sensitive pop up menu 3 Continue as previously described for the pop up menu Working with translations 213 Tip Alternatively when the Bookmarks window is open click on the name of the bookmarked object you want to edit This will display the contents of that object in the main area Then you can edit it as described in Section 9 2 3 1 4 Using the Edit button to edit a translation 9 2 3 2 Adding a new translation You can translate an object into any of the available languages There are several ways to add a new translation to an object and they are all very similar to the ones previously described for editing an existing translation Tip In the Website Interface add a new translation by first accessing the siteaccess for the new language Then navigate to the content object in question and click the Translate button on the Website Toolbar as described in Section 2 5 4 Translating content Tip It is not possible to add new translations through the Translations window in the main area of the Administration Interface This window when the corresponding switch is selected and your site is multilingual only displays information about existing translations and lets you access them When adding a new translation it is possible to choose an existing translation to base it on You can select one of the existing languages or No
396. or lt News and Events gt 3 a Version Status Edited language Creator Created Modified La Archived BS English Administrator 02 19 2007 09 57 02 19 2007 11 06 American User am am lvl 5 Draft English Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 20 02 19 2007 12 53 53 American am pm 3 8 Published E9 English Administrator 02 19 2007 11 13 02 19 2007 11 17 American User am am English American z 5 gt 6 x Show differences Figure 9 24 Remove selected version In contrast to the removal of translations this removal is performed silently without any confirmation notice Consequently be extra careful when removing versions Both archived and draft versions can be removed The published version cannot be removed Return to the Object Edit Interface by clicking the Back button in the Version history interface not your browser s Back button If you accessed the interface from the pop up menu you will instead be returned to the page you were previously viewing Working with translations 219 Warning If you are not already in edit mode and do not need to edit an object s contents we re commend that you use the context sensitive pop up menu to access the Version history interface This is because the system creates a new draft whenever you enter edit mode If you go directly to the Version history interface you do not have to worry about leaving stale drafts 9 2 3 5 Copying a translation from a version It
397. or User My profile Site map Your company slogan here News and Events Products Partner Community Knowledge Base Company Home News and Events Press Releases New company website released gez Manage versions Store and exit Preview No transkation gt Translate Edit Article New company website released Title required New company website released Short title Author Name Email V Administrator User nospam ez no Delete selected Add author Summary required 2 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem a lt gt AGE e fii ii Normal e B 7 ipsum dolor sit amet lt p gt Disable editor Class none ig Online Editor 4 2 Figure 2 9 Edit mode Both the Content Editing Interface and its equivalent Object Edit Interface from the Administration Interface use a specialized application resource called the Online Editor The WYSIWYG Online Editor facilitates the manipulation of content attributes The table below shows the relationship between the interfaces and resources used in edit mode 32 Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface Table 2 1 Edit mode involved interfaces Main interface Edit interface Resource Website Interface Content Editing Interface Online Editor Administration Interface Object Edit Interface Online Editor 2 3 2 Adding and editing co
398. or pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A box of color pencils Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Price 89 00 d 4 Green Paint Color Pencil Matchbox Bucket Box Price 142 00 Price 245 00 Price 89 00 Figure 5 19 Infobox on Products page Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Suspendisse non augue Mauris vulputate lacinia risus Praesent ultricies neque in lobortis luctus magna metus nonummy leo nonummy bibendum elit mi eget sapien In cursus auctor sapien Curabitur condimentum justo ac nisl sollicitudin lobortis Quisque tristique tellus quis purus The above screenshot was taken when logged in as an Editor user Note the icon at the bottom right corner of the infobox Clicking this Edit button will put the infobox into edit mode To delete the infobox via the Website Interface you must be logged in with an Administrator account You will then see an additional icon the Remove button When clicked this will bring up a confirmation window The most important attributes are Header Content Image and URL The Content attribute works just like the body of an article see Section 5 2 1 Article class For details about the U
399. or user can create a new forum topic by clicking the New topic button on the public siteaccess like other registered users on the site or through the Website Toolbar or the Administration Interface A forum topic consists of several attributes The Subject attribute is the topic you want to discuss The Message attribute contains what the thread is about The Sticky checkbox see below should be marked if you want the topic to remain at the top of the list of new topics Whenever a new reply is added to a topic that topic is bumped to the top of the topic list but below any sticky topics The last attribute is represented by the Notify me about updates checkbox which should be marked if you want to receive an email every time the particular topic is updated see Section 2 2 1 3 Notifications In Depth Sticky forum topics Forum topics that contain important information can be marked as sticky by Editor or Administrator users Marking a topic is done in edit mode Keep in mind that if too many topics are made sticky this functionality loses value 5 5 3 4 Forum reply class a single post on a discussion thread Remember the Comment content class described earlier A forum topic is like an article and a forum reply is like a comment An object of the Forums container class would then correspond to a folder and the specific forum containers are like specific article folders such as sports or news article folders A forum reply c
400. ording to the corresponding standard This is described in Sec tion 11 1 Input validation If there are problems for example with invalid or missing data the system will indicate this using a yellow frame above the Main edit window If the data is successfully validated the draft will become the current published version for the object and the previously published version will become archived Since the draft only contains data for one language the system will copy the other translations from the 160 Chapter 7 The Object Edit Interface last published version of this object You will learn more about this in Section 9 2 3 Working with translations 7 6 2 Save draft button The Save draft button makes it possible to store the information that has been entered without making it live on your site This button is particularly useful when you are working on something and want to save your work from time to time In addition since eZ Publish will attempt to validate the input as mentioned above if the object has attrib utes with datatypes supporting validation this button can also be used to verify that the inputted data is correct according to the datatype of the attribute The published version of the object will not change when you click this button 7 6 3 Discard draft button The Discard draft button deletes the draft that is currently being edited The draft will not be validated or stored it will simply be deleted This
401. orm is submitted When class attributes are marked as information collectors those object attributes in in stances of that class can collect information This is done when the data structure the content class of the content object is defined by checking the information collector switch associated with the attribute The default view mode behavior results in the display of the information that was provided in edit mode For example when viewing a news article the contents of the article are displayed but cannot be edited However if an at tribute is marked as a collector it will allow information to be input on the public siteaccess When the object is viewed each collector attribute will be displayed using the chosen datatype s data collector template Instead of just outputting the attributes contents the collector templates provide interfaces for data input The generated input interface depends on the datatype that represents the attribute Information collection is only supported by a small set of the built in datatypes The datatypes that are capable of collecting inform ation are checkbox email selection radio button dropdown list and text block line Of these email is the only one that supports input validation 11 4 2 Feedback form example The following example demonstrates how this feature can be used to create a basic feedback form with attributes that collect information Suppose we have a content class called Feed
402. ormation about this company Information about this company Information about this company Information about this company Information ab out this company Information about this company Information about this company Information about this company Information ab out this company Information about this company header level 1 gt Main values of company lt header gt ul li Value 1 lt li gt lt li gt Value 2 li li Value 3 lt li gt lt ul gt lt table border 0 width 100 gt lt tr gt lt th gt Europe lt th gt lt th gt America lt th gt 1 3 Enable editor Show children r Send forpublishing Store draft Discard Figure 11 58 Edit XML code directly Tip Pressing the Enter key once gives you a new line Pressing it twice gives you a new paragraph In Section 11 3 1 XML syntax below we will outline basic XML syntax for many page elements Keep in mind that this is not a book about learning XML or XHTML Interested readers should refer to other documentation such as www w3c org for more information about these markup languages 11 3 1 XML syntax We will use standard writing styles for describing syntax This may be a bit unfamiliar for some content editors so let us introduce this with an example lt b class gt Bold text lt b gt The example above shows the writing style for the lt b gt tag that produces bold text Note the opening and closing tag
403. ormation window The screenshot shows that the ID of the object being edited is 143 The object was initially created on the 22nd of December 2006 at 08 53 AM by the Administrator user The object was last modified by the same user on the 2nd of January 2007 at 01 32 PM The object exists in several versions and the fourth version is the published version In other words it is the fourth version that will be displayed when the object is being viewed by site visitors The Manage versions button brings up the Version history interface which makes it possible to display a list of the versions of the object that is being edited Version man agement is described in Chapter 8 Current draft window The Current draft window displays information about the version that is currently being edited Drafts in relation to the Website Interface were described in Section 2 5 2 Drafts Versions and drafts are covered in detail in Chapter 8 The Current draft window is shown in the screenshot below 156 Chapter 7 The Object Edit Interface Created 01 19 2007 10 51 am Administrator User Modified 01 19 2007 10 51 am Administrator User Version Figure 7 5 Current draft window This window displays the same properties as the Object information window except that these are specific to the draft being edited These properties include the date and time that the draft was originally created the person who created it and the date and
404. ose in Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing but that apply to managing the contents of the media library It also contains a detailed example that pulls together content management issues from both this and previous chapters Contents of the media library Clicking the Media library tab will bring you to the top node of the Media branch as shown in Figure 10 1 Media library tab above Often this branch contains nodes rep resenting content objects frequently used by other nodes An example would be portrait images of article authors that are reused and embedded in the various articles If enabled and if JavaScript is supported and enabled in your browser the left menu will display an interactive tree containing the nodes that belong to the Media branch The main area will display information about the top level node itself along with a list of the nodes that are directly below it Warning Content does not show up automatically in the media library just because it is used by some content such as an article in the Content branch You have to explicitly add content to the media library although in older versions of eZ Publish this was not the case 256 Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab The media library is typically used to store different kinds of multimedia content including images animations movies and other documents that are related to nodes of the Content branch In other words you may think of the media lib
405. other potential problems while you work on specific content objects 2 6 1 Importing an OpenOffice org document There are two basic things to know about importing OpenOffice org documents all im ported documents are stored as objects of the Article class and documents can only be imported into content containers such as folders Follow these steps to import an OpenOffice org document 1 Make sure you are logged in to the Website Interface with an Editor or Adminis trator user account 2 Browse to the location where you want to import the document Make sure this is a container We will be using the Press Releases folder that currently holds our Fruit article as shown in the screenshot below Importing an OpenOffice org document 51 Home News and Events Press Releases eZ arice v Createhere Edit Move Remove Openoffice Import Export Replace News and Events Press Releases gt Investor bulletin Fresh fruit Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Quisque sagittis laoreet urna Nam rhoncus risus eget enim Pellentesque erat libero pharetra non gt Events pretium vel commodo vitae arcu New company website released Po Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit f amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet P f Good results in the fourth quarter Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good resul
406. ow will always be at the bottom The following subsections describe these windows in the given order 6 2 1 Selected node content always at the top When viewing some content the main area will at a minimum contain the row of switches in addition to two windows While the top window displays the contents of the selected node the bottom window the Sub items window shows the node s children The top window is known as the Preview window and it is associated with the Preview switch Unlike the other windows this window does not completely disappear after you deactivate the corresponding switch Deactivating the switch will only hide the window s contents The following screenshot shows the window in a deactivated collapsed state 136 Chapter 6 Content Structure Tab Layout in Detail Preview Details Transhtions Locations Rehtions Lj News and Events Folder Last modified 56 am Administrator User English American EE Eoun arenan EM SES E Figure 6 6 Preview window disabled When the window is activated it will display the attributes of the object The following screenshot displays the window in an active state Lj News and Events Folder 1 Last modified 12 20 2006 08 56 am Administrator User 2 English American E News and Events Latest Information From This Compan Press Releases Events Show children No Figure 6 7 Preview window enabled The following section will give you
407. p Sorting is managed through the Sorting controls in the Sub items window This window is shown at the bottom of the main area when a content node is being viewed 234 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Tip You cannot sort content in the Website Interface This has to be done through the Ad ministration Interface Recall from Section 4 3 2 2 4 Sort method that the sort method of a parent node de termines how the children of the node are sorted Here we cover the timestamp and pri ority sorting criteria Interested readers should refer to http ez no doc ez publish tech nical manual for more information on the other sorting criteria We then discuss the Sorting controls and the practical details on how to set priority levels We close the section with some troubleshooting information 9 3 2 1 Sorting criteria Recall from Chapter 4 that a node structure has the following properties Node ID Parent node ID Object ID Sort method Sort order and Priority see Section 4 3 2 2 Node structure It is only possible to set sorting criteria for objects that are marked as contain ers Warning Your site may be configured to use specific sorting criteria for specific content regardless of what is set in the Administration Interface See Section 9 3 2 5 Troubleshooting below for more information 9 3 2 1 1 Sort by published timestamp This method sorts nodes by the creation time and date of the obje
408. parent The link does not have a class attrib ute The line http ez no ez_publish documentation reveals the URL that the link points to Layout of Online Editor elements 301 11 2 4 5 OE toolbar The OE toolbar contains tools for editing the content that is displayed in the OE text area The buttons are very similar to those found in many word processors For example if you select a part of the text and click the Bold button the selected text will become bold and the OE will take care of inserting the corresponding XML tag The following screenshot shows the different buttons Text Style Actions Format Lists Special Tools Tables Help vss eres sr Re ee esse Figure 11 10 OE toolbar buttons The OE toolbar is located above the OE text area It is divided into seven areas as the previous illustration indicates Text Style Actions Undo and Redo Format Bold and Italic Lists Special Tools Object Link Anchor Custom tag Literal text Special character Tables Help Tip When using Internet Explorer you will see an additional button labeled Find text a Some of the buttons are described in the subsections below while the others are covered in Section 11 2 5 Formatted text in the Online Editor and Section 11 2 6 Online Editor daily tasks later 11 2 4 5 1 Active and inactive buttons The OE toolbar buttons may be active or inactive Active buttons allow you to perform an o
409. peration on the current element A tooltip see Section 11 2 4 5 2 Tooltips is displayed when the mouse pointer hovers over an active button 302 Chapter n Content Editing A button is usually inactive if its operation is not allowed for the current element Inactive buttons have a grayed out background and do not respond when clicked For example the list buttons are inactive when you work with headings The reason for this is that a heading can never contain a list item Documentation Figure 11 11 Online Editor active and inactive buttons The screenshot above shows a heading that is being edited The cursor is placed inside the word Documentation Note that the buttons used for creating lists are inactive be cause these operations cannot be used with headings The Bold and Italic buttons are also inactive because bold and italic formatting are not allowed for headings 11 2 4 5 2 Tooltips Each button has a tooltip that is displayed when you hover the mouse over the button provided that the button is active Tooltips are used to give further information about the action that the button represents Sometimes buttons have different tooltips depending on the current context In other words the tooltips for the same button may change depending on the current editing situation For example if the cursor is just blinking and no text is selected the tooltip for the Link button will say Insert link which means th
410. plicated we recommend that inexperienced editors use the Online Editor if it is available for this particular task lt embed href view size id gt align Tip To edit an embed tag with the OE refer to Section 11 2 6 4 Uploading and embedding an image using the OE Table 11 5 Parameters for the embed tag Parameter Description Required href The href parameter must be a valid link to either a node Yes or an object using the same notation as for hyperlinks eznode 134 eznode path to some node and ezobject 1024 for example If the provided link is a link to a node eZ Publish will use the object that is en capsulated by that node since nodes are simply wrap pers XML syntax 359 Parameter Description Required view The view parameter makes it possible to specify the No view to be used when the object is rendered for example embed and embed inline align The align parameter can be used to specify the posi No tioning of the embedded object Possible values are left center and right size The size parameter can be used to set the image size No that should be used when an image object is included for example small medium and large id The id parameter makes it possible to assign a unique No ID that will be the ID attribute in the resulting HTML The following screenshot shows code
411. pm This object is already being edited by someone else You should contact the other user s to make sure that you are not stepping on anyone s toes The most recently modified draft is version 9 created by Bergfrid Skaara last changed 02 19 2007 01 26 pm Possible actions Create a new draft and start editing it Cancel the edit operation Version Translations Creator Created Modified G 9 English American Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 01 26 pm 02 19 2007 01 26 pm cansos ERE EEN Figure 9 28 Edit conflict warning other users The system is simply telling you that you should be careful because somebody else is working on the same object There might be several drafts in the list However the usual case is that there is just one Unlike in the previous scenario you cannot edit this draft because it belongs to a different user 9 2 4 2 1 Possible solutions Youcan create a new draft by clicking the New draft button However keep in mind that the new draft will be a copy of the published version The draft that is causing the conflict may contain updated information Before proceeding you should contact the person that owns the existing draft You might have login permissions for both users who have made drafts For example you might start to edit the object in the Website Interface with your Editor user ac count then log into the Administration Interface as an Administrator user to perform tasks that require Adminis
412. ponents of a news article title intro duction body images There is a front end and a back end interface for managing content the Website In terface commonly used by content editors and managers and Administration Inter face commonly used by webmasters site administrators and developers The Website Interface uses the Content Editing Interface to edit and add content while the Ad ministration Interface uses the Object Edit Interface to do the same In addition each set contains some special purpose sub interfaces such as one for managing content versions The Administration Interface is divided into six main areas shown below 128 Chapter 6 Content Structure Tab Layout in Detail y 6L E Allcontent g Current iocation Advanced Preview Details Transhtions Relations Content structure Current user BE Home Frontpage amp g News and Events Change information amp gg Products Last modified 12 20 2006 08 56 am Administrator Use Change password amp j Partner Logout Name Home _ Community Multimedia Downloads E Pictures Forums Bookmarks Add to bookmarks Press Releases Clear cache Latest Information From mpany Raves English American gt Eg Move Remove EJ Sub items 6 Billboard Corporate banner Left column amp _ Knowledge Base amp Company Investor Relatid Center colu
413. proach since there is often only one unpublished draft If there are several unpublished drafts you should remove all but one of them in order to avoid further conflicts In most cases you will resume editing a draft that is newer than the published version because it usually does not make sense to edit outdated content However when working with translations a new version may be published while you are editing a translation If you store the draft version containing the translation then resume editing and publish it the Version history interface might look something like this Versions for lt News and Events gt 5 Version Status Edited language Creator Created Modified Lj T Archived German Administrator 02 19 2007 01 21 02 19 2007 01 33 E User pm pm Lj 9 Draft ES English Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 01 26 02 19 2007 01 35 E American pm pm 10 Archived 3 English Administrator 02 19 2007 01 34 02 19 200701 34 A American User pm pm Don Draft fag German Administrator 02 19 2007 01 59 02 19 2007 01 59 E E User pm pm 3 42 Published EE3 English Administrator 02 19 2007 02 00 02 19 2007 02 01 E American User pm pm Delete selected English American v 11 v 12 gt Published version Version Translations Creator Created Modified Copy translation 12 FS English Administrator 02 19 2007 02 00 02 19 2007 02 01 English American E American User pm pm Bes German This object does not have any d
414. pter 1 Intro duction to eZ Publish Content Management for a brief description of design issues Beyond that we do not deal with this tab in this book Setup Clicking the Setup tab displays the main site configuration area This area should only be used by advanced users and site adminis trators The usage of this tab is described in the documentation at http ez no doc and the book eZ Publish Basics My account Clicking the My account tab displays the current user s personal area This area provides access to user specific data and configur ation such as access to the user s own drafts and user account in formation This is explained in the documentation at http ez no doc and the book eZ Publish Basics Also see Section 2 2 1 User profile 3 4 Navigation This section describes various ways to navigate the Administration Interface The two most common methods are clicking around and searching You can also navigate to a specific node by clicking on your pre configured bookmarks Clicking around 67 3 4 1 Clicking around When you are looking for a specific piece of content typically because you want to do something with it like edit or move it you can navigate the tree and examine the nodes The frames in the following screenshot show the primary navigation zones the areas that can be used to navigate the node tree puD version 3 9 0 Me
415. quat sed gravida ut arcu Pellentesque convallis felis vel lacus Maecenas at odio Nulla facilisi Donec tristique purus non auctor porttitor sapien nisi dignissim leo eget imperdiet mauris ipsum sed odio Technology Introduction Etiam nisl Nulla lorem dui vulputate sed hendrerit vel gravida eget sem Proin semper nisl sit amet quam Proin a enim Praesent varius nisi sed sem Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac turpis egestas Morbi at ante Quisque eget justo Created 12 20 2006 08 58 am Modified 12 20 2006 08 58 am Figure 5 18 Documentation page While they are both containers an object of the Folder class is mainly used to organize other content while an object of the Documentation page class contains its own information 5 6 2 Infobox class Objects of the Infobox class are used to display small content entities on the right side of the webpage as shown in the screenshot below Note that the actual position of an infobox depends on your site design 122 Chapter 5 Content Classes Eng Fre Ger Logout Bergfrid Skaara My profile Site map Your company slogan here _searn News and Events Products Community Knowledge Base Company Home Products B eZ arice v Createhere Edit openoffice Import Export Replace Products Heads up Products Color Pencil Box A box of col
416. r In in tellus vit gravida sem tristique tortor 4 praesent grav LJ g non sapien pretium malesuada Aliquam feugiat porta magna Cum sociis na nartiiriant mantes nasretur ridiciiliis mus Nulla Inhartis alimet nihh Pellente Figure 11 41 Create a hyperlink from an embedded object 2 Click the Link button You can also right click on the image and choose the Insert Link item from the context sensitive pop up menu 3 A modal dialog will be displayed see Figure 11 39 Modal dialog for insert link The Text and Class properties will be inactive Choose http from the dropdown list so that the http notation appears in the URL field Add Www ez no to this notation in order to make a valid link 4 Type ina tooltip text such as Link to eZ Systems in the Title field and click the OK button The image will become a link and it will be surrounded by a frame aptent taciti sociosqu ad litora torquent per conubia nostra per Inceptos n diam Nullam dignissim Cras erat Etiam porttitor auctor dolor n in tellus gravida sem tristique tortor r P raesent t orci non sapien pretium malesuada Aliquam feugiat porta magna Cum dis narturient mantes nascetur ridiculus mus Nulla lobortis aliauet nibh F Figure 11 42 Link object shown with frame 5 Select the image by clicking on it and then click the Link button or right click on the image and choose the Link Properties item from the pop up menu 6 You wil
417. rafts Figure 9 29 Version history interface resume draft How to undo changes 227 In the above screenshot the draft that you are returning to edit is version 11 and another user has published version 12 containing a different updated translation In this case there may not be anything to worry about since you are returning to edit a different translation of the object 9 2 4 4 3 Keeping your draft list tidy We encourage all content editors to regularly check the My drafts list in the My account tab Remove any drafts that you do not intend to work on and that have become deprecated In other words clean up this list on a regular basis and aim to have it contain only your work in progress drafts 9 2 5 How to undo changes There are several ways to undo changes depending on the specific scenario The built in version management system makes it possible to revert the contents of an object to a previous version as previously described in Section 9 2 2 4 2 Publishing a version older than the current This technique works at the version layer and is useful for example if you accidentally click the Send for publishing button instead of the Store draft button You should note that if a version between the one you revert to and the new version you are about to publish introduced a new translation this translation will be copied to the new version Therefore reverting to an older version does not remove a new translation
418. ranslation is a representation of the information in a specific language The Translation interface is a special purpose translator mode of the Object Edit Interface or Content Editing Interface A draft is a newly created version that has not yet been published 190 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing The Object Edit Interface is a special purpose interface embedded within the eZ Publish Administration Interface When it is accessed you are in edit mode The chapter provides step by step procedures in these main categories The different ways in which you can create objects and the associated options Features related to editing objects with a focus on versions and translations Manipulating content objects including how to preview sort move copy and delete objects and nodes as well as publish at multiple locations We assume that you are familiar with the theoretical aspects of content objects and the node tree see Chapter 4 as well as version control and translations Chapter 8 Tasks that deal with the Online Editor can be found in Chapter 11 Content Editing We also assume that you are working with the current major version of eZ Publish 3 9 at the time of writing or at least a version not older than 3 8 You can find more inform ation on advanced editing operations not discussed in this chapter by referring to the documentation at http ez no doc You might find it useful to refer to the Gloss
419. rary as a repository of frequently used attachments or embedded objects for the content you have in the Content branch Note that the related objects feature does not have to include the Content branch You can have two objects both within the media library that are related to each other However the common case is that content within the Media branch is related to content in the Content branch In Depth Why not put everything in the content branch Suppose that you are producing an article about Thanksgiving and plan to reuse some image material from the previous year Imagine the chaos if you have images from the past 2 3 years stored in a single folder Most likely you will give up and just upload a new image because the existing image is too hard to find Consequently it is useful to store media in an organized fashion separate from the other content Object relations see Section 6 2 6 Relations window and Section 7 8 Related objects window allow you to reuse content When uploading new content for a relation you can choose where to put it It might seem convenient to locate it directly below the content object it is related to But for subsequent object rela tions you would have to search the entire node tree to find where the object was first uploaded This is not very intuitive and it would become tiresome to continually have to locate images scattered throughout the content hierarchy Therefore placing reusable con
420. rat sit amet blandi semper rius tortor malesuada nulla nec ultrices justo massa nec nisi Aliquam non mi quis ko malesu C BIB German iaculis Aenean sit amet lacus Pellentesque metus ligula condimentum nec malesuada nec tincidunt nibh Location ea C Home Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Sed ut libero eu ligula aliquet vestibulum Siteaccess Suspendisse elementum faucibus magna Quisque nisl felis pharetra id accumsan mattis gravida at eg Cof all flavours C fre Vivamus magna elit bibendum vitae porta at ornare quis nibh Donec non dui Donec pharetra eleifei augue Phasellus libero dolor adipiscing ut viverra dapibus consequat ut nulla Proin iaculis C ger C front Events C back Figure 9 36 Version preview interface Warning The Version preview interface should not be confused with the Preview window Tip To generate a full screen preview click on the icon located at the top of the Version preview interface E 9 3 1 1 Previewing the current version To preview content from edit mode follow the steps below We assume that you are in the Object Edit Interface 1 Click the View button in the Current draft window The system will bring up the Version preview interface Sorting content 233 2 You can select different siteaccesses to change the layout of the preview Refer to Chapter 1 for information about siteaccesses and design If the object has multiple nodes loca
421. ration Interface The secondary menus of the first three tabs Content structure Media library and User accounts look and behave in the same way These menus provide access to different parts of the node tree Because of this the secondary menu is also referred to as the tree menu See Also Secondary menu Administration Interface Some content management tasks can be undone Deleted items can be recovered from the trash provided that they are still in the trash Unwanted changes to content objects can be reverted by copying and re publishing a previous version Some text editing and formatting in the Online Editor can be undone through the integrated undo feature See Also Trash Revert Online Editor Unicode is a 16 bit character encoding scheme that supports all languages Western Eastern Cyrillic Greek Arabic Hebrew Chinese Japanese Korean Thai Urdu Hindi and so on within a single character set In addition the specification includes standard compression schemes and a wide range of typesetting information required for worldwide locale sup port A Uniform Resource Locator is a way of specifying the location of something on the internet for example http www ex ample com hello html The part before the colon specifies the protocol the part after the colon specifies a unique address A user account represents a registered user on the system and is associated with a username and a password Based on the group it belo
422. re 5 10 Frontpage billboard attribute In Depth Are objects of the Article class containers or not This in depth section refers to a few concepts explained later in this book Inter ested readers not familiar with these concepts should refer to the Glossary for a quick introduction or should re read this in depth material at a later time The important issue here is that articles behave as non containers although articles are technically defined as containers The class definition for an article states that it is a container Because you can enable comments for an article and these comments are placed beneath the article the Article class needs to be able to have sub items Related objects such as embedded inline graphics are also usually placed beneath the article as sub items The Website Toolbar of the Website Interface see Section 2 1 1 Website Toolbar and Section 2 3 Managing content prevents users from creating content as sub items of an article The Create here dropdown list and button are not shown when you are viewing an article in the Website Interface You can however if comments are enabled add a comment by clicking the Add comment button at the bottom of an article In the Administration Interface this restriction still holds for Editor users as they cannot create content below an article through the context sensitive pop up menu Also when viewing the article in the main area you will see that the Create
423. re clicking around and searching In addition you can navigate by using bookmarks A node is a location for the published version of a content object within the content node tree When an object is published at multiple locations this means that there are several nodes within the node tree that refer to the same object Youcan view and manage the locations for a content object in the Locations window This window is shown in the main area when the corresponding switch is selected The content node tree has several branches including the Content and Media branches These branches are managed in the Content structure and Media library tabs The left menu provides access to different parts of the node tree When the Content structure tab is selected you will have access to the Content branch when the Media library tab is selected you will have access to the Media branch and so on The context sensitive pop up menu contains functions that are specific to the item from which the menu was invoked JavaScript is required in order to use the pop up menu The Bookmarks window is found in the right area of the Administration Interface The built in bookmark feature is restricted to content nodes and provides you with quick links assisting navigation in the three left most tabs The Relations window inside main area associated with switch reveals information about other objects that either use the current object or that the curren
424. re referred to as attributes Acontent object consists of one or more versions This additional layer makes it pos sible to have different versions of the same content Each version further consists of one or more translations The translation layer makes it possible to represent the same version of the same content in multiple languages A translation is the final or last layer that actually holds the attributes Content objects are wrapped or encapsulated and structured using content nodes or nodes for short Nodes can be thought of as pages or page elements on the site and are organized in a node tree The node tree is also known as the content hierarchy and is divided into three major parts the Content Media and Users branches A node represents the published version of content objects 168 Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features You are working in edit mode when you are viewing some content in the Content Editing Interface Website Interface or the Object Edit Interface Administration Interface This usually means that either the Edit or Create button has been clicked The Object Edit Interface allows you to edit content objects manage the object s versions and preview the version that is being edited In this chapter you will learn about the following The version control mechanism How to use the features available in the Version history interface How versions are structured
425. rectly beneath the container in the content hierarchy are displayed For example you can add article objects below folder objects in the content structure By default when viewing the folder the list of articles is displayed How the sub items are displayed is defined in the templates and settings for the container objects In eZ Publish the most commonly used container class is the Folder class Other content container classes include the Gallery and Forum classes 2 3 3 2 Sorting objects When you have several content objects in a certain content container such as a folder you may want to sort the objects in a certain order By default content is sorted from newest to oldest To specify how this should be done for some particular container on your site you have to access the Administration Interface Refer to Section 9 3 2 Sorting content for more information 2 3 3 3 Moving objects To move some content from one location to another on the site use the Move button on the Website Toolbar You can only relocate content to container objects For example you cannot place an article as a sub item of an image Follow the steps below to move content We will be using our newly created article as an example 1 Browse to the page that you want to move See Figure 2 13 Edit article start 2 Click the Move button 3 The site s content hierarchy is displayed Browse the hierarchy by clicking links The screenshot shows how the
426. rently enabled If this is the case you can either try to enable it yourself or contact your site administrator If you feel up to the task of fixing it follow the steps listed in the in depth block below Note that you must have sufficient access permis sions The OE allows you to insert various objects into XML input fields For example you can embed photos in articles In eZ Publish images are usually stored as Image objects To determine if the inserted object is an image or not the OE checks the class identi fier see Chapter 5 The configuration for the OE may not contain the correct identifier especially if you are using an enhanced image class on your site and if so inserted images may not be recognized as images Contact your site administrator to correct the problem You may also refer to the online installation guide for the OE at ht tp ez no doc for more information In Depth Enabling the OE extension Follow the steps below to enable the Online Editor extension ezdhtml assuming that it has been installed on your system in other words it appears in the Available extensions window shown in Figure 11 4 Set up OE extension but is not marked as active Note that you need access to the Setup tab of the Administration Interface 1 Make sure you are viewing the Available extensions window accessed by selecting Extensions from the left menu of the Setup tab 2 Select the ezdhtml item and click the Apply changes
427. rface from Section 2 3 1 Edit mode At the bottom next to the Send for publishing and Discard buttons is a third button labeled Store draft Let us now revisit the article we created earlier Assume that it has been recovered from the trash and returned to its original location as shown previously in Figure 2 13 Edit article start Navigate to the bottom of the page and click the Store draft button Then navigate to the top of the page and click the Manage versions button on the Website Toolbar By examining the resulting page shown in Figure 2 22 Version overview page you can see that our article has two versions the published version and the draft we just created 46 Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface Versions for Fruit 2 Version Status Edited language Creator Published B3 Engli Administrator American User E Draft ES English Bergfrid Skaara Amer Remove selected eac Published version Version Translations Creator Created T ES English Administrator 12 22 2006 08 39 America User am New drafts 1 Version Edited language Creator Created English American Bergfrid Skaara 01 02 2007 11 31 am Created 12 22 2006 08 39 am 01 02 2007 11 31 am Modified 12 22 2006 08 53 am Modified 12 22 2006 08 53 am 01 02 2007 11 34 E ka am English American x Modified Figure 2 22 Version overview page 01 02 2007 11 34 am EH iki You can resume
428. rid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 19 am 02 19 2007 10 19 am EJ 5 Draft E English American Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 20 am 02 19 2007 10 20 am ER Delete selected English American z 4 M s x Published version Version Translations Creator Created Modified Copy translation 3 E English American Administrator User 02 19 2007 09 57 am 02 19 2007 11 06 am English American M E EE German Version Edited language Creator Created Modified 4 Em German Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 19 am 02 19 2007 10 19 am Epa 5 ES English American Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 20 am 02 19 2007 10 20 am E Figure 9 14 Version history result Tip In the Website Interface the procedure is initiated from the Version overview page and works in exactly the same way except that the Content Editing Interface is used for editing 9 2 2 4 2 Publishing a version older than the current You might want to revert to an older version if you accidentally published a draft instead of storing or discarding it or if the published version no longer applies We continue our above example and are going to revert back to version 2 from version 3 that we just published 1 Locate the version and create a new draft with its contents by clicking the Copy button Working with versions 207 Versions for lt News and Events gt 5 we Archived RE German Administrator User 01 18 2007 08 15 am 01 18 2007 08 15 am FE Rea Published E9 English American Ad
429. rid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 20 am 02 19 2007 10 20 am eraenianevean e i Figure 9 11 Compare versions select 2 Click the Show differences button The Version history interface will be reloaded to show the Differences between versions X and Y window below the Versions for xxx window Working with versions 203 3 Versions for lt News and Events gt 5 Version Status Edited language Creator Created Modified 9 Archived E3 English American Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am 12 20 2006 08 56 am Og Published P German Administrator User 01 18 2007 08 15am 01 18 2007 08 15 am EX ea Draft E English American Administrator User 02 19 2007 09 57 am 02 19 2007 10 31 am BA T4 Draft I German Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 19 am 02 19 2007 10 19 am E rs Draft E3 English American Bergfrid Skaara 02 19 2007 10 20 am 02 19 2007 10 20 am E Delete selected English American z 4 gt s x Differences between versions 2 and 4 Ok version Inline changes Blockchanges New version Name Folder News and Events Short name Summary Description Show children Version 2 No Version 4 No Back to history Figure 9 12 Compare versions view Use the toolbar of links directly below the window title bar to examine the versions You can select Old version Inline changes Block changes and New version The screenshot above has Inline changes selected If desired select two other versi
430. rigger an editing conflict This usually happens when two people are attempting to work on the same content object Whatever the case editing conflicts always involve unpublished drafts Note that content editors do not have to be logged in to the system at the same time for editing conflicts to occur editing conflicts are triggered whenever you try to edit an object where there is at least one unpublished draft in a more recent version than the published version This topic was first introduced in Section 2 3 2 2 1 Editing conflicts when describing the Website Interface In both the Website Interface and the Administration Interface content editors will eventually encounter warnings titled Possible edit conflict The following section explains the possible conflicts along with some solutions 222 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Tip The simplest way to solve an editing conflict is to decide whether you want to edit the published version or one of the drafts Next select the desired version and click the Edit button Note however that this might only postpone the editing conflict until the other content editor resumes her work and re triggers the same editing conflict Therefore we recommend that you examine the different scenarios described here and solve the conflict according to the specific type Tip Drafts are unpublished versions of content objects but editable only by the user that created the draft Re
431. rmat only the current object and not its children is exported For example if you export a folder only the content in the folder object and not articles beneath the folder is exported Follow the steps below to export content to OpenOffice org format 1 Log in as Editor or Administrator 2 Browse to the content object you want to export 3 Click the Export button on the Website Toolbar 4 You will be prompted to either open the exported content or to save the content to a file as illustrated in the screenshot below 2 Opening Coffee odt You have chosen to open A Coffee odt which is a ODT document from http nemo bms ez no What should Firefox do with this file Word Processor default D DownThemaIll Save to Disk Do this automatically for files like this from now on Figure 2 31 OpenOffice org export If you open the exported file in OpenOffice org Writer for example you will see the eZ Publish footer with a logo and copyright information at the bottom of each page Summary In this chapter we have looked at content editing in the Website Interface Editors and Administrators must log in to access the Website Interface The context sensitive Website Toolbar is the most important tool for editing and managing content in the Website Interface There are two groups of settings accessible through the Website Interface user profile and site settings You can ch
432. rmatted text in the Online Editor 305 In Depth XML block input validation for custom tags The strict validation rules of the tags of the XML block datatype make it easy to export data or redesign the site because of the separation of content and design where design is changed via templates While the ability to add customs tags can be useful it moves aspects of design into the content itself Code in custom tags is not validated by eZ Publish and can make design changes and data export more complicated Configuring custom tags is beyond the scope of this book For more information refer to the Custom tags subsection in the XML tags section of the Reference chapter of the documentation at http ez no doc ez publish technical manual 11 2 5 Formatted text in the Online Editor This section describes the general functionality of the Online Editor and includes some particular usage principles You will learn about formatted text beyond what was de scribed in Section 5 1 2 XML block datatype rich text format lines and paragraphs block and inline elements and element properties The class property or parameter is described in Section 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements We also discuss more about the buttons of the OE Toolbar Practical step by step instructions for daily tasks are found in Section 11 2 6 Online Editor daily tasks below 11 2 5 1 Introduction to formatted text An XML block consists o
433. rmatted text in the Online Editor 307 11 2 5 1 1 Text Style tool The Text Style tool is a dropdown list that allows you to create headings The list of choices contains different text styles While Normal means normal text the other six styles are headings ranging from levels 1 to 6 Headings are incompatible with all other XML tags This means that a heading cannot contain a link nor can it be bold italic and so on In fact the only things that headings can contain other than normal text are special characters In Depth OE heading levels versus XHTML lt h gt tags When generating XHTML code which is the markup method for displaying pages the system will produce lt h2 gt tags for headings of level 1 lt h3 gt tags for headings of level 2 and so on This is done because the lt h1 gt tag is usually used to display the name of the node being viewed and hence it is reserved and not available from within the Online Editor This behavior can be changed by your site developers with custom templates but this is not recommended 11 2 5 1 2 Text formatting emphasizing text with Bold and Italic buttons The Format area of the OE toolbar contains two buttons used for bold and italic text formatting as explained in Section 11 2 4 5 OE toolbar When generating XHTML code the system will use lt b gt and lt i gt tags for bold and italic elements This behavior is dictated by the template files The Bold button will make
434. rrently listing some art icles We are going to add a new article here 2 Select the desired content class the Article class in this case from the dropdown list at the bottom of the Sub items window The different content classes are de scribed in Chapter 5 3 Click the Create here button 4 When you create a content object fields are displayed where you enter data for the object s attributes such as the title of the object and text content Fill in the fields with the appropriate values explained in Section 9 2 Editing objects writing and translating Some fields are marked as required while others are optional 194 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Edit lt New Article gt Article English American Title required uice Short title juice Author Name Email r Administrator User bms ez no d n u hor Summary required 7 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Pellentesque ullamcorper erat sit amet blandit semper risus tartar malaminda nulla naa ultrinne iira maces naa nici Alieiiam nan mi anie lan malaminda iacilie Aanaan cit amat 88 8 Ae e ie B amp ws wre noma ee B 7 Figure 9 3 Add article edit mode 5 Click the Send for publishing button to add the newly created content to the system and make it visible on the site Storing your changes without publishing is done through the draft mechanism described later in S
435. s It is possible to control both the sort method and order with the dropdown lists Click the Set button to store the new settings after they have been modified 236 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing When the sort method is set to Priority the node list in the Sub items window will contain a column of input fields titled Priority In addition the Update priorities button will become enabled The input fields can be used to manually sort the nodes It is possible to use both negative and positive integers zero included The Update priorities button must be clicked in order to store the new changed priorities Note that the sort order ascending or descending will still be controlled by the direction dropdown list 9 3 2 3 Example sort contents of a folder by priority The following example illustrates how to sort the contents of a folder ordered by priority We assume that the folder is already published and thus is located in the node tree You may also set up sorting at the same time you create the folder This is described in the following section 1 Locate the container node for which you want to sort the contents It should be displayed in the main area of the Administration Interface and you should see the Sub items window at the bottom 2 Select Priority in the left dropdown list of the Sorting controls You can optionally change the sort order in the right dropdown list 3 Click the Set button t
436. s 101 Built in multilingual support 49 167 182 Built in search engine 72 Built in version system 44 167 Collaboration system 179 Embed object feature 310 Extension 292 Installation xx Key feature 5 Node layer 93 Object oriented model 93 Object oriented principles 86 Philosophy xxvii Requirements 18 Separation of content and design 287 Structure 86 Trash system 228 User interaction 113 Webshop feature 39 eZ Publish features Built in multilingual support xvii Built in plug in system xviii Built in search engine xviii Built in version system xvii Built in workflow system xviii Discussion forums xvii Flexible licensing xvii Online Editor xvii 292 Online shopping xviii Role based multi user access xviii Standards compliant xviii 395 eZ Publish training program xix eZ Publish XML code 292 eZ Systems xxvii ezdhtml 296 ezwebin xx F Feedback form class 90 102 113 114 362 Default text 115 Recipient email address 115 File class 107 Folder class 37 107 130 see also Container Container 14 Formatted text xxiii 102 298 305 305 Bold 317 Emphasize 317 Heading 313 314 Insert HTML code 311 Insert program source code 311 Insert XML content 311 Italic 317 Line break 308 List 308 321 Nested 330 Paragraph 308 Set text style 316 Table 341 XML tags 353 Syntax 354 Formatting 103 Forum 113 115 Create new topic 119 Create reply 119 Forum reply
437. s folder from the previous section As seen in Figure 9 42 Tree menu this folder has several sub items and the exact number is listed in the confirmation dialog The following text explains different approaches for removing single or multiple nodes from the system Tip You can remove content in the Website Interface by clicking the Remove button on the Website Toolbar when viewing the desired content This is described in Section 2 3 3 4 Removing and retrieving objects Tip Your Editor user account might not have sufficient permissions to remove objects In this case log in as an Administrator or contact the person responsible for managing user accounts on your site 9 3 5 1 Procedures for removing content objects 9 3 5 1 1 Removing the node that is currently being viewed You can remove the node that is being viewed by clicking the Remove button in the Preview window at top of the main area 244 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Lj News and Events Folder Last modified 02 15 2007 02 54 pm Administrator User English American Ej Figure 9 47 Remove displayed object through the Preview window If your user account has insufficient permissions this button is not shown or is disabled 9 3 5 1 2 Removing a single node using the pop up menu Another way to remove a single node is to use the context sensitive pop up menu Simply click on a node s icon either in the tree menu or in the Sub items win
438. s about drafts as previously described in Chapter 8 Smart editing using drafts 199 A draft is a newly created version that has not yet been published A version can only be edited if it is a draft and it can only be edited by the same user who initially created the draft Following from this nobody else can log in to the system and continue working on your draft unless they have access to your account However they can create a new version based on your draft or any other existing version and edit and publish that Your drafts are left undisturbed except by you 9 2 1 1 Saving a working copy at any time You can save your working copy of an object regardless of whether or not prior versions of that object have been published at any time Also you can have several saved drafts at the same time for a particular object and resume working on any of them whenever you choose In the Object Edit Interface you can save the draft in two ways save or save and exit Save click the Store draft button at the bottom of the Object Edit Interface You will then get the message input was stored successfully or an error message explain ing what to do if something went wrong You will remain in the Object Edit Interface Saveandexit In the Current draft window on the left click the Store and exit button The object will be saved and you will then be brought out of the Object Edit Interface In this case you will not receive
439. s and define the properties make a blueprint before you start building the physical house In short this means that there is a distinction between the description of the object and the physical object itself In OO terms the former is referred to as a class whereas the latter is referred to as an object or instance Once a class is defined objects or instances of that class can be created For example after defining an Article class you can create as many articles as you like based on that class These articles will all share the same structure but the actual contents will vary Multiple objects belonging to the same class are used to store similar data For example multiple Article objects are used to store different articles which all belong to the Article class 4 1 1 Object orientation in eZ Publish The system provides a set of fundamental building blocks and mechanisms that combine to provide a flexible content management solution From Chapter 1 you know that a data structure is defined by a content class and a content class is made up of attributes An attribute can be thought of as a field For example if you were to create a user through a form with input fields for name age email address and so on the email address here is one of the attributes of the user the class When submitted the form with your values Datatypes attributes classes and objects 87 becomes an object of that class The characteristics of the at
440. s and tricks 261 Translate 208 213 Translation 44 49 167 209 Trash 228 Troubleshooting Edit conflict 221 Online Editor 295 Search 75 Undo 227 Version 44 44 167 Version control 200 View collected info 365 Webshop orders 43 Website Interface 37 Content management system 1 Content manager xviii Content node 15 85 92 93 97 129 135 167 245 see also Content node tree Encapsulation 93 Location 94 Main 141 Node structure 94 Node tree 93 Path 141 Sub items 141 Top level 95 Visibility 141 Content node tree 15 85 93 97 111 115 129 153 167 237 245 254 Content branch 94 130 Expand collapse 78 Media branch 94 253 255 Root node 95 Top level node 95 Users branch 94 Content object 14 21 57 85 91 94 97 101 129 149 167 189 198 287 Archived 180 Archived status 94 As link 337 Attributes 137 Container 14 Create 191 With sort criteria 236 Creator 138 Draft 198 Edit 198 Draft 198 199 Published version 204 Translation 209 Edit history 172 see also Version history interface Embed 358 Encapsulation 15 93 Image 331 393 Location 97 Main 97 Secondary 97 Main location 245 Name 137 Name and ID 87 Second dimension 169 Store draft 199 Third dimension 182 Timestamp 138 Translate 213 Translation Add 183 Version 169 Compare 202 Publish 204 Revert 206 Show 201 Content object attribute 289 Content relationship 101 1
441. s at the beginning and end of the line Between these two tags is the actual text that is affected by the styling The square brackets are used to denote XML syntax 355 that something is optional There may be zero or more optional attributes for a tag In the example above we could thus write lt b gt Bold text b or lt b class red gt Bold text lt b gt For some elements you will also see that there are sets of matching tags within another tag set for example list items within a list The class parameter available for some tags is used to classify contents of that tag as described in Section 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements In eZ Publish each tag has its own corresponding template dictating layout Because this is a lightweight book for content editors some technical issues have been purposely omitted You may need to consult your site administrator for more information about what options are available for your specific site 1 3 1 1 Headings Headings titles inside XML block attributes not to be confused with text line attributes holding only a title can be added by making use of either the lt h gt or the header tag The level parameter controls the depth of the heading and must be a number between 1 and 6 see In Depth OE heading levels versus XHTML lt h gt tags The op tional class parameter classifies the header as described in Section 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML ele
442. s chapter assume that you are logged into the Administration Interface with an account that has at least Editor user permis sions 9 1 Creating objects The first step in adding new content is to decide where to put it Use one of the first three tabs the secondary menu and the Sub items window to find the location where you want to add new content You can use the Bookmarks window as well if the location has been bookmarked Then select the desired content class and language and click the Create here button located in the lower left corner of the Sub items window In the screenshot below frames are used to indicate these items Search All content g Current location Advanced Webshop Design My account Preview Details Translations Locations Relations current user Press Releases Folder Administrator User Change information Administ E News and Events Investor bulletins Technology 3 Product releases l Change password r r English american EN EXE E Logout og Bookmarks EJ Sub items 7 Software Tea 3 Coffee E Press Releases 3 Frit Name Visibility Type Modifier Modified Section Ej Enit eE Daily Usage M New company eben Tea Visible Article Administrator User 01 24 2007 10 39 am Standard 5a 2I ion Good results in the fou CA rpm RES T Coffee Visible Article Administrator User 01 03 2007 10 19 am Standard
443. s not apply to you About eZ Publish Webshop eZ Publish comes with an integrated shop mechanism for e commerce that plugs directly into the content model The Webshop functionality is built around the following compon ents Products Value Added Taxes VATs Discount rules Wishlists Baskets Orders The following illustration shows how the different components interconnect 40 Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface DISCOUNT RULES VAT SALE 7o Affects SN m Affects the price 2 the price Can be Can be putinto en PRODUCTS E put into v WISHLIST SHOPPING BASKET Checkout ORDER Figure 2 16 Webshop components An actual product is represented by a content object that contains information about the product itself along with a price The price must be represented by an attribute that makes use of the built in price or multi price datatype A datatype is the smallest entity of storage in eZ Publish and determines validation storage and retrieval for the value held by the attribute It can be considered the type of the attribute The main difference between the price and multi price datatypes is that the former allows you to specify only one price value for each object simple price product whereas the latter makes it possible to specify several price values in different currencies for each object multi price product It is not recommended to use both price and multi price datatypes on your site
444. s of the Article class are contain ers but function more like non containers This oddity is explained at the end of the next section 5 2 1 Article class The Article class is the most commonly used content class The default Article class has seven attributes Title Short title Author Summary Body Enable comments and Image The title of an article is shown at the top of article pages and as linked text when the article is included in a list such as when a group of articles is displayed in an object of the Folder class The Short title attribute is by default only used within the Adminis tration Interface and in places like the window title of a browser Because of this it should be kept short The input fields for these attributes are shown in the screenshot below Figure 5 4 Article title and author input fields Keep in mind that input fields represent attributes for example the Name field is where you enter the data for the Name attribute Article class 105 English Ameri E Title required New company website released Short title Author Name Email m Administrator User IhospamGez no po EE Figure 5 4 Article title and author input fields If the Author fields are filled in the name and email address will be displayed under the title of the article similar to a byline in a magazine The Name field can also contain additional information such as the author s title for example Bergfrid Skaara
445. s operation allows you to upload a file and add it as a related object When the file is uploaded an object will be created according to the type of the file The newly created object will be placed within the chosen location The newly created object will be automatically related to the draft being edited News and Events Select the file you wish to upload and click the Upload button Upload file Location Automatic M Name File Browse Figure 9 6 Object relation upload new object The Browse button is used to search the file system for a file to be uploaded The Location dropdown list is used to specify where the uploaded file should be placed in the node tree The Automatic setting will let eZ Publish decide the location based on the extension and or the MIME type see the MIME type definition in the Glossary of the uploaded file You can also upload the new object beneath the node currently being edited if it is a container or to some folders in the media library Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab deals with the media library The Cancel button aborts the operation and brings you back to the Object Edit Inter face When the Upload button is clicked the file will be uploaded to eZ Publish The system will create an object and its content class will be determined using the extension and or MIME type of the file Finally the object will be related to the one that is being edited and thus
446. s the same purpose as the Object Edit Interface that is it is used for content editing operations Note that the Website Interface is an optional add on package and is not installed by default In other words there is a front end and a back end content management interface as well as some special purpose sub interfaces such as those for managing content versions and translations Everything that can be done in the Website Interface plus a lot more can be done in the Administration Interface The Website Interface is a simplified interface set de signed specifically for content editors The above interfaces will be introduced in this chapter and described in detail throughout the book In this chapter you will also find information about Content management systems The separation between content and design Siteaccesses and their relationship with the Website Interface and the Administration Interface The template system Content objects and the node tree eZ Publish user accounts 2 Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management eZ Publish access requirements The internal structure of eZ Publish that is the library kernel and modules the system s software layers and the directory structure are not described in this book We take a largely non technical perspective Readers wishing to examine the more technical aspects of eZ Publish are referred to the eZ Publish technical manual http ez no doc
447. sa G Investor Relations conference Visible Article Administrator User 02 21 2007 02 24 pm Standard 5 A 4 gt f Trash Up roris sman EN Large Article English American gt ESS sorting Published Descending gt Figure 10 23 Resulting content structure With the three articles from this example in mind Figure 10 14 View conference article Figure 10 17 View article 1 Figure 10 20 View article 2 we will revisit the Im ages container of the media library see Figure 10 15 Media library Images folder and examine the reverse object relations We encourage you to revisit the previous screenshots to verify the reverse object relations Let us start with the green paint bucket This image object has no object relations as shown by the count of zero in the Relations window Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab gt Green paint bucket Image Last modified 02 21 2007 02 23 pm Administrator User English American Ell Green paint bucket English American z Administrator User 02 21 2007 02 29 pm Media Relations 0 The item being viewed does not make use of any other objects Wee item being viewed is not in use by any other objects Figure 10 24 Image green paint bucket This is correct since we have not used it in our example However we did use the matchbox image shown below so you might expect t
448. screenshot above shows the Press Releases page currently listing some articles We are going to add a new article here 2 Select the desired content class the Article class in this case from the drop down list in Website Toolbar The different content classes are described in Chapter 5 Content Classes 3 Click the Create button 4 When you create a content object fields are displayed where you enter data for the object s attributes such as the title of the object and text content Fill in the fields with the appropriate values explained in Section 2 3 2 2 Editing content Some fields are marked as required while others are optional Edit Article New article Input was Saved successfully Title required Fresh fruit Short title Fruit Author Name Email l Administrator User bms ez no Delete selected Add author Summary required Normal EPSERIETERIESES Z a E e Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus Quisque sagittis laoreet urna Nam rhoncus risus eget enim Pellentesque erat libero pharetra non pretium vel commodo vitae arcu lt p gt Disabk editor Class none E ontine Editor 4 2 Figure 2 11 Add article edit mode 5 Click the Send for publishing button to add the newly created content to the system and make it visible on the site Storing your changes without publishing is done through the draft mechanis
449. scription of the Media library tab is found in Chapter 10 In addition readers will en counter the terms node and node tree in this material These terms are covered in detail in Chapter 4 Content Management Concepts Objects and Nodes For a quick review see Section 1 4 2 Nodes or the Glossary definition of Content node The following table gives a brief overview of the main menu tabs Table 3 1 Administration Interface main menu tabs Menu item tab Description Content structure Clicking the Content structure tab displays the top of the Content branch of the node tree This is a tree structure representation of most of the content that site visitors see If the Content structure tab is selected the secondary menu 3 will display an interactive tree containing the nodes that belong to the Content branch The main area 4 displays information about the top level node itself followed by a list of the nodes that are directly below it Media library Clicking the Media library tab displays the top node of the Media branch another branch of the node tree The Media branch can be used to store data that is frequently used by other nodes It is typic ally used to store images animations and documents that are related to nodes located in the Content branch If the Media library tab is selected the secondary menu 3 displays an interactive tree containing the nodes that belong to the Media branch The main area 4
450. sely related to versions so the use of the Version history interface plays an im portant role here Content can be translated to any of the languages found in the list of translation languages refer to Section 8 2 3 3 Translation languages Recall that Working with translations 209 A version can be edited by clicking on its corresponding edit icon on the right in the Version history interface eZ Publish will only allow you to edit drafts Attributes can be marked as translatable or non translatable by developers You may encounter editing scenarios where some of the content is pre entered and cannot be changed The Translations window see Section 6 2 4 Translations window in the main area of the Administration Interface displays the existing languages for the last published version of an object The currently selected translation is displayed in bold characters Tip Starting from eZ Publish version 3 8 when a user edits an object it is no longer the entire version that gets edited Instead a combination of a version and a translation is edited This approach avoids the locking of entire versions along with all the translations and thus it allows multiple translators to work with the same content in several languages at the same time We will now discuss how to create edit and remove object translations In Depth Access control for translations It is possible to control whether a user or a group of users
451. ser account Objects of the Gallery content class are containers that can be used to organize content usually images See Also Content class Container See User group Usage assistance is available via mouse hover tooltips and through the Help button on the Website Toolbar and OE toolbar HyperText Markup Language is the language designed for the creation of webpages and other information viewable in a browser HTML is typ ically used to structure information such as headings paragraphs lists and images This is done with tags such as lt p gt and lt li gt Hypertext Transfer Protocol is the primary method used to transfer data between webservers and browsers The information collection feature makes it possible to gather user input when a node referencing an information collector object is viewed This means that some part of the content on a specific page is set up to gather 376 Initial language Input validation Interactive tree J JavaScript L Language selection in terface Glossary data It is typically useful when it comes to the creation of feedback forms surveys and polls See Main language Input validation is supported by most but not all of the built in datatypes The validation feature of a datatype cannot be turned on or off If a data type supports validation it will always try to validate the incoming data and the system will never allow the storage of incorrectly formatted inpu
452. site s CSS and templates dictate how different classes are rendered Contact your site administrator or see the online documentation at http ez no for more information on how classes are rendered Here we will describe the class parameter for the following elements headings em phasized text paragraphs links literal text lists objects and table header cells In general the procedure of assigning classes in the Online Editor is very similar for most of the elements 1 Right click somewhere inside the desired element to bring up the pop up menu Be sure not to select any text first as this will affect the items on the pop up menu The table below contains an overview of how to bring up the pop up menu for elements in the Online Editor Table 11 4 Bringing up the pop up menu in the OE for different elements Element How to select Special remarks Headings Right click somewhere inside None the heading Chapter n Content Editing Element How to select Special remarks Emphasized Right click somewhere inside None text bold it the text alic Paragraph Find some non formatted text The Properties menu item inside the paragraph and right will not be available if you first click select or mark a part of the text and or if you right click on bold text links and so on Links Right click somewhere inside For links the desired menu the link item is called Link Proper ties
453. site s content structure is displayed when you are browsing for a container 38 Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface Choose new location for Fruit Please choose where you want to place Fruit t Press Releases 5 Name Type Fruit Article C New company website re Article C Article C Article C F T Article Select Cancel Figure 2 15 Moving content browse for location Select the destination location for the content by clicking on the radio button next to the name Click the container name to view the contents of the container and to continue browsing for the destination location 4 After selecting the new location click the Select button Warning You should note that if you move a content container the system will also move any content beneath that object For example if you move a folder containing articles from one location to another the articles will also be moved Depending on the number of sub items this operation might be quite time and resource consuming If there is a large amount of content to be moved you should contact your webmaster or site administrator to check that this can be carried out safely without impacting site performance 2 3 3 4 Removing and retrieving objects Deleting content on your site is an easy matter You will be given a warning confirmation request first to prevent you from accidentally deleting material By default deleted content is moved to a trash con
454. sitive pop up menu 11 2 6 6 5 Inserting a new row or column To insert a new row position your mouse cursor inside one of the table cells and click the Insert row button Online Editor daily tasks 345 Body oma ee Biz erre a e ex eS e uu n e e j Q gp al b1 c1 d1 a2 b2 c2 d2 ga3 b3 c3 d3 1 a b4 c4 d4 a5 b5 c5 d5 L Figure 11 50 Insert row step 1 A row will appear above the current cell n n n a1 b1 c1 di a2 b2 c2 d2 da3 b3 c3 d n l f a4 b4 c4 da d n a5 b5 c5 d5 Figure 11 51 Insert row result To insert a new column position the cursor inside a table cell as explained above and click the Insert column button A new column will appear to the left of the current cell Tip You can insert a row or column by right clicking on a table cell and choosing Insert row or Insert column from the pop up menu 346 Chapter n Content Editing Warning You cannot add a row to the bottom of a table in the Online Editor since new rows are always added above the current row Likewise you cannot add a column to the right of a table in the Online Editor since new columns are always added to the left of the current column To do so you must manually edit the XML tags with the Online Editor disabled see Section 11 3 Manual editing with XML tags Experienced content editors can apply a workaround technique in the Online
455. sitive pop up menu to add a translation above 9 2 3 3 Changing the main language If an object exists in several languages you can choose one of them to be the main lan guage This concept was described in Section 8 2 3 4 Initial main language Combined with site languages see Section 8 2 3 5 Site languages the main language is important to ensure if desired that objects will always default to a specified language when they do not exist in another language You should also know how to change the main language because it is a required step when deleting the main language of an object without having to delete the entire object itself Tip This procedure only affects the object currently shown Changing the overall site lan guage s can only be done by the site administrator or developers 1 Make sure that you are viewing the content object for which you wish to update the main language in the main area of the Administration Interface 2 If needed activate the Translations window by clicking the corresponding switch 3 Select the desired translation in the Translations window using the corresponding radio buttons Then click the Set main button Working with translations 217 Existing languages za Language Locale Main m English American eng US A mH German ger DE C A Use the main language if there is no prioritized translation Figure 9 23 Set main language Tip It is not possible to chan
456. specifies access rules for content It is part of the access control mechanism of eZ Publish It is associated with a role which again can be associated with a user or user group See Also Access control Role See Context sensitive pop up menu The Preview window is shown at the top of the main area of the Admin istration Interface below the horizontally aligned row of switches when viewing some content This window displays the actual contents the at tributes of the object referenced by the selected node See Also Main area Administration Interface Content objects can refer to other objects called related objects Related objects are listed in the Related objects window at the bottom of the Object Edit Interface and the Relations window near the bottom of the main area of the Administration Interface See Also Content object Object relation The Relations window is shown in the main area of the Administration Interface when viewing some content and the corresponding switch is selected The purpose of this window is to reveal information about ob jects that either use or are used by the object that is referenced by the se lected node See Also Main area Reverting content means to go back to and publish an older version of some content object This useful if you accidentally published a draft instead of storing or discarding it or if the published version is no longer valid See Also Undo 382 Rich text c
457. ss occurs atthe system management level For simplicity the term siteaccess can be used to denote Siteaccesses 7 both There is a one to one relationship between these two terms The Administration Interface corresponds to the admin siteaccess and the public front end interface possibly containing the Website Interface corresponds to the public siteaccess Multilingual eZ Publish sites usually also have different site interfaces for each of the available languages Thus they have multiple public siteaccesses one for each available language The term public siteaccess is in this case used to denote any of the language specific siteaccesses As a content editor you will not be working with setting up new siteaccesses but some basic knowledge about them will help you to be more comfortable with your daily tasks 1 3 1 1 Interface overview The introduction explained that there is a front end and a back end interface set for managing content the Website Interface and the Administration Interface 1 3 1 2 Website Interface Chapter 2 deals exclusively with the Website Interface Here we introduce it briefly to give you a sense of what distinguishes it from the Administration Interface Most of the basic content management tasks can be performed through the Website In terface It has a simpler graphical user interface GUI than the Administration Interface One reason for this is that the Website Interface is embedded in the fr
458. st P Pagelayout 13 Paragraph 308 Parent node ID 234 Partner User account 16 Password 17 60 Change 26 Path 233 246 PDF xviii Pending status 179 PHP xviii Plain text 103 Policy 16 400 Pop up menu see Context sensitive pop up menu Preview xxiii 225 231 During edit 232 Full scale 232 Version 233 Preview interface see Version preview interface Preview switch xxiii 136 Preview window 136 152 161 Button bar 137 Information bar 137 Object attributes 137 Title bar 136 Price datatype 40 Discount rule 40 Primary language see Translation languages Product 41 101 see also Webshop Protected area 245 259 Publish 159 247 290 Additional location 251 Show hide 245 Published status 177 R Redo 303 Rejected status 179 Related object 163 194 256 265 268 287 310 331 Add 195 Add to list 334 Embed links 195 Remove 197 Upload new 196 Related objects feature 256 Related objects window 151 163 194 266 Add existing 164 Remove selected 164 Toolbar 164 Upload new 164 XML code column 164 Relation type Attribute 142 Common 142 196 Embedded 142 276 Linked 142 Relations switch 141 Index Relations window 141 194 254 258 Remove xxiii 146 242 244 249 268 Alternatives 245 Displayed node 243 Location 249 Multiple objects 244 Object relation 197 Procedure 243 Table 344 Table row or column 346 Translation 217 Version 217
459. stration Interface Glossary A Access control Administration Inter face Administrator user Always available Anonymous user Attribute In general the term access control refers to the practice of granting rights to access data or perform actions based on the configuration of a user account In eZ Publish the public siteaccess is available to all site visitors by de fault Access to the Website Interface used for adding and editing con tent and the Administration Interface used for advanced administrative tasks requires a username and password Viewing specific content can be further restricted to registered users on the site Access control can also be applied to creating translations of existing content A user or group of users can be permitted to or restricted from edit and or translate content into different languages The Administration Interface is the back end interface used for adding and managing content for your website and for performing general admin istration tasks such as configuring user accounts It consists of six main components main menu top path breadcrumbs secondary menu left main area right area and Search interface See Also Siteaccess Website Interface By default a user belonging to the Administrator user group has unlimited access to manage the site and perform editorial tasks The default username for the Administrator user is admin The default password for the
460. support example com To visitors a feedback form looks something like this Forum related classes 115 Company Contact us an example of how make a contact form on your eZ Publish site This form will specified in for this object Go to the Administration Interface or Website Interface and edit this object to change this text and the recipient Sender name Email Subject Message Send form Figure 5 13 Feedback form In addition to writing a message and a corresponding subject visitors must supply their names and email addresses so that you can reply to their messages if needed When an Editor or Administrator user creates a feedback form several additional fields must be specified The Name attribute is used for the title of the feedback form and the Recipient email address attribute specifies where the feedback should be sent If you enter some text in the four fields displayed to visitors that text will be displayed as default text in the input fields Users are free to modify or replace it Feedback forms and the general topic of information collection is discussed in Sec tion 11 4 Information collection 5 5 3 Forum related classes Discussion forums are often a popular user interaction feature on a website In eZ Publish this feature is created by using objects of up to four different content classes These are listed in Table 5 1 Forum related classes below The classes are listed in the order they woul
461. sz Daily Usage l E Banners Visible Folder Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 55 am Media EB tions QgFiles Visible Folder Administrator User 03 25 2004 02 10 pm Media E 8 A Lj Cars E Images Visible Folder Administrator User 03 25 2004 02 09 pm Media E EE A I Qj Multimedia Visible Folder Administrator User 03 25 2004 02 10 pm Media EP EE A Clear cache EZ article x English American 7 Sorting Name Ascending gt eZ publish Copyright 1999 2006 eZ systems AS and others For more information see ezinfo about Figure 10 1 Media library tab This chapter is written for content editors working with the Administration Interface Specifically we discuss issues that pertain to working with media content Tip The contents of the media library are not directly accessible or manageable through the Website Interface Content editors who need to work with media content must log in to the Administration Interface and follow the procedures given in this chapter 254 Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab Recall that The overall organization of the Administration Interface is described in Chapter 3 The main area displays the actual content and interfaces that are associated with selected object This is where most of the work is done When viewing content here you will see a row of switches at the top that are used for toggling information windows on and off The two most obvious strategies for locating content a
462. t Content is information that is organized and stored in a structured manner by eZ Publish For example content includes the properties of a news article title introduc tion body images Acontent type is called a content class or class for short while a specific piece of content is called a content object or object for short A content class can be thought of as a structural blueprint for a particular type of content The properties of that content are referred to as attributes A datatype describes the type of value that can be stored in an attribute and is the smallest possible entity of storage A usual way of categorizing content within the content hierarchy or node tree is by making use of containers for example folders under which relevant content objects are placed roughly in the same way as on a file system In this chapter you will find information about The three types of text input fields for text datatypes Built in content classes including frequently used container non container user inter action information sharing and multimedia classes Content relationships such as relationships in the content hierarchy and object relations The collection and description of the content classes in this chapter is not exhaustive For full details refer to the documentation on http ez no doc The Product class was also described in Section 2 4 Webshop This material will give you an overv
463. t Good results in the fourth quarter Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Boxes New product release The new product XYZ was released to the pr public today Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet The new product XYZ Green Paint Bucket Color Pencil Box Matchbox was released to the TP EET E public today Lorem Price 245 00 Price 89 00 Price 142 00 ipsum dolor sit amet Figure 2 2 Website Interface after login Note especially the Website Toolbar In the Website Interface this will be your most important tool for editing and managing content An important feature of the Website Toolbar is context sensitivity This means that the buttons and options shown on the toolbar depend on the content currently displayed and the operations available under the given circumstances For example you may upload an image to an article but attempting to put an article inside an image makes no sense and is an illegal operation Thus you will not find a create new article option when viewing an image Settings 2 2 25 Settings In general there are two kinds of settings available site settings and user profile settings Site settings are only available to Administrator users and can be accessed viathe Site settings link in the top right corner From there you can edi
464. t If there are any validation errors you will be informed when attempting to store or publish a draft See Also Datatype The left menu of the Administration Interface shown when accessing the Content Media or Users branch of the node tree behaves in a similar way as the interface of a typical file browser in a modern operating system It allows you to view and explore the depths of the tree by expanding the different nodes A node is selected by clicking its name Whenever a dif ferent node is selected the interface will reload and the main area will display the selected node This behavior is in contrast to expanding and collapsing the branches which does not reload the main area See Also Content node tree Tree menu JavaScript is a lightweight client side programming language that extends the functionality of HTML It is used to create a more user friendly envir onment in eZ Publish Among other things JavaScript is used to create an interactive tree representation of content in the Administration Inter face in the tree menu enables the usage of pop up menus both in the Website Interface and Administration Interface and it is involved in important features of the Online Editor When adding a new translation it is possible to choose an existing trans lation on which it will be based This is done in the Language selection interface after selecting a language in the Edit in dropdown list choosing Edit in from the pop up
465. t oe Delete selected mi mH a EE Article LJ Move Remove SPa AA Cr Co Expand Hide unhide Cola ap View index un Add to my bookmarks Reverse related for subtree Add to my notifications ka y Manage versions Create here Kn Export OpenOffice org Export PDF Export Word Import OpenOffice org Replace OpenOffice org Venang eran l Figure 3 15 Context sensitive pop up menu This screenshot shows the pop up menu in the Content structure tab The title at the top of the menu is the name of the node or object that was clicked In the example above a node called Press Releases was clicked The following shows the different menu items along with short descriptions Table 3 2 Context sensitive pop up menu functions Item Description View Selects the current node The selected node will be displayed in the main area Edit Opens the node for editing For multilingual sites the text dis played here is Edit in and the sub menu lets you select the language to use for editing Selectively displaying windows by toggling switches 79 Item Description Copy Creates a copy of the object that is encapsulated by the current node see the Glossary definition of Content node You will be prompted to specify a location for the newly created node Note that any children of the node will not be automatically copied Copy subtree Similar to Copy but creates a cop
466. t result sy oria iaa een 319 11 23 OE modal dialog for inserting literal text sese 320 11 24 Special input field for inserting literal text eese 320 11 25 Create list step Laces cece eet teh e he xn Enn Rr ein HR HERR 322 11 26 Create list St p 2 14 ose detti ote ete o eT en ERR eut qat eus 323 11 27 Select all list items to change list type sA 324 11 28 Numbered list now converted to bulleted list ceseseeeseeses 324 11 29 Convert selected paragraph s to list items s ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 325 11 30 Convert selected paragraph s to list items s result sues 325 11 31 Convert list item s into paragraph s result esee 326 11 32 Convert list style for list item six list items seen 327 11 33 Convert list style for list item independent list item numbering 328 11 34 Add new text lines to a list item six list items eeeeeeee 329 11 35 Add new text lines to a list item new line within list item 330 11 36 Nested Stats oet ed o eren perte a eee ter odn 331 11 37 OE modal dialog for embed object esA 332 11 38 Object inline embedded sssssssssse 334 11 39 Modal dialog for insert link esesese 335 11 40 Browse button for creating internal link eee 336 11 4
467. t 59 245 Change password 26 Registration 59 Success 60 User profile 25 200 Change password 26 Edit 26 Notifications 28 Username 17 V Validation 102 see Input validation Validation error 290 VAT 43 see also Webshop Version xvii 44 87 137 138 149 156 167 167 169 171 189 287 Access 169 Archived 45 180 Compare xxiii Create 169 Draft 45 175 198 Edit 169 180 History 170 201 Compare 202 Manage xxiii Management 200 Translation 208 Number 200 Overview 169 Preview 233 Publish existing 204 Published 15 45 139 177 Revert 47 Status 45 173 200 Structure 171 Creator 173 Status 173 Timestamps 172 Translations 182 Version number 172 Timestamps 172 Translations 182 403 Version number 172 Version preview interface 160 View 169 200 Version control 169 see Version management Upper limit 171 Version history 169 169 Version history interface xxiii 155 160 169 170 189 200 201 218 226 Compare versions 202 Preview 233 Version information window 161 Version management xxiii 44 155 167 198 200 218 Compare versions 202 Copy and edit approach 169 Edit Published version 204 Publish existing version 204 Reassign published status 204 Revert to older version 206 Version history interface 170 201 Version number 156 Version preview interface 156 160 161 170 231 View control window 162 View control window 161 162 Locatio
468. t 10 25 50 List Thumbnail Detailed isi Ferrari BB 512 side Name Visibility Type Modifier Modified Section fs Colour pencil box V ga Cars Visible Gallery Administrator User 02 21 2007 01 43 pm Media a A Gars ry Administrator User Media Gi int bucket al ur r isi Colour pencil box Visible Image Administrator User 02 21 2007 02 28 pm Media B ia A as atc X CE 3 Multimedia r isi Green paint bucket Visible Image Administrator User 02 21 2007 02 29 pm Media B aA T Rs Matchbox Visible Image Administrator User 02 21 2007 02 30 pm Media 5a A s Ir 4 Ili gt fij Trash Update priorities Small Medium Large Article gt English American ESSE sorting Name Ascending gt Figure 10 15 Media library Images folder We start by selecting Article from the dropdown list and clicking Create here in the Sub items window for our target folder In edit mode we title the article January 2007 newsletter supply some text and navigate to the bottom of Object Edit Interface to work with images and related objects Media library example 271 Enable comments r Image Current image Preview Filename MIME type Size matchbox jpg image jpeg 39 72 kB New image file for upload Browse Alternative image text Matchbox Send for publishing Discard draft Related objects 1 Related images 1 Colour pencil box embed href ezobject 184 gt link href ezobject 184 gt lt linke C
469. t element This word is also bold since it is a part of a bold phrase professional customized and dynamic its parent element This phrase is part of a text paragraph the parent element for both The hierarchical structure is indicated in the OE status bar A set of XHTML tags in this example p b i describe the current element together with its parent elements The line Class italicRed shows the class name of the current element See Sec tion 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements for information about classes not to be confused with content classes If the current element is a custom tag see Section 11 2 4 5 7 Custom tag button this line will display the name of the custom tag The OE status bar can also show some additional information such as the URL that a link points to The eZ publish doclimentation covers common topics related to the setup and daily use of the eZ publish content management system framework In addition it also covers some advanced topics People who are unfamiliar with eZ publish should at least read the eZ publish basics chapter X http ez no ez publish documentation LE Online Editor 4 0 Figure 11 9 OE status bar example 2 In the screenshot above the cursor is placed inside a link eZ publish documentation the current element It is located inside a paragraph its parent element The tags p and a describe the current element and its
470. t has its own Node ID as well as a different Object ID than the other two folders To further illustrate the copy concept consider another example Think of a document on your computer containing the text for your next article As you go about your editing tasks you might cut and paste some content mark and copy some important phrases to include in the summary and so on Still you are working with a single document How ever if you choose to save your document with a different name save as you will have two distinct documents in your directory When comparing them most likely the one with the new name holds the changes you made while the older one does not In this case the duplicate was probably not a very good idea But if you are writing many articles of a similar structure you might want to keep a template document with a common outline Then it makes sense to make a copy of that template document each time you start on a new article and subsequently give the new article its own title introduction and so on In this scenario copying facilitates the editing process There are times when it is more appropriate to publish an object at multiple locations rather than copying it See Section 9 3 6 Publishing at multiple locations and Table 9 1 Publish at multiple locations or duplicate overview for more information 9 3 5 Deleting content This section describes how to remove content from your system Content in this
471. t information such as the company logo data about the site meta data and so on For more information see the Website Interface User Guide at http ez no doc 2 2 1 User profile The user profile is associated with each individual user account and is only accessible when the user is logged in Here you can change your password update personal inform ation manage drafts and notifications and view Webshop order information if your site has a Webshop To access the User profile page make sure you are logged in then click the My profile link at the top right corner of the website shown in Figure 2 2 Website Interface after login You will then be taken to a page that looks something like this User profile User profile Username bergfrid E mail turtle ez no Name Bergfrid Skaara Edit profile Change password Figure 2 3 My profile page Drafts are covered in Section 2 5 2 Drafts Webshop related information is found in Section 2 4 Webshop Below you will learn how to change your password edit your personal information and manage notification settings 26 Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface 2 2 1 1 Changing your password The Change password link is found at the bottom of the User profile page shown in Figure 2 3 My profile page above Clicking it will bring up the Change password page Change password for user bergfrid Old password New password Retype password OK
472. t object uses We start with some general features in the Media library tab and move on to more spe cific issues In this chapter you will find information about The different types of content that can be found in the media library How to access navigate edit and use the media library The relationships between objects in the Content and Media branches of the content node tree The following table presents an overview of media related concepts used in this chapter Contents of the media library 255 10 1 Table 10 1 Media related concepts Concept Description media content Content in general with media properties including images Flash videos mp3 audio files dvd clips and so on There is no direct connection between media content properties and where the media is located in the content hierarchy Media branch The branch of the content node tree with the Media top level node as the parent media library Another name for the Media branch Media library tab One of several tabs that make up the main menu of the Admin istration Interface It is associated with the Media branch In this chapter we do not repeat in detail concepts that were already described for the Content structure tab Instead we identify the issues applicable to the Media library tab and point to the cases where the functionality and procedures deviate This chapter contains practical step by step procedures similar to th
473. t release The new product XYZ was released to the public today Lorem lf umm 2 The new product XYZ Green Paint Bucket Color Pencil Box Matchbox was released to the public today Lorem Price 245 00 Price 89 00 Price 142 00 ipsum dolor sit amet Figure 2 1 Public siteaccess Anonymous site visitor To log in follow the procedure described in Section 1 5 1 Logging in 2 1 1 Website Toolbar After a successful login with an Editor user account your site will display the Website Interface 24 Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface Eng Fre Ger Logout Bergfrid Skaara My profile Site map COMPANYLOGO Your company slogan here _search News and Events Products Community Knowledge Base Company gez Documentation page Y Createhere Edit Press Releases New company website released ge Lorem ipsum dolor sit Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet fo J sit amet Lorem ipsum Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem A Z dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet 7 Si Pore Name Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit 4 F Lorem ipsum dolor sit 4 amet amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit ame
474. t to make article author information consistently display in italics 5 1 2 XML block datatype rich text format In contrast to the plain text content you get from the text block or line datatype described above the XML block datatype allows you to add formatting Formatting can be as simple as marking a word to be shown in bold or italics or more advanced like tables lists inline graphics links and so on This kind of content is often referred to as rich text Formatting is achieved by using XML Extensible Markup Language a feature rich and highly portable format for defining complex documents and data structures Chapter 11 Content Editing describes in detail how to add different XML stylings Figure 5 3 XML block input field below shows an XML block input field specifically the Summary attribute of an article You might recognize the Online Editor from Chapter 2 Note the toolbar that is used to apply formatting 104 Chapter 5 Content Classes Summary required noma v cx BI ee ws we Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Class none Igi Online Editor 4 2 Disable edor Figure 5 3 XML block input field 5 2 Frequently used non container content classes This section describes frequently used content classes that are not containers the Art icle Image and File classes Technically object
475. tainer and is not entirely deleted from the system To bypass the trash in order to delete content permanently uncheck the Move to trash checkbox in the confirmation window Items in the trash can be retrieved through the Administration Interface See Section 9 2 5 1 Trash for a detailed description of data recovery Follow the steps below to remove some content We will be using our newly created article as an example Webshop 2 4 2 4 1 39 1 Browse to the page that you want to remove In our example view the article shown in Figure 2 13 Edit article start 2 Click the Remove button on the Website Toolbar shown in Figure 2 13 Edit article start 3 Confirm or cancel the action by clicking the corresponding button Warning Children objects in the content hierarchy will also be deleted In other words if you delete a folder everything found beneath it will also be gone If you do this on the top level page on your site let us hope your site administrator makes frequent backup copies of all content In other words make sure to read the confirmation text carefully before confirming a delete operation Deleted objects also affect other objects Objects that link to or embed the deleted content must be corrected for broken links Webshop This section is relevant only to sites having the Webshop functionality enabled and running or that plan to do so It is safe to skip this material if this doe
476. tains nested table rows which contain nested table cells A paragraph can contain emphasized text and links among other things As a content editor working with the OE you should not worry much about what you can and cannot do The OE will take care of this by disabling specific elements if they are not allowed in the current context such as a table cell that is not nested in a table row Moreover if you manually insert markup with the OE disabled the input validation mechanism of eZ Publish will discover any errors and report them when you try to save or publish your content The current element is determined by the cursor s position Selected elements refer to highlighted or otherwise selected content To perform an operation on the current or selected element use the OE toolbar and the context sensitive pop up menu The Online Editor allows you to specify the properties of elements This can be done for all elements except for lines list items and table rows Most of the elements can be classified This means that you can assign some value to the class parameter of the XML tags This is described below in Section 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements Warning Note the usage of the term attribute when related to XML XHTML and HTML tags Here an attribute refers to a property of a tag and will often be used interchangeably with the term parameter Do not confuse tag attributes with object and class attributes Fo
477. te is used in the HTML markup for web usability reasons This is explained further in the next section 5 2 2 Image class The Image class holds more information than just the jpg or gif file Images are content objects that contain both an actual image and a description When creating an image you give it a name enter text in the Caption field upload the image file itself and optionally fill out the Alternative image text field You have probably viewed webpages with missing images shown in the browser as squares with a red x inside It is possible that the image was not found or the file format was not supported by your browser It may also be the case that you are viewing the page on a device that strips images or that you are using some web reading tool for visually impaired users In any of these cases it can be beneficial to have some alternative text when the image is not displayed File class 107 Web accessibility standards recommend using the alt attribute of the HTML image tag for this purpose All images used in eZ Publish therefore contain the corresponding Al ternative image text attribute 5 2 3 File class The File class is very simple and holds a single file with its associated name and de scription The input fields are similar to the ones for the Image class The file upload section is shown below File required Current file Filename MIME type Size secret txt text plain 3B New file for upload
478. teaccess 1 5 11 161 Admin 5 57 see also Administration Interface Configuration overrides 6 Select 233 SOAP xviii 401 Sort xxiii 146 233 By modified timestamp 234 By priority 235 By published timestamp 234 Criteria 234 see also Node sort method Node sort method 97 234 Order 235 Sorting controls 235 Specify at object creation time 236 Sort method 97 Sort order 235 Ascending 235 Descending 235 Sorting controls 234 235 Sorting criteria 234 Split Table cell 347 SQL xviii Stale draft 171 198 219 see also Draft Status 94 200 Sticky 119 Stylesheet 103 294 Sub items window xxiii 131 135 143 152 191 210 214 262 Create 146 Detailed list Copy button 239 Limitation links 144 Node list 145 Remove 146 Sorting controls 146 234 235 View mode 144 Detailed 144 List 144 Thumbnail 144 Subtree copy 240 Switches 128 Details 82 138 Horizontally aligned 134 Locations 82 140 Preview 82 135 136 Relations 82 141 Translations 82 139 Syntax 354 402 T Tab Content structure 65 Design 65 Media library 65 253 My account 65 Setup 65 User accounts 65 Webshop 65 Table 341 361 Cell 347 Nested 350 Property 349 Remove 344 Width 350 Table cell Property 349 Table column 344 346 Table header 344 IE 344 Mozilla 344 Table row 344 346 Template xvii 10 15 110 137 237 294 355 Component based system 13 For object creation 242
479. tected areas ERR 259 10 3 Usage of the media library eeee 260 10 3 1 Navigation and structure cesesseeee e 260 10 3 2 Creating new content in the media library 262 10 3 3 Editing media library objects eee 264 10 3 4 Relating media content to objects in the Content branch 265 10 3 5 Media library and multiple locations sese 267 vii 10 3 6 Moving copying and removing content of the media lib LADY dade DD EI E 267 10 4 Media library example sss 268 10 57 SUMMARY 6 eene E UP Hotei ei ea ee 284 Ti Content Editing 5 oer der Pre P ym Eee eret poe Ebo Pep 287 11 1 Inp t validation rettet urere eed etri R tees 289 11 1 1 Validation against web standards sseeesssssl 289 11 1 2 Input validation tied to datatype seeeees 290 11 1 3 Input validation example e 290 TT2 Online Editor ote e ede eene 292 11 2 1 What is the Online Editor ss 292 11 2 2 Enabling and disabling the Online Editor 295 11 2 3 Troubleshooting the Online Editor sesessess 295 11 2 4 Layout of Online Editor elements seeeeeeese 297 11 2 5 Formatted text in the Online Editor eesssssse 305 11 2 6 Online Editor daily tasks
480. tent locating content such as a page that you want to edit move or remove and finding a place to publish some new content Searching 73 Recall from the Administration Interface layout overview above in Section 3 2 Ad ministration Interface layout that The Search interface is located in the upper right corner tis always present and can be used to search regardless of the part of the Administra tion Interface that is being accessed t is disabled whenever the Administration Interface is in edit mode for example when an object is being edited The default behavior is that the system will search for the specified word s within the entire node tree The editing operations themselves are described in Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing This section describes how to perform searches However when relevant we will add a short description about how to continue from the Search interface to a specific task In this section you will find information about How to perform standard as opposed to advanced searches How to limit the content that gets searched Search troubleshooting such as diagnosing the reason why the Search interface is disabled or understanding why searches did not provide the expected results Advanced search features are covered in the documentation on http ez no doc 3 4 3 1 How to perform standard searches Searching for content is done by entering text in the se
481. tent in a dedicated location is handy and conveni ent For quick navigation and easy access a location within the Content branch can be a good alternative Unfortunately this has some negative side effects First the default behavior of eZ Publish is to display all content within the Content branch on the public siteaccess If you were to add a folder titled Shared images to this structure the folder would automatically become a part of your site s main navigation as an additional menu item the site map and so on To prevent this developers would have to modify the templates regulating this display behavior Second when uploading new content for a new object relation by clicking the Upload new button you would not be able to select your custom folder Con sequently you would have to upload it to some other location first then move it to the desired location This workaround is inefficient As a result we recommend that you use the media library to upload content in tended for reuse Contents of the media library 257 Tip Add bookmarks to content objects that you frequently access to avoid spending time searching for objects and navigating to their locations Let us take a closer look at the Media library tab as shown in Figure 10 1 Media library tab At first glance the only noticeable differences when compared to the Content structure tab are that Media library is highlighted in the main menu the title of the
482. tep illustrated walk throughs Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab discusses the contents access and usage of the media library including a comprehensive example on content editing and management Chapter 11 Content Editing covers practical object editing focusing mainly on the usage of the Online Editor in edit mode Other topics include manual text editing with XML tags input validation and information collection 3 1 Reading suggestions Because the target audience includes editors working either within the Website Interface or the Administration Interface or a combination of the two we have compiled a list of reading suggestions tailored to different reader groups The following chapters are relevant for all content editors Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management This is an overall intro duction Chapter 4 Content Management Concepts Objects and Nodes You will find that eZ Publish becomes more accessible and useful if you develop an understanding of its underlying concepts and basic terms Chapter 5 Content Classes This material is crucial in order to gain an understanding of the different content classes Chapter 11 Content Editing Section 11 2 Online Editor The Online Editor is very important for all content editors working with eZ Publish It is applicable to both the Website Interface and the Administration Interface in edit mode Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface
483. tep 2 3 To end a numbered list press the Enter key inside an empty list item Tip To edit a list tag manually refer to Section 11 3 1 4 Lists bulleted and numbered 11 2 6 3 2 Changing the list type 1 Select all the list items 324 Chapter n Content Editing faucibus vel justo Sed sit ame 1 Figure 11 27 Select all list items to change list type 2 Click the Bullet list button The numbered list will be transformed into a bullet list Bod Documentation and guidance Morbi elit neque accumsan nec tincidunt elementum Cras molestie nisi quis metus metus vitae augue vehicula rhoncus Cras vitae nunc Vivamus quis odio id justo aliq ante eget facilisis magna neque non diarr faucibus vel justo Sed sit amet ante Ve this is the fist list item second list item Figure 11 28 Numbered list now converted to bulleted list Click the Numbered list button The bullet list will be transformed into a numbered list Tip When using Internet Explorer you can also put the cursor somewhere inside the list or select only a part of the list instead of having to select the entire list then click the desired list button Online Editor daily tasks 325 11 2 6 3 3 Converting paragraphs into list items and vice versa To transform a paragraph into a numbered or ordered list item follow the steps below 1 Position the cursor inside the paragraph or select multiple paragraphs 2 Click the Number
484. ter releases The Online Editor depends on this component Therefore if you have Windows Vista we recommend that you use Mozilla Firefox The Online Editor also makes use of JavaScript technology see the in depth block above This means that JavaScript must be installed and enabled in your web browser for it to be available 1 6 2 Installation and environment require ments for the Online Editor The Online Editor is available for both eZ Publish 3 and eZ Publish 2 2 For version 4 0 of the Online Editor eZ Publish version 3 5 or higher is required as well as the PHP version indicated in the eZ Publish requirements for the specific version 1 7 Summary In this chapter we introduced content management with eZ Publish emphasizing the Website Interface and Administration Interface We looked at the fundamental concepts 20 Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management of eZ Publish including content classes objects and the node tree We also discussed user accounts and described the login process Below we have compiled a list of the most important concepts in this chapter We encour age you to review this list and refer to the Glossary for a full listing and definitions of terms in this book Content management system CMS used for collecting managing and publishing content Content information actual data organized and stored in a structure Design visual presentation layout and data markup S
485. terface but many of these functions are only relevant to site administrators and developers What makes the Administration Interface more advanced is not only what it enables you to do but the interface itself The visual presentation of content is stripped down with all design elements layout and styling pertaining to the public siteaccess removed That said the Administration Interface has its own layout but it is restricted to struc tural organization of content with navigation menus access to management operations and special purpose embedded interfaces to manage content versions or create new user accounts for example The screenshot below shows the Administration Interface 10 Chapter 1 Introduction to eZ Publish Content Management Search Allcontent gy Current location Advanced User accounts Webshop Design My account gt Home E Preview Details Transhtions Locations Rehtions Content structure Ls ma al Home Frontpage Administrator User amp News and Events Change information amp E Products Last modified 12 2 56 am Administrat English American Bil Change password j Partner Name Logout TT muai Mere Multimedia Billboard suo G Downloads Corporate banner 3 Pictures Tat oolimn visis Press Releases Knowledge Base Ded canes a zi amp Company Latest Information From This Company I
486. terface can be used for most editing tasks These tasks can also be performed in the Administra tion Interface which is discussed in Chapter 3 The public siteaccess displayed through the front end to regular site visitors Anonymous users is shown in the screenshot below Editors and Administrators must log in to access the Website Interface Website Toolbar 23 Eng Fre Ger Login Register Site map COMPANYLOGO Your company slogan here News and Events Products Community Knowledge Base Company Press Releases Latest Information From This Compan New company website released m Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem P Lorem ipsum dobr sit ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor S amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet f sitamet Lorem ipsum Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A ipsum dolor sit amet a Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results in the fourth quarter Good results Lorem E ipsum dolor sit amet Boxes Good results Lorem fj ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet New produc
487. that object This is usually the original tree location for that object The other locations are additional or secondary locations You can either add a new location to an object that has already been published or you can publish an object at multiple locations at the same time The following text explains both situations 9 3 6 1 Adding a new location to a published object This approach allows you to publish an already published object at a new location in the content node tree For example if you have a news article that you wish to make available somewhere else on the site you can simply assign it to an additional location For this to work you will need to enable the Locations window by toggling the corres ponding switch in the main area of the Administration Interface The following proced ure describes how to add a secondary location to an article 1 Access the desired content in the Administration Interface Click the Add locations button in the Locations window 2a Location Sub items Visibility Main Home News and Events Press Releases Tea 0 Visible Hide Delete selected Set main Figure 9 49 Locations window add location The system will bring up the Browse interface 2 Use the Browse interface to select other location s to publish the object 3 Mark the corresponding checkboxes then click the Select button Note the path in the top left corner Home Community Downloads If you do not mark any
488. the Administration Interface is a collection of hori zontally aligned tabs A tab is basically a menu item As such it gives access to content and or interfaces The main menu contains the Content 384 Template Translate from window Translation Translation languages Translations window Translator mode Trash Glossary structure Media library User accounts Webshop Design Setup and My account tabs See Also Administration Interface An eZ Publish template is a custom HTML file that describes how some particular type of content should be visualized It is also used for inform ation extraction The template system is component based and the funda mental unit of site design The main template is called pagelayout See Also Design CSS HTML The Translate from window is a part of the Object Edit Interface and displays information about the existing languages It also allows you to select the language on which a new translation should be based See Also Object Edit Interface Translation A translation is a representation of the information in a specific language The one to one translation solution makes it possible to represent the exact same content in multiple languages This mechanism is completely inde pendent of the datatypes Each version consists of at least one translation which by default is the initial main translation Translations are also known as the third dimension of content objects The tr
489. the Object Edit Interface or Content Editing Interface if you are using the Website Interface used when translating existing content to a new language You might recall this from Section 7 6 4 Translator mode When adding a new translation it is possible to choose which existing translation it should be based on This is done in the Language selection interface after selecting a language in the Edit in dropdown list for some content object You can select one of the existing languages or choose None ID 143 New languages Created 12 22 2006 08 53 am js Administrator User One Modified BAD 01 02 2007 01 32 pm Select the language the added translation will be based on Administrator User None Select the language you want to add Published version C English American 4 Figure 8 10 Language selection interface When a language is chosen instead of None the main part of the edit page will contain the Translation interface instead of the standard edit interface The content of the selected existing language will be displayed above the corresponding attribute fields for easy reference as you translate the draft 184 Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features 143 nslating content from Engish American Bil to German BM Title required 12 22 2006 08 53 am Administrator User Modified Fresh fruit 01 02 2007 01 32 pm Administrator User Fresh fruit Short title Published
490. the context sensitive pop up menu When using a Mozilla based browser you can remove the entire table by deleting all of its rows and columns as described in Section 11 2 6 6 6 Removing a table row or column 11 2 6 6 4 Creating a table header You can transform table cells into table header cells This feature works differently in Internet Explorer than in Mozilla based browsers The former lets you do this for indi vidual cells while the latter applies the formatting to the entire row 11 2 6 6 4 1 Creating table headers in Internet Explorer Internet Explorer allows you to transform single cells to header cells Right click some where inside the target cell and choose TH from the pop up menu The cell will become a header cell If you want to transform it back to a normal cell simply right click inside the cell and select TH 11 2 6 6 4 2 Creating table headers in Mozilla based browsers You cannot transform a single table cell into a table header cell with a Mozilla based browser Rather the transformation will occur for all cells inside a row Right click on the target row and choose Change To TH from the pop up menu The row will become a table header row containing all header cells g 4 b Dn e cell 1 cell2 a E cell 3 cell 4 m m Figure 11 49 Table with header row If you want to change the row back to all normal cells right click on a table header and choose Change To TD from the context sen
491. the list of related objects you should add it by using one of the two buttons located below the list itself It is possible to either add an existing object or upload a new file and use that as a related object The usage of the Upload new and Add existing buttons were described in Section 9 1 2 Related objects 1 2 6 5 Creating links to external and internal webpages Adding links in your content improves the experience for site visitors The link feature in the OE lets you add links both to external and internal webpages In addition you can add links within a single page so that visitors can jump back and forth without having to scroll and search for information The Link button and the Anchor button were intro duced in Section 11 2 5 3 2 Hyperlinks and anchors Online Editor daily tasks 335 11 2 6 5 1 Creating a hyperlink Follow the steps below to create a link 1 Position the cursor at a location where you wish to add a hyperlink and click the Link button You can also right click and select Insert link from the context sensitive pop up menu 2 You will see a modal dialog called Insert link with the link properties Text Type URL Class Open in new window Title and ID The following screenshot shows this dialog re http nemo bms ez no Insert link Sandbox Mozilla Firefox J m x Text Type other x URL Class none z Open in new window Title optional ID optional
492. the purpose of later retrieval is referred to as content 1 2 2 Design the presentation of data The presentation of content is determined by the design of a site While content refers to structured data design refers to the way the data is visually presented Design includes the things that make up a web interface HTML stylesheets CSS images that are not part of the content typography fonts and so on In Depth Web markup standards This in depth section is a quick introduction to the HTML XML XHTML and CSS web standards The first three deal mainly with structural markup whereas CSS adds styling This introduction can be complemented with additional ma terial from http www w3 org or similar web documentation Hyper Text Markup Language HTML is the traditional language designed for the creation of webpages and other information viewable in a browser HTML is typically used to structure information such as headings paragraphs lists images and so on This is done with tags such as p and 1i eXtensible Markup Language XML is a rich and highly portable format for defining complex documents and data structures Some of the content you create in eZ Publish is stored as XML eXtensible Hypertext Markup Language XHTML is a reformulation of HTML version 4 0 in XML 1 0 Whereas HTML applies relatively loose standards XHTML is much stricter Among other things the strictness of XHTML results in a faster and more co
493. the same way as in HTML using the lt table gt lt tr gt lt th gt and td tags Tables can be nested table class border width gt table The class border and width parameters are optional The class parameter clas sifies the tag as described in Section 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements The border parameter can be used to set a border number of pixels The width parameter can be used to control the table width either 0 100 or number of pixels 362 Chapter n Content Editing Tip To edit a table tag with the OE refer to Section 11 2 6 6 1 Creating a table 11 3 1 7 1 Table rows Table rows can be created in the same way as in HTML lt tr gt Table row content goes here lt tr gt 11 3 1 7 2 Table headers and cells Table headers can be created in the same way as in HTML lt th class width mW rowspan mW colspan gt Example lt th gt Table data cells can be created in the same way as in HTML lt td class width rowspan colspan gt Example lt td gt All parameters are optional The class parameter classifies the tag as described in Section 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements The width parameter can be used to set the width either as percentage or number of pixels The rowspan and colspan parameters are the same as in HTML 11 4 Information collection The topic of information collection was intro
494. tially created This value is fixed The modification time specifies when the version was last modified This information is set by the system every time the version is saved as a draft as well as when the version is finally published Note that after a version is published its modification time will no longer change We will return to how and when timestamps are updated later when discussing the pub lishing process Version structure and status 173 8 1 4 3 Creator You might recall the Created and Modified information shown in the Object information and Current draft windows The version s creator displays the user who created the version as shown in the previous screenshot In other words when you click the Edit button for some existing object you become the creator of a new version of that object Although a content object can only belong to a single user each version can belong to a different user The creator reference is set by the system when the version is created It cannot be manipulated and will not change even if the user who created the version is removed from the system As is noted in Section 9 3 5 2 Alternatives to removing content you should not delete users from your system Instead you should disable a user account when necessary 8 1 4 4 Status This section describes the status and state related to both objects and versions A brief overview of the concepts is provided at the end of the section The l
495. ting eee 189 9 1 Creating objects ee ente eese ORC etat ete ror ie ote ESEN De Eee 191 931 T Object CLEA ON cereo nrS ere traen render oe ee etr s 191 9 1 2 Related objects irri ee deed eek eode siesta ey 194 9 2 Editing objects writing and translating ee 198 9 2 1 Smart editing using drafts ss 198 9 2 2 Working with Version Sese rei n e a Hm 200 9 2 3 Working with translations seeeH 208 92 4 Bdititie COnlliCls 5 cores Doce ttes teer eee euo Les otn e nete de ev tuatd 221 9 2 5 How to undo changes ssesesesee e eee 227 9 3 Content manipulation esiste eene se ees harder ehadeavenedegarsnnecsss nce 231 9 3 1 Previewing content eise rrr rne e n xe nds 231 9 3 2 Sorting CODEETIL erret soos ex eet epe dese cau eS Eee Bonne decease EDE 233 9 3 3 Moving content around sssessseseem eee 237 9 34 Copying contente i vtaeee desee eterne cena reU RE dost ken en rER SE sae 239 9 3 5 Deleting content neiro i i erit ere tene ene rene 242 9 3 6 Publishing at multiple locations eee 245 9 4 Summary est eee tore tex rete dee ese Hat ex eor REI ES gea EDEA e eere oxenoeds 251 10 The M dia Library Tab intet rette eR ituri ed e Hber de 253 10 1 Contents of the media library see 255 10 2 Accessing the contents of the media library eeeeeeees 258 10 2 T Pro
496. tion related topics are described in Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Any changes related to the bottom three issues require some configuration and you should contact your site administrator in those cases Summary A content object consists of one or more versions Versions are also known as the second dimension of content objects Every time you or someone else with editing permissions click either the Create or Edit buttons for some content a new version is automatically created by the system It is always the new version that will be edited old versions remain untouched In other words the version mechanism follows a copy and edit approach rather than an overwrite replace approach The Version history interface makes it possible to view and manage the versions that belong to an object It can be accessed by clicking the Manage versions button located inside the Object information window of the Object Edit Interface or by selecting Advanced Manage versions from the context sensitive pop up menu A version contains the following elements Version number Creation time Modification time Creator Status and Translations The version number is automatically incremented by one for each version that is created inside an object The life cycle of a content object consists of several object statuses These are Draft Published and Archived The status of a content object depends on the combined statuses of its
497. tion of the My account tab from the list in the Version history interface or in the list of existing drafts if you happen to encounter an editing conflict Edit existing content Publish your content in additional locations 252 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing From the Object Edit Interface you can among other things perform text editing relate other objects to the one you are working with manage versions and preview the current version Most likely the Online Editor is available and enabled on your site to assist text editing Chapter 11 explains the Online Editor in detail Some scenarios can trigger editing conflicts where the system does not know which version of some piece of content you wish to edit This is caused by the existence of one or more unpublished drafts either by you some other editor or a combination of both The best solution is to adopt good editing and content management practices to reduce the number of possible editing conflicts Most content management tasks are easily accessible through the context sensitive pop up menu Simply locate the content in the secondary menu by folding and unfolding the branches of the content hierarchy and bring up the pop up menu by left clicking on the corresponding icon Remember that when you work with the secondary menu or some of the special purpose windows in the main area when viewing content you are working with the currently published version
498. tions you can also change the location to be represented in the preview Click the Update view button to regenerate the preview 3 Click the Edit button to return to the Object Edit Interface Tip To preview content in the Website Interface click the Preview button on the Website Toolbar 9 3 1 2 Previewing a version You can view and manage all versions that belong to an object in the Version history interface Because of this you do not have to go through edit mode to preview a version The procedure below assumes that you are already viewing the Version history interface 1 Click on one of the version numbers or one of the translations The system will bring up the Version preview interface 2 Select a different siteaccess and click the Update view button to regenerate the preview as described in the above procedure 3 Click the Manage versions button to go back to the Version history interface Tip To preview any version of a content object through the Website Interface access the Version history interface from the Website Toolbar for that object Then continue as described in the above procedure 9 3 2 Sorting content eZ Publish allows you to sort content below container objects in many different ways including but not limited to by path by publication date by modification date and by priority By default content is automatically sorted in the order the content was published with the newest material at the to
499. to the next issue below Note that clicking the Store draft button will not end the editing session Clicking the Back button of your web browser is a very common mistake responsible for many stale drafts Altering the URL in your current browser window is another source of trouble Be very careful when altering URLs in the Administration Interface and always open a new window or tab if you need to do so You will always find a button like Store and exit Back or Cancel somewhere on the page depending on which part interface you are currently viewing to take you to the previous page and eventually out of the Object Edit Interface When previewing content you should use the Edit button to exit the preview and return to the Object Edit Interface Tip In short you should follow the security tip commonly given on planes Look for the nearest exit it may be located right behind you There will always be a button or link for you to exit properly but it will not necessarily be named Back Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing 9 2 4 4 2 Can you resume editing the object without creating a new draft When you wish to edit an existing content object remember that there might be unpub lished draft s on this content You can select one of the drafts and edit it either from the My drafts page the Version history interface or from the list that displays when you trigger an editing conflict This is the most commonly used ap
500. tputting text as tall 1S 11 3 1 q4 Lists bulleted and numbered To create lists in the same way as in HTML use the lt ol gt lt ul gt and lt 1i gt tags Lists can be nested The optional class parameter classifies the tag as described in Sec tion 11 2 6 7 Class parameter of general XML elements The following examples demonstrate the usage of ordered numbered and unordered bulleted lists Tip To edit a list tag with the OE refer to Section 11 2 6 3 1 Creating a list 11 3 1 4 1 Ordered lists ol class gt li Element 1 lt 1i gt li Element 2 lt 1i gt li Element 3 lt 1i gt ol 11 3 1 4 2 Unordered lists ul class gt li Element 1 lt 1i gt lt li gt Element 2 lt 1i gt li Element 3 li ul 358 Chapter n Content Editing 11 3 1 4 3 Nested lists example The following screenshot shows code for a nested bulleted list ul lt li gt this is an unordered list lt li gt li with several list items li lt li gt and some are nested lt ul gt li like this lt li gt lt li gt and like that lt li gt lt ul gt lt li gt lt li gt and now the final element li lt ul gt Figure 11 60 XML example 2 lists 11 3 1 5 Objects images and embedding The lt embed gt tag makes it possible to insert a content object directly in the XML block It is most often used to embed images Note that the XML syntax here is a bit com
501. track of the different versions of an object The version number is automatically incremented by one for each version that is created inside an object You cannot change the version number In Section 9 2 Editing objects writing and translating you will learn how to make use of these numbers in daily editing tasks Because the number is fixed it can be used as a stable and predictable reference to a specific point in some ob ject s editing history The following screenshot shows an article titled Fruit that has five versions two archived one published and two drafts Versions for lt Fruit gt 5 Version Status Edited language Creator Created Modified gl 4 Archived English American Administrator User 12 22 2006 08 39 am 12 22 2006 08 53 am a 2 Archived English American Administrator User 01 02 2007 12 44 pm 01 02 2007 01 19 pm EJ 1 4 Published English American Administrator User 01 02 2007 01 27 pm 01 02 2007 01 32 pm E Cis Draft English American Administrator User 01 22 2007 10 02 am 01 22 2007 10 56 am E 6 Draft English American Bergfrid Skaara 01 23 2007 01 22 pm 01 23 2007 01 22 pm a 49 Figure 8 2 Version number example 8 1 4 2 Timestamps for creation and modification A version contains two timestamps shown in the above screenshot that record the exact date and time of its creation and last modification Both timestamps are set by the system The creation time specifies when the version was ini
502. transition 4 the scenario will change to the following Version structure and status 179 Object information Versions for lt Tea gt 2 ID B z IER E EEEE E i E S I Te 160 a Version Status Edited language Creator Created Modified Created Ler Archived English American Administrator User 01 24 2007 08 38 am 01 24 2007 08 59am 01 24 2007 09 20 am Administrator User zi 2 Published E9 English American Administrator User 01 24 2007 10 04 am 01 24 2007 10 39 am EJ Modified 01 24 2007 10 39 am Engish American v 1 z 2 gt Administrator User Published version 2 Published version Version Translations Creator Created Modified Copy translation 2 English American Administrator User 01 24 2007 10 04 am 01 24 2007 10 39 am English American This object does not have any drafts Figure 8 9 Published object second version The published version of the object is now 2 Moreover the status of version 1 has changed from Published to Archived and the status of version 2 that we published has changed from Draft to Published There are no drafts at the moment see the bottom window The object status is Published As a result of this behavior content editors can work on and make changes to content on a live site without having to worry about visitors seeing an under construction or half finished page In Depth Collaboration system eZ Publish has a built in collaboration system that
503. tration Interface provides access to content and or interfaces that are associated with the tab that was selected from the main menu When viewing content this menu can be hidden or displayed using the and buttons A section is a virtual collection of nodes that belong together either con ceptually or functionally Using sections makes it possible for example to segment the node tree into different subtrees set up custom template override rules limit and control access to content and assign discount rules to a group of products When the Send for publishing button is clicked the system will attempt to validate the contents of the attributes if their datatypes support valida tion and publish the draft The draft will then become the current pub lished version of the object and by default it will be viewable on the site See Also Draft eZ Publish sites with only one language configured or enabled are referred to as single language sites Site Siteaccess Site languages SMTP SOAP Sort Sub items window Switches Tab 383 A site or website encapsulates and includes everything that belongs to a particular area on the web for example http ez no This includes configuration settings a database with content structure and actual content content related files and design related files See Also HTML The siteaccess tells the system how to recognize the site interface that is being accessed and
504. tration user permissions If you then as Administrator at tempt to edit the same object you will trigger an editing conflict You should return to the Website Interface as an Editor to either delete the draft or resume editing The Cancel button will simply cancel the entire edit operation and the system will be left in the same state as before In other words no changes will be made and you will still encounter an editing conflict the next time you try to edit the object Editing conflicts 225 9 2 4 3 Unpublished draft multiple users including you Sometimes somebody else may be editing the same object that you wish to edit as in the previous scenario In addition there might be drafts that you have left on the system In this case the Administration Interface will display a warning that is similar to the ones from the previous cases This is the worst case scenario and you should definitely contact the other user s before doing anything else You might also want to take the opportunity to sort through all of your other drafts 9 2 4 4 Preventative measures Each content editor can help to reduce the number and frequency of editing conflicts by adopting some easy and basic editing routines 9 2 4 4 1 Leaving the Object Edit Interface properly You should always exit the Object Edit Interface by clicking the Send for publishing Discard draft or Store and exit button If you choose the third option pay special atten tion
505. tree is fully unfolded at all times The vertical size height of the menu cannot be adjusted This is because the window automatically adjusts itself depending on the height of the tree that is being displayed In addition to the width we mentioned above that it is possible to configure which types of objects should be included in the menu For large sites displaying a lot of nodes in the menu is very demanding on the server Therefore from version 3 8 of eZ Publish onwards the default configuration has been changed so that the tree only shows certain types of nodes Interested readers should refer to the documentation at http ez no doc ez publish technical manual for an explanation 6 1 3 Selected features of the pop up menu The context sensitive pop up menu is described in Section 3 5 1 Context sensitive pop up menu Below we give a summary of the most important features for content editors To display the pop up menu click on one of the icons to the left of a node in the tree menu or the Sub items window using the left or primary button on your mouse or other pointer device For example the icon for a folder node would look like this L Selected features of the pop up menu 133 Content structure E Bisca Home C News and Events Investor bulletins Last modified 01 02 2007 O E Technology English American x Product releases A Sub items 0 zE E B Ti uw View The current item do
506. tributes inside the class are determined by the datatypes you might recognize the term from Section 2 4 Web shop It is important to understand that a content class is just a definition of an arbitrary structure In other words the class itself does not store any actual data To sum up our knowledge so far once a content class has been defined it is possible to create instances of that class An instance of a content class is called a content object Actual content is stored inside objects for example folders articles comments employees members and so on in attributes In Depth Versions and translations A content object consists of at least one version Every time you save changes to an object a version is saved If it the first time you save changes compared to how the object displays on the website a new version is created Otherwise an existing version will simply be updated This additional layer makes it possible to have different versions of the same content Each version further consists of at least one translation The translation layer makes it possible to represent the same version of the same content in multiple languages It is this final translation layer that holds the attributes of an object These concepts are covered in Chapter 8 eZ Publish adds yet another layer of abstraction to classical object orientation through the node concept Abstraction here refers to how the system allows you to think of a news
507. tructured including both published and hidden nodes An object may be assigned to several nodes thereby appearing at multiple places in the content node tree The tree is divided into three major parts the Content Media and Users branches See Also Content node Content object In eZ Publish a content type is called a content class or class for short while a specific piece of content is called a content object or object for short A content object contains actual content data stored within its attributes In object oriented terms an object is an instance of a certain class See Also Content object attribute Content node Content class A content object attribute or attribute for short holds the actual data for a content object These are the values you enter in the input fields when creating or modifying an object In object oriented terms a content object attribute is an instance of a content class attribute See Also Content object Datatype Content class attribute A content relationship implies that there is some form of connection between different pieces of content In eZ Publish there are three ways of building content relationships First the content node tree ties all pub lished content together in a content hierarchy Second object relations of several types allow you to reuse content from within the system Third links connect your content both internally and externally See Also Container Embed Ob
508. ts Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Good results Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Figure 2 26 OpenOffice org import start 3 Ifthe Import button on the Website Toolbar is disabled or not showing this means that the import operation is not permitted at the current location Make sure that you are Viewing a container Click on the Import button to bring up the OpenOffice org import page OpenOffice org import Import OpenOffice org document Import to Press Releases OpenOffice org You can import OpenOffice org Writer documents directly into eZ publish from this page You are asked where to place the document and eZ publish does the rest The document is converted into the appropriate class during the import you get a notice about this after the import is done Images are placed in the media library so you can re use them in other articles Browse Lpbad file Figure 2 27 OpenOffice org import interface 4 Click the Browse button and select the document you wish to upload Then click the Upload file button 5 The system will upload and import the document to eZ Publish When complete it will display a page with a confirmation message and a link to the new article The screenshot below shows the end result 52 Chapter 2 Front end Editing Website Interface 01 03 2007 09 45 am Document is now imported OpenOffice org import Document is now imported e H 9 The object was
509. ts are inserted as block elements even though the OE sometimes displays images as if they were inline elements However you can also set embedded objects to be inline elements Note that the system will use the lt embed gt XML tag for embedded objects 11 2 5 3 2 Hyperlinks and anchors The Link button allows you to create and edit hyperlinks This button is located in the Special Tools area of the OE toolbar When generating XHTML code the system will use the a tag for hyperlinks e Formatted text in the Online Editor 3n The Anchor button is located in the Special Tools area of the OE toolbar Note that the anchor names must be unique within the same page document object When generating XHTML code the system will use the a tag for anchors l A hyperlink can refer not only to a whole document but also to a specific section within a document You need to mark the section before you can link to it To do this insert an anchor at the beginning of the desired fragment When creating a hyperlink referring to this fragment append the hash character and the anchor name to the URL Step by step instructions for both hyperlinks and anchors are described in Section 11 2 6 5 Creating links to external and internal webpages 1 2 5 4 Unformatted literal text The Literal text button is located in the Special Tools area of the OE toolbar This button can be used to create an area where you can input unformatt
510. tual data structure and how arbitrary and complex data structures can be built by combining attributes Keep in mind that a class does not store any data Content classes and class attributes 89 The figure below shows the Class Edit Interface for the Article class As a content editor you will not be working with this interface we have only included the screenshot for illustrative purposes Edit lt Article gt Class Last modified 01 08 2007 01 20 pm Administrator User English American Li M article Object name pattern short title title Container Default sorting of children Path String gt Ascending M Default object availability r Class attributes 7 4 Title Text line id 181 wish Name itle Identifier Required v Searchable Information collector Disable translation Default value New article Max string length 55 characters Figure 4 1 Class Edit Interface Notice the Name and Identifier input fields There is one name identifier pair at the top giving the name identifier for the class Then there are additional pairs for each at tribute The screenshot shows the Title attribute The Name field is used for storing a user friendly name for the attribute or class For example if a class defines a data structure for storing information about cooking recipes the name of the class might be Cooking recipes This string will appear in various 90 Ch
511. tus Fusce orci lectus imperdiet in tempor Paste Select All Remove link Link Properties ffp ez no doc Class none I Online Editor 4 2 Figure 11 6 Pop up menu for OE element This particular screenshot shows the pop up menu for a link part of the XML block contents called doc ez no In addition to classic commands like undo cut copy and so on the pop up menu contains specific items that can be used to manipulate the selected current element In this case when working with a link Remove link and Link Properties are displayed The items on the menu will vary based on what you are working on hence the name context sensitive pop up menu 11 2 4 3 Modal dialogs When some of the OE toolbar buttons or items in the context sensitive pop up menu are clicked modal dialogs windows will appear A modal dialog provides access to Layout of Online Editor elements 299 additional editing tools depending on the current setting It will take total control and thus not allow you to access the parent main window When a modal dialog appears you must always close it before continuing work in the parent main window The fol lowing screenshot shows one of the modal dialogs re http nemo bms ez no Insert special chari x Insert special character Figure 11 7 Modal dialog The modal dialog shown here is used to select and insert a special character Other modal dialogs deal with
512. tween the Text line and Text block datatypes is that the former contains only a single line whereas the latter can contain multiple lines Still neither of them allow for formatting The XML block datatype allows you to add formatting Formatting can be as simple as marking a word to be shown in bold or italics or more advanced like tables lists inline graphics links and so on This kind of content is often referred to as rich text 126 Chapter 5 Content Classes We presented groups of classes based on common features or usage Frequently used non container content classes include the Article Image and File classes Frequently used container content classes are the Folder and the Frontpage classes Note in particular that folders are commonly used to structure the content hierarchy of your site while frontpages are used to gather and display content from other parts of the site A content relationship implies that there is some form of connection between different pieces of content In eZ Publish there are three ways of building content relationships First the content node tree ties all published content together in a content hierarchy Second object relations of several types allow you to reuse content from within the system Third links connect your content both internally and externally User interaction refers to site visitors submitting feedback signing up for notifications posting comments and participating in forum discussio
513. u can edit class information such as the class name attributes and whether or not the class is a contain er See Also Content class Content class attribute The class parameter can assign a specific appearance or behavior to an element In most cases the value in this parameter corresponds to a spe cific CSS class used for styling Therefore your site s CSS and templates dictate how different classes are rendered See Also Online Editor CSS A Content Management System for example eZ Publish is used to organ ize and store collect manage and publish website content The main goal of such a system is to provide a well structured automated yet flexible solution that allows information to be freely distributed and instantly up dated across various communication channels such as the internet in tranets and miscellaneous front and back end systems The system s ability to handle the distinction between structuring and displaying content content vs design is one of the key features of eZ Publish See Also Content Design Some content objects are of container classes and can contain and display other content objects below them in the content node tree This works just like folders and files on your computer The folders are containers for the items that are put in them Only objects located directly beneath the con tainer in the content hierarchy are displayed For example you can add Content Content class Content c
514. uit Article Standard community downloads press releases A rj 3 Good results in the Article Standard community downloads press releases Kr fourth quarter j _ Happenings Event Standard company A calendar 3 5 juice Article Standard community downloads press releases e r 5 Latest Information Article Standard community downloads press_releases Fr From This Company T E New article Article Standard news and events press releases fruit Ej r E New company Article Standard community downloads press releases A website released r 53 New product Article Standard community downloads press releases rz release Press Releases Folder Standard community downloads Fr i 3 Tea Article Standard community downloads press releases Fay Figure 9 33 Content in trash 230 Chapter 9 Content Structure Tab Daily Editing Notice the Original placement column Here we have our 10 items that we just deleted along with some additional items that were previously deleted If you click the Empty trash button everything listed here will be permanently deleted You can alternatively delete some items by marking the corresponding checkboxes then clicking the Remove selected button To restore content to its original location click the Edit button to the right of the item you want to restore In our case it is natural to start with the deleted folder before restoring its children You will be sent to the Object retriev
515. unt is 1 and the Reverse related objects list contains an entry with the January 2007 newsletter article We then navigate into the Cars container and look at the four Ferrari images there The first image is used by two objects the conference and February 2007 newsletter art icles Media library example 281 m Ferrari BB 512 front open Image Last modified 02 21 2007 01 43 pm Administrator User English American BS Administrator User 02 21 2007 01 43 pm Media Relations 2 The item being viewed does not make use of any other objects E conference Article Common February 2007 newsletter Article Common Figure 10 27 Image Ferrari 1 The February 2007 newsletter also uses the second Ferrari image 282 Chapter 10 The Media Library Tab Kaj Ferrari BB 512 side open Image Last modified 02 21 2007 01 43 pm Administrator User English American BA Administrator User 02 21 2007 01 43 pm Media 1 1 175 183 The item being viewed does not make use of any other objects February 2007 newsletter Article Common Figure 10 28 Image Ferrari 2 The conference article makes use of both of the following content objects Media library example 283 aed Ferrari BB 512 front Image Last modified 02 21 2007 01 43 pm Administrator User English American Efl Administrator User 02 21 2007 01 43 pm Media it 1 173 181 Relations 2
516. urpose Internet Mail Extensions MIME is an internet standard that defines content types Its purpose is to extend the format of emails It is common to associate a MIME type with a file extension like jpg When some OE toolbar buttons or context sensitive pop up menu items are clicked modal dialogs windows will appear A modal dialog provides access to additional editing tools depending on the current setting It will take control of the browser and thus not allow you to access the parent main window until you close the modal dialog See Also Online Editor Context sensitive pop up menu A module offers an HTTP interface that can be used for web based inter action with eZ Publish eZ Publish comes with a collection of modules custom modules can also be created that cover the needs of typical everyday tasks The requested URL tells eZ Publish about which module it should execute in order to process the request A module consists of a set of views See Also View A Mail Transfer Agent is an application that sends and receives emails to and from the system on which it is installed Starting from eZ Publish 3 8 the primary language concept has been re moved and objects can be created using different languages Content can be translated into any of the installed languages You can also display content according to location specific settings See Also Translation eZ Publish sites with more than one language configured enabled
517. us sit amet lacus Chapter 2 Ut congue nisi vel malesuada vulputate lacus tortor vehicula dolor at laoreet lectus mauris quis quam Vestibulum nec nisi et nulla varius dapibus Mauris diam elit euismod et fermentum vel mollis vitae neque Nam orci enim aliquet vel tempor vel pretium eget est Aenean risus Nam tincidunt quam id mauris Nunc elit felis viverra in elementum vel malesuada ut dolor Proin tincidunt tincidunt urna Sed purus est tincidunt ac pulvinar at elementum a nulla Nulla X lt p gt Disable editor Class none r Online Editor 4 2 Figure 11 25 Create list step 1 The empty paragraph will be transformed to an empty numbered list item 2 Write text for the first list item and press the Enter key to create another empty list item Continue adding new list items as required Online Editor daily tasks 323 Body Normal e lls z s Documentation and guidance Morbi elit neque accumsan nec tincidunt sed elementum Cras molestie nisi quis metus Fu metus vitae augue vehicula rhoncus Cras sus vitae nunc Vivamus quis odio id justo aliquarr ante eget facilisis magna neque non diam M faucibus vel justo Sed sit amet ante Vestibu 1 this is the fist list item 2 second list item 3 Chapter 2 Ut congue nisi vel malesuada vulputate lacu nisi et nulla varius dapibus Mauris diam elit e ol li Disable editor Figure 11 26 Create list s
518. usually not an everyday task for content editors and it is not described in this book Still you should be aware that objects of the User class as well as custom classes with similar properties might be associated with other content Removing the object representing a user will then leave other content in an inconsistent state Let us illustrate this with an example If your co editor resigns and you delete her user account from the system every piece of content she has created or edited will lose the reference in the object s created modified information attributes An article would then be displayed with Author empty Also if you have a list of user links the links to deleted users will be broken Recall that published content cannot be un published As long as the main node for a content object is located within the Content branch of the node tree it will by default be displayed on the public siteaccess In order to hide or remove it the obvious solution would seem to be to delete that object However there are several things that you can do to prevent an object from being publicly viewed without having to actually delete the content If properly set up this does not need to be technically demanding for you as a content editor One alternative is to have a dedicated archive folder or hierarchy of folders with addi tional access restrictions Everything in that folder would be prevented from being viewed on the public siteac
519. utton to save your settings or the Discard button to go back to the site s main page You can also store the changes as a draft see Section 2 5 2 Drafts below 2 2 1 3 Motifications To access the Notification settings page click on the My notification settings link on the User profile page shown in Figure 2 3 My profile page above Notification settings Notification settings r Receive all messages combined in one digest Time of day 0 00 gt c Daily Weekly day of week Sunday gt Monthly day of month E If the day of month number you have chosen is larger than the number of days in the current month then the last day of the current month will be used instead Node notification Name Class Section Select Remove Store Figure 2 6 Notification settings page The email notification service sends an email to subscribed users every time a specific part of the website is changed For example users can get email notifications when forum topics are updated To sign up for notifications click the Keep me updated button when viewing a forum topic User profile 29 General An example of the general forum New topic Keep me updated Topic Replies Author Last reply Administrator nif 0 User Administrator User Administrator User Figure 2 7 Keep me updated button Alternatively you may specify Notify me about updates when creating a new topic Forums are described i
520. ver the body of the article contains the text found in the source document By Exporting to OpenOffice org format 53 default the summary field is left empty Older versions of eZ Publish and installations without the Website Interface installed refer to this as the intro field In edit mode after clicking the Edit button on the Website Toolbar we can add content to the empty fields edit the other fields then save and publish a new version of the article The result is shown below Note the changed title and the bold summary changed from Figure 2 29 OpenOffice org import result article full view above e Ne d Eve Pre ekases Coffee gez Edit Move Remove OpenOffice Export Replace 2 ae Coffee of all flavours Administrator User Vivamus magna elit bibendum vitae porta at ornare quis nibh Donec non dui Donec a pharetra eleifend augue Phasellus libero dolor adipiscing ut viverra dapibus consequat ut nulla Proin iaculis Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Mauris blandit magna quis tristique pulvinar mauris turpis pretium urna eu rutrum fel it ut nibh In dapibus dui a nisl Aliquam at sem dignissim libero placerat sodales Mauris iaculis scelerisque augue Morbi vulputate hendrerit lacus Suspendisse potenti Nulla dolor Etiam pulvinar nisl nec venenatis semper nunc nisi vestibulum dui eu scelerisque nulla dolor vel dolor In faucibus nunc et arcu Pellentesque risus nulla iaculis sed e
521. w one of the XML input fields Working directly on the simplified XML markup can be a powerful tool but is not recommended for content editors inexperienced with XML or web markup Summary 367 in general To increase your familiarity with XML you can disable and enable the OE to view the underlying code When editing XML with the OE disabled remember that a new line is created by pressing the Enter key once To create a paragraph with the OE disabled press the Enter key a second time In the OE hold the Shift key and press Enter to create a new line and simply press Enter to create a new paragraph Revisit the specific sections for detailed procedures related to other markup elements Input validation is supported by some of the built in datatypes like the XML block As a consequence the system will only accept and store data if it has valid XML structure This ensures that your webpages and content follow web standards but also that your system does not contain markup errors that will break your site display You can collect information from visitors on your site by using the information collection feature During development some content classes can be set up with attributes that collect content The Contact us feedback form is a classic example of this where visitors on the site can submit some comment to be emailed to a predefined email address The collected information is also available in the Setup tab of the Admini
522. w with only one translation Existing languages 24 Language Locale Main p English American eng US A Delete selected Set main Use the main language if there is no prioritized translation Update Figure 6 10 Translations window one translation As you can see from the screenshot above the top of the window shows the number of translations which is the same as shown in Figure 6 9 Details window above The table provides the following information for each language translation The language itself this is the full language name In our example it is English American The locale of the language In our example it is eng US Whether the language is the main language for the object You will learn about locales and main languages in Chapter 8 Versions Translations and Multilingual Features Let us now look at an example with two translations The screenshot below shows both the Details window and the Translations window 140 Chapter 6 Content Structure Tab Layout in Detail Creator Created Section Versions Translations Node ID Object ID Administrator User 12 20 2006 08 56 am Standard 2 2 72 70 Translations 2 Existing languages EA Language Locale Main 3 English American eng US e i8 mm German ger DE c A Delete selected EL Use the main language if there is no prioritized translation Update Figure 6 11 Translations window several translations Notice that
523. ways considered external links see the explanation above In addition to the Name attribute which holds the title of the link links have two other attributes The screenshot shows a link in edit mode 112 Chapter 5 Content Classes Edit New Link Link English American EE Name required Description Normal Bice e BI T seme TBoweraeaa Disable editor Location Send for publishing Discard draft Figure 5 11 Link in edit mode You should now be familiar with the Description field The Location field consists of two sub items The URL attribute specifies the location of the item the link is pointing to For example a link to the homepage of eZ Systems should read http ez no The Text attribute is the clickable string shown on the webpage that points to the page specified by the URL In other words clicking on the text will send the visitor to the URL One typical placement for links is inside a content folder When displayed the folder will show a list of clickable hyperlinks Depending on the template used to display the folder the links will also be displayed with the name and description User interaction 113 5 5 User interaction This section describes content classes commonly used for user interaction on the site User interaction here refers to activities such as visitors submitting feedback signing up for notifications posting comments and participating in forum discussions Usu
524. words this list will affect which translation of multilingual content is displayed on the site The site administrator should be contacted concerning information about site languages set up for your specific page Refer to the Configuring the site languages section of the online technical manual http ez no doc ez publish technical manual for more inform ation about site languages 8 2 3 6 Always available objects Some content objects always need to be shown even if they do not exist in any of the languages that are configured for a siteaccess Typical examples include user objects and container nodes like folders Because of this it is possible to individually control the availability of the different objects by toggling the always available flag This is done by the Use the main language if there is no prioritized translation checkbox When an object does not exist in any of the site languages and it is always available the system will use the object s main language to display its contents This flag is most likely already set by the site administrator for the relevant objects You should be aware of this option as it will be displayed in the Object Edit Interface when an object is created or edited 8 2 5 7 Non translatable attributes Recall from Chapter 4 Content Management Concepts Objects and Nodes that the properties of attributes are dictated by datatypes If an attribute is translatable the system Multilingual support
525. work in progress while you write by periodically clicking the Store draft button in edit mode If there are validation errors you can fix them immediately instead of waiting for them to accumulate 11 1 2 Input validation tied to datatype As a content editor you will most likely find that XML block datatype validation is a great advantage For example this validation ensures that large article bodies display correctly Without validation if you were to create a table inside a heading forget to close tags or write incorrect tags the resulting display would produce very odd formatting in the browser The Integer datatype is another good example of input validation You can type all kinds of values in the input field but only true integer values will be accepted to be stored in the system The Integer datatype will check if the value is numeric if the value should only be from 0 to 100 and so on Input validation is supported by most but not all of the built in datatypes This includes Email and URL XML block mage Integer float Date date and time time Useraccount ISBN The validation feature of a datatype cannot be turned on or off In other words if a datatype supports validation it will always try to validate the incoming data and the system will never allow the storage of incorrectly formatted input This means that you must correct any identified errors before you can save or publish content when you cli
526. x English American z E os n Descending gt Figure 7 2 Open Object Edit Interface from main area Bringing up the Object Edit Interface 153 Preview Content structure E News and Event Last modified 01 18 2007 08 15 G3 Technology English American x E E Product releases Press Releases Sub i E Coffee ub reed ruit 10 25 50 ae a Name Fruit Lo gt Investor bulletins Y G lew T Qj Investor bulletins 55 Du A p Edit in 4 English American Y amp r J Ev rud Another language O ubtree amp gg Prod 2 Py Press Releases T love amp Partn Remove Events y ef Comr Advanced I L3 Know ER Delete selected amp E Come Colapse Article E 4 Add to my bookmarks Add to my notifications fij Trash Create here b Export OpenOffice org Aug Z publish Copyright 19 eZ publisi ri Export Word Pyng Import OpenOffice org Replace OpenOffice org Figure 7 3 Open Object Edit Interface from pop up menu We have previously seen that when one of first three tabs is selected from the main menu the secondary menu and the switches will affect what is displayed in the main area Bringing up the Object Edit Interface will affect other areas and disable most of the other features Specifically the following changes occur refer to Figure 7 1 Object Edit Interface above First the standard left menu is hidden As shown in Figure 7 1 Object Edit
527. xt area 4 Type the text inside the box as shown in the screenshot below luctus quam a massa Pellentesque est nibh dictum a varius non elementum ultrices libero Aliquam lacinia arcu nec tellus Cras eget elit ut leo pharetra pharetra Suspendisse varius quam in erat This is the new paragraph with a bold sentence at first Then the bold styling is turned off Ut eget orci non sapien pretium malesuada Aliquam feugiat porta magna Cum sociis natoque penatibus et magnis dis parturient montes nascetur ridiculus mus bin sh catlabels chapter sort cut delimiter f2 uniq d n Chapter 3 Class aptent taciti sociosqu ad litora torquent per conubia nostra per inceptos hymenaeos Aliquam lobortis ornare diam Nullam dianissim Cras erat Etiam porttitor auctor dolor In in tellus vitae est ultrices aliquet Inteaer aravida sem tristiaue L7 p literal Disable editor Class none ia Online Editor 4 2 Figure 11 24 Special input field for inserting literal text Online Editor daily tasks 321 Tip To edit a literal tag manually refer to Section 11 3 1 3 Literal unformatted text 1 2 6 2 2 Removing literal text When using a Mozilla based browser you can simply click somewhere inside the area marking the literal block You will then see two x elements near the borders Click on one of the x elements to remove the literal block Tip If you accidentally click the x
528. y Summary 285 When navigating to media content in the Browse interface of some editing operation you need to use the Up arrow to go to the top of the node tree beyond the root of the Content branch and then back down into your desired location inside the Media branch Extra attention is needed when working with media objects that are used by other content objects Use the Relations window to view and manage relations Chapter 11 Content Editing This chapter covers practical object editing focusing mainly on the usage of the Online Editor in edit mode Other topics include manual text editing with XML tags input val idation and information collection This material especially the section about the Online Editor is very important for all content editors working with eZ Publish It is applicable to both the Website Interface and the Administration Interface edit mode Recall that eZ Publish has a clear separation of content and design Content is information that is organized and stored in a structured manner by eZ Publish For example it may be the components of a news article title introduction body images The presentation of content is determined by the design of a site While content refers to structured data design refers to the way the data is visually presented Acontent type is called a content class or class for short while a specific piece of content is called a content object or object for
529. y of an entire subtree including all the content published below this node Move Moves the node from one location to another You will be prompted to specify a new location for the node Remove Deletes the node If the selected node is the only one referencing the object then the object itself will also be removed Advanced Refer to the documentation at http ez no doc for a description of advanced features Expand Unfolds the target node if collapsed displaying all the nodes that are below it This feature can be used to explore a subtree without having to repeatedly click the and buttons Note that folding and unfolding parts of the tree is only available with JavaScript support enabled in your browser which we strongly recommend Collapse The opposite of Expand this function folds an open subtree Add to my book Adds the node to your bookmarks Bookmarks were described marks in Section 3 4 2 Bookmarks Add to my notific Adds the node to the list of pages that will generate email noti ations fications when the page changes The topic of notifications was briefly introduced in Section 2 2 1 3 Notifications Refer to the documentation on http ez no doc for more information 3 5 2 Selectively displaying windows by tog gling switches The horizontally aligned switches at the top of the main area determine which windows also called panels are shown in the main area A blue background indicat
530. y website released Administrator User Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet p Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A Successful Launch Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet A On time On budget Comments Amazing site was impressed with your new design Congratulations This is looking very nice New Comment Figure 5 12 Article with comments By clicking the Enable comments box while creating a content object this functionality becomes available Comments are not supported by all types of content Usually com ments are added through the public siteaccess While you can also create them in edit mode most content editors find it more convenient to add comments through the public siteaccess for example to reply to a question posed in a previous comment 5 5 2 Feedback form class The Feedback form class is typically used to add Contact us functionality allowing visitors to send messages to a specified recipient through the website For example sales related feedback could be sent to sales example com while requests for help would be sent to
531. yed with additional information file type and size All other objects will be displayed as shown in the screenshot above The information shown in the Related objects window is a slightly more detailed view about the objects that can be seen in the Relations window from the main area when the Relations switch is selected However reverse object relations are shown in the Relations window but not in the Related objects window Related objects 3 Class Relation type Latest Information From This Company Article Common Embedded J Events Event calendar Embedded Press Releases Folder Embedded Reverse related objects 0 The item being viewed is not in use by any other objects Figure 7 13 Relations window Note the additional XML code column in Figure 7 12 Related objects window See Section 11 3 Manual editing with XML tags for more information 7 8 1 Toolbar for managing related objects 7 9 At the bottom of the Related objects window there are three buttons that you can use to manage the related objects The checkboxes and the Remove selected button can be used to remove relations of the Common type see Table 6 1 Object relation types The Add existing button allows you to browse the node tree and select multiple objects that should be related to the current one The Upload new button makes it possible to upload new content to the system and automatically relate it to the object that is currently
532. ype of information should be validated stored and retrieved eZ Publish comes with a collection of fundamental data types that can be used to build powerful and complex content structures While these built in datatypes are sufficient for most scenarios custom datatypes can also be created if your site has specific needs Creating a custom datatype requires PHP programming skills and some knowledge of the eZ Publish kernel the core of the system In Depth Datatypes The following table provides an overview of the most commonly used built in datatypes Table 4 1 Commonly used built in datatypes Datatype Description Text line Stores a single line of unformatted text Text block Stores multiple lines of unformatted text XML block Validates and stores multiple lines of formatted text Integer Validates and stores a numerical integer value Float Validates and stores a numerical floating point value A complete list of datatypes can be found in the documentation at ht tp ez no doc ez publish technical manual Some datatypes support validation in addition to just storing data For example XML is a formatting standard thus XML blocks are checked for correct formatting before being stored in the system Input validation is described in Section 11 1 Input validation 4 2 2 Content classes and class attributes This section explains the content class and attributes We will look at the description of the ac
533. ys the top level node in the site s content hierarchy In other words you will most likely be shown the content from the index front page of your website The following screenshot shows the Content structure tab Chapter 5 An Overview of the Administration Interface yo 6 ie Alicontent gy Current iocanion Advanced gt Home Preview Details Translations Relations Content structure Current user BE Home Frontpage 3j Administra Change information amp News and Events amp gg Products m Administrator Use English American FEM Change password a Partner Logout Community Home Multimedia Billboard GP Mi renes Left column Forums Press Releases Clear cache amp _ Knowledge Base amp Company G Investor Relatig Center column Content Quick settings Latest Information From Zbis Compan Raves English American gt Eg Move Remove EJ Sub items 6 4 gt i Trash Small Medium Large List Thumbnail Detailed Type Priority T gg News and Events Folder NM A T gg Products Folder B i F Partner Frontpage Bb E D Community Frontpage fe id V Knowledge Base Documentation page B rz jj Company Folder BR B Update priorities Delete selected Ar icie gt Engish American Sortin

eZ Publish Content Management Basics

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents